Flash tutorial by kharidas

VIEWS: 1,464 PAGES: 527

More Info
									ADOBE FLASH CS3 PROFESSIONAL
® ®

USER GUIDE

© 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Copyright

Using Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional for Windows® and Mac OS If this guide is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement, this guide, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by any such license, no part of this guide may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement. The content of this guide is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide. Please remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law. The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner. Please be sure to obtain any permission required from the copyright owner. Any references to company names in sample templates are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe Premiere, ActionScript, ColdFusion, Director, Fireworks, Flash, Flash Lite, FreeHand, Illustrator, and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (www.apache.org). MPEG Layer-3 audio compression technology licensed by Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Multimedia (http://www.iis.fhg.de/amm/). You cannot use the mp3 compressed audio within the Software for real time or live broadcasts. If you require an mp3 decoder for real time or live broadcasts, you are responsible for obtaining this mp3 technology license. Speech compression and decompression technology licensed from Nellymoser, Inc. (www.nellymoser.com) Flash CS3 video is powered by On2 TrueMotion video technology. © 1992-2005 On2 Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. http://www.on2.com. This product includes software developed by the OpenSymphony Group (http://www.opensymphony.com/)

Sorenson Spark™ video compression and decompression technology licensed from Sorenson Media, Inc. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Notice to U.S. Government End Users: The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference.

iii

Contents
Chapter 1: Getting started Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Using Help Resources What’s new ................................................................................ 2 ................................................................................ 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Chapter 2: Workspace Flash workflow and workspace Using the Stage and Tools panel The Timeline Using Flash authoring panels Undo, redo, and history

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Accessibility in the Flash workspace

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Automating tasks with the Commands menu

Chapter 3: Creating and managing documents Working with Flash documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Creating and previewing mobile content with Adobe Device Central Working with projects Working with timelines Working with scenes Find and Replace Templates Adding media to the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Chapter 4: Adobe Version Cue Working with Adobe Version Cue Working with Version Cue projects Working with files in Version Cue Version Cue versions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Working with the Version Cue Server

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Editing and synchronizing offline files Version Cue Server Administration Version Cue PDF reviews

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Chapter 5: Using imported artwork Placing artwork into Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Working with Illustrator AI files Imported bitmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Working with Photoshop PSD files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

iv

Chapter 6: Drawing Drawing Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Using Flash drawing and painting tools Drawing with the Pen tool Snapping Reshaping lines and shape outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 7: Working with color, strokes, and fills Working with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Modifying color palettes Strokes, fills, and gradients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Chapter 8: Working with graphic objects About graphic objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Selecting objects Arranging objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Moving, copying, and deleting objects Transforming objects

Chapter 9: Using symbols, instances, and library assets Working with symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Working with symbol instances Library assets Using shared library assets Scaling and caching symbols Symbols and ActionScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Working with button symbols

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Chapter 10: Creating animation Animation basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Using Timeline effects Tweened animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Chapter 11: Special effects About filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 About blend modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Chapter 12: Working with text Text and fonts in Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Creating text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Setting text attributes

Chapter 13: Creating multilanguage text Creating multilanguage text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Encoding text formats XML file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Authoring multilanguage text

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Multilanguage text and ActionScript

v

Chapter 14: Working with sound Using sounds in Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Exporting Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Sound and ActionScript

Chapter 15: Working with video Creating and publishing Flash Video About digital video and Flash Encoding video

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Importing and modifying Flash Video files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Working with Premiere Pro and After Effects Using ActionScript to play external Flash Video

Chapter 16: Creating e-learning content Getting started with Flash e-learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Including a Flash learning interaction in a document Adding, naming, and registering assets Configuring learning interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Changing the appearance of a learning interaction Extending learning interaction scripts

Tracking to AICC- or SCORM-compliant learning management systems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Chapter 17: Creating accessible content About accessible content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Using Flash to enter accessibility information for screen readers Specifying advanced accessibility options for screen readers Creating accessibility with ActionScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Chapter 18: Working with screens Screen-based documents and the screen authoring environment Working with screens Adding content to screens Chapter 19: ActionScript Working with ActionScript Writing and managing scripts Debugging ActionScript 3.0 ActionScript publish settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

Script Assist mode and behaviors

Debugging ActionScript 1.0 and 2.0

Chapter 20: Publishing Flash content Publishing Flash documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Using Flash Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Developing applications for mobile devices Configuring a web server for Flash Flash security features Using publish profiles

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

vi

HTML publishing templates Editing Flash HTML settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Chapter 21: Exporting from Flash About exporting from Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Exporting Flash content, images, and video Chapter 22: Printing with Flash Printing from the Flash authoring tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Chapter 23: Best practices Structuring FLA files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Organizing ActionScript in an application Behaviors conventions Video conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Projects and version control guidelines Flash application authoring guidelines Accessibility guidelines Advertising with Flash

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Optimizing FLA files for SWF output

Tips for creating content for mobile devices Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

1

Chapter 1: Getting started
If you haven’t installed your new software, begin by reading some information on installation and other preliminaries. Before you begin working with your software, take a few moments to read an overview of Adobe® Help and of the many resources available to users. You have access to instructional videos, plug-ins, templates, user communities, seminars, tutorials, RSS feeds, and much more.

Installation
Requirements
❖ To review complete system requirements and recommendations for your Adobe® software, see the Read Me file

on the installation disc.

Install the software
1 Close any other Adobe applications open on your computer. 2 Insert the installation disc into the disc drive, and follow the on-screen instructions.

Note: For more information, see the Read Me file on the installation disc.

Activate the software
If you have a single-user retail license for your Adobe software, you will be asked to activate your software; this is a simple, anonymous process that you must complete within 30 days of starting the software. For more information on product activation, see the Read Me file on your installation disc, or visit the Adobe website at www.adobe.com/go/activation.
1 If the Activation dialog box isn’t already open, choose Help > Activate. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Note: If you want to install the software on a different computer, you must first deactivate it on your computer. Choose Help > Deactivate.

Register
Register your product to receive complimentary installation support, notifications of updates, and other services.
❖ To register, follow the on-screen instructions in the Registration dialog box, which appears after you install and

activate the software. If you postpone registration, you can register at any time by choosing Help > Registration.

Change or reinstall Flash Player
1 Close your browser. 2 Remove any currently installed version of the player.

FLASH CS3 2
User Guide

For instructions, see TechNote 14157 on the Adobe® Flash® Support Center at www.adobe.com/go/tn_14157.
3 To begin installation, run one of the following in your Players folder:

• For the ActiveX control for Windows® (Internet Explorer or AOL), run the Install Flash Player 9 AX.exe file. • For the plug-in for Windows (CompuServe, Firefox, Mozilla, Netscape, or Opera), run the Install Flash Player
9.exe file.

• For the plug-in for Macintosh® (AOL, CompuServe, Firefox, Internet Explorer for Macintosh, Netscape, Opera, or
Safari), run Install Flash Player 9 (Mac OS 9.x) or Install Flash Player 9 OS X (Mac OS X.x). Note: To verify installation in Netscape, select Help > About Plug-ins from within the browser.

Using Help
About Flash Help
The Flash Help panel (Help > Flash Help) contains the full set of user-assistance information provided with Flash. To view a Help topic, click its title in the table of contents. Above the topic, you can see its relative location in the hierarchy of topics. You can hide the table of contents. To display it again, click the Table of Contents button . When you search Help, the returned topics take the place of the table of contents. To redisplay the table of contents, click Clear. The Help panel also displays context-sensitive reference information that you access from the Actions panel.

Adobe Help resources
Documentation for your Adobe software is available in a variety of formats.
In-product and LiveDocs Help

In-product Help provides access to all documentation and instructional content available at the time the software ships. It is available through the Help menu in your Adobe software.

FLASH CS3 3
User Guide

LiveDocs Help includes all the content from in-product Help, plus updates and links to additional instructional content available on the web. For some products, you can also add comments to the topics in LiveDocs Help. Find LiveDocs Help for your product in the Adobe Help Resource Center, at www.adobe.com/go/documentation.

Most versions of in-product and LiveDocs Help let you search across the Help systems of multiple products. Topics may also contain links to relevant content on the web or to topics in the Help of another product. Think of Help, both in the product and on the web, as a hub for accessing additional content and communities of users. The most complete and up-to-date version of Help is always on the web.
Adobe PDF documentation

The in-product Help is also available as a PDF that is optimized for printing. Other documents, such as installation guides and white papers, may also be provided as PDFs. All PDF documentation is available through the Adobe Help Resource Center, at www.adobe.com/go/documentation. To see the PDF documentation included with your software, look in the Documents folder on the installation or content DVD.
Printed documentation

Printed editions of the in-product Help are available for purchase in the Adobe Store, at www.adobe.com/go/store. You can also find books published by Adobe publishing partners in the Adobe Store. A printed workflow guide is included with all Adobe Creative Suite® 3 products, and stand-alone Adobe products may include a printed getting started guide.

Searching Flash Help
Flash can search all Flash Help systems or a single Help system (such as Using Flash). You can also search the text of a single topic: Click in the topic to give it focus and press Ctrl+F (Windows) or Command+F (Macintosh).

FLASH CS3 4
User Guide

You can search Flash Help for a combination of words and phrases:
Single-word searches Return a list of help pages that contain the specified word. For example, if you type timeline

in the search text field, Flash returns a list of help pages that contain the word timeline or Timeline.
Multiple-word searches Return a list of help pages that each contain all of the search terms you enter. In this case,

the word and is implicit in the search. For example, if you type movie clip in the search text field, Flash returns a list of pages that contain both movie and clip—that is, clip movie, movie clip,movie...clip, and so on.
Explicit AND/OR searches Use the words AND or OR to refine the search results. For example, if you type timeline
AND keyframe in the search text field, Flash returns a list of help pages that contain both timeline and keyframe. If

you type timeline OR tween in the search text field, Flash returns a list of help pages that contain timeline and pages that contain tween. The words AND and OR must be all capital letters and must be in English, even if you are searching a non-English version of Flash Help.
Exact phrase searches Use quotation marks to return only pages that contain the specific phrase you enter. For example, if you type “motion tween” in the search text field, Flash returns a list of help pages that contain the phrase motion tween, but not pages that contain separate instances of motion and tween. Exact phrase with explicit AND/OR searches Use a combination of quotation marks and the words AND or OR to further refine your searches. For example, if you type “motion tween” AND “ActionScript” in the search field, Flash returns a list of pages that contain both the phrase motion tween and the word ActionScript.

Access context-sensitive Help from the Actions panel
1 To select an item for reference, do any of the following:

• Select an item in the Actions panel toolbox pane (on the left side of the Actions panel). • Select an ActionScript term in the Actions panel in the Script pane. • Place the insertion point before an ActionScript term in the Actions panel in the Script pane.
2 To open the Help panel reference page for the selected item, do one of the following:

• Press F1. • Right-click the item and select View Help. • Click Help
above the Script pane.

Choosing the right Help documents
Flash Help contains many documents. The following list describes each document’s purpose and contents:

• Using Flash contains an introduction to what Flash is, what you can do with it, and how the Flash user interface
works. It also contains detailed information about using all of the tools and features in the Flash authoring tool.

• Programming ActionScript 3.0 provides a detailed description of the ActionScript 3.0 language, intended for
beginning and experienced scripters. Programming ActionScript 3.0 explains the basic concepts of writing code, including how to use logic to write code that makes decisions, how to make your Flash projects respond to user actions, and how to write code to perform the most common tasks in Flash. ActionScript 3.0 is faster and more appropriate for computationally intensive applications than ActionScript 2.0, and is somewhat more complex than ActionScript 2.0.

FLASH CS3 5
User Guide

• The ActionScript 3.0 Language and Components Reference includes dictionary-style entries for all of the actions,
methods, and properties in the ActionScript 3.0 application programming interface (API), as well as the APIs for the ActionScript 3.0 components included with Flash. This reference is a fast way to find specific ActionScript terms to accomplish specific tasks. Each entry includes details of the term’s syntax and functionality, and code examples.

• Using ActionScript 3.0 Components contains information on using and configuring ActionScript 3.0 components
in a Flash document. Components are reusable user interface elements such as buttons, menus, and so on, that you can use in your own projects without having to create and script them yourself. Some components do not have a visual presence, but instead help you store and manage data for your application. This document also contains information about creating your own reusable components with ActionScript 3.0.

• Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash provides a detailed description of the ActionScript 2.0 language, intended
for both new and more experienced scripters. Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash describes the basic concepts of writing code, including which scripts you can use in Flash, when to use each type, how to use logic to write code that makes decisions, how to make your Flash projects respond to user actions, and how to write specific code to perform the most common tasks in Flash.

• The ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference includes dictionary-style entries for all of the actions, methods, and
properties in the ActionScript 2.0 application programming interface (API). This reference is a fast way to find specific ActionScript terms to accomplish specific tasks. Each entry includes details of the term’s syntax and functionality, as well as code examples.

• Using ActionScript 2.0 Components contains information on using and configuring components in a Flash
document. Components are reusable user interface elements such as buttons, menus, and so on, that you can use in your own projects without having to create and script them yourself. Some components do not have a visual presence, but instead help you store and manage data for your application. These documents also contain information about creating your own reusable components with ActionScript.

• ActionScript 2.0 Components Language Reference includes dictionary-style entries for all of the methods and
properties that are available to each component included with Flash. You control the behavior of components with these APIs. After you understand the basics of how to use components, this reference is a fast way to find specific APIs that can help you accomplish specific tasks.

• Extending Flash describes how to add functionality and automation to the Flash authoring tool with custom
JavaScript APIs created for that purpose.

• Getting Started with Flash Lite 2.x provides an introduction to the process of developing content with Adobe®
Flash® Lite™ 2.x for delivery on mobile phones and devices. Flash Lite 2.x supports a subset of ActionScript 2.0.

• Developing Flash Lite 2.x Applications provides techniques and guidelines for creating content and applications for
Flash Lite 2.x, the most current version of Adobe® Flash® Player designed for mobile phones and other devices. Because Flash Lite 2.x supports different features than the desktop version of Flash Player, techniques for creating content for Flash Lite are different from techniques for creating Flash desktop content.

• Introduction to Flash Lite 2.x ActionScript describes in detail the ActionScript features available in Flash Lite 2.x
and explains how to accomplish common scripting tasks when using Flash Lite 2.x.

• Flash Lite 2.x ActionScript Language Reference provides dictionary-style entries for all of the actions, methods, and
properties available in Flash Lite 2.x. Each entry includes the details of the term’s syntax and functionality, as well as sample code.

• Getting Started with Flash Lite 1.x provides an introduction to the process of developing content with Flash Lite
1.x for delivery on mobile phones and devices. Flash Lite 1.x supports a subset of ActionScript 1.0.

FLASH CS3 6
User Guide

• Developing Flash Lite 1.x Applications provides techniques and guidelines for creating content and applications for
Flash Lite 1.x, the first version of Flash Player designed for mobile phones and other devices. Because Flash Lite 1.x supports different features than the desktop version of Flash Player, techniques for creating content for Flash Lite 1.x are different from techniques for creating Flash desktop content.

• Learning Flash Lite 1.x ActionScript describes in detail the ActionScript features available in Flash Lite 1.0 and 1.1
and explains how to perform common scripting tasks when using Flash Lite 1.x.

• Flash Lite 1.x ActionScript Language Reference provides dictionary-style entries for all of the actions, methods, and
properties available in Flash Lite 1.0 and 1.1. Each entry includes the details of the term’s syntax and functionality, as well as sample code.

Resources
Adobe Video Workshop
The Adobe Creative Suite 3 Video Workshop offers over 200 training videos covering a wide range of subjects for print, web, and video professionals. You can use the Adobe Video Workshop to learn about any Creative Suite 3 product. Many videos show you how to use Adobe applications together.

FLASH CS3 7
User Guide

When you start the Adobe Video Workshop, you choose the products you want to learn and the subjects you want to view. You can see details about each video to focus and direct your learning.

Community of presenters

With this release, Adobe Systems invited the community of its users to share their expertise and insights. Adobe and lynda.com present tutorials, tips, and tricks from leading designers and developers such as Joseph Lowery, Katrin Eismann, and Chris Georgenes. You can see and hear Adobe experts such as Lynn Grillo, Greg Rewis, and Russell Brown. In all, over 30 product experts share their knowledge.
Tutorials and source files

The Adobe Video Workshop includes training for novices and experienced users. You’ll also find videos on new features and key techniques. Each video covers a single subject and typically runs about 3-5 minutes. Most videos come with an illustrated tutorial and source files, so you can print detailed steps and try the tutorial on your own.
Using Adobe Video Workshop

You can access Adobe Video Workshop using the DVD included with your Creative Suite 3 product. It’s also available online at www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials. Adobe will regularly add new videos to the online Video Workshop, so check in to see what’s new.

Flash CS3 Professional videos
Adobe Video Workshop covers a wide range of subjects for Adobe Flash® CS3 Professional, including these:

• Drawing with the Pen tool • Creating animations using motion tweens • Creating and animating masks • Getting started with ActionScript 3.0

FLASH CS3 8
User Guide

• Using the Flash Video Encoder
Videos also show you how to use Flash CS3 with other Adobe components:

• Using symbols effectively between Illustrator® and Flash • Understanding the Fireworks® and Flash workflow • Designing websites with Flash and Photoshop • Creating mobile content in Flash
To access Adobe Creative Suite 3 video tutorials, visit Adobe Video Workshop at www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials.

Extras
You have access to a wide variety of resources that will help you make the most of your Adobe software. Some of these resources are installed on your computer during the setup process; additional helpful samples and documents are included on the installation or content disc. Unique extras are also offered online by the Adobe Exchange community, at www.adobe.com/go/exchange.
Installed resources

During software installation, a number of resources are placed in your application folder. To view those files, navigate to the application folder on your computer.

• Windows®: [startup drive]\Program Files\Adobe\[Adobe application] • Mac OS®: [startup drive]/Applications/[Adobe application]
The application folder may contain the following resources:
Plug-ins Plug-in modules are small software programs that extend or add features to your software. Once installed,

plug-in modules appear as options in the Import or Export menu; as file formats in the Open, Save As, and Export Original dialog boxes; or as filters in the Filter submenus. For example, a number of special effects plug-ins are automatically installed in the Plug-ins folder inside the Photoshop CS3 folder.
Presets Presets include a wide variety of useful tools, preferences, effects, and images. Product presets include

brushes, swatches, color groups, symbols, custom shapes, graphic and layer styles, patterns, textures, actions, workspaces, and more. Preset content can be found throughout the user interface. Some presets (for example, Photoshop Brush libraries) become available only when you select the corresponding tool. If you don’t want to create an effect or image from scratch, go to the preset libraries for inspiration.
Templates Template files can be opened and viewed from Adobe Bridge CS3, opened from the Welcome Screen, or opened directly from the File menu. Depending on the product, template files range from letterheads, newsletters,

FLASH CS3 9
User Guide

and websites to DVD menus and video buttons. Each template file is professionally constructed and represents a best-use example of product features. Templates can be a valuable resource when you need to jump-start a project.

Are you leav ing mon ey on the tabl e?

Yo ur Inv est

me nt Gu ide

Typi non habe nt claritatem insitam; est claritatem. Investigationes usus legen tis in iis qui demonstra legunt saepi facit eorum verunt lecto us. Claritas res legere me est etiam proce lius quod ii ssus.
CORE INVE STME NT SPEC TRUM Vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla et iusto odio facilisis at vero dignissim qui. eros et accum san RETIR EMEN T SAVI NG PLAN Vel illum dolore eu feugiat nulla et iusto odio facilisis at vero dignissim qui. eros et accum san

Vel:

Ad : Vulputate:

Travel Earth
Best 100 places to see on the planet in your lifetime

01
01

Pelletir Inc.

ET
ET DUO

COSE
VERO

ET JUSTO KASD. ET ACCUSAM CLITA EOS STET REBUM. ET EA

TETU

R SADI

PSCI

NG

DOLORES

Ca si Sp opia A
vero LC H nulch dio E agiam e eum sum et ad $45 a lorp erit agiam vero et nulch dio ad atin agaim e su eum utet nu et ma $25 llam ad eu m lorp er agiam it vero et sum eum dio ad lo a rper $35 nulla it m sucic C IV vero vero ER O nulch dio dio S e su eum ma

volute ipsummy , commy re eugiarud tem eraesexer n ullutet

NU

SUR VIC E

ME NU
$15 eum vero nulla nulch dio m agaim e su eum nu et ma $35 llam ad eu m

SU

eum $35 nulla m sucic C IV vero vero ER O nu dio dio S $15 lche su eum ma eum vero nulla nulch dio m agaim e su eum nu et ma $35 llam ad eu m

N

C

SU

C

Samples Sample files include more complicated designs and are a great way to see new features in action. These files demonstrate the range of creative possibilities available to you. Fonts Several OpenType® fonts and font families are included with your Creative Suite product. Fonts are copied to

your computer during installation:

• Windows: [startup drive]\Windows\Fonts • Mac OS X: [startup drive]/Library/Fonts
For information about installing fonts, see the Read Me file on the installation DVD.
DVD content

The installation or content DVD included with your product contains additional resources for use with your software. The Goodies folder contains product-specific files such as templates, images, presets, actions, plug-ins, and effects, along with subfolders for Fonts and Stock Photography. The Documentation folder contains a PDF version of the Help, technical information, and other documents such as specimen sheets, reference guides, and specialized feature information.
Adobe Exchange

For more free content, visit www.adobe.com/go/exchange, an online community where users download and share thousands of free actions, extensions, plug-ins, and other content for use with Adobe products.

Bridge Home
Bridge Home, a new destination in Adobe Bridge CS3, provides up-to-date information on all your Adobe Creative Suite 3 software in one convenient location. Start Adobe Bridge, then click the Bridge Home icon at the top of the Favorites panel to access the latest tips, news, and resources for your Creative Suite tools.

FLASH CS3 10
User Guide

Note: Bridge Home may not be available in all languages.

Adobe Design Center
Adobe Design Center offers articles, inspiration, and instruction from industry experts, top designers and Adobe publishing partners. New content is added monthly.

You can find hundreds of tutorials for design products and learn tips and techniques through videos, HTML tutorials, and sample book chapters.

FLASH CS3 11
User Guide

New ideas are the heart of Think Tank, Dialog Box, and Gallery:

• Think Tank articles consider how today’s designers engage with technology and what their experiences mean for
design, design tools, and society.

• In Dialog Box, experts share new ideas in motion graphics and digital design. • The Gallery showcases how artists communicate design in motion.
Visit Adobe Design Center at www.adobe.com/designcenter.

Adobe Developer Center
Adobe Developer Center provides samples, tutorials, articles, and community resources for developers who build rich Internet applications, websites, mobile content, and other projects using Adobe products. The Developer Center also contains resources for developers who develop plug-ins for Adobe products.

In addition to sample code and tutorials, you'll find RSS feeds, online seminars, SDKs, scripting guides, and other technical resources. Visit Adobe Developer Center at www.adobe.com/go/developer.

Customer support
Visit the Adobe Support website, at www.adobe.com/support, to find troubleshooting information for your product and to learn about free and paid technical support options. Follow the Training link for access to Adobe Press books, a variety of training resources, Adobe software certification programs, and more.

Downloads
Visit www.adobe.com/go/downloads to find free updates, tryouts, and other useful software. In addition, the Adobe Store (at www.adobe.com/go/store) provides access to thousands of plug-ins from third-party developers, helping you to automate tasks, customize workflows, create specialized professional effects, and more.

FLASH CS3 12
User Guide

Adobe Labs
Adobe Labs gives you the opportunity to experience and evaluate new and emerging technologies and products from Adobe. At Adobe Labs, you have access to resources such as these:

• Prerelease software and technologies • Code samples and best practices to accelerate your learning • Early versions of product and technical documentation • Forums, wiki-based content, and other collaborative resources to help you interact with like-minded developers
Adobe Labs fosters a collaborative software development process. In this environment, customers quickly become productive with new products and technologies. Adobe Labs is also a forum for early feedback, which the Adobe development teams use to create software that meets the needs and expectations of the community. Visit Adobe Labs at www.adobe.com/go/labs.

User communities
User communities feature forums, blogs, and other avenues for users to share technologies, tools, and information. Users can ask questions and find out how others are getting the most out of their software. User-to-user forums are available in English, French, German, and Japanese; blogs are posted in a wide range of languages. To participate in forums or blogs, visit www.adobe.com/communities.

What’s new
New features
The following features are new to Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional.
CS3 Interface

The Flash user interface is updated to share a common interface with other Adobe Creative Suite CS3 components. A consistent appearance across all Adobe software helps users work more easily with multiple applications. See “Workspace” on page 15.
Adobe Bridge and Version Cue

Organize and browse Flash and other creative assets using Adobe Bridge, an independent file-management system that you can launch from within Flash. Through Adobe Bridge, you can automate workflows across Adobe Creative Suite components, apply consistent color settings across Adobe software, and access version control features and online stock photo purchase services. A Welcome screen provides centralized control of settings, as well as ongoing access to tips and tutorials in Adobe Design Center. See “Adobe Version Cue” on page 83.
Bitmap Symbol Library Item dialog box

The Bitmap Symbol Library Item dialog box has been enlarged to provide a larger preview of the bitmap. See “Using symbols, instances, and library assets” on page 208.

FLASH CS3 13
User Guide

Multicolored bounding boxes

You can change the selection color of specific types of elements to identify each element easily. See “Get information about instances on the Stage” on page 216.
Adobe Device Central

A new way to test content created with Adobe products on emulated mobile devices, Device Central lets you select a target device from the beginning of the development process, and gives you a clear idea of what a device’s limitations are. See “Developing applications for mobile devices” on page 432.
Active content detections

To eliminate the need to first activate Flash Player so that users can interact with Flash content, Flash publishes HTML templates that you can use to embed Flash SWF files. Using these templates, embedded SWF files are activated seamlessly without the need for an additional mouse click or other user activation. See “Publishing Flash documents” on page 419.
9-slice onstage preview

Because 9-slice scaling now provides onstage preview, you can see changes and adjustments to 9-slice scaled movie clips on stage. See “About 9-slice scaling and movie clip symbols” on page 223.
Filter copy and paste

You can now copy and paste graphic filter settings from one instance to another. See “Apply filters” on page 251.
Copy and paste motion

Copy and paste motion lets you copy a motion tween and paste (or apply) the frames, tween, and symbol information to another object. When pasting the motion tween to another object, you can choose to paste all properties associated with the motion tween, or choose specific properties to apply to the other object. See “Copy and paste a motion tween” on page 233.
Copy motion as ActionScript 3.0

In addition to copying the properties of one motion tween and applying those properties to another object, you can copy the properties that define a motion tween in the Timeline as ActionScript 3.0 and apply that motion to another symbol, either in the Actions panel or in the source files (such as class files) for a Flash document that uses ActionScript 3.0. See “Copy motion as ActionScript” on page 234.
Pen tool enhancements

The Pen tool has been improved.

• The Pen tool now behaves similarly to the Illustrator Pen tool to provide a more consistent user experience across
Adobe software

• The cubic-to-quadratic conversion is now more efficient, resulting in better accuracy and fewer points.
See “Drawing with the Pen tool” on page 173.
Adobe Photoshop import

You can now import Adobe Photoshop PSD files directly into Flash documents. Most Photoshop data types are supported, and several import options are provided so that you can find the best balance of image fidelity and editability within Flash. See “Import Photoshop PSD files” on page 150.

FLASH CS3 14
User Guide

Adobe Illustrator import

You can now import Adobe Illustrator AI files directly into Flash documents. Most Illustrator data types are supported, and several import options are provided so that you can find the best balance of image fidelity and editability within Flash. See “Import Adobe Illustrator files” on page 141.
Primitive Rectangle and Oval drawing tools

New Rectangle and Oval drawing tools let you create rectangles and ovals whose properties (such as stroke or corner radius) you can edit at any time in the Property inspector. See “Draw rectangles and ovals” on page 167.
Enhanced Quicktime video support

QuickTime export is intended for users who want to distribute Flash content, such as animation, in the QuickTime video format. This release improves the quality of the exported QuickTime video file, which you can distribute as streaming video or on a DVD, or import into a video-editing application such as Adobe® Premiere Pro®. See “Exporting QuickTime” on page 454.
Save and load cue points for Flash video

Save and load functionality has been added to the Cue Points tab to allow you to save the cue points added to one file and apply them to another. You can generate a cue points XML file based on known time codes and import it into the encoder before encoding, eliminating the need to manually add each cue point through the Flash Video Encoder user interface. See Flash Video Encoder Help.
Script Assist mode for ActionScript 3.0

Script Assist mode has been updated to include support for ActionScript 3.0. See “Script Assist mode and behaviors” on page 387.
Improvements in ActionScript

Flash has a new, improved version of ActionScript. ActionScript 3.0 offers a robust programming model familiar to developers with a basic knowledge of object-oriented programming. ActionScript 3.0 facilitates the creation of highly complex applications with large data sets and object-oriented, reusable code bases. While ActionScript 3.0 is not required for content that runs in Adobe Flash Player 9, it allows performance improvements that are available only with the new ActionScript Virtual Machine (AVM2). ActionScript 3.0 code can execute up to ten times faster than legacy ActionScript code. The older version of ActionScript Virtual Machine, AVM1, executes ActionScript 1.0 and ActionScript 2.0 code. Flash Player 9 supports AVM1 for backward compatibility with existing and legacy content. To learn about ActionScript 3.0, see Programming ActionScript 3.0.

15

Chapter 2: Workspace
The Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional workspace includes tools and panels that help you create and navigate your documents. Understanding these tools will help you maximize the application’s capabilities.

Flash workflow and workspace
General Flash workflow
To build a Flash application, you typically perform the following basic steps:
Plan the application.

Decide which basic tasks the application will perform.
Add media elements.

Create and import media elements, such as images, video, sound, text.
Arrange the elements.

Arrange the media elements on the Stage and in the Timeline to define when and how they appear in your application.
Apply special effects.

Apply graphic filters (such as blurs, glows, and bevels), blends, and other special effects as you see fit.
Use ActionScript to control behavior.

Write ActionScript code to control how the media elements behave, including how the elements respond to user interactions.
Test and publish your application.

Test to verify that your application is working as you intended, and find and fix any bugs you encounter. You should test the application throughout the creation process. Publish your FLA file as a SWF file that can be displayed in a web page and played back with Flash Player. Depending on your project and your working style, you might use these steps in a different order. For video tutorials about the Flash workflow, see the following:

• Flash workflow: www.adobe.com/go/vid0132 • Creating your first interactive Flash file: www.adobe.com/go/vid0118
For a text tutorial about creating an application, see Create an Application on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials.

FLASH CS3 16
User Guide

Workspace overview
You create and manipulate your documents and files using various elements such as panels, bars, and windows. Any arrangement of these elements is called a workspace. When you first start an Adobe Creative Suite component, you see the default workspace, which you can customize for the tasks you perform there. For instance, you can create one workspace for editing and another for viewing, save them, and switch between them as you work. You can restore the default workspace at any time by choosing the default option on the Window > Workspace menu. Although default workspaces vary across Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, and Photoshop, you manipulate the elements much the same way in all of them. The Photoshop default workspace is typical:

• The menu bar across the top organizes commands under menus. • The Tools panel (called the Tools palette in Photoshop) contains tools for creating and editing images, artwork,
page elements, and so on. Related tools are grouped together.

• The Control panel (called the options bar in Photoshop) displays options for the currently selected tool. (Flash has
no Control panel.)

• The Document window (called the Stage in Flash) displays the file you’re working on. • Panels (called palettes in Photoshop) help you monitor and modify your work. Examples include the Timeline in
Flash and the Layers palette in Photoshop. Certain panels are displayed by default, but you can add any panel by selecting it from the Window menu. Many panels have menus with panel-specific options. Panels can be grouped, stacked, or docked.

FLASH CS3 17
User Guide

A D E

B

C

G

F

H

Default Photoshop workspace A. Document window B. Dock of panels collapsed to icons C. Panel title bar D. Menu bar E. Options bar F. Tools palette G. Collapse To Icons button H. Three palette (panel) groups in vertical dock

For a video on understanding the workspace, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0187.
Hide or show all panels

• (Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, Photoshop) To hide or show all panels, including the Tools panel and options bar
or Control panel, press Tab.

• (Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, Photoshop) To hide or show all panels except the Tools panel and options bar or
Control panel, press Shift+Tab. You can temporarily display panels hidden by these techniques by moving the pointer to the edge of the application window (Windows) or to the edge of the monitor (Mac OS) and hovering over the strip that appears.

• (Flash) To hide or show all panels, press F4.
Display panel menu options
❖ Position the pointer on the panel menu icon

in the upper-right corner of the panel, and press the mouse

button.
(Illustrator) Adjust panel brightness
❖ In User Interface preferences, move the Brightness slider. This control affects all panels, including the Control

panel.

FLASH CS3 18
User Guide

Reconfigure the Tools panel

You can display the tools in the Tools panel in a single column, or side by side in two columns. In InDesign, you also can switch from single-column to double-column display by setting an option in Interface preferences.
❖ Click the double arrow at the top of the Tools panel.

Customize the workspace
To create a custom workspace, move and manipulate panels (called palettes in Photoshop and in Adobe Creative Suite 2 components).
A B

C

Narrow blue drop zone indicates Color panel will be docked on its own above Layers panel group. A. Title bar B. Tab C. Drop zone

You can save custom workspaces and switch among them. In Photoshop, you can change the font size of the text in the options bar, palettes, and tool tips. Choose a size from the UI Font Size menu in General preferences. Note: For a video on customizing the workspace in Illustrator, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0032. For a video on customizing the workspace in InDesign, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0065.
Dock and undock panels

A dock is a collection of panels or panel groups displayed together, generally in a vertical orientation. You dock and undock panels by moving them into and out of a dock. Note: Docking is not the same as stacking. A stack is a collection of free-floating panels or panel groups, joined top to bottom.

• To dock a panel, drag it by its tab into the dock, at the top, bottom, or in between other panels. • To dock a panel group, drag it by its title bar (the solid empty bar above the tabs) into the dock. • To remove a panel or panel group, drag it out of the dock by its tab or title bar. You can drag it into another dock
or make it free-floating.

FLASH CS3 19
User Guide

Navigator panel being dragged out to new dock, indicated by blue vertical highlight

Navigator panel now in its own dock

To prevent panels from filling all space in a dock, drag the bottom edge of the dock up so it no longer meets the edge of the workspace.
Move panels

As you move panels, you see blue highlighted drop zones, areas where you can move the panel. For example, you can move a panel up or down in a dock by dragging it to the narrow blue drop zone above or below another panel. If you drag to an area that is not a drop zone, the panel floats freely in the workspace.

• To move a panel, drag it by its tab. • To move a panel group or a stack of free-floating panels, drag the title bar.
Press Ctrl (Windows) or Control (Mac OS) while moving a panel to prevent it from docking.

Add and remove docks and panels

If you remove all panels from a dock, the dock disappears. You can create new docks by moving panels to drop zones next to existing docks or at the edges of the workspace.

• To remove a panel, click its close icon (the X at the upper-right corner of the tab), or deselect it from the Window menu. • To add a panel, select it from the Window menu and dock it wherever you wish.
Manipulate panel groups

• To move a panel into a group, drag the panel’s tab to the highlighted drop zone at the top of the group.

FLASH CS3 20
User Guide

Adding a panel to a panel group

• To rearrange panels in a group, drag a panel’s tab to a new location in the group. • To remove a panel from a group so that it floats freely, drag the panel by its tab outside the group. • To make a panel appear at the front of its group, click its tab. • To move grouped panels together, drag their title bar (above the tabs).
Stack free-floating panels

When you drag a panel out of its dock but not into a drop zone, the panel floats freely, allowing you to position it anywhere in the workspace. Panels may also float in the workspace when first selected from the Window menu. You can stack free-floating panels or panel groups together so that they move as a unit when you drag the topmost title bar. (Panels that are part of a dock cannot be stacked or moved as a unit in this way.)

Free-floating stacked panels

• To stack free-floating panels, drag a panel by its tab to the drop zone at the bottom of another panel. • To change the stacking order, drag a panel up or down by its tab.
Note: Be sure to release the tab over the narrow drop zone between panels, rather than the broad drop zone in a title bar.

• To remove a panel or panel group from the stack, so that it floats by itself, drag it out by its tab or title bar.
Resize or minimize panels

• To resize a panel, drag any side of the panel or drag the size box at its lower-right corner. Some panels, such as the
Color panel in Photoshop, cannot be resized by dragging.

• To change the width of all the panels in a dock, drag the gripper
You can open a panel menu even when the panel is minimized.

at the top left of the dock.

• To minimize a panel, panel group, or stack of panels, click the Minimize button in its title bar.

FLASH CS3 21
User Guide

Minimize button

Manipulate panels collapsed to icons

Collapse panels to icons to reduce clutter on the workspace. (In some cases, panels are collapsed to icons in the default workspace.) Click a panel icon to expand the panel. You can expand only one panel or panel group at a time.

Panels collapsed to icons

Panels expanded from icons

• To collapse or expand all panels in a dock, click the double arrow at the top of the dock. • To resize panel icons so that you see only the icons (and not the labels), drag the gripper • To expand a single panel icon, click it. • To collapse an expanded panel back to its icon, click its tab, its icon, or the double arrow in the panel’s title bar.
If you select Auto-Collapse Icon Panels from the Interface or User Interface Options preferences, an expanded panel icon will collapse automatically when you click away from it. at the top of the dock toward the icons until the text disappears. (To display the icon text again, drag the gripper away from the panels.)

• To add a panel or panel group to an icon dock, drag it in by its tab or title bar. (Panels are automatically collapsed
to icons when added to an icon dock.)

• To move a panel icon (or panel icon group), drag the bar that appears above the icon. You can drag panel icons up
and down in the dock, into other docks (where they appear in the panel style of that dock), or outside the dock (where they appear as free-floating, expanded panels).

FLASH CS3 22
User Guide

Save, delete, and switch between workspaces
By saving the current size and position of panels as a named workspace, you can restore that workspace even if you move or close a panel. The names of saved workspaces appear in the Window > Workspace menu. In Photoshop, the saved workspace can include a specific keyboard shortcut set and menu set.
Save a custom workspace 1 With the workspace in the configuration you want to save, do one of the following:

• (Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign) Choose Window > Workspace > Save Workspace. • (Flash) Choose Window > Workspace > Save Current, or choose Save Current from the Workspace menu in the
Edit bar.

• (Photoshop) Choose Save Workspace from the Workspace menu in the options bar.
2 Type a name for the workspace. 3 (Photoshop) Under Capture, select one or more options:
Palette Locations Saves the current palette locations. Keyboard Shortcuts Saves the current set of keyboard shortcuts. Menus Saves the current set of menus.

4 Click OK. Display or switch between workspaces

Flash, Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop include preset workspaces designed to make certain tasks easier.

• Choose Window > Workspace, and select a workspace. • (Photoshop) Select a workspace from the Workspace menu in the options bar. • (Flash) Select a workspace from the Workspace menu in the Edit bar.
(InDesign and Photoshop) Assign keyboard shortcuts to each workspace to navigate among them quickly.

Delete a custom workspace

• (Illustrator) Choose Window > Workspace > Manage Workspaces, select the workspace, and then click the Delete icon. • (InDesign) Choose Window > Workspace > Delete Workspace, select the workspace, and then click Delete. • (Flash) Choose Manage from the Workspace menu in the Edit bar, select the workspace, and then click Delete.
Alternatively, choose Window > Workspace > Manage, select the workspace, and then click Delete.

• (Photoshop) Choose Delete Workspace from the Workspace menu in the options bar. Alternatively, choose
Window > Workspace > Delete Workspace, select the workspace, and then click Delete.
(Photoshop) Start with the last or default palette locations

When you start Photoshop, palettes can either appear in their original default locations, or appear as you last used them.
❖ In Interface preferences:

• To display palettes in their last locations on startup, select Remember Palette Locations. • To display palettes in their default locations on startup, deselect Remember Palette Locations.

FLASH CS3 23
User Guide

Using the Stage and Tools panel
Welcome screen overview
When Flash is running with no documents open, the Welcome screen appears. The Welcome screen contains the following four areas:
Open a Recent Item Lets you open your most recent documents (click the Open icon). Create New Lists Flash file types, such as Flash documents and ActionScript™ files. Create from Template Lists the templates most commonly used to create Flash documents. Extend Links to the Flash Exchange website, where you can download helper applications, extensions, and related

information. The Welcome screen also offers quick access to Help resources. You can take a tour of Flash, learn about documentation resources, and find Adobe Authorized Training facilities.

• To hide the Welcome screen, select Don’t Show Again. • To show the Welcome screen, select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or select Flash > Preferences (Macintosh), and
select Show Welcome screen in the General category.

Using the Stage
The Stage is the rectangular area where you place graphic content when creating Flash documents. The Stage in the authoring environment represents the rectangular space in Flash Player or in a web browser window where your document appears during playback. To change the view of the Stage as you work, zoom in and out. To help you position items on the Stage, you can use the grid, guides, and rulers.

The Timeline and Stage with content

FLASH CS3 24
User Guide

For a video tutorial about the Flash interface, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0116.
Zoom the Stage

To view the entire Stage on the screen, or to view a particular area of your drawing at high magnification, change the magnification level. The maximum magnification depends on the resolution of your monitor and the document size. The minimum value for zooming out on the Stage is 8%. The maximum value for zooming in on the Stage is 2000%.

• To zoom in on an element, select the Zoom tool

in the Tools panel, and click the element. To switch the Zoom tool between zooming in or out, use the Enlarge or Reduce modifiers (in the options area of the Tools panel when the Zoom tool is selected) or Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh). the Zoom tool.

• To zoom in so that a specific area of your drawing fills the window, drag a rectangular selection on the Stage with • To zoom in on or out of the entire Stage, select View > Zoom In or View > Zoom Out. • To zoom in or out by a specified percentage, select View > Magnification, and select a percentage from the
submenu or select a percentage from the Zoom control at the upper-right corner of the Timeline.

• To scale the Stage so that it fits completely in the application window, select View > Magnification > Fit in
Window.

• To show the contents of the current frame, select View > Magnification > Show All, or select Show All from the
Zoom control at the upper-right side of the application window. If the scene is empty, the entire Stage appears.

• To show the entire Stage, select View > Magnification > Show Frame or select Show Frame from the Zoom control
at the upper-right corner of the Timeline.

• To show the workspace surrounding the Stage, or to view elements in a scene that are partly or completely outside
of the Stage area, select View > Pasteboard. The pasteboard appears in light gray. For example, to have a bird fly into a frame, initially position the bird outside of the Stage in the pasteboard and animate it into the Stage area.
Move the view of the Stage

When the Stage is magnified, you may not be able to see all of it. To change the view without having to change the magnification, use the Hand tool to move the Stage.
❖ In the Tools panel, select the Hand tool and drag the Stage. To temporarily switch between another tool and the

Hand tool, hold down the Spacebar and click the tool in the Tools panel.

Use rulers
When rulers show, they appear along the top and left sides of the document. You can change the unit of measure used in the rulers from the default of pixels to another unit. When you move an element on the Stage with the rulers displayed, lines indicating the element’s dimensions appear on the rulers.

• To show or hide rulers, select View > Rulers. • To specify the rulers’ unit of measure for a document, select Modify > Document, and select a unit from the Ruler
Units menu.

See also
“Snapping” on page 181

FLASH CS3 25
User Guide

Use guides
When rulers show (View > Rulers), you can drag horizontal and vertical guides from the rulers onto the Stage. When you create nested timelines, draggable guides appear on the Stage only when the Timeline in which they were created is active. To create custom guides or irregular guides, use guide layers.

• To display or hide the drawing guides, select View > Guides > Show Guides.
Note: If the grid is visible and Snap to Grid is turned on when you create guides, guides snap to the grid.

• To turn snapping to guides on or off, select View > Snapping > Snap to Guides.
Note: Snapping to guides takes precedence over snapping to the grid in places where guides fall between grid lines.

• To move a guide, click anywhere on the ruler with the Selection tool and drag the guide to the desired place on the
Stage.

• To remove a guide, use the Selection tool with guides unlocked to drag the guide to the horizontal or vertical ruler. • To lock guides, select View > Guides > Lock Guides or use the Lock Guides option in the Edit Guides (View >
Guides > Edit Guides) dialog box.

• To clear guides, select View > Guides > Clear Guides. If you are in document-editing mode, all guides in the
document are cleared. If you are in symbol-editing mode, only guides used in symbols are cleared.

See also
“Use guide layers” on page 40
Set guide preferences 1 Select View > Guides > Edit Guides and do any of the following:

• To set Color, click the triangle in the color box and select a guide line color from the palette. The default guide
color is green.

• To display or hide guides, select or deselect Show Guides. • To turn snapping to guides on or off, select or deselect Snap To Guides. • Select or deselect Lock Guides. • To set Snap Accuracy, select an option from the pop-up menu. • To remove all guides, click Clear All. Clear All removes all guides from the current scene. • To save the current settings as the default, click Save Default.
2 Click OK.

Use the grid
The grid appears in a document as a set of lines behind the artwork in all scenes.
Display or hide the drawing grid
❖ Do one of the following:

• Select View > Grid > Show Grid. • Press Control+'' (quote) (Windows) or Command+'' (quote) (Macintosh).

FLASH CS3 26
User Guide

Turn snapping to grid lines on or off
❖ Select View > Snapping > Snap to Grid.

Set grid preferences 1 Select View > Grid > Edit Grid and select from the options. 2 To save the current settings as the default, click Save Default.

About the main toolbar and edit bar
The menu bar at the top of the application window contains menus with commands for controlling functionality. The edit bar, at the top of the Stage, contains controls and information for editing scenes and symbols, and for changing the magnification level of the Stage.

See also
“Using symbols, instances, and library assets” on page 208 “Working with scenes” on page 75

Tools panel overview
The tools in the Tools panel let you draw, paint, select, and modify artwork, as well as change the view of the Stage. The Tools panel is divided into four sections:

• The tools area contains drawing, painting, and selection tools. • The view area contains tools for zooming and panning in the application window. • The colors area contains modifiers for stroke and fill colors. • The options area contains modifiers for the currently selected tool. Modifiers affect the tool’s painting or editing
operations. To specify which tools to display in the authoring environment, use the Customize Tools Panel dialog box.

See also
“Using Flash drawing and painting tools” on page 165 “Selecting objects” on page 197

Use the Tools panel
To show or hide the Tools panel, select Window > Tools.
Select tools
❖ Do one of the following:

• Click the tool in the Tools panel. Depending on the tool you select, a set of modifiers might appear in the options
area at the bottom of the Tools panel.

• Press the tool’s keyboard shortcut. To view the keyboard shortcuts, select Edit > Keyboard Shortcuts (Windows)
or Flash > Keyboard Shortcuts (Macintosh). On the Macintosh, you might need to move the mouse to see the new pointer appear.

FLASH CS3 27
User Guide

• To select a tool located in the pop-up menu for a visible tool such as the Rectangle tool, press the icon of the visible
tool and select another tool from the pop-up menu.
Customize the Tools panel

To specify which tools appear in the authoring environment, use the Customize Tools Panel dialog box to add or remove tools from the Tools panel. When more than one tool appears in a location, the top tool in the group (the most recently used) appears with an arrow in the lower-right corner of its icon. This arrow indicates that additional tools are present in a pop-up menu. The same keyboard shortcut functions for all tools in the pop-up menu. When you press and hold the mouse button on the icon, the other tools in the group appear in a pop-up menu.
1 To show the Customize Tools Panel dialog box, do one of the following:

• (Windows) Select Edit > Customize Tools panel. • (Macintosh) Select Flash > Customize Tools panel.
The Available Tools menu indicates the tools that are currently available. The Current Selection menu indicates the tools currently assigned to the selected location in the Tools panel.
2 To browse through the tools to specify the location to assign to another tool, click a tool in the Tools panel image or use the arrows. 3 To add a tool to the selected location, select the tool in the Available Tools list and click Add. You can assign a tool to more than one location. 4 To remove a tool from the selected location, select the tool in the Current Selection scroll list and click Remove. 5 To restore the default Tools Panel layout, click Restore Default in the Customize Tools Panel dialog box. 6 Click OK to apply your changes and close the Customize Tools Panel dialog box.

Use context menus
Context menus contain commands relevant to the current selection. For example, when you select a frame in the Timeline window, the context menu contains commands for creating, deleting, and modifying frames and keyframes. Context menus exist for many items and controls in many locations, including on the Stage, in the Timeline, in the Library panel, and in the Actions panel.
❖ Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) an item.

Set preferences in Flash
You can set preferences for general application operations, editing operations, and clipboard operations.

FLASH CS3 28
User Guide

The General category in the Preferences dialog box

See also
“Specify drawing preferences” on page 164 “Change the display of frames in the Timeline” on page 36 “About the Timeline” on page 33 “Creating and managing documents” on page 52 “Substituting missing fonts” on page 264 “Set Pen tool preferences” on page 174 “AI File Importer preferences” on page 144 “PSD file import preferences” on page 151
Set preferences 1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh). 2 Make a selection in the Category list and select from the respective options. Set AutoFormat preferences for ActionScript
❖ Select any of the options. To see the effect of each selection, look in the Preview pane.

FLASH CS3 29
User Guide

Set text preferences

• For Font Mapping Default, select a font to use when substituting missing fonts in documents you open in Flash. • For Vertical Text options, select Default Text Orientation (deselected by default). • To reverse the default text display direction, select Right To Left Text Flow (deselected by default). • To turn off kerning for vertical text, select No Kerning (deselected by default). Turning off kerning is useful to
improve spacing for some fonts that use kerning tables.

• For Input Method, select the appropriate language.
Set warning preferences

• To receive a warning when you try to save documents with content that is specific to the Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional authoring tool as a Flash 8 file, select Warn On Save For Adobe Flash 8 Compatibility (default).

• To receive a warning when you open a Flash document that uses fonts that are not installed on your computer,
select Warn On Missing Fonts (default).

• To receive a warning if the URL for a document changed since the last time you opened and edited it, select Warn
On URL Changes In Launch And Edit.

• To place a red X over any Generator objects as a reminder that Generator objects are not supported in Flash 8,
select Warn On Reading Generator Content.

• To receive an alert when Flash inserts frames in your document to accommodate audio or video files that you
import, select Warn On Inserting Frames When Importing Content.

• To receive an alert when selecting Default Encoding could potentially lead to data loss or character corruption,
select Warn On Encoding Conflicts When Exporting .as Files. (For example, if you create a file with English, Japanese, and Korean characters and select Default Encoding on an English system, the Japanese and Korean characters are corrupted.)

• To receive a warning when you attempt to edit a symbol with timeline effects applied to it, select Warn On
Conversion Of Effect Graphic Objects.

• To receive a warning when you export a document to this earlier version of Flash Player, select Warn On Exporting
To Flash Player 6 r65.

• To receive a warning when you create a site in which the local root folder overlaps with another site, select Warn
On Sites With Overlapped Root Folder.

• To receive a warning when you convert a symbol with a behavior attached to a symbol of a different type—for
example, when you convert a movie clip to a button—select Warn On Behavior Symbol Conversion.

• To receive a warning when you convert a symbol to a symbol of a different type, select Warn On Symbol
Conversion.

• To receive a warning when Flash converts a graphic object drawn in Object Drawing mode to a group, select Warn
On Automatically Converting From Drawing Object To Group.

• To display warnings on controls for features not supported by the Flash Player version that the current FLA file is
targeting in its Publish settings, select Show Incompatibility Warnings On Feature Controls.
Set General preferences
On Launch Specify which document opens when you start the application. Undo To set the number of undo or redo levels, enter a value from 2 to 300. Undo levels require memory; the more

undo levels you use, the more system memory is consumed. The default is 100.

FLASH CS3 30
User Guide

Document- or Object-level undo Document-level undo maintains a single list of all your actions for the entire Flash document. Object-level undo maintains separate lists of your actions for each object in your document. Object-level lets you undo an action on one object without having to also undo actions on other objects that might have been modified more recently than the target object. Printing (Windows only) To disable PostScript output when printing to a PostScript printer, select Disable

PostScript. By default, this option is deselected. Select this option if you have problems printing to a PostScript printer; however, this option slows down printing.
Test Movie To open a new document tab in the application window when you select Control > Test Movie, select

Open Test Movie In Tabs. The default is to open the test movie in its own window.
Selection To control how multiple elements are selected, select or deselect Shift Select. When Shift Select is off,

clicking additional elements adds them to the current selection. When Shift Select is on, clicking additional elements deselects other elements unless you hold down Shift.
Show Tooltips Shows tooltips when the pointer pauses over a control. To hide the tooltips, deselect this option. Contact Sensitive Select objects when any part of them is included in the marquee rectangle when dragging with the Selection or Lasso tools. The default is that objects are only selected when the tool’s marquee rectangle completely surrounds the object. Timeline To use span-based selection in the Timeline, rather than the default frame-based selection, select Span Based Selection. Named Anchor On Scene Make the first frame of each scene in a document a named anchor. Named anchors let you

use the Forward and Back buttons in a browser to jump from scene to scene.
Highlight Color To use the current layer’s outline color, select a color from the panel, or select Use Layer Color. Project To have all files in a project close when the project file is closed, select Close Files With Project. Save Files On Test Or Publish Project Save each file in a project whenever the project is tested or published.

Clipboard preferences
Bitmaps (Windows only)

To specify Color Depth and Resolution parameters for bitmaps copied to the clipboard, select their respective options. To apply anti-aliasing, select Smooth. To specify the amount of RAM that is used when placing a bitmap image on the Clipboard, enter a value in the Size Limit text field. Increase this value when working with large or high-resolution bitmap images.
Gradient Quality (Windows only) To specify the quality of gradient fills placed in the Windows metafile, select an option. Choosing a higher quality increases the time required to copy artwork. To specify gradient quality when pasting items to a location outside of Flash, use this setting. When you are pasting in Flash, the full gradient quality of the copied data is preserved regardless of the Gradients setting on the Clipboard. PICT Settings (Macintosh only) To specify how PICT files are handled, use the following settings.

• Type To preserve data copied to the Clipboard as vector artwork, select Objects. To convert the copied artwork to a bitmap, select one of the bitmap formats. • Resolution Enter a value. • Include PostScript Select to include PostScript data.

FLASH CS3 31
User Guide

• Gradients To specify gradient quality in the PICT file, select an option. Choosing a higher quality increases the time required to copy artwork. To specify gradient quality when pasting items to a location outside of Flash, use the Gradients setting. When you are pasting in Flash, the full gradient quality of the copied data is preserved regardless of the Gradient setting. • FreeHand Text To keep text editable in a pasted FreeHand file, select Maintain Text As Blocks.

Customize keyboard shortcuts
To match the shortcuts you use in other applications, or to streamline your workflow, select keyboard shortcuts. By default, Flash uses built-in keyboard shortcuts designed for the application. You can also select a built-in keyboard shortcut set from one of several graphics applications.
View or print the current set of keyboard shortcuts 1 Select Edit > Keyboard Shortcuts (Windows) or Flash > Keyboard Shortcuts (Macintosh). 2 In the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box, select the shortcut set to view from the Current Set pop-up menu. 3 Click the Export Set As HTML button

.

4 Select a name and location for the exported HTML file. The default file name is the name of the selected shortcut set. 5 Click Save. 6 Find the exported file in the folder you selected and open the file in a web browser. 7 To print the file, use the browser’s Print command. Select a keyboard shortcut set 1 Select Edit > Keyboard Shortcuts (Windows) or Flash > Keyboard Shortcuts (Macintosh). 2 In the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box, select a shortcut set from the Current Set pop-up menu. Create a keyboard shortcut set 1 Select a keyboard shortcut set and click the Duplicate Set button. 2 Enter a name for the new shortcut set and click OK. Rename a custom keyboard shortcut set 1 In the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box, select a shortcut set from the Current Set pop-up menu. 2 Click the Rename Set button, enter a new name, and click OK. Add or remove a keyboard shortcut 1 Select Edit > Keyboard Shortcuts (Windows) or Flash > Keyboard Shortcuts (Macintosh) and select the set to

modify.
2 From the Commands pop-up menu, select a category to view shortcuts for the selected category. 3 In the Commands list, select the command for which you want to add or remove a shortcut. An explanation of the selected command appears in the description area in the dialog box. 4 Do one of the following:

• To add a shortcut, click the Add Shortcut (+) button. • To remove a shortcut, click the Remove Shortcut (-) button and proceed to step 6.

FLASH CS3 32
User Guide

5 If you are adding a shortcut, enter the new shortcut key combination in the Press Key box.

Note: To enter the key combination, press the keys on the keyboard. You do not need to spell out key names, such as Control, Option, and so on.
6 Click Change. 7 Repeat this procedure to add or remove additional shortcuts, and click OK. Delete a keyboard shortcut set 1 Select Edit > Keyboard Shortcuts (Windows) or Flash > Keyboard Shortcuts (Macintosh). In the Keyboard

Shortcuts dialog box, click Delete Set.
2 In the Delete Set dialog box, select a shortcut set and click Delete.

Note: You cannot delete the keyboard shortcut sets built into Flash.

Create custom keyboard shortcuts
You can create and modify keyboard shortcuts.
Customize keyboard shortcuts 1 Select Edit > Keyboard Shortcuts (Windows) or Flash > Keyboard Shortcuts (Macintosh).

The Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box appears.
2 Use the following options to add, delete, or edit keyboard shortcuts:
Current Set Lets you choose a set of predetermined shortcuts (listed at the top of the menu), or any custom set you’ve

defined.
Commands Lets you select a category of commands to edit (for example, menu commands). The command list displays the commands associated with the category you selected from the Commands pop-up menu, along with the assigned shortcuts. The Menu Commands category displays this list as a tree view that replicates the structure of the menus. The other categories list the commands by name (such as Quit Application), in a flat list. Shortcuts Displays all shortcuts assigned to the selected command. Add Item

Adds a new shortcut to the current command. To add a new blank line to the Shortcuts box, click this button. To add a new keyboard shortcut for this command, enter a new key combination and click Change. Each command can have two different keyboard shortcuts; if two shortcuts are already assigned to a command, the Add Item button does nothing. Removes the selected shortcut from the list of shortcuts.

Remove Item

Press Key Displays the key combination you enter when you’re adding or changing a shortcut. Change Adds the key combination shown in the Press Key box to the list of shortcuts, or changes the selected

shortcut to the specified key combination. Duplicates the current set. Give the new set a name; the default name is the current set’s name with the word copy appended to it.
Duplicate Rename Renames the current set.

Saves the current set in an HTML table format for easy viewing and printing. Open the HTML file in your browser and print the shortcuts for easy reference.
Export Set As HTML Delete

Deletes a set. You cannot delete the active set.

FLASH CS3 33
User Guide

3 Click OK. Remove a shortcut from a command 1 From the Commands pop-up menu, select a command category, select a command from the Commands list, and

select a shortcut.
2 Click Remove Item (-). Add a shortcut to a command 1 From the Commands pop-up menu, select a command category and select a command. 2 Prepare to add a shortcut by doing one of the following:

• If fewer than two shortcuts are already assigned to the command, click Add Item
the Shortcuts box, and the insertion point moves to the Press Key box.

. A new blank line appears in

• If two shortcuts are already assigned to the command, select one of them to be replaced by the new shortcut, and
click in the Press Key box.
3 Press a key combination.

Note: If a problem occurs with the key combination (for example, if the key combination is already assigned to another command), an explanatory message appears just below the Shortcuts box and you may be unable to add or edit the shortcut.
4 Click Change. Edit an existing shortcut 1 From the Commands pop-up menu, select a command category, select a command from the Commands list, and

select a shortcut to change.
2 Click in the Press Key box, enter a new key combination, and click Change.

Note: If a problem occurs with the key combination (for example, if the key combination is already assigned to another command), an explanatory message appears just below the Shortcuts box and you may be unable to add or edit the shortcut.

The Timeline
About the Timeline
The Timeline organizes and controls a document’s content over time in layers and frames. Like films, Flash documents divide lengths of time into frames. Layers are like multiple film strips stacked on top of one another, each containing a different image that appears on the Stage. The major components of the Timeline are layers, frames, and the playhead. Layers in a document are listed in a column on the left side of the Timeline. Frames contained in each layer appear in a row to the right of the layer name. The Timeline header at the top of the Timeline indicates frame numbers. The playhead indicates the current frame displayed on the Stage. As a document plays, the playhead moves from left to right through the Timeline. The Timeline status displayed at the bottom of the Timeline indicates the selected frame number, the current frame rate, and the elapsed time to the current frame.

FLASH CS3 34
User Guide

Note: When an animation is played, the actual frame rate is displayed; this may differ from the document’s frame rate setting if the computer can’t calculate and display the animation quickly enough.
A B

C

E

F D G

H

I

J

K

L

Parts of the Timeline A. Playhead B. Empty keyframe C. Timeline header D. Guide layer icon E. Frame View pop-up menu F. Frame-by-frame animation G. Tweened animation H. Scroll To Playhead button I. Onion-skinning buttons J. Current Frame indicator K. Frame Rate indicator L. Elapsed Time indicator

The Timeline shows where animation occurs in a document, including frame-by-frame animation, tweened animation, and motion paths. Controls in the layers section of the Timeline let you hide, show, lock, or unlock layers, as well as display layer contents as outlines. You can drag frames to a new location on the same layer or to a different layer. For a video tutorial about the Timeline, keyframes, and frame rates, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0123.

See also
“Manage frames and keyframes in the Timeline” on page 70 “Creating motion” on page 229

Change the appearance of the Timeline
By default, the Timeline appears at the top of the main application window, above the Stage. To change its position, detach the Timeline from the Stage and float it in its own window or dock it to any other panel you choose. You can also hide the Timeline. To change the number of layers and frames that are visible, resize the Timeline. To view additional layers when the Timeline contains more layers than can be displayed, use the scroll bars on the right side of the Timeline.

FLASH CS3 35
User Guide

Dragging the Timeline

• To move the Timeline when it is docked to the application window, drag the gripper (2 dotted vertical bars) at the
upper-left corner of the Timeline.

• To dock an undocked Timeline to the application window, drag the gripper (2 dotted vertical bars) to the top of
the application window.

• To dock an undocked Timeline to other panels, drag the Timeline title bar tab to the location you choose. To
prevent the Timeline from docking to other panels, press Control while you drag. A blue bar appears to indicate where the Timeline will dock.

• To lengthen or shorten layer name fields in the Timeline panel, drag the bar separating the layer names and the
frames portions of the Timeline.
Resize the Timeline

• If the Timeline is docked to the main application window, drag the bar separating the Timeline from the Stage
area.

• If the Timeline is not docked to the main application window, drag the lower-right corner (Windows) or the size
box in the lower-right corner (Macintosh).

Move the playhead
The playhead moves through the timeline as a document plays to indicate the current frame displayed on the Stage. The Timeline header shows the frame numbers of the animation. To display a frame on the Stage, move the playhead to the frame in the Timeline. To display a specific frame when you’re working with a large number of frames that can’t all be displayed in the Timeline at once, move the playhead along the Timeline.

• To go to a frame, click the frame’s location in the Timeline header, or drag the playhead to the desired position. • To center the Timeline on the current frame, click the Scroll To Playhead button at the bottom of the Timeline.

Moving the playhead

FLASH CS3 36
User Guide

Change the display of frames in the Timeline
1 To display the Frame View pop-up menu, click Frame View in the upper-right corner of the Timeline.

Frame View pop-up menu

2 Select from the following options:

• To change the width of frame cells, select Tiny, Small, Normal, Medium, or Large. (The Large frame-width setting
is useful for viewing the details of sound waveforms.)

• To decrease the height of frame cell rows, select Short.

Short and Normal frame view options

• To turn the tinting of frame sequences on or off, select Tinted Frames. • To display thumbnails of the content of each frame scaled to fit the Timeline frames, select Preview. This can cause
the apparent content size to vary and requires extra screen space.

• To display thumbnails of each full frame (including empty space), select Preview In Context. This is useful for
viewing the way elements move in their frames over the course of the animation, but previews are generally smaller than with the Preview option.

About layers
Layers help you organize the artwork in your document. You can draw and edit objects on one layer without affecting objects on another layer. In areas of the Stage with nothing on a layer, you can see through it to the layers below. To draw, paint, or otherwise modify a layer or folder, select the layer in the Timeline to make it active. A pencil icon next to a layer or folder name in the Timeline indicates that the layer or folder is active. Only one layer can be active at a time (although more than one layer can be selected at a time). When you create a Flash document, it contains only one layer. To organize the artwork, animation, and other elements in your document, add more layers. You can also hide, lock, or rearrange layers. The number of layers you can create is limited only by your computer’s memory, and layers do not increase the file size of your published SWF file. Only the objects you place into layers add to the file size.

FLASH CS3 37
User Guide

To organize and manage layers, create layer folders and place layers in them. You can expand or collapse layer folders in the Timeline without affecting what you see on the Stage. Use separate layers or folders for sound files, ActionScript, frame labels, and frame comments. This helps you find these items quickly to edit them. To help create sophisticated effects, use special guide layers to make drawing and editing easier, and mask layers.

Create layers and layer folders
When you create a layer or folder, it appears above the selected layer. The newly added layer becomes the active layer.
Create a layer
❖ Do one of the following:

• Click the Insert Layer button • Select Insert > Timeline > Layer.

at the bottom of the Timeline.

• Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) a layer name in the Timeline and select Insert Layer from the
context menu.
Create a layer folder
❖ Do one of the following:

• Select a layer or folder in the Timeline and select Insert > Timeline > Layer Folder. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) a layer name in the Timeline and select Insert Folder from
the context menu. The new folder appears above the layer or folder you selected.

View layers and layer folders
A red X next to the name of a layer or folder in the Timeline indicates that a layer or folder is hidden. In the Publish Settings, you can choose whether hidden layers are included when you publish a SWF file. To distinguish which layer an object belongs to, display all objects on a layer as colored outlines.
Show or hide a layer or folder
❖ Do one of the following:

• To hide a layer or folder, click in the Eye column to the right of the layer or folder name in the Timeline. To show
the layer or folder, click in it again.

• To hide all the layers and folders in the Timeline, click the Eye icon. To show all layers and folders, click it again. • To show or hide multiple layers or folders, drag through the Eye column. • To hide all layers and folders other than the current layer or folder, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click
(Macintosh) in the Eye column to the right of a layer or folder name. To show all layers and folders, Alt-click or Option-click it again.
View the contents of a layer as outlines
❖ Do one of the following:

• To display all objects on that layer as outlines, click in the Outline column to the right of the layer’s name. To turn
off outline display, click in it again.

• To display objects on all layers as outlines, click the outline icon. To turn off outline display on all layers, click it
again.

FLASH CS3 38
User Guide

• To display objects on all layers other than the current layer as outlines, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click
(Macintosh) in the Outline column to the right of a layer’s name. To turn off the outline display for all layers, Alt-click or Option-click in it again.
Change a layer’s outline color 1 Do one of the following:

• Double-click the layer’s icon (the icon to the left of the layer name) in the Timeline. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the layer name and select Properties from the context menu. • Select the layer in the Timeline and select Modify > Timeline > Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties dialog box, click the Outline Color box, select a new color, and click OK. Change layer height in the Timeline 1 Do one of the following:

• Double-click the layer’s icon (the icon to the left of the layer name) in the Timeline. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the layer name and select Properties from the context menu. • Select the layer in the Timeline and select Modify > Timeline > Layer Properties.
2 In the Layer Properties dialog box, select an option for Layer Height and click OK. Change the number of layers displayed in the Timeline
❖ Drag the bar that separates the Timeline from the Stage area.

Edit layers and layer folders
By default, new layers are named by the order in which they are created: Layer 1, Layer 2, and so on. To better reflect their contents, rename layers.
Select a layer or folder
❖ Do one of the following:

• Click the name of a layer or folder in the Timeline. • Click any frame in the Timeline of the layer to select. • Select an object on the Stage that is located in the layer to select. • To select contiguous layers or folders, Shift-click their names in the Timeline. • To select discontiguous layers or folders, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Macintosh) their names
in the Timeline.
Rename a layer or folder
❖ Do one of the following:

• Double-click the name of the layer or folder in the Timeline and enter a new name. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the name of the layer or folder and select Properties from the
context menu. Enter the new name in the Name box and click OK.

• Select the layer or folder in the Timeline and select Modify > Timeline > Layer Properties. Enter the new name in
the Name box and click OK.

FLASH CS3 39
User Guide

Lock or unlock one or more layers or folders
❖ Do one of the following:

• To lock a layer or folder, click in the Lock column to the right of the name. To unlock the layer or folder, click in
the Lock column again.

• To lock all layers and folders, click the padlock icon. To unlock all layers and folders, click it again. • To lock or unlock multiple layers or folders, drag through the Lock column. • To lock all other layers or folders, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh) in the Lock column to the
right of a layer or folder name. To unlock all layers or folders, Alt-click or Option-click in the Lock column again.
Copy a layer 1 To select the entire layer, click the layer name in the Timeline. 2 To create a layer, click the Insert Layer button. 3 Select Edit > Timeline > Copy Frames. 4 Click the new layer and select Edit > Timeline > Paste Frames. Copy the contents of a layer folder 1 Collapse the folder (click the triangle to the left of the folder name in the Timeline) and click the folder name to

select the entire folder.
2 Select Edit > Timeline > Copy Frames. 3 To create a folder, select Insert > Timeline > Layer Folder. 4 Click the new folder and select Edit > Timeline > Paste Frames. Delete a layer or folder 1 To select the layer or folder, click its name in the Timeline or any frame in the layer. 2 Do one of the following:

• Click the Delete Layer button in the Timeline. • Drag the layer or folder to the Delete Layer button. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the layer or folder name and select Delete Layer from the
context menu. Note: When you delete a layer folder, all the enclosed layers and all their contents are also deleted.

Organize layers and layer folders
To organize your document, rearrange layers and folders in the Timeline. Layer folders help organize your workflow by letting you place layers in a tree structure. To see the layers a folder contains without affecting which layers are visible on the Stage, expand or collapse the folder. Folders can contain both layers and other folders, allowing you to organize layers in much the same way you organize files on your computer. The layer controls in the Timeline affect all layers within a folder. For example, locking a layer folder locks all layers within that folder.

• To move a layer or layer folder into a layer folder, drag the layer or layer folder name to the destination layer folder name.

FLASH CS3 40
User Guide

• To change the order of layers or folders, drag one or more layers or folders in the Timeline to the desired position. • To expand or collapse a folder, click the triangle to the left of the folder name. • To expand or collapse all folders, Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) and select Expand All
Folders or Collapse All Folders.

Use guide layers
For help in aligning objects when drawing, create guide layers and align objects on other layers to the objects you create on the guide layers. Guide layers are not exported and do not appear in a published SWF file. Any layer can be a guide layer. Guide layers are indicated by a guide icon to the left of the layer name. To control the movement of objects in a motion tweened animation, create a motion guide layer. Note: Dragging a normal layer onto a guide layer converts the guide layer to a motion guide layer. To prevent accidentally converting a guide layer, place all guide layers at the bottom of the layer order.
❖ Select the layer and Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) and select Guide from the context menu.

To change the layer back to a normal layer, select Guide again.

See also
“Tween motion along a path” on page 245

Using Flash authoring panels
About the Property inspector
The Property inspector provides easy access to the most commonly used attributes of the current selection, either on the Stage or in the Timeline. You can make changes to the object or document attributes in the Property inspector without accessing the menus or panels that also control these attributes. Depending on what is currently selected, the Property inspector displays information and settings for the current document, text, symbol, shape, bitmap, video, group, frame, or tool. When two or more different types of objects are selected, the Property inspector displays the total number of objects selected.

The Property inspector showing the properties for the Text tool

To display the Property inspector, Select Window > Properties > Properties, or press Control+F3 (Windows) or Command+F3 (Macintosh).

FLASH CS3 41
User Guide

About the Library panel
The Library panel is where you store and organize symbols created in Flash, as well as imported files, including bitmap graphics, sound files, and video clips. The Library panel lets you organize library items in folders, see how often an item is used in a document, and sort items by type.

The Library panel showing a movie clip symbol

To display the Library panel, select Window > Library, or press Control+L (Windows) or Command+L (Macintosh).

See also
“Managing media assets with the Flash document library” on page 65

About the Actions panel
The Actions panel lets you create and edit ActionScript code for an object or frame. Selecting a frame, button, or movie clip instance makes the Actions panel active. The Actions panel title changes to Button Actions, Movie Clip Actions, or Frame Actions, depending on what is selected.

FLASH CS3 42
User Guide

The Actions panel showing a stop() action in a frame

To display the Actions panel, select Window > Actions or press F9.

See also
“Actions panel overview” on page 383 “Script window overview” on page 384

Use the Movie Explorer
The Movie Explorer lets you view and organize the contents of a document and select elements in the document for modification. It contains a display list of currently used elements, arranged in a navigable hierarchical tree. Use the Movie Explorer to perform the following actions:

• Filter which categories of items in the document appear in the Movie Explorer. • Display the selected categories as scenes, symbol definitions, or both. • Expand and collapse the navigation tree. • Search for an element in a document by name. • Familiarize yourself with the structure of a Flash document that another developer created. • Find all the instances of a particular symbol or action. • Print the navigable display list that appears in the Movie Explorer.
The Movie Explorer has a Panel menu and a context menu with options for performing operations on selected items or modifying the Movie Explorer display. A check mark with a triangle below it in the Movie Explorer panel indicates the Panel menu. Note: The Movie Explorer has slightly different functionality when you are working with screens.

FLASH CS3 43
User Guide

See also
“Working with screens” on page 367
View the Movie Explorer
❖ Select Window > Movie Explorer.

Filter the categories of items that appear in the Movie Explorer

• To show text, symbols, ActionScript, imported files, or frames and layers, click one or more of the filtering buttons
to the right of the Show option. To customize which items to show, click the Customize button. Select options in the Show area of the Movie Explorer Settings dialog box to view those elements.

• To show items in scenes, select Show Movie Elements from the Movie Explorer Panel menu. • To show information about symbols, select Show Symbol Definitions from the Movie Explorer Panel menu.
Note: The Movie Elements option and the Symbol Definitions option can be active at the same time.
Search for an item using the Find box
❖ In the Find box, enter the item name, font name, ActionScript string, or frame number. The Find feature searches

all items that appear in the Movie Explorer.
Select an item in the Movie Explorer
❖ Click the item in the navigation tree. Shift-click to select more than one item.

The full path for the selected item appears at the bottom of the Movie Explorer. Selecting a scene in the Movie Explorer shows the first frame of that scene on the Stage. Selecting an element in the Movie Explorer selects that element on the Stage if the layer containing the element is not locked.
Use the Movie Explorer Panel menu or context menu commands 1 Do one of the following:

• To view the Panel menu, click the Panel menu control in the Movie Explorer panel. • To view the context menu, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) an item in the Movie Explorer
navigation tree.
2 Select an option from the menu:
Go To Location Jumps to the selected layer, scene, or frame in the document. Go To Symbol Definition Jumps to the symbol definition for a symbol that is selected in the Movie Elements area of the Movie Explorer. The symbol definition lists all the files associated with the symbol. (The Show Symbol Definitions option must be selected. See its definition in this list.) Select Symbol Instances Jumps to the scene containing instances of a symbol that is selected in the Symbol Definitions area of the Movie Explorer. (The Show Movie Elements option must be selected.) Find In Library Highlights the selected symbol in the document’s library. (Flash opens the Library panel if it is not

already visible.)
Rename Lets you enter a new name for a selected element. Edit In Place Lets you edit a selected symbol on the Stage. Edit In New Window Lets you edit a selected symbol in a new window. Show Movie Elements Shows the elements in your document organized into scenes.

FLASH CS3 44
User Guide

Show Symbol Definitions Shows all the elements associated with a symbol. Copy All Text To Clipboard Copies selected text to the clipboard. For spell checking or other editing, paste the text

into an external text editor.
Cut, Copy, Paste, And Clear Performs these common functions on a selected element. Modifying an item in the

display list modifies the corresponding item in the document.
Expand Branch Expands the navigation tree at the selected element. Collapse Branch Collapses the navigation tree at the selected element. Collapse Others Collapses the branches in the navigation tree that do not contain the selected element. Print Prints the hierarchical display list that appears in the Movie Explorer.

About the Web Services panel
You can view a list of web services, refresh web services, and add or remove web services in the Web Services panel (Window > Other Panels > Web Services). When you add a web service to the Web Services panel, the web service is then available to any application you create. You can use the Web Services panel to refresh all your web services at once by clicking the Refresh Web Services button. If you are not using the Stage but instead are writing ActionScript code for the connectivity layer of your application, you can use the Web Services panel to manage your web services. For detailed information about using the web services panel, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_web_services.

Accessibility in the Flash workspace
About accessibility support
Accessibility support in the authoring environment provides keyboard shortcuts for navigating and using interface controls, including panels, the Property inspector, dialog boxes, the Stage, and objects on the Stage, so that you can work with these interface elements without using the mouse. Note: Certain keyboard controls and authoring environment accessibility features are available only in Windows. To customize the keyboard shortcuts for accessibility in the authoring environment, use the Workspace Accessibility Commands section of the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box.

See also
“Customize keyboard shortcuts” on page 31

About Flash authoring accessibility on the Macintosh
Accessibility for the authoring environment on the Macintosh has the following limitations:

• The Panel Focus keyboard shortcut (Command+Option+Tab) is not supported for the Property inspector. • The Panel Control Focus keyboard shortcut (Tab) is supported only for the Timeline, not for other panels or the
Property inspector.

FLASH CS3 45
User Guide

Select panels or the Property inspector with keyboard shortcuts
To select a panel or the Property inspector (also referred to as applying focus to the panel or Property inspector), use the keyboard shortcut Control+F6 (Windows) or Command+F6 (Macintosh). Apply focus to a panel or the Property inspector only when the panel or Property inspector is visible in the application window. The panel can be expanded or collapsed. When you use the keyboard shortcut to select panels, focus is applied to panels using the following criteria:

• Docked panels are given focus first. • If the Timeline is showing and docked, the Timeline is given focus the first time you press Control+F6 (Windows)
or Command+F6 (Macintosh).

• If the Timeline is not showing and docked, or if you press the keyboard shortcut again, focus moves to the
rightmost and highest docked panel. Pressing the keyboard shortcut repeatedly then moves the focus through the other docked panels, from right to left and from top to bottom of the workspace.

• If you move the focus through all the docked panels, or if no docked panels are showing, focus moves to the
rightmost and highest floating panel. Pressing the keyboard shortcut repeatedly then moves the focus through the other floating panels, from right to left and from top to bottom of the workspace.
Use keyboard shortcuts to select or deselect, expand, or collapse panels or the Property inspector

• To move the focus through the panels currently displayed in the workspace, press Control+F6 (Windows) or
Command+F6 (Macintosh). A dotted line appears around the title of the currently focused panel.

• To move the focus to the previously selected panel, press Control+Shift+F6 (Windows) or Command+Shift+F6
(Macintosh).

• To deselect a panel, press Escape, or move, dock, or undock the panel. • To move the focus to the panel above or below the current panel in a panel group, press Up Arrow or Down Arrow. • To hide all panels and the Property inspector, press F4. To display all panels and the Property inspector, press F4
again.
Use keyboard shortcuts to expand or collapse panels or the Property inspector 1 Press Control+F6 (Windows) or Command+F6 (Macintosh) until the panel to expand or collapse has focus. A

dotted line appears around the title of the currently focused panel.
2 To expand or collapse the currently selected panel, press the Spacebar.

Select controls in a panel or the Property inspector using keyboard shortcuts
To move the focus through the panel controls when a panel or the Property inspector has the current focus, use the Tab key. To activate the control that has the current focus, use the Spacebar (that is, pressing Spacebar is equivalent to clicking a control in the panel). When you use the keyboard shortcut for panel controls, focus is applied to a control and the control is activated using the following criteria:

• To select a control in the panel with the Tab key, the panel with the current focus must be expanded. If the panel
is collapsed, pressing Tab has no effect.

• When the panel with the current focus is expanded, pressing Tab the first time moves the focus to the panel’s Panel
menu.

FLASH CS3 46
User Guide

• To move the focus between the Panel menu and the panel title bar, use Right Arrow and Left Arrow. • If the focus is on the Panel menu, press Tab again to move the focus through the other controls in the panel.
Pressing Tab again does not return the focus to the Panel menu.

• To display the Panel menu items when the Panel menu has the focus, press Enter (Windows only). • To move the focus between the Panel menus of the panels in the group in panels that are grouped, use Up Arrow
and Down Arrow.

• You can move the focus to a panel control only if the control is active. If a control is dimmed (inactive), you cannot
apply focus to the control.
Move the focus from a panel title bar to a panel options menu
❖ Do one of the following:

• Press Tab. • Press Right Arrow. To return the focus to the panel title bar, press Left Arrow or Shift+Tab. • To move the focus to the Panel menu of the panel immediately above the panel with the current focus if the panel
is in a group, press Up Arrow. To move the focus to the Panel menu of the panel immediately below the panel with the current focus, press Down Arrow.
Move the focus through the items in the Panel menu of a panel 1 To display the Panel menu items with the focus currently applied to the Panel menu, press the Spacebar. 2 To move through the items in the Panel menu, press Down Arrow. 3 To activate the currently selected Panel menu item, press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh). Move the focus through the controls in a panel 1 Press Tab when the focus is currently applied to the Panel menu. To move the focus through the controls in the

panel, press Tab repeatedly.
2 To activate the currently selected panel control, press Enter (Windows only).

Navigate dialog box controls using keyboard shortcuts (Windows only)
• To move through the controls in the dialog box, press Tab. • To move through the controls within one section of a dialog box, press Up Arrow and Down Arrow. • To activate the button (equivalent to clicking the button), when the focus is applied to a dialog box control button,
press Enter.

• To apply the current settings and close the dialog box (equivalent to clicking OK), when the focus is not applied
to any dialog box control button, press Enter.

• To close the dialog box without applying the changes (equivalent to clicking Cancel), press Escape. • To view the Help content for the dialog box (equivalent to clicking Help), when the focus is applied to the Help
button, press Enter or Spacebar.

Select the Stage or objects on the Stage using keyboard shortcuts
Selecting the Stage with a keyboard shortcut is equivalent to clicking on the Stage. Any other element currently selected becomes deselected when the Stage is selected.

FLASH CS3 47
User Guide

After the Stage is selected, use the Tab key to navigate through all objects on all layers, one at a time. You can select instances (including graphic symbols, buttons, movie clips, bitmaps, videos, or sounds), groups, or boxes. You cannot select shapes (such as rectangles) unless those shapes are instances of symbols. You cannot select more than one object at a time using keyboard shortcuts. To select Objects on the Stage, use the following criteria:

• To select the previous object when an object is currently selected, press Shift+Tab. • To select the first object that was created on the active frame in the active layer, press Tab. When the last object on
the top layer is selected, press Tab to move to the next layer beneath it and select the first object there, and so on.

• When the last object on the last layer is selected, press Tab to move to the next frame and select the first object on
the top layer there.

• Objects on layers that are hidden or locked cannot be selected with the Tab key. • To select the Stage, press Control+Alt+Home (Windows) or Command+Option+Home (Macintosh). • To select an object on the Stage, with the Stage selected, press Tab.
Note: If you are currently typing text in a box, you cannot select an object using the keyboard focus. You must first change the focus to the Stage and then select an object.

Navigate tree structures using keyboard shortcuts
To navigate tree structures, the hierarchical displays of file structures in certain Flash panels, use keyboard shortcuts.

• To expand a collapsed folder, select the folder and press Right Arrow. • To collapse an expanded folder, select the folder and press Left Arrow. • To move to the parent folder of an expanded folder, press Left Arrow. • To move to the child folder of an expanded folder, press Right Arrow.

Work with library items using keyboard shortcuts
1 To copy or paste a selected library item, press Control+X (Windows) or Command+X (Macintosh) to cut the item, or press Control+C (Windows) or Command+C (Macintosh) to copy the item. 2 To paste a cut or copied item, click the Stage or in another library to set the insertion point, and press Control+V (Windows) or Command+V (Macintosh) to paste in the center of the Stage; or press Control+Shift+C (Windows) or Command+Shift+C (Macintosh) to paste in place (in the same location as the original).

To cut, copy, and paste items, use the following criteria:

• Cut or copy one item or multiple items. • Cut or copy an item from the Library panel and paste it onto the Stage or into another library, or paste a folder
into another library.

• You cannot paste a shape from the Stage into the library. • You cannot paste a library item into a common library, because common libraries cannot be modified. However,
you can create a common library.

• When you paste a library item onto the Stage, the item is centered. • If you paste a folder, each item in the folder is included. • To paste a library item into a folder in the destination library, click the folder before pasting.

FLASH CS3 48
User Guide

• You can paste a library item into a different location in the same library where it originated. • If you attempt to paste a library item into a location containing another item by the same name, select whether to
replace the existing item.

See also
“Work with common libraries” on page 69

Undo, redo, and history
Undo, Redo, and Repeat commands
To undo or redo actions on individual objects, or all objects within the current document, specify either object-level or document-level Undo and Redo commands (Edit > Undo or Edit Redo). The default behavior is document-level Undo and Redo. You cannot undo some actions when using object-level Undo. Among these are entering and exiting Edit mode; selecting, editing, and moving library items; and creating, deleting, and moving scenes. To remove deleted items from a document after using the Undo command, use the Save And Compact command. To reapply a step to the same object or to a different object, use the Repeat command. For example, if you move a shape named shape_A, select Edit > Repeat to move the shape again, or select another shape, shape_B, and select Edit > Repeat to move the second shape by the same amount. By default, Flash supports 100 levels of undo for the Undo menu command. Select the number of undo and redo levels, from 2 to 9999, in Flash Preferences.

See also
“Set preferences in Flash” on page 27 “Automating tasks with the Commands menu” on page 50

Permanently remove items deleted with Undo
By default, when you undo a step using Edit > Undo or the History panel, the file size of the document does not change, even if you delete an item in the document. For example, if you import a video file into a document, and undo the import, the file size of the document still includes the size of the video file. Any items that you delete from a document when performing an Undo command are preserved to restore the items with a Redo command. To permanently remove the deleted items from the document, and reduce the document file size, select File > Save And Compact.

Using the History panel
The History panel (Window > Other Panels > History) shows a list of the steps you’ve performed in the active document since you created or opened that document, up to a specified maximum number of steps. (The History panel doesn’t show steps you’ve performed in other documents.) The slider in the History panel initially points to the last step that you performed.

FLASH CS3 49
User Guide

To undo or redo individual steps or multiple steps at once, use the History panel. Apply steps from the History panel to the same object or to a different object in the document. However, you cannot rearrange the order of steps in the History panel. The History panel is a record of steps in the order in which they are performed. Note: If you undo a step or a series of steps and then do something new in the document, you can no longer redo the steps in the History panel; they disappear from the panel. To remove deleted items from a document after you undo a step in the History panel, use the Save And Compact command. By default, Flash supports 100 levels of undo for the History panel. Select the number of undo and redo levels, from 2 to 9999, in Flash Preferences. To erase the history list for the current document, clear the History panel. After clearing the history list, you cannot undo the steps that are cleared. Clearing the history list does not undo steps; it removes the record of those steps from the current document’s memory. Closing a document clears its history. To use steps from a document after that document is closed, copy the steps with the Copy Steps command or save the steps as a command.

See also
“Set preferences in Flash” on page 27 “Automating tasks with the Commands menu” on page 50

Undo steps with the History panel
When you undo a step, the step is dimmed in the History panel.

• To undo the last step performed, drag the History panel slider up one step in the list. • To undo multiple steps at once, drag the slider to point to any step, or click to the left of a step along the path of
the slider. The slider scrolls automatically to that step, undoing all subsequent steps as it scrolls. Note: Scrolling to a step (and selecting the subsequent steps) is different from selecting an individual step. To scroll to a step, click to the left of the step.

Replay steps with the History panel
When you replay steps with the History panel, the steps that play are the steps that are selected (highlighted) in the History panel, not necessarily the step currently indicated by the slider. Apply steps in the History panel to any selected object in the document.
Replay one step
❖ In the History panel, select a step and click the Replay button.

Replay a series of adjacent steps 1 Select steps in the History panel by doing one of the following:

• Drag from one step to another. (Don’t drag the slider; drag from the text label of one step to the text label of
another step.)

• Select the first step, then Shift-click the last step; or select the last step and Shift-click the first step.
2 Click Replay. The steps replay in order, and a new step, labeled Replay Steps, appears in the History panel.

FLASH CS3 50
User Guide

Replay nonadjacent steps 1 Select a step in the History panel, and Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Macintosh) other steps. To

deselect a selected step, Control-click or Command-click.
2 Click Replay.

Copy and paste steps between documents
Each open document has its own history of steps. To copy steps from one document and paste them into another, use the Copy Steps command in the History panel options menu. If you copy steps into a text editor, the steps are pasted as JavaScript code.
1 In the document containing the steps to reuse, select the steps in the History panel. 2 In the History panel options menu, select Copy Steps. 3 Open the document to paste the steps into. 4 Select an object to apply the steps to. 5 Select Edit > Paste to paste the steps. The steps play back as they’re pasted into the document’s History panel. The History panel shows them as only one step, called Paste Steps.

Automating tasks with the Commands menu
Create and manage commands
To repeat the same task, create a command in the Commands menu from steps in the History panel and reuse the command. Steps replay exactly as they were originally performed. You can’t modify the steps as you replay them. To use steps the next time you start Flash, create and save a command. Saved commands are retained permanently, unless you delete them. Steps that you copy using the History panel Copy Steps command are discarded when you copy something else. Create a command from selected steps in the History panel. Rename or delete commands in the Manage Saved Commands dialog box.

See also
“Copy and paste steps between documents” on page 50
Create a command 1 Select a step or set of steps in the History panel. 2 Select Save As Command from the History panel options menu. 3 Enter a name for the command and click OK. The command appears in the Commands menu.

Note: The command is saved as a JavaScript file (with the extension .jsfl) in your Commands folder. This folder is in the following locations: Windows 2000 or Windows XP: boot drive\Documents and Settings\<user>\Local Settings\Application Data\Adobe\Flash CS3\<language>\Configuration\Commands; Mac OS X: Macintosh HD/Users/<username>/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Flash CS3/<language>/Configuration/Commands.

FLASH CS3 51
User Guide

Edit the names of commands in the Commands menu 1 Select Commands > Manage Saved Commands. 2 Select a command to rename. enter a new name for it, and click Close. Delete a name from the Commands menu 1 Select Commands > Manage Saved Commands, and select a command. 2 Click Delete, and click Close.

Run commands
• To use a saved command, select the command from the Commands menu. • To run a JavaScript or Flash JavaScript command, select Commands > Run Command, navigate to the script to
run, and click Open.

Get more commands
Use the Get More Commands option in the Commands menu to link to the Flash Exchange website at www.adobe.com/go/flash_exchange and download commands that other Flash users have posted. For more information on the commands posted there, see the Flash Exchange website.
1 Make sure you are connected to the Internet. 2 Select Commands > Get More Commands.

Steps that can’t be used in commands
Some tasks can’t be saved as commands or repeated using the Edit > Repeat menu item. These commands can be undone and redone, but they cannot be repeated. Examples of actions that can’t be saved as commands or repeated include selecting a frame or modifying a document size. If you attempt to save an unrepeatable action as a command, the command is not saved.

52

Chapter 3: Creating and managing documents
When you create and save Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional documents within the Flash authoring environment, the documents are in FLA file format. To display a document in Adobe® Flash® Player, you must publish or export the document as a SWF file. You can add media assets to a Flash document and manage the assets in the library, and you can use the Movie Explorer to view and organize all the elements in a Flash document. The Undo and Redo commands, the History panel, and the Commands menu let you automate tasks in a document.

Working with Flash documents
About Flash files
In Flash you can work with a variety of file types, each of which has a separate purpose:

• FLA files, the primary files you work with in Flash, contain the basic media, timeline, and script information for
a Flash document. Media objects are the graphic, text, sound, and video objects that comprise the content of your Flash document. The Timeline is where you tell Flash when specific media objects should appear on the Stage. You can add ActionScript™ code to Flash documents to more finely control their behavior and to make them respond to user interactions.

• SWF files, the compiled versions of FLA files, are the files you display in a web page. When you publish your FLA
file, Flash creates a SWF file.

• AS files are ActionScript files—you can use these to keep some or all of your ActionScript code outside of your
FLA files, which is helpful for code organization and for projects that have multiple people working on different parts of the Flash content.

• SWC files contain the reusable Flash components. Each SWC file contains a compiled movie clip, ActionScript
code, and any other assets that the component requires.

• ASC files are files used to store ActionScript that will be executed on a computer running Flash Media Server.
These files provide the ability to implement server-side logic that works in conjunction with ActionScript in a SWF file.

• JSFL files are JavaScript files that you can use to add new functionality to the Flash authoring tool. • FLP files are Flash project files. You can use Flash projects to manage multiple document files in a single project.
Flash projects allow you to group multiple, related files together to create complex applications. For video tutorials about working with Flash files, see the following:

• www.adobe.com/go/vid0117 • www.adobe.com/go/vid0118

See also
“About the Timeline” on page 33

FLASH CS3 53
User Guide

Create or open a document and set its properties
You can create a new document or open a previously saved document in Flash, and you can open a new window as you work. You can set properties for new or existing documents. For a text tutorial about creating your first Flash file, see Create your First File on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials. For video tutorials, see:

• Working with Flash files: www.adobe.com/go/vid0117

See also
“Set preferences in Flash” on page 27 “Publishing Flash content” on page 419
Create a new document 1 Select File > New. 2 On the General tab, select Flash Document. Create a new document of the same type as the last document created (Windows only)
❖ Click the New File button in the main toolbar.

Create a new document from a template 1 Select File > New. 2 Click the Templates tab. 3 Select a category from the Category list, select a document from the Category Items list, and click OK. You can select standard templates that come with Flash or a template you have already saved. Open an existing document 1 Select File > Open. 2 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the file or enter the path to the file in the Go To box. 3 Click Open. Open a new window in the current document
❖ Select Window > Duplicate Window.

Set properties for a new or existing document 1 With the document open, select Modify > Document.

The Document Properties dialog box appears.
2 To embed metadata within your SWF files, enter a descriptive title in the Title box, and enter a description in the Description box.

Embedding metadata improves the ability of web-based search engines to return meaningful search results for Flash content. Descriptions can author and copyright information, and short descriptions about the content and its purpose. The search metadata is based on the RDF (Resource Description Framework) and XMP (Extensible Metadata Platform) specifications and is stored in Flash in a W3C-compliant format.

FLASH CS3 54
User Guide

The title and description you enter is a human readable title and a human readable description. These fields are not intended for keywords to provide greater search results. Instead, these fields are made available to search engines that index SWF files, and display the contents of the title and description field in their search results. Search metadata can be exported to any version of Flash. While it was introduced in Flash 8, Flash Player ignores tags it does not understand, thus Flash 8 exports it to all versions. Note: Flash lets you make the settings you specify in the Document Properties dialog box the default settings for any Flash document that you create. The exception to this is the Title and Description, which you need to specify for each Flash document that you create.
3 For Frame Rate, enter the number of animation frames to appear every second.

For most computer-displayed animations, especially those playing from a website, 8 frames per second (fps) to 12 fps (the default) is sufficient.
4 For Dimensions, set the Stage size:

• To specify the Stage size in pixels, enter values in the Width and Height boxes. The minimum size is 1 x 1 pixels;
the maximum is 2880 x 2880 pixels.

• To set the Stage size so that there is equal space around the content on all sides, click the Contents button to the
right of Match. To minimize document size, align all elements to the upper-left corner of the Stage, and then click Contents.

• To set the Stage size to the maximum available print area, click Printer. This area is determined by the paper size
minus the current margin selected in the Margins area of the Page Setup dialog box (Windows) or the Print Margins dialog box (Macintosh).

• To set the Stage size to the default size, 550 x 400 pixels, click Default.
5 To set the background color of your document, click the triangle in the Background Color control and select a color from the palette. 6 To specify the unit of measure for rulers that you can display along the top and side of the application window, select an option from the pop-up menu in the upper right. (This setting also determines the units used in the Info panel.) 7 Do one of the following:

• To make the new settings the default properties for the current document only, click OK. • To make the new settings the default properties for all new documents, click Make Default.
Change document properties using the Property inspector 1 Deselect all assets, then select the Selection tool. 2 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), click the Size control to display the Document

Properties dialog box.
3 To select a background color, click the triangle in the Background color control and select a color from the palette. 4 For Frame Rate, enter the number of animation frames to appear every second. 5 For Publish, click the Settings button to display the Publish Settings dialog box with the Flash tab selected. For more information, see “Publishing Flash documents” on page 419. 6 If you are developing content for mobile devices such as cell phones, click the Settings button to display the Device Settings dialog box, which lets you choose devices to test mobile content and provides information on ActionScript support for each device you select.

FLASH CS3 55
User Guide

Note: The Device Settings button can be used only if your publish settings are set to a supported version of Flash Lite.

View a document when multiple documents are open
When you open multiple documents, tabs at the top of the Document window identify the open documents and let you easily navigate among them. Tabs appear only when documents are maximized in the Document window.
❖ Click the tab of the document you want to view.

By default, tabs appear in the order in which the documents were created. You can drag the document tabs to change their order.

Save Flash documents
You can save a Flash FLA document using its current name and location or using a different name or location. When a document contains unsaved changes, an asterisk (*) appears after the document name in the document title bar, the application title bar, and the document tab. When you save the document, the asterisk is removed.
Save a Flash document 1 Do one of the following:

• To overwrite the current version on the disk, select File > Save. • To save the document in a different location and/or with a different name, or to compress the document, select
File > Save As.
2 If you selected Save As, or if the document has never been saved before, enter the filename and location. 3 Click Save. Revert to the last saved version of a document
❖ Select File > Revert.

Save a document as a template 1 Select File > Save As Template. 2 In the Save As Template dialog box, enter a name for the template in the Name box. 3 Select a category from the Category pop-up menu, or enter a name to create a new category. 4 Enter a description of the template in the Description box (up to 255 characters), and click OK.

The description appears when the template is selected in the New Document dialog box.
Save a document as a Flash 8 document 1 Select File > Save As. 2 Enter the filename and location. 3 Select Flash 8 Document from the Format pop-up menu, and click Save.

Important: If an alert message indicates that content will be deleted if you save in Flash 8 format, click Save As Flash 8 to continue. This might happen if your document contains features, such as graphic effects or behaviors, that are available only in Flash 9. Flash does not preserve these features when you save the document in Flash 8 format.

FLASH CS3 56
User Guide

Save documents when quitting Flash 1 Select File > Exit (Windows) or Flash > Quit Flash (Macintosh). 2 If you have documents open with unsaved changes, Flash prompts you to save or discard the changes for each document.

• Click Yes to save the changes and close the document. • Click No to close the document without saving the changes.

Working with other Adobe applications
Flash is designed to work with other Adobe applications to enable a broad range of creative workflows. You can import Illustrator and Photoshop files directly into Flash. You can also create video from Flash and edit it in Premiere Pro or After Effects, or import video from either of those applications into Flash. When publishing your Flash content, you can use Dreamweaver to embed the content in your web pages, and launch Flash directly from within Dreamweaver to edit the content.

See also
“Working with Illustrator and Flash” on page 135 “Working with Photoshop and Flash” on page 148 “Working with Premiere Pro and After Effects” on page 317 “Edit a SWF file from Dreamweaver in Flash” on page 420

Creating and previewing mobile content with Adobe Device Central
Access Adobe components from Adobe Device Central
1 Start Device Central. 2 Select File > New Document In > Flash, Illustrator, or Photoshop.

In Device Central, the New Document panel appears with the correct options to create a new mobile document in the selected application.
3 Make any necessary changes, such a selecting a new Player Version, ActionScript Version, or Content type. 4 Do one of the following:

• Select the Custom Size for All Selected Devices option and add a width and height (in pixels). • Select a device or multiple devices from the Device Sets list or Available Devices list.
5 If you selected multiple devices, Device Central selects a size for you. If you want to select a different size, click on a different device or set of devices. 6 Click Create.

The selected application opens with a new mobile document ready to edit.

FLASH CS3 57
User Guide

Create mobile content with Adobe Device Central and Flash CS3
1 Start Flash. 2 On the main Flash screen, select Create New > Flash File (Mobile).

Flash opens Device Central and displays the New Document tab.
3 In Device Central, select a Player version and ActionScript version.

The Available Devices list on the left is updated. Devices that do not support the selected Player version and ActionScript version are dimmed.
4 Select a content type.

The Available Devices list on the left is updated and shows the devices that support the content type (as well as the Player version and ActionScript version) selected.
5 In the Available Devices list, select a single target device or multiple devices (or select a set or individual device in the Device Sets list).

Device Central lists proposed document sizes based on the device or devices you selected (if the devices have different display sizes). Depending on the design or content you are developing, you can create a separate mobile document for each display size or try to find one size appropriate for all devices. When choosing the second approach, you may want to use the smallest or largest suggested document size as a common denominator. You can even specify a custom size at the bottom of the tab.
6 Click Create.

Flash starts up and creates a document with preset publish settings from Device Central, including the correct size for the device (or group of devices) specified.
7 Add content to the new Flash document. 8 To test the document, select Control > Test Movie.

The new document is displayed in the Device Central Emulator tab. If one or more devices were selected in the Available Devices list in step 5, a new device set is created (named according to the FLA file) and listed in the Device Sets panel. The device shown in the Emulator tab is listed in the Device Sets panel with a special icon . To test the new Flash document on another device, double-click the name of a different device in the Device Sets or Available Devices lists. For tutorials about creating content using Flash and Device Central, see http://www.adobe.com/go/vid0186 and http://www.adobe.com/go/vid0206.

Create mobile content with Adobe Device Central and Photoshop
1 Start Photoshop. 2 Select File > New. 3 Click Device Central to close the dialog box in Photoshop and open Device Central. 4 Select a content type.

The available Devices list on the left is updated and shows the devices that support the content type selected.
5 In the Available Devices list, select a single target device or multiple devices (or select a set or individual device in

the Device Sets list).

FLASH CS3 58
User Guide

Device Central lists proposed document sizes based on the device or devices you selected (if the devices have different display sizes). Depending on the design or content you are developing, you can create a separate mobile document for each display size or try to find one size appropriate for all devices. When choosing the second approach, you may want to use the smallest or largest suggested document size as a common denominator. You can even specify a custom size at the bottom of the tab.
6 Click Create.

A blank PSD file with the specified size opens in Photoshop. The new file has the following parameters set by default:

• Color Mode: RGB/8bit • Resolution: 72 ppi • Color Profile: SRGB IEC61966-2.1
7 Fill the blank PSD file with content in Photoshop. 8 When you finish, select File > Save For Web & Devices. 9 In the Save For Web & Devices dialog box, select the desired format and change other export settings as desired. 10 Click Device Central.

A temporary file with the export settings specified is displayed in the Device Central Emulator tab. To continue testing, double-click the name of a different device in the Device Sets or Available Devices lists.
11 If, after previewing the file in Device Central, you need to make changes to the file, go back to Photoshop. 12 In the Photoshop Save For Web & Devices dialog box, make adjustments, such as selecting a different format or

quality for export.
13 To test the file again with the new export settings, click the Device Central button. 14 When you are satisfied with the results, click Save in the Photoshop Save For Web & Devices dialog box.

Note: To simply open Device Central from Photoshop (instead of creating and testing a file), select File > Device Central. For a tutorial about creating content using Photoshop and Device Central, see http://www.adobe.com/go/vid0185.

Create mobile content with Adobe Device Central and Illustrator
1 Start Illustrator. 2 Select File > New. 3 In New Document Profile, select Mobile and Devices. 4 Click Device Central to close the dialog box in Illustrator and open Device Central. 5 Select a content type.

The available Devices list on the left is updated and shows the devices that support the content type selected.
6 In Device Central, select a device, several devices, or a device set.

Based on the device(s) selected and content type, Device Central suggests one or multiple artboard sizes to be created. To create one document at a time, select a suggested document size (or select the Custom Size for all selected Devices option and enter custom values for Width and Height).
7 Click Create.

A blank AI file of the specified size opens in Illustrator. The new file has the following parameters set by default:

• Color Mode: RGB

FLASH CS3 59
User Guide

• Raster Resolution: 72 ppi
8 Fill the blank AI file with content in Illustrator. 9 When you finish, select File > Save For Web & Devices. 10 In the Save for Web & Devices dialog, select the desired format and change other export settings as desired. 11 Click Device Central.

A temporary file with the export settings specified is displayed in the Device Central Emulator tab. To continue testing, double-click the name of a different device in the Device Sets or Available Devices lists.
12 If, after previewing the file in Device Central, you need to make changes to the file, go back to Illustrator. 13 On the Illustrator Save for Web & Devices dialog, make adjustments such as selecting a different format or

quality for export.
14 To test the file again with the new export settings, click the Device Central button. 15 When you are satisfied with the results, click Save in the Illustrator Save for Web & Devices dialog.

Note: To simply open Device Central from Illustrator (instead of creating and testing a file), select File > Device Central. For a tutorial about creating content with Illustrator and Device Central, see http://www.adobe.com/go/vid0207.

Preview a movie on a virtual mobile device using Adobe Premiere Pro
Using Adobe Device Central, you can preview movies formatted for mobile devices in emulations of those devices. This option is available for most of the H.264 formats listed in the Adobe Media Encoder.
1 On Windows computers, make sure QuickTime is installed. 2 Start Adobe Premiere Pro. 3 Open the file to preview. 4 Select the file in the project area or Timeline. 5 Choose File > Export > Adobe Media Encoder. 6 In the Export Settings area of the Export Settings Window, select H.264 from the Format drop-down menu. 7 Select a mobile preset (e.g., 3GPP).

Open in Device Central should be checked by default.
8 Click OK. 9 Name and save the file.

The file is rendered.
10 A temporary file is displayed in the Device Central Emulator tab. To continue testing, double-click the name of

a different device in the Device Sets or Available Devices lists.

Preview a movie on a virtual mobile device using After Effects
Using Adobe Device Central, you can preview movies formatted for mobile devices in emulations of those devices. This option is available for most of the H.264 formats listed in the Adobe Media Encoder.
1 Start After Effects. 2 In the Project panel, select the composition to preview.

FLASH CS3 60
User Guide

3 Choose Composition > Add to Render Queue. 4 In the Render Queue panel, click the underlined text to the right of Output Module, or select Custom from the Output Module menu. 5 In the Output Modules Settings dialog box, choose H.264 from the Format menu. 6 In the Export Settings section of the H.264 dialog box, select Open in Device Central. 7 Modify other settings as desired and click OK. 8 Click OK to close the Output Module Settings dialog box. 9 In the Render Queue panel, click Render.

Rendering may take a few minutes, depending on the size of the file. When rendering is complete, a temporary file is displayed in the Adobe Device Central Emulator tab. To continue testing, double-click the name of a different device in the Device Sets or Available Devices lists.

Preview mobile content with Adobe Device Central and Dreamweaver
To preview pages created in Dreamweaver on various mobile devices, use Device Central with its built-in Opera Small-Screen Rendering feature. Different devices have different browsers installed, but the preview can give a good impression of how content will look and behave on a selected device.
1 Start Dreamweaver. 2 Open a file. 3 Do one of the following:

• Select File > Preview in Browser > Device Central. • On the document window toolbar, click and hold the Preview/Debug In browser button
Device Central. The file is displayed in the Device Central Emulator tab. To continue testing, double-click the name of a different device in the Device Sets or Available Devices lists. and select Preview In

Access Adobe Device Central from Adobe Bridge
To access Device Central from Adobe Bridge, select an individual file. The supported formats are: SWF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, GIF, WBM, MOV, 3GP, M4V, MP4, MPG, MPEG, AVI, HTM, HTML, XHTML, CHTML, URL, and WEBLOC.
1 Start Adobe Bridge. 2 Do one of the following:

• Select a file and click File > Test in Device Central. • Right-click a file and select Test in Device Central.
The file is displayed in the Device Central Emulator tab. To continue testing, double-click the name of a different device in the Device Sets or Available Devices lists. Note: To browse device profiles or to create mobile documents, select Tools > Device Central. Device Central opens with the Devices Profiles tab shown. For a tutorial about using Adobe Bridge and Device Central, see http://www.adobe.com/go/vid0208.

FLASH CS3 61
User Guide

Working with projects
About projects
You can use Flash projects (FLP files) to manage multiple document files in a single project. Flash projects allow you to group multiple, related files together to create complex applications. You can use version-control features with projects to ensure that the correct file versions are used during editing, and to prevent accidental overwriting. Flash projects include the following features:

• A Flash project can contain any Flash or other file type, including previous versions of FLA and SWF files. • You can add an existing file to a Flash project. Each file can be added to a particular Flash project only once. Files
can be organized in nested folders.

• A Flash project is an XML file with the file extension .flp—for example, myProject.flp. The XML file references all
the document files contained in the Flash project.

• A Flash project can contain another Flash project (FLP file). • Changes that you make to a project are updated to the FLP file immediately, so the file is always current; you do
not need to do save the file.

• You can create a Flash project in the Flash authoring environment, or you can create the XML file for a Flash
project in an external application.

• Flash projects use UTF-8 text encoding. All filenames and folder names in a Flash project must be UTF-8
compatible.

Create and manage projects
You use the Project panel (Window > Project) to create and manage projects. The panel displays the contents of a Flash project in a collapsible tree structure. The panel title bar displays the project name. If a project file is missing (not in its specified location), a Missing File icon appears next to the filename. You can search for the missing file or delete the file from the project. When you publish a project, each FLA file in the project is published with the publish profile specified for that file. Only one project can be open at one time. If a project is open and you open or create another project, Flash automatically saves and closes the first file.

See also
“Using publish profiles” on page 435
View the Project pop-up menu
❖ When a project is open, click the Project button at the upper-left corner of the Project panel.

Create a new project 1 Do one of the following:

• Select File > New. On the General tab, select Flash Project. • Select New Project from the Project pop-up menu in the Project panel (visible only if a project is open).

FLASH CS3 62
User Guide

• If no other project is open, open the Project panel and select Create A New Project in the panel window. • If no project is currently open, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) in the Document window of
a saved Flash document or ActionScript file and select Add To New Project from the context menu.
2 In the New Project dialog box, enter a name for the project and click Save. Open an existing project
❖ Do one of the following:

• Select Open Project from the Project pop-up menu in the Project panel. Navigate to the project and click Open. • Double-click the filename. • If no other project is open, open the Project panel and select Open An Existing Project in the panel window.
Navigate to the project and click Open.

• Select File > Open. Navigate to the project and click Open.
Add a file to a project
❖ Do one of the following:

• Click the Add Files (+) button at the lower-right corner of the Project panel. Select one or more files and click Add. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) in the Document window of an open FLA or AS file and
select Add To Project from the context menu. Note: A file must be saved before you can add it to a project. You can add a file to a given project only once. If you attempt to add a file to the same project more than once, an error message appears.
Create a folder 1 Click the Folder button at the lower-right corner of the Project panel. 2 Enter a name for the folder and click OK.

Note: Folders at the same level on the same branch of the project tree structure must have unique names. If there is a folder name conflict, an error message appears.
Move a file or folder
❖ Drag the file or folder to a new location in the project tree structure. When you move a folder, all of its contents

are moved. Note: If you drag a folder to a location with another folder of the same name, Flash merges the contents of the two folders in the new location.
Delete a file or folder 1 Select the item in the Project panel. 2 Do one of the following:

• Click the Remove button at the lower-right corner of the Project panel. • Press the Delete key. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the file or folder and select Remove from the context menu.
Open a file from the Project panel in Flash
❖ Double-click the filename in the Project panel.

FLASH CS3 63
User Guide

If the file is of a native file type (a type supported by the Flash authoring tool), the file opens in Flash. If the file is a nonnative file type, the file opens in the application used to create it.
Test a project 1 Click Test Project in the Project panel. 2 If the project contains no FLA, HTML, or HTM file, an error message appears. Click OK and add a file of the appropriate type. 3 If no FLA, HTML, or HTM file is designated as the default document, an error message appears. Click OK. In the Select Default Document dialog box, select a document and click OK.

When a default document is present, the Test Project feature publishes all FLA files in the document. If the default document is a FLA file, the Test Movie command is executed. If it is an HTML file, a browser is opened.
Specify a publish profile for a FLA file in a project 1 Select the file in the Project panel and do one of the following:

• Select Settings from the Project pop-up menu. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) and select Settings from the context menu.
2 In the Project Settings dialog box, select the FLA file in the tree structure. 3 Select a publish profile from the Profile menu. Publish a project
❖ Select Publish Project from the Project pop-up menu.

Note: Flash uses default publish profiles to publish FLA files in the project, unless you select other profiles.
Save files in a project when testing or publishing 1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh) and click General in the Category list. 2 Under Project Preferences, click Save Files On Test or Publish Project.

When this option is selected, Flash saves all open files in the current project before executing the Test Project or Publish Project operation.
Close a project
❖ Select Close Project from the Project pop-up menu.

Set preferences to close all files or not close all files when you close a project 1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh) and click General in the Category list. 2 Under Project Preferences, select or deselect Close Files with Project. When this option is selected, by default, Flash closes all files in a project when you close the project. Rename a project or a folder 1 Select the project name or folder name in the Project panel and do one of the following:

• Select Rename from the Project pop-up menu. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the item and select Rename from the context menu.
2 Enter a new name and click OK.

FLASH CS3 64
User Guide

Note: By default, a project is given the same name as the first file added to the project. To rename a project, you must use the Rename menu item. Renaming the FLP file for a project does not rename the project.
Find a missing file in a project

A file that is part of a project can appear to be missing if it is moved from its original location relative to the other files in the project.
1 Select the filename (designated by a Missing File icon) in the Project panel. 2 Select Find Missing File from the Project pop-up menu, or right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) and select Find Missing File from the context menu. 3 Navigate to the file and click OK.

Use version control with projects
Version control lets you ensure that each author working in a project file is always using the latest version of a file, and that multiple authors do not overwrite each other’s work. To use version-control features, you must define a site for the project. You can specify a local, network, or FTP connection, or you can specify custom plug-ins for version-control systems. On Windows, you can use Flash projects with SourceSafe.
Define a site for version control 1 Create a new project and add files. 2 Select File > Edit Sites. 3 In the Edit Sites dialog box, click New. 4 In the Site Definition dialog box, enter the site name, the local root path, and the e-mail address and name of the user. 5 To specify a local, network, or FTP connection, select Local/Network or FTP from the Connection menu. Enter the location information for the Local/Network path or for the FTP connection and skip the next step. 6 (Windows only) To specify a Visual SourceSafe database, select SourceSafe Database from the Connection menu. a In the Database Path box, click Browse to browse for the VSS database you want, or enter the full file path. The

file you select becomes the srcsafe.ini file used to initialize SourceSafe.
b In the Project box, enter the project within the VSS database that you want to use as the remote site’s root directory. c In the Username and Password boxes, enter your login user name and password for the selected database. If you

don’t know your user name and password, check with your system administrator.
d Click OK to return to the Site Definition dialog box.

Note: You must have Microsoft Visual SourceSafe Client version 6 installed.
7 In the Project panel (Window > Project), select Settings from the Project pop-up menu or context menu. 8 In the Project Settings dialog box, select the site definition from the Site menu in the Version Control section. Click OK. 9 In the Project pop-up menu, select Check In. Flash checks all files in the current project into the site. Edit a file with version control applied 1 Open the project that contains the file.

FLASH CS3 65
User Guide

2 Select the file in the tree structure in the project panel and select Check Out from the project context menu.

The icon next to the filename indicates that the file is checked out.
3 To check a file back in, select the file in the project panel and select Check In from the project context menu.

The icon next to the filename indicates that the file is checked in.
Open a file from a version-control site 1 Select File > Open from Site. 2 In the Open From Site dialog box, select the site from the Site menu. 3 Select the file in the site. 4 If the file exists on your local system, a message appears indicating whether the file is checked out and, if so, asking whether you want to overwrite it. Click Yes to overwrite the local version with the version from the remote site.

Troubleshooting remote folder setup for Flash projects
A web server can be configured in many ways. The following information can help you resolve some common issues in setting up a remote folder for version control:

• The Flash FTP implementation may not work properly with certain proxy servers, multilevel firewalls, and other
forms of indirect server access. If you have problems with FTP access, ask your local system administrator for help.

• In some applications, you can connect to any remote directory, then navigate through the remote file system to
find the directory you want. However, for the Flash FTP implementation, you must connect to the remote system’s root folder. Be sure to indicate the remote system’s root folder as the host directory.

• If you have problems connecting, and you’ve specified the host directory using a single slash (/), you might need
to specify a relative path between the directory you are connecting to and the remote root folder. For example, if the remote root folder is a higher-level directory, you may need to specify a ../../ for the host directory.

• Filenames and folder names that contain spaces and special characters often cause problems when transferred to
a remote site. Use underscores in place of spaces, and avoid special characters wherever possible, especially colons, slashes, periods, and apostrophes.

• If problems persist, try uploading with an external FTP program to determine if the problem is specific to using
FTP in Flash.

Adding media to the library
Managing media assets with the Flash document library
The library in a Flash document stores media assets that you create in the Flash authoring environment or import to use in the document. You can create vector artwork or text directly in Flash; import vector artwork, bitmaps, video, and sound; and create symbols. A symbol is a graphic, a button, a movie clip, or text that you create once and can reuse multiple times. You can also use ActionScript to add media content to a document dynamically. The library also contains any components that you have added to your document. Components appear in the library as compiled clips. You can open the library of any Flash document while you are working in Flash, to make the library items from that file available for the current document.

FLASH CS3 66
User Guide

You can create permanent libraries in your Flash application that are available whenever you start Flash. Flash also includes several sample libraries containing buttons, graphics, movie clips, and sounds. You can export library assets as a SWF file to a URL to create a runtime-shared library. This lets you link to the library assets from Flash documents that import symbols using runtime sharing.

See also
“Working with text” on page 261 “Using imported artwork” on page 133 “Working with sound” on page 292 “Working with video” on page 301 “Using symbols, instances, and library assets” on page 208

Work with libraries
The Library panel (Window > Library) displays a scroll list with the names of all items in the library, which lets you view and organize these elements as you work. An icon next to an item’s name in the Library panel indicates the item’s file type.
Open a library in another Flash file 1 From the current document, select File > Import > Open External Library. 2 Navigate to the Flash file whose library you want to open and click Open.

The selected file’s library opens in the current document, with the filename at the top of the Library panel. To use items from the selected file’s library in the current document, drag the items to the current document’s Library panel or to the Stage.
Resize the Library panel
❖ Do one of the following:

• Drag the lower-right corner of the panel. • Click the Wide State button to enlarge the Library panel so it shows all the columns. • Click the Narrow State button to reduce the width of the Library panel.
Change the width of columns
❖ Position the pointer between column headers and drag to resize.

You cannot change the order of columns.
Access the Panel menu for the Library panel
❖ Click the Panel menu button in the Library panel’s title bar.

Work with library items
When you select an item in the Library panel, a thumbnail preview of the item appears at the top of the Library panel. If the selected item is animated or is a sound file, you can use the Play button in the library preview window or the Controller to preview the item.

FLASH CS3 67
User Guide

Use a library item in the current document
❖ Drag the item from the Library panel onto the Stage.

The item is added to the current layer.
Convert an object on the Stage to a symbol in the library
❖ Drag the item from the Stage onto the current Library panel.

Use a library item from the current document in another document
❖ Drag the item from the Library panel or Stage into the Library panel or Stage of another document.

Copy library items from a different document 1 Select the document that contains the library items. 2 Select the library items in the Library panel. 3 Select Edit > Copy. 4 Select the document that you want to copy the library items to. 5 Select that document’s Library panel. 6 Select Edit > Paste.

Work with folders in the Library panel
You can organize items in the Library panel using folders. When you create a new symbol, it is stored in the selected folder. If no folder is selected, the symbol is stored at the root of the library.
Create a new folder
❖ Click the New Folder button

at the bottom of the Library panel.

Open or close a folder
❖ Double-click the folder, or Select the folder and select Expand Folder or Collapse Folder from the Panel menu for

the Library panel.
Open or close all folders
❖ Select Expand All Folders or Collapse All Folders from the Panel menu for the Library panel.

Move an item between folders
❖ Drag the item from one folder to another.

If an item with the same name exists in the new location, Flash prompts you to replace it with the item you are moving.

Sort items in the Library panel
Columns in the Library panel list the name of an item, its type, the number of times it’s used in the file, its linkage status and identifier (if the item is associated with a shared library or is exported for ActionScript), and the date on which it was last modified.

FLASH CS3 68
User Guide

You can sort items in the Library panel alphanumerically by any column. Items are sorted within folders.
❖ Click the column header to sort by that column. Click the triangle button to the right of the column headers to

reverse the sort order.

Edit a library item
1 Select the item in the Library panel. 2 Select one of the following from the Panel menu for the Library panel:

• To edit an item in Flash, select Edit. • To edit an item in another application, select Edit With and then select an external application.
Note: When starting a supported external editor, Flash opens the original imported document.

Rename a library item
Changing the library item name of an imported file does not change the filename.
1 Do one of the following:

• Double-click the item’s name. • Select the item and select Rename from the Panel menu for the Library panel. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the item and select Rename from the context menu.
2 Enter the new name in the box.

Delete a library item
When you delete an item from the library, all instances or occurrences of that item in the document are also deleted unless you specify that they not be.
1 Select the item and click the trash can icon at the bottom of the Library panel. 2 In the warning box that appears, select Delete Symbol Instances (the default) to delete the library item and all its instances. Deselect the option to delete only the symbol, which leaves the instances on the Stage. 3 Click Delete.

Find unused library items
To organize your document, you can find unused library items and delete them. Note: It is not necessary to delete unused library items to reduce a Flash document’s file size, because unused library items are not included in the SWF file. However, items linked for export are included in the SWF file.
❖ Do one of the following:

• Select Unused Items from the Panel menu for the Library panel. • Sort library items by the Use Count column, which indicates whether an item is in use.

See also
“Using shared library assets” on page 219

FLASH CS3 69
User Guide

Update imported files in the library
If you use an external editor to modify files that you have imported into Flash, such as bitmaps or sound files, you can update the files in Flash without reimporting them. You can also update symbols that you have imported from external Flash documents. Updating an imported file replaces its contents with the contents of the external file.
1 Select the imported file in the Library panel. 2 Select Update from the Panel menu for the Library panel.

Work with common libraries
You can use the sample common libraries included with Flash to add buttons or sounds to your documents. You can also create custom common libraries, which you can then use with any documents that you create.

See also
“Configuration folders installed with Flash” on page 417
Use an item from a common library in a document 1 Select Window > Common Libraries, and select a library from the submenu. 2 Drag an item from the common library into the library for the current document. Create a common library for your Flash application 1 Create a Flash file with a library containing the symbols that you want to include in the common library. 2 Place the Flash file in the user-level Libraries folder on your hard disk.

• On Windows, the path is C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local Settings\Application Data\Adobe\Flash
CS3\language\Configuration\Libraries\.

• On Mac OS, the path is Hard Disk/Users/username/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Flash
CS3/language/Configuration/Libraries/.

Working with timelines
About frames and keyframes
Like films, Flash documents divide lengths of time into frames. In the Timeline, you work with these frames to organize and control your document’s content. You place frames in the Timeline in the order you want the objects in the frames to appear in your finished content. A keyframe is a frame in which you define a change to an object’s properties for an animation or include ActionScript code to control some aspect of your document. You can also arrange keyframes in the Timeline to edit the sequence of events in an animation. Flash can tween, or automatically fill in, the frames between keyframes in order to produce fluid animations. Because keyframes let you produce animation without drawing each individual frame, they make creating animation easier. For a video tutorial about the Timeline, keyframes, and frame rates, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0123.

FLASH CS3 70
User Guide

See also
“Creating animation” on page 229 “The Timeline” on page 33

Manage frames and keyframes in the Timeline
You can perform the following modifications on frames or keyframes:

• Insert, select, delete, and move frames or keyframes. • Drag frames and keyframes to a new location on the same layer or on a different layer. • Copy and paste frames and keyframes. • Convert keyframes to frames. • Drag an item from the Library panel onto the Stage to add the item to the current keyframe.
Flash offers two different methods for selecting frames in the Timeline. In frame-based selection (the default) you select individual frames in the Timeline. In span-based selection, the entire frame sequence, from one keyframe to the next, is selected when you click any frame in the sequence. You can specify span-based selection in Flash preferences.
Specify span-based frame selection 1 Select Edit > Preferences. 2 Select the General category. 3 In the Timeline section, select Span Based Selection. 4 Click OK. Insert frames in the Timeline

• To insert a new frame, select Insert > Frame. • To create a new keyframe, select Insert > Keyframe, or right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the
frame where you want to place a keyframe, and select Insert Keyframe from the context menu.

• To create a new blank keyframe, select Insert > Blank Keyframe, or right-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Macintosh) the frame where you want to place the keyframe, and select Insert Blank Keyframe from the context menu.
Select one or more frames in the Timeline

• To select one frame, click the frame. If you have Span Based Selection enabled, clicking one frame selects the entire
frame sequence between two keyframes.

• To select multiple contiguous frames, Shift-click additional frames. • To select multiple discontiguous frames, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Macintosh) additional
frames.

• To select all frames in the Timeline, select Edit > Timeline > Select All Frames.

FLASH CS3 71
User Guide

Copy or paste a frame or frame sequence
❖ Do one of the following:

• Select the frame or sequence and select Edit > Timeline > Copy Frames. Select the frame or sequence that you
want to replace, and select Edit > Timeline > Paste Frames.

• Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh) and drag the keyframe to the location where you want to paste it.
Delete a frame or frame sequence
❖ Select the frame or sequence and select Edit > Timeline > Remove Frame, or right-click (Windows) or

Control-click (Macintosh) the frame or sequence and select Remove Frame from the context menu. Surrounding frames remain unchanged.
Move a keyframe or frame sequence and its contents
❖ Drag the keyframe or sequence to the desired location.

Change the length of a tweened sequence
❖ Drag the beginning or ending keyframe left or right. To change the length of a frame-by-frame animation

sequence, see “Create frame-by-frame animations” on page 231.
Extend the duration of a keyframe animation
❖ Press Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and drag the keyframe to the frame that you want to be the final

frame of the sequence.
Convert a keyframe to a frame
❖ Select the keyframe and select Edit > Timeline > Clear Keyframe, or right-click (Windows) or Control-click

(Macintosh) the keyframe and select Clear Keyframe from the context menu. The Stage contents of the cleared keyframe and all frames up to the subsequent keyframe are replaced with the Stage contents of the frame preceding the cleared keyframe.
Add an item from the library to the current keyframe
❖ Drag the item from the Library panel onto the Stage.

About multiple timelines and levels
Flash Player has a stacking order of levels. Every Flash document has a main Timeline located at level 0 in Flash Player. You can use the loadMovie action to load other Flash documents (SWF files) into Flash Player at different levels. If you load documents into levels above level 0, the documents stack on top of one another like drawings on transparent paper; when there is no content on the Stage, you can see through to the content on lower levels. If you load a document into level 0, it replaces the main Timeline. Each document loaded into a level of Flash Player has its own Timeline. Timelines can send messages to each other with ActionScript. For example, an action on the last frame of one movie clip can tell another movie clip to play. To use ActionScript to control a Timeline, you must use a target path to specify the location of the Timeline. For a video tutorial about using multiple timelines, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0128.

FLASH CS3 72
User Guide

About nested movie clips and parent-child hierarchy
When you create a movie clip instance in a Flash document, the movie clip’s Timeline is nested inside the main Timeline of the document. Each movie clip symbol has its own Timeline. You can also nest a movie clip instance inside another movie clip symbol. When a movie clip is nested inside another movie clip, or inside a document, it becomes a child of that movie clip or document, which becomes the parent. Relationships between nested movie clips are hierarchical: modifications made to the parent affect the child. The root Timeline for each level is the parent of all the movie clips on its level, and because it is the topmost Timeline, it has no parent. In the Movie Explorer, you can view the hierarchy of nested movie clips in a document. To understand movie clip hierarchy, consider the hierarchy on a computer: the hard disk has a root directory (or folder) and subdirectories. The root directory is analogous to the main (or root) Timeline of a Flash document: it is the parent of everything else. The subdirectories are analogous to movie clips. You can use the movie clip hierarchy in Flash to organize related objects. For example, you could create a Flash document containing a car that moves across the Stage. You can use a movie clip symbol to represent the car and set up a motion tween to move it across the Stage. To add wheels that rotate, you can create a movie clip for a car wheel, and create two instances of this movie clip, named frontWheel and backWheel. Then you can place the wheels on the car movie clip’s Timeline—not on the main Timeline. As children of car, frontWheel and backWheel are affected by any changes made to car; they move with the car as it tweens across the Stage. To make both wheel instances spin, you can set up a motion tween that rotates the wheel symbol. Even after you change frontWheel and backWheel, they continue to be affected by the tween on their parent movie clip, car; the wheels spin, but they also move with the parent movie clip car across the Stage. For a video tutorial about using multiple timelines, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0128.

See also
“Using symbols, instances, and library assets” on page 208

About absolute paths
An absolute path starts with the name of the level into which the document is loaded and continues through the display list until it reaches the target instance. You can also use the alias _root to refer to the topmost Timeline of the current level. For example, an action in the movie clip california that refers to the movie clip oregon could use the absolute path _root.westCoast.oregon. The first document to open in Flash Player is loaded at level 0. You must assign each additional loaded document a level number. When you use an absolute reference in ActionScript to reference a loaded document, use the form _levelX, where X is the level number into which the document is loaded. For example, the first document that opens in Flash Player is called _level0; a document loaded into level 3 is called _level3. To communicate between documents on different levels, you must use the level name in the target path. The following example shows how the portland instance would address the atlanta instance located in a movie clip called georgia (georgia is at the same level as oregon):
_level5.georgia.atlanta

FLASH CS3 73
User Guide

You can use the _root alias to refer to the main Timeline of the current level. For the main Timeline, the _root alias stands for _level0 when targeted by a movie clip also on _level0. For a document loaded into _level5, _root is equal to _level5 when targeted by a movie clip also on level 5. For example, if the movie clips southcarolina and florida are both loaded into the same level, an action called from the instance southcarolina could use the following absolute path to target the instance florida:
_root.eastCoast.florida

About relative paths
A relative path depends on the relationship between the controlling Timeline and the target Timeline. Relative paths can address targets only within their own level of Flash Player. For example, you can’t use a relative path in an action on _level0 that targets a Timeline on _level5. In a relative path, use the keyword this to refer to the current Timeline in the current level; use the _parent alias to indicate the parent Timeline of the current Timeline. You can use the _parent alias repeatedly to go up one level in the movie clip hierarchy within the same level of Flash Player. For example, _parent._parent controls a movie clip up two levels in the hierarchy. The topmost Timeline at any level in Flash Player is the only Timeline with a _parent value that is undefined. An action in the Timeline of the instance charleston, located one level below southcarolina, could use the following target path to target the instance southcarolina:
_parent

To target the instance eastCoast (one level up) from an action in charleston, you could use the following relative path:
_parent._parent

To target the instance atlanta from an action in the Timeline of charleston, you could use the following relative path:
_parent._parent.georgia.atlanta

Relative paths are useful for reusing scripts. For example, you could attach the following script to a movie clip that magnifies its parent by 150%:
onClipEvent (load) {_parent._xscale = 150;_parent._yscale = 150; }

You can reuse this script by attaching it to any movie clip instance. Note: Flash Lite 1.0 and 1.1 support attaching scripts only to buttons. Attaching scripts to movie clips is not supported. Whether you use an absolute or a relative path, you identify a variable in a Timeline or a property of an object with a dot (.) followed by the name of the variable or property. For example, the following statement sets the variable name in the instance form to the value "Gilbert":
_root.form.name = "Gilbert";

Using absolute and relative target paths
You can use ActionScript to send messages from one timeline to another. The timeline that contains the action is called the controlling timeline, and the timeline that receives the action is called the target timeline. For example, there could be an action on the last frame of one timeline that tells another timeline to play. To refer to a target timeline, you must use a target path, which indicates the location of a movie clip in the display list. The following example shows the hierarchy of a document named westCoast on level 0, which contains three movie clips: california, oregon, and washington. Each of these movie clips in turn contains two movie clips.

FLASH CS3 74
User Guide

_level0 westCoast california sanfrancisco bakersfield oregon portland ashland washington olympia ellensburg

As on a web server, each timeline in Flash can be addressed in two ways: with an absolute path or with a relative path. The absolute path of an instance is always a full path from a level name, regardless of which timeline calls the action; for example, the absolute path to the instance california is _level0.westCoast.california. A relative path is different when called from different locations; for example, the relative path to california from sanfrancisco is _parent, but from portland, it’s _parent._parent.california.

See also
“Structuring FLA files” on page 465 “Organizing ActionScript in an application” on page 467

Specify target paths
To control a movie clip, loaded SWF file, or button, you must specify a target path. You can specify it manually, or by using the Insert Target Path dialog box, or by creating an expression that evaluates to a target path. To specify a target path for a movie clip or button, you must assign an instance name to the movie clip or button. A loaded document doesn’t require an instance name, because you use its level number as an instance name (for example, _level5).
Assign an instance name to a movie clip or button 1 Select a movie clip or button on the Stage. 2 Enter an instance name in the Property inspector. Specify a target path using the Insert Target Path dialog box 1 Select the movie clip, frame, or button instance to which you want to assign the action.

This becomes the controlling Timeline.
2 In the Actions panel (Window > Actions), go to the Actions toolbox on the left, and select an action or method that requires a target path. 3 Click the parameter box or location in the script where you want to insert the target path. 4 Click the Insert Target Path button

above the Script pane.

5 Select Absolute or Relative for the target path mode. 6 Select a movie clip in the Insert Target Path display list, and click OK. Specify a target path manually 1 Select the movie clip, frame, or button instance to which you want to assign the action.

FLASH CS3 75
User Guide

This becomes the controlling Timeline.
2 In the Actions panel (Window > Actions), go to the Actions toolbox on the left, and select an action or method that requires a target path. 3 Click the parameter box or location in the script where you want to insert the target path. 4 Enter an absolute or relative target path in the Actions panel. Use an expression as a target path 1 Select the movie clip, frame, or button instance to which you want to assign the action.

This becomes the controlling Timeline.
2 In the Actions panel (Window > Actions), go to the Actions toolbox on the left, and select an action or method that requires a target path. 3 Do one of the following:

• Enter an expression that evaluates to a target path in a parameter box. • Click to place the insertion point in the script. Then, in the Functions category of the Actions toolbox, doubleclick the targetPath function. The targetPath function converts a reference to a movie clip into a string.

• Click to place the insertion point in the script. Then, in the Functions category of the Actions toolbox, select the
eval function. The eval function converts a string to a movie clip reference that can be used to call methods such

as play. The following script assigns the value 1 to the variable i. It then uses the eval function to create a reference to a movie clip instance and assigns it to the variable x. The variable x is now a reference to a movie clip instance and can call the MovieClip object methods.
0i = 1; 0x = eval("mc"+i); 0x.play(); 0// this is equivalent to mc1.play();

You can also use the eval function to call methods directly, as shown in the following example:
0eval("mc" + i).play();

Working with scenes
About scenes
To organize a document thematically, you can use scenes. For example, you might use separate scenes for an introduction, a loading message, and credits. Though using scenes has some disadvantages, there are some situations in which few of these disadvantages apply, such as when you create lengthy animations. When you use scenes, you avoid having to manage a large number of FLA files.

FLASH CS3 76
User Guide

Using scenes is similar to using several SWF files together to create a larger presentation. Each scene has a Timeline. When the playhead reaches the final frame of a scene, the playhead progresses to the next scene. When you publish a SWF file, the Timeline of each scene combines into a single Timeline in the SWF file. After the SWF file compiles, it behaves as if you created the FLA file using one scene. Because of this behavior, scenes have some disadvantages:

• Scenes can make documents confusing to edit, particularly in multiauthor environments. Anyone using the FLA
document might have to search several scenes within a FLA file to locate code and assets. Consider loading content or using movie clips instead.

• Scenes often result in large SWF files. Using scenes encourages you to place more content in a single FLA file,
which results in larger FLA files and SWF files.

• Scenes force users to progressively download the entire SWF file, even if they do not plan or want to watch all of
it. If you avoid scenes, users can control what content they download as they progress through your SWF file.

• Scenes combined with ActionScript might produce unexpected results. Because each scene Timeline is
compressed onto a single Timeline, you might encounter errors involving your ActionScript and scenes, which typically requires extra, complicated debugging.

Use scenes
When you publish a Flash document that contains more than one scene, the scenes in the document play back in the order they are listed in the Scene panel. Frames in the document are numbered consecutively through scenes. For example, if a document contains two scenes with ten frames each, the frames in Scene 2 are numbered 11–20. To stop or pause a document after each scene, or to let users navigate the document in a nonlinear fashion, you use actions.
Display the Scene panel
❖ Select Window > Other Panels > Scene.

View a particular scene
❖ Select View > Go To, and then select the name of the scene from the submenu.

Add a scene
❖ Select Insert > Scene, or click the Add Scene button

in the Scene panel.

Delete a scene
❖ Click the Delete Scene button

in the Scene panel.

Change the name of a scene
❖ Double-click the scene name in the Scene panel and enter the new name.

Duplicate a scene
❖ Click the Duplicate Scene button

in the Scene panel.

Change the order of a scene in the document
❖ Drag the scene name to a different location in the Scene panel.

FLASH CS3 77
User Guide

Find and Replace
About Find and Replace
The Find and Replace feature lets you do the following:

• Search for a text string, a font, a color, a symbol, a sound file, a video file, or an imported bitmap file. • Replace the specified element with another element of the same type. Different options are available in the Find
and Replace dialog box depending on the type of specified element.

• Find and replace elements in the current document or the current scene. • Search for the next occurrence or all occurrences of an element, and replace the current occurrence or all occurrences. Note: In a screen-based document, you can find and replace elements in the current document or the current screen, but you can’t use scenes. The Live Edit option lets you edit the specified element directly on the Stage. If you use Live Edit when searching for a symbol, Flash opens the symbol in edit-in-place mode. The Find and Replace Log at the bottom of the Find and Replace dialog box shows the location, name, and type of the elements for which you are searching.

See also
“Working with screens” on page 367

Find and replace text
1 Select Edit > Find and Replace. 2 Select Text from the For pop-up menu. 3 In the Text box, enter the text to find. 4 In the Replace With Text box, enter the text to replace the existing text. 5 Select options for searching text:
Whole Word Searches for the specified text string as a whole word only, bounded on both sides by spaces, quotes, or similar markers. When Whole Word is deselected, the specified text can be searched as part of a larger word. For example, when Whole Word is deselected, a search for place will yield the words replace, placement, and so on. Match Case Searches for text that exactly matches the case (uppercase and lowercase character formatting) of the

specified text when finding and replacing.
Regular Expressions Searches for text in regular expressions in ActionScript. An expression is any statement that

Flash can evaluate that returns a value.
Text Field Contents Searches the contents of a text field. Frames/Layers/Parameters Searches frame labels, layer names, scene names, and component parameters. Strings in ActionScript Searches strings in ActionScript in the document or scene (external ActionScript files are not

searched).
6 To select the next occurrence of the specified text on the Stage and edit it in place, select Live Edit.

Note: Only the next occurrence is selected for live editing, even if you select Find All in step 7.

FLASH CS3 78
User Guide

7 To find text, do one of the following:

• To find the next occurrence of the specified text, click Find Next. • To find all occurrences of the specified text, click Find All.
8 To replace text, do one of the following:

• To replace the currently selected occurrence of the specified text, click Replace. • To replace all occurrences of the specified text, click Replace All.

Find and replace fonts
1 Select Edit > Find And Replace. 2 Select Font from the For pop-up menu, then select from the following options:

• To search by font name, select Font Name and select a font from the pop-up menu or enter a font name in the box.
When Font Name is deselected, all fonts in the scene or document are searched.

• To search by font style, select Font Style and select a font style from the pop-up menu. When Font Style is
deselected, all font styles in the scene or document are searched.

• To search by font size, select Font Size and enter a value for minimum and maximum font size to specify the range
of font sizes to be searched. When Font Size is deselected, all font sizes in the scene or document are searched.

• To replace the specified font with a different font name, select Font Name under Replace With and select a font
name from the pop-up menu or enter a name in the box. When Font Name is deselected under Replace with, the current font name remains unchanged.

• To replace the specified font with a different font style, select Font Style under Replace With and select a font style
from the pop-up menu. When Font Style is deselected under Replace with, the current style of the specified font remains unchanged.

• To replace the specified font with a different font size, select Font Size under Replace With and enter values for
minimum and maximum font size. When Font Size is deselected under Replace With, the current size of the specified font remains unchanged.
3 To select the next occurrence of the specified font on the Stage and edit it in place, select Live Edit.

Note: Only the next occurrence is selected for live editing, even if you select Find All in step 4.
4 To find a font, do one of the following:

• To find the next occurrence of the specified font, click Find Next. • To find all occurrences of the specified font, click Find All.
5 To replace a font, do one of the following:

• To replace the currently selected occurrence of the specified font, click Replace. • To replace all occurrences of the specified font, click Replace All.

Find and replace colors
You cannot find and replace colors in grouped objects. Note: To find and replace colors in a GIF or JPEG file in a Flash document, edit the file in an image-editing application.
1 Select Edit > Find And Replace. 2 Select Color from the For pop-up menu.

FLASH CS3 79
User Guide

3 To search for a color, click the Color control and do one of the following:

• Select a color swatch from the color pop-up window. • Enter a hexadecimal color value in the Hex Edit box in the color pop-up window. • Click the System Color Picker button and select a color from the system color picker. • To make the eyedropper tool appear, drag from the Color control. Select any color on your screen.
4 To select a color to replace the specified color, click the Color control under Replace With and do one of the following:

• Select a color swatch from the color pop-up window. • Enter a hexadecimal color value in the Hex Edit box in the color pop-up window. • Click the System Color Picker button and select a color from the system color picker. • To make the eyedropper tool appear, drag from the Color control. Select any color on your screen.
5 To specify which occurrence of the color to find and replace, select the Fills, Strokes, or Text option or any combination of those options. 6 To select the next occurrence of the specified color on the Stage and edit it in place, select Live Edit.

Note: Only the next occurrence is selected for live editing, even if you select Find All in the next step.
7 To find a color, do one of the following:

• To find the next occurrence of the specified color, click Find Next. • To find all occurrences of the specified color, Click Find All.
8 To replace a color, do one of the following:

• To replace the currently selected occurrence of the specified color, click Replace. • To replace all occurrences of the specified color, click Replace All.

Find and replace symbols
When you find and replace symbols, search for a symbol by name. Replace a symbol with another symbol of any type—movie clip, button, or graphic.
1 Select Edit > Find And Replace. 2 Select Symbol from the For pop-up menu. 3 For Name, select a name from the pop-up menu. 4 Under Replace With, for Name select a name from the pop-up menu. 5 To select the next occurrence of the specified symbol on the Stage and edit it in place, select Live Edit.

Note: Only the next occurrence is selected for editing, even if you select Find All in the next step.
6 To find a symbol, do one of the following:

• To find the next occurrence of the specified symbol, click Find Next. • To find all occurrences of the specified symbol, click Find All.
7 To replace a symbol, do one of the following:

• To replace the currently selected occurrence of the specified symbol, click Replace. • To replace all occurrences of the specified symbol, click Replace All.

FLASH CS3 80
User Guide

Find and replace sound, video, or bitmap files
1 Select Edit > Find and Replace. 2 Select Sound, Video, or Bitmap from the For pop-up menu. 3 For Name, enter a sound, video, or bitmap filename or select a name from the pop-up menu. 4 Under Replace With, for Name enter a sound, video, or bitmap filename or select a name from the pop-up menu. 5 To select the next occurrence of the specified sound, video, or bitmap on the Stage and edit it in place, select Live Edit.

Note: Only the next occurrence is selected for editing, even if you select Find All in the next step.
6 To find a sound, video, or bitmap, do one of the following:

• To find the next occurrence of the specified sound, video, or bitmap, click Find Next. • To find all occurrences of the specified sound, video, or bitmap, click Find All.
7 To replace a sound, video, or bitmap, do one of the following:

• To replace the currently selected occurrence of the specified sound, video, or bitmap, Click Replace. • To replace all occurrences of the specified sound, video, or bitmap, click Replace All.

Templates
About templates
The Flash templates provide you with easy-to-use starting points for a range of common projects. There are templates for projects such as photo slideshows, quizzes, mobile content, and more.
Mobile device templates

Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional content is viewable across multiple browsers, platforms, and mobile phones. You can author the following:

• High-quality animations • Games • Rich-media custom user interfaces for devices and desktop systems • E-commerce and business solutions
Flash files are compact, which makes them suitable for wireless carrier networks, where transfer rates vary between 9.6 and 60 kilobytes per second (Kbps). Mobile devices have limited storage capability, so the small memory requirement of Flash is ideal. Mobile device templates let you create content for many mobile devices. Use the device skins in the templates to preview content as it will look on the device. Note: The skins are on guide layers and won’t export with your content or appear at runtime. For more information on authoring Flash files for mobile devices, see the Adobe Mobile Devices site at www.adobe.com/go/devnet_devices.

FLASH CS3 81
User Guide

Quiz templates

Use the quiz templates to create self-scoring quizzes with several interaction types.
Advertising templates

Advertising templates facilitate the creation of standard rich media types and sizes defined by the Interactive Advertising Bureau (IAB) and accepted by the industry. For more information on IAB-endorsed ad types, see the IAB site at IAB.net. Test ads for stability in a variety of browser and platform combinations. Your application is considered stable if it doesn’t cause error messages, browser crashes, or system crashes. Work with webmasters and network administrators to create detailed testing plans that include tasks relevant to your users. Make these plans publicly available and update them regularly. Vendors should publish detailed plans indicating the browser and platform combinations in which their technologies are stable. Examples are available at the IAB Rich Media testing section of IAB.net. Size and file format requirements of ads might vary by vendor and site. Check with your vendor, ISP, or the IAB to learn about these requirements that can affect the ad’s design.
Photo slideshow templates

Use the photo slideshow template to exhibit your photos with text captions and playback controls.

To use templates
1 Select File > New. 2 Click the Templates tab. 3 Select a template and click OK. 4 Add content to the FLA file. 5 Save and publish the file.

Use the Photo Slideshow template
Photos must be in a suitable format for use in the Photo Slideshow template. You can import images in a variety of formats, but JPEGs typically work best for photographs. For best results, save photos as JPEGs using an image-editing program. Images should be 640 x 480 pixels and should be named in a numbered sequence, for example, photo1.jpg, photo2.jpg, and photo3.jpg.
Import photos to a SWF file 1 Select the layer of photos included in the example called “picture layer,” and click the trash can icon to delete it. 2 Create a layer by clicking the Insert Layer button, and name this new layer My Photos.

Make sure that this new layer is the bottom layer.
3 Select the first blank keyframe in the My Photos layer, select File > Import > Import to Stage, and locate your photo sequence. 4 Select the first image in the series, click Open (Windows) or Import (Macintosh), and click Import. 5 Flash recognizes that your image is part of a series and asks you to import all files in the series. Click Yes.

FLASH CS3 82
User Guide

Add finishing touches

Flash places each image on separate keyframes. If you have more than four images, all of the other layers must have an equal number of frames. Your images appear in the Library panel.
1 Delete the old images that were included in this document from the library. 2 Change the title, date, and caption at the top for each image. Replace text as desired.

The template automatically determines how many images are in your document and indicates which photo you are currently using.
Use autoplay mode

The Photo Slideshow template also has a built-in autoplay mode that automatically changes the photo after a set delay. The template is set to a default delay time of 4 seconds, but you can change this setting.
1 Select the controller component on the Stage. It is an instance “mc, controller” component. 2 Open the Component inspector (Window > Component Inspector).

The Parameters tab is selected by default.
3 Select the delay, and change this value to a new delay value, in seconds. 4 Save and publish your document.

83

Chapter 4: Adobe Version Cue
Adobe Version Cue® CS3 is a file-version manager included with Adobe Creative Suite 3 Design Premium and Standard, Adobe Creative Suite 3 Web Premium and Standard, and Adobe Creative Suite 3 Master Collection. Version Cue enables versioning and asset management in Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components, including Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Flash, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Bridge, and Adobe InCopy.

Working with Adobe Version Cue
About Version Cue
Version Cue is a file-version manager included with Creative Suite 3 Design, Web, and Master Collection editions that consists of two pieces: the Version Cue Server and Version Cue connectivity. The Version Cue Server can be installed locally or on a dedicated computer and hosts Version Cue projects and PDF reviews. Version Cue connectivity, included with all Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components (Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InDesign, InCopy, Photoshop, and Bridge) enables you to connect to Version Cue Servers. Use Version Cue to track versions of a file as you work and to enable workgroup collaboration such as file sharing, version control, backups, online reviews, and the ability to check files in and out. You can organize Version Cuemanaged files into private or shared projects. Version Cue is integrated with Adobe Bridge: use Bridge as a file browser for Version Cue projects. With Bridge, you can access Version Cue Servers, projects, and files, and view, search for, and compare information about Version Cue-managed assets. Use Version Cue Server Administration to create and manage user access, projects, and PDF reviews; administer backups; export content; and to specify advanced Version Cue Server information. For a video on using Version Cue, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0112.

See also
“Version Cue Server Administration” on page 114 “Version Cue PDF reviews” on page 125

What’s new
Initial server configuration When you first start the Version Cue Server (which is turned off by default), the Initial

Configuration window in Version Cue Server Administration enables you specify initial server configuration settings.
Improved integration with Adobe Bridge Use the Inspector in Bridge to display and act on context-sensitive infor-

mation about Version Cue Servers, projects, and assets. Version Cue options in the Content panel in Bridge let you connect to Version Cue Servers, create Version Cue projects, and work with Version Cue-managed assets.
Faster upload/download and more efficient server storage Version Cue transfers and stores only the differences

between local files and their counterparts on the Version Cue Server.

FLASH CS3 84
User Guide

Welcome Screen and updated terminology A Welcome screen in Bridge enables you to quickly access Version Cue Servers and projects. Updated terminology makes it easier to work with Version Cue. New users and groups interface A new interface for managing user access to Version Cue includes the ability to assign permissions based on group membership. LDAP If your workgroup uses LDAP directories for user account management, you can set up Version Cue to search

and add users from these directories. Users can then log in to Version Cue using their LDAP credentials.
SSL Enabling SSL (Secure Sockets Layer, a security protocol), in Version Cue Server Administration allows for

secure communication between the Version Cue Server and Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components.
Version Cue SDK Java developers can use the Version Cue CS3 SDK to create plug-ins that customize workflows or

create connections to a DAM (Digital Asset Management) system. The API enables developers to deploy a serverside plug-in to integrate custom solutions into Creative Suite 3 components and Bridge. For more information, see www.adobe.com/go/developer.

See also
“Create projects” on page 96 “Editing and synchronizing offline files” on page 112 “Create and manage users” on page 116

Version Cue basics
Version Cue Server

When you perform the default installation of Creative Suite 3 Design, Web, and Master Collection editions, a Version Cue Server is installed on your computer, but is not turned on. Version Cue Servers store Version Cue projects and their related assets. You access the Version Cue Server by using Adobe Bridge or the Adobe dialog box in Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components. You can start the Version Cue Server on your computer, or, optimally, install and run the Version Cue Server on a dedicated computer accessible to others on your network. When you first turn on the Version Cue Server, you’ll be prompted to specify initial server settings, including a system administrator password, server name and visibility settings, and user account creation settings.
Version Cue Server Administration

Once you’ve installed and turned on the Version Cue Server, use Version Cue Server Administration to set up users, create projects and edit their properties, create and administer PDF reviews, and configure the Version Cue Server.
Version Cue projects

Version Cue uses projects to store related files and folders. Projects are stored on Version Cue Servers. Projects store the master copies of files added to the project, as well as file metadata such as version information and comments.
Local project files and server versions

Local project files are created on your hard drive when you open and edit a file from a Version Cue project (Version Cue marks the file as checked out by you). As you work with the local project file, you save changes to it by choosing File > Save. This updates the local file on your hard drive, but not the file on the Version Cue Server. When you’re ready to check in the local project file changes back to the Version Cue Server, you create a version by using the Check In command. Versions represent a snapshot of the file at a given time.

FLASH CS3 85
User Guide

The Version Cue Server stores all versions of a file so you can view earlier versions, promote earlier versions to be the current version, or delete unnecessary or obsolete versions.
Version control

Version Cue allows multi-user access to files on the Version Cue Server. If two users try to edit a file on the Version Cue Server, Version Cue institutes version control by notifying the second user that the file is checked out. Version Cue then lets you decide how to proceed.

See also
“Version Cue Server Administration” on page 114 “Working with Version Cue projects” on page 95 “Version Cue Server Administration” on page 114 “Version Cue versions” on page 109 “Edit files checked out by another user” on page 104

Version Cue workflow
Before you begin using Version Cue features, you’ll need to install and configure the Version Cue Server, create a project, and assign users to it.
1. Install and configure the Version Cue Server

When you install Creative Suite 3 Design, Web, and Master Collection editions, a Version Cue Server is installed on your computer, but is not turned on. You can turn on the server to enable simple file sharing; however, if you want to share Version Cue-managed assets with a workgroup, you should install it on a dedicated computer accessible to others on your network. When you start the server for the first time, you’ll be prompted to specify initial server settings, including a system administrator password, server name and visibility settings, and default user access rights. See “About Version Cue Server Administration” on page 114. Configure the server further by specifying settings in Version Cue Server preferences and in Version Cue Server Administration. See “Version Cue Server Administration” on page 114 and “Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123.
2. Create a project and assign users

After you’ve set up and configured the Version Cue Server, you can create projects and assign users to them. By default, projects you create in Version Cue are private. You change a project’s shared status at any time, and restrict access to the project, by specifying that users log in when they access the project. Create projects by using Bridge, the Adobe dialog box, or Version Cue Server Administration. To specify advanced project properties, such as requiring user login and assigning user access permissions, you must use Version Cue Server Administration. See “Create projects” on page 96 and “Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration” on page 119.

FLASH CS3 86
User Guide

3. Add files to a project

Once you’ve created a project, add files to the project so users can check them out, make changes, and check them back in. You can add multiple Adobe or non-Adobe files by using Bridge, or add files one at a time from within a Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component by using the Adobe dialog box. See “Add files and folders to a project” on page 99.

Accessing Version Cue features
Access to Version Cue features, by way of the Adobe dialog box or Bridge, varies depending on whether or not you use Version Cue-enabled software and whether or not you use one of the Adobe Creative Suite products (for example, Adobe Creative Suite Design Premium). For instance, you have access to the full feature set, either through the Adobe dialog box or Bridge, when you use Photoshop as part of a suite product. By contrast, if you use Photoshop as standalone software, you must be granted access to a shared project in order to use the full Version Cue feature set. In Dreamweaver, Contribute, and Fireworks, you have access to Version Cue features only through Bridge. The following table explains the scenarios in which you have access to Version Cue features, and how you access those features.
Software component Acrobat, Bridge, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, Photoshop, Flash Access via the Adobe dialog box Access via Bridge

When used as part of a Creative Suite When used as part of a Creative Suite product: Yes product: Yes When used as standalone software: Only if granted access to a shared project When used as standalone software: Only if granted access to a shared project When used as part of a Creative Suite product: Yes When used as standalone software: Only if granted access to a shared project

Dreamweaver, Contribute, Fireworks, No

Adobe recommends managing non-Adobe files with Bridge. However, if you’re collaborating with other users who don’t have access to Bridge, you can use the Version Cue WebDAV Server URL to access projects on a Version Cue Server. IT administrators can use the Adobe Version Cue Access Utility, available for download from the Adobe website, to access and extract current versions of files stored in a Version Cue project. For more information, visit the Adobe website.

Using Creative Suite 2 components and Acrobat 8 with Version Cue CS3
You can use Adobe Creative Suite 2 components and Acrobat 8 with the Version Cue CS3 Server; however, there are some differences to keep in mind.

• If you’re using Acrobat 8 or an Adobe Creative Suite 2 component to access Version Cue CS3-managed files, the
files must be part of a Version Cue CS2-compatible project. You can specify that a Version Cue CS3 project is Version Cue CS2-compatible when you create it. (You cannot specify that a project is Version Cue CS2-compatible after you create it.) Note: Projects migrated from Version Cue CS2 to Version Cue CS3 remain compatible with Acrobat 8 and Adobe Creative Suite 2 components.

FLASH CS3 87
User Guide

• Acrobat 8 and Adobe Creative Suite 2 components can’t connect to a Version Cue CS3 Server if you enable SSL in
Version Cue Server Administration.

• Adobe Creative Suite 2 components can’t work with Version Cue CS3 servers that are installed on the same
computer. Adobe Creative Suite 2 components can, however, connect to Version Cue CS3 Servers that reside on the network.

• The Version Cue CS2 Workspace and the Version Cue CS3 Server can be installed and function on the same
computer simultaneously (and must be installed on the same computer if you want to migrate projects from Version Cue CS2 to Version Cue CS3).

• If a Version Cue CS2 Workspace and a Version Cue CS3 Server are installed on the same computer, Adobe
Creative Suite 2 components work only with the Version Cue CS2 Workspace, because they can communicate only with the port that the Version Cue CS2 Workspace uses.

• Version Cue CS3 doesn’t support alternates; however, Adobe Creative Suite 2 components can work with alternates in Version Cue CS2-compatible projects on a Version Cue CS3 Server. Adobe Creative Suite 3 components cannot access alternates in a Version Cue CS2-compatible project on a Version Cue CS3 Server. For help using Acrobat 8 with Version Cue CS2, see “Using Version Cue” in Acrobat 8 Help. For help using Adobe Creative Suite 2 components with Version Cue CS2, see Version Cue CS2 Help.

See also
“Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration” on page 119

Use the Adobe dialog box
In Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components, you can use the Adobe dialog box when you choose the Open, Import, Export, Place, Save, or Save As commands. The Adobe dialog box gives you access to Version Cue commands and controls, and displays thumbnails and other information that makes it easy to identify files. To use the Adobe dialog box, click Use Adobe Dialog in the Open, Import, Export, Place, Save, or Save As dialog boxes. If the Use Adobe Dialog button doesn’t appear in the Open, Import, Export, Place, Save, or Save As dialog box, make sure that you have enabled Version Cue file management in Bridge or in the Creative Suite component you’re using. Use the View menu options to customize the display. You can change back to the OS dialog box at any time by clicking Use OS Dialog.

FLASH CS3 88
User Guide

A

B C

D

E

The Adobe dialog box A. Favorites panel B. Look In menu C. Toggle metadata D. Tools menu E. View menu

Version Cue Server and project icons
Bridge and the Adobe dialog box display status icons for Version Cue Servers and projects to let you know whether they’re online (available), offline, local, or remote.
Shared Project Private Project Offline Project

Indicates a project that’s available and shared with other users. Indicates a project that’s available and not shared with other users. Indicates a project that’s not available. Indicates a project that is compatible with Adobe Creative Suite 2 components and

VC2 Compatible Project

Adobe Acrobat 8.
Offline Server My Server

Indicates an offline Version Cue Server. Indicates a Version Cue Server that is local to your computer. Indicates a remote Version Cue Server that’s available.

Network Server

Enable Version Cue file management
Version Cue file management, which provides access to Version Cue projects, is enabled by default in Bridge CS3 and all Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components, except for Acrobat 8. (You must always enable or disable Version Cue file management manually in Acrobat 8.) If you disable Version Cue file management in one Creative Suite component, you disable it in all other Version Cueenabled Creative Suite components, except Acrobat and Bridge. If you disable Version Cue file management in Bridge, you disable it in all Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components, except Acrobat.

FLASH CS3 89
User Guide

Disabling Version Cue file management means that you disable access to all Version Cue projects on all Version Cue Servers.

• In the Startup Scripts preferences in Bridge, select Version Cue, and click OK. • In File Handling & Clipboard preferences in Illustrator, select Enable Version Cue, and click OK. • In File Handling preferences in InDesign, select Enable Version Cue, and click OK. • In File Handling preferences in Photoshop, select Enable Version Cue, and click OK. • In General preferences in Flash, select Enable Version Cue, and click OK. • In Documents preferences in Acrobat, select Enable Version Cue File Version Manager, and click OK. • In File Handling preferences in InCopy, select Enable Version Cue, and click OK.

View Version Cue information
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can view information about Version Cue Servers, projects, and assets in the Adobe dialog box or by using the Inspector in Bridge. For help on viewing information in Bridge, see “Inspect Version Cue files” in Bridge Help. If you’ve already opened a Version Cue-managed file in a Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component, you can view information about it in the status bar at the lower-left of the document window (in Acrobat, this information appears in the lower-left of the navigation pane).

Status bar

1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, choose File > Open. 2 Click Use Adobe Dialog. (If you see Use OS Dialog instead, you are already using the Adobe dialog box.) 3 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 4 To change the display of Version Cue Servers, projects, or files in the dialog box, choose a display option from View menu .

Note: If a Version Cue Server for which you want to view information is outside your subnet, use the Connect To Server command from the Tools menu (or Connect To from the Project Tools menu in Acrobat) to access it.
5 To display information about a Version Cue Server, project, or file, do one of the following:

• Click the toggle

to display the Properties panel and view the properties of a file.

• Place the pointer over the item. Information appears in a tool tip. • Select the file and choose Versions from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu to display information about
a file’s versions.

FLASH CS3 90
User Guide

See also
“File statuses” on page 102

Working with the Version Cue Server
About Version Cue Server installation
Version Cue Servers store Version Cue projects and their related assets. When you perform a default installation of Creative Suite 3 Design, Web, or Master Collection editions, Version Cue installs the Version Cue Server on your computer, but does not turn it on. When the Version Cue Server is installed on your computer, the server is available only if your computer is turned on and networked to the other users in your group. This scenario is adequate for personal use or for file sharing between individuals. Alternatively, you can install the Version Cue Server on a dedicated computer accessible to others on your network, so that Version Cue-managed assets are always available to a workgroup. For a video on using Version Cue in a workgroup, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0113.
INDIVIDUAL USER-BASED CONFIGURATION SERVER-BASED CONFIGURATION

Individuals

Workgroups

Workgroups

`

`

`

Local or server-based file sharing: Version Cue can be set up to operate in a user- or server-based environment. In a user-based implementation, files and projects are shared from an individual’s own hard drive. In a server-based environment, the Version Cue Server resides on a separate, dedicated computer.

The Version Cue Server is installed in the Program Files/Common Files/Adobe/Adobe Version Cue CS3/Server folder (Windows) or in the Library/Application Support/Adobe/Adobe Version Cue CS3/Server folder (Mac OS). You cannot change this location. To install the Version Cue Server on a dedicated computer, run the Creative Suite 3 Design, Web, or Master Collection edition installer on the dedicated computer, following the on-screen prompts to install only the Version Cue Server. Note: Consult the End-User License Agreement (EULA) for your copy of Adobe Creative Suite before installing the Version Cue Server on a dedicated computer.

Turn on and configure the Version Cue Server
To use a Version Cue Server, you’ll need to turn it on and configure initial settings. Once you’ve configured initial settings, you can configure additional Version Cue Server settings in the Version Cue preferences and specify advanced server settings (such as enabling SSL) in Version Cue Server Administration.

FLASH CS3 91
User Guide

For a video on setting up the Version Cue server, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0114.
1 Do either of the following:

• Click Start My Server in the Adobe dialog box or in Adobe Bridge. • Open the Control Panel and double-click Adobe Version Cue CS3 (Windows) or click Adobe Version Cue CS3 in
System Preferences (Mac OS), and then click Start. Version Cue starts Version Cue Server Administration and displays the Initial Configuration window.
2 In the Initial Configuration window, specify a system administrator password in the Password box.

Note: Be sure to note the password you specify. If you forget the system administrator password, you’ll need to reinstall the Version Cue Server.
3 Specify a name for the server in the Server Name box. 4 Choose an option from the Server Visibility menu:

• To prevent other users in your network from seeing the server, choose Private. Private Version Cue Servers can be
accessed only from your local computer.

• To make the server visible to other users in your network, choose Visible To Others. (You must configure the
server to be visible to grant others access to projects on the server.) Note: If Version Cue is installed on a Windows computer that uses a firewall and you want to share the server with others, make sure that TCP ports 3703 and 5353 are left open. If you've enabled SSL for the Version Cue Server, also leave port 3704 open. If Version Cue CS2 is installed on the same computer, also leave port 50900 open (and 50901 if you’ve enabled SSL). For instructions, see Windows Help.
5 Choose an option from the User Accounts menu: I

• To enable users to access the server without an existing user account, choose Automatic User Creation. If you
select this option, Version Cue creates a new user account without a password when a new user accesses the server. If you enable Automatic User Account Creation and then subsequently enable LDAP support, LDAP users are automatically imported when they access the server with their LDAP account name. Users imported in this fashion are added to the Everyone group, given a user access level of None, and are not able to log into Version Cue Server Administration. Use this technique to automatically assign LDAP users default access rights to projects on a Version Cue server without having to explicitly import users.

• To specify that only named users, defined in Version Cue Server Administration, can access the server, choose
Manual User Creation.
6 Click Save & Continue to log in to Version Cue Server Administration and specify advanced server settings.

See also
“Version Cue Server Administration” on page 114 “Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Create and manage users” on page 116

FLASH CS3 92
User Guide

Set Version Cue Server preferences
You can configure many Version Cue Server settings in Version Cue preferences, such as the amount of RAM available to Version Cue and the location of the Data folder. To configure advanced settings, such as enabling SSL, changing the name of the Version Cue Server, specifying server log options, resetting user locks, or backing up the server, you must use Version Cue Server Administration.

See also
“Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123
Access Version Cue Server preferences 1 Do one of the following to access Version Cue preferences:

• In Windows, double-click the Version Cue icon • In Mac OS, click the Version Cue icon
Preferences from the menu.

in the system tray at the lower-right of the screen.

in the menu bar at the top of the screen, and choose Version Cue CS3

• Open the Control Panel and double-click Adobe Version Cue CS3 (Windows) or click Adobe Version Cue CS3 in
System Preferences (Mac OS).
2 Click the Settings tab in the Adobe Version Cue CS3 dialog box. Make the Version Cue Server visible 1 To grant others access to shared Version Cue projects on the server, choose This Server Is Visible To Others from

the Server Visibility menu. To hide the Version Cue Server from other users, choose This Server Is Private. Note: If Version Cue is installed on a Windows computer that uses a firewall and you want to share the server with others, make sure that TCP ports 3703 and 5353 are left open. If you've enabled SSL for the Version Cue Server, also leave port 3704 open. If Version Cue CS2 is installed on the same computer, also leave port 50900 open (and 50901 if you’ve enabled SSL). For instructions, see Windows Help.
2 Click Apply. Specify a workgroup size 1 From the Workgroup Size menu, choose the number of people who use the Version Cue Server on a typical day.

This setting controls how the Version Cue Server handles the potential load.
2 Click Apply. Specify RAM

The default amount of allocated RAM (128 MB) is sufficient for workgroups of fewer than 10 people and projects with fewer than 1000 assets. Allocate at least 256 MB of RAM for larger workgroups and projects with up to 1000 assets. Allocate at least 512 MB of RAM if you work with more than 1000 assets per project or more than 50 projects, regardless of workgroup size.
1 In the Memory Usage box, enter the amount of RAM that you want to make available to Version Cue (the default is 128 MB). 2 Click Apply. Keep the Version Cue icon visible 1 Select Show Version Cue CS3 Tray Icon (Windows) or Show Version Cue CS3 Status in Menu Bar (Mac OS) to

keep the Version Cue icon visible.

FLASH CS3 93
User Guide

2 Click Apply. Turn Version Cue on when the computer starts 1 Select Turn Version Cue CS3 On When The Computer Starts. 2 Click Apply.

Change the location of the Data folder
The Data folder contains files that maintain the integrity of Version Cue projects, file versions, and metadata. You can change the location of the Data folder; however, you cannot move it to a network volume. If you move the Data folder to an external disk in Mac OS, make sure to deselect Ignore File Permissions in the disk’s Get Info dialog box. Important: Shut down the Version Cue Server before you change the folder location. Do not attempt to move this folder manually or edit any of the files in the Version Cue Data folder.
1 Do one of the following to access Version Cue preferences:

• In Windows, double-click the Version Cue icon • In Mac OS, click the Version Cue icon
Preferences from the menu.

in the system tray at the lower-right of the screen.

in the menu bar at the top of the screen, and choose Version Cue CS3

• Open the Control Panel and double-click Adobe Version Cue CS3 (Windows) or click Adobe Version Cue CS3 in
System Preferences (Mac OS).
2 Click the Locations tab in the Adobe Version Cue CS3 dialog box. 3 Click the Choose button next to the current Data folder location, and select a new location for the folder. You must choose a location on the computer (including external disks) where the Version Cue Server is installed. 4 Click OK. 5 Click Apply. If prompted, click Yes (Windows) or Restart (Mac OS) to restart the Version Cue Server.

See also
“Shut down or restart the Version Cue Server” on page 95

Connect to remote servers
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. When you need to work on Version Cue projects that are located on a different subnet, you can use the IP address of the computer to access the remote Version Cue Server, as long as it is configured to be visible to other users. Version Cue Servers within your subnet that are configured to be visible are visible automatically.
1 Do one of the following:

• In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, choose File > Open. If you’re using the OS Dialog
box, click Use Adobe Dialog. Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel, and choose Connect To Server from the Tools menu or Connect To from the Project Tools (Acrobat) menu .

• In Bridge, choose Tools > Version Cue > Connect To Server.
2 In the Connect To Server dialog box, type the IP or DNS address and port of the Version Cue Server, for example, http://153.32.235.230. If you’re connecting to a server that is on the same system as a Version Cue CS2 workspace, append the port number 50900 to the end of the Version Cue URL, for example, http://153.32.235.230:50900.

FLASH CS3 94
User Guide

Display the Version Cue Server Administration login page to identify the Version Cue URLs that remote users and WebDAV applications need to access the server. Alternatively, view the URLs in the Inspector in Bridge.
3 Click OK.

A shortcut to the remote server is automatically included in your list of available Version Cue Servers.

Connect to a Version Cue Server using WebDAV
Adobe recommends managing non-Adobe files with Adobe Bridge. However, if you’re collaborating with other users who don’t have access to Adobe Bridge, you can use the Version Cue WebDAV Server URL to access projects on a Version Cue Server. You can access a Version Cue Server by using a WebDAV-enabled application, such as a Microsoft Office application. In Windows, specify a project on a Version Cue Server as a network place by specifying the project’s WebDAV URL. In Mac OS, specify the project’s WebDAV URL by using the Connect To Server Command from the Finder. Before attempting to connect, refer to your application’s documentation on using its WebDAV features.
❖ Enter the Version Cue WebDAV URL, the port number (3703, or 50900 if you’re connecting to a server that is

running on the same system as a Version Cue CS2 workspace), “webdav,” and the project name. For example: http://153.32.235.230:3703/webdav/project_name

Migrate projects to the Version Cue 3.0 Server
If you currently use Version Cue CS2, you need to migrate your projects to Version Cue CS3. When you migrate Version Cue CS2 projects to Version Cue CS3, users assigned to those projects are also migrated. You cannot migrate Version Cue CS2 projects to Version Cue CS3 on Intel-based Macintosh computers. Before migrating projects, ask all users to synchronize their assets so project data is up to date.
1 Locate the folder “com.adobe.versioncue.migration_2.0.0” on the computer on which Version Cue CS3 is installed and copy it to the Version Cue CS2 Plugins folder. 2 Restart Version Cue CS2. 3 Log in to Version Cue CS3 Server Administration. 4 Click the Advanced tab, and then click Import Version Cue CS2 Data. 5 Enter a Version Cue CS2 administrator login and password, and click Log In. 6 Select the project you want to migrate, and click Migrate.

Note: If the Version Cue CS2 project has the same name as a project that exists on the Version Cue CS3 Server, Version Cue will append a number to the end of the Version Cue CS2 project name (for example, Test Project (2)). If a Version Cue CS2 user has the same user name as an existing user on the Version Cue CS3 Server, Version Cue will use the existing Version Cue CS3 user account.
7 When Version Cue Server Administration displays the confirmation page, click End. 8 Stop the Version Cue CS2 workspace. 9 Uninstall Version Cue CS2. 10 Restart the Version Cue CS3 Server. This resets the port to allow access from both Adobe Creative Suite 2 and

Adobe Creative Suite 3 components.

FLASH CS3 95
User Guide

See also
“Log in to Version Cue Server Administration” on page 115

Shut down or restart the Version Cue Server
When you shut down the Version Cue Server, you disable access to the Version Cue projects hosted on that server. Each time you restart the Version Cue Server, it performs an integrity check and makes repairs, if necessary. To ensure best performance, restart the Version Cue Server weekly so that it can perform the integrity check and make repairs.
1 Do one of the following to access Version Cue preferences:

• In Windows, double-click the Version Cue icon • In Mac OS, click the Version Cue icon
Preferences.

in the system tray at the lower-right of the screen.

in the menu bar at the top of the screen, and choose Version Cue CS3

• Open the Control Panel and double-click Adobe Version Cue CS3 (Windows) or click Adobe Version Cue CS3 in
System Preferences (Mac OS).
2 Click the Settings tab in the Adobe Version Cue CS3 dialog box.

• To shut down the Version Cue Server, click Stop. When prompted, click Yes (Windows) or Shut Down (Mac OS). • To restart the Version Cue Server, click Stop, and then click Start. • To automatically turn on Version Cue when the computer starts, select Turn Version Cue CS3 On When The
Computer Starts.
3 Click OK (Windows) or Apply Now (Mac OS).

You can also restart the Version Cue Server by clicking Restart Server in the Advanced tab of Version Cue Server Administration.

See also
“Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123

Working with Version Cue projects
About Version Cue projects
Version Cue projects are stored on Version Cue Servers. Projects store the master copies of files added to the project, as well as file versions and other file data, such as comments and version dates. When the Version Cue Server is specified to be visible and projects are shared, multiple users can access projects, which can contain both Adobe and non-Adobe files. When you first open a Version Cue project, Version Cue creates a folder named “Version Cue” in your My Documents (Windows) or Documents (Mac OS) folder, and adds a project folder to the Version Cue folder. Version Cue also creates a shortcut to the project that appears in Bridge and in the Adobe dialog box after you click the Version Cue favorite icon. You can create and administer projects only if you’ve been assigned appropriate permissions in Version Cue Server Administration.

FLASH CS3 96
User Guide

Note: If you use an Adobe Creative Suite 2 component or Acrobat 8, you won’t be able to see Version Cue CS3 projects in the Adobe dialog box or in Bridge unless the project is specified to be backward compatible with Adobe Creative Suite 2 and Acrobat 8. In addition, Creative Suite 2 components and Acrobat 8 can’t connect to a Version Cue CS3 Server that uses SSL.

See also
“About local project files” on page 101 “About versions” on page 109 “Create and manage users” on page 116

Create projects
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can create projects by using Bridge, any Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component, or Version Cue Server Administration, which provides options for specifying advanced project properties. You must have Project Administration permissions to be able to create projects in Version Cue.

See also
“Create and manage users” on page 116
Create a project 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if

you’re using the OS dialog box.
2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Choose New Project from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu

.

4 Choose a Version Cue Server to host the project from the Location menu. 5 Enter a name for the project in the Project Name box and a description in the Project Info box. 6 To make this project and its files available to others, select Share This Project With Others. 7 To create a project that Creative Suite 2 or Acrobat 8 users can access, select Maximize Compatibility With CS2 Applications And Acrobat 8. 8 Click OK. Create a project in Bridge 1 Choose Tools > Version Cue > New Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, choose a Version Cue Server to host the project from the Location menu. 3 Enter a name for the project in the Project Name box and a description in the Project Info box. 4 To make this project and its files available to others, select Share This Project With Others. 5 To create a project that Creative Suite 2 or Acrobat 8 users can access, select Maximize Compatibility With CS2 Applications And Acrobat 8. 6 Click OK.

FLASH CS3 97
User Guide

Open a project
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can open projects that are stored on a local Version Cue Server or open shared projects on a remote server that is configured to be visible to others.

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87
Open a project 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if

you’re using the OS dialog box.
2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Do one of the following:

• Double-click your local server to view its projects. • Double-click Recent Projects to open a recently opened project. • Double-click Browse Servers to locate the Version Cue Server that hosts the project. When you locate the server,
double-click it to view its projects. Note: If the server that hosts the project is outside your network, choose Connect To Server from the Tools menu or Connect To from the Project Tools menu (Acrobat), enter the IP or DNS address of the server, and click Connect.
4 Double-click the project to open it. Open a project in Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 Do one of the following:

• Double-click your local server to view its projects. • Double-click Recent Projects to open a recently opened project. • Double-click Browse Servers to locate the Version Cue Server that hosts the project. When you locate the server,
double-click it to view its projects. Note: If the server that hosts the project is outside your subnet, choose Tools > Version Cue > Connect To Server, enter the IP or DNS address of the server, and click Connect.
3 Double-click the project to open it.

Edit project properties
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can edit most of the properties of a project, including the project name, description, and shared status; the location of local project files; and the location of project backups in Bridge or in the Adobe dialog box. However, if you want to enable lock protection, edit or assign users, or require users to log in to the project, use Version Cue Server Administration instead.

FLASH CS3 98
User Guide

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97 “About local project files” on page 101 “Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration” on page 119
Access project properties

• In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, select the project in the Adobe dialog box, and then
choose Edit Properties from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu.

• In Bridge, select the project, choose View > Inspector Panel, and click Edit Properties in the Tasks area of the
Inspector panel.

• In Bridge, select the project and then choose Tools > Version Cue > Edit Properties.
Note: To edit advanced project properties in Version Cue Server Administration, click Server Administration in the Edit Properties dialog box.
Change the project name or description 1 In the Edit Properties dialog box, enter a name in the Project Name box. The new name will not be reflected in

your (or your workgroup’s) local project folder until you disconnect from and reconnect to the project. To change the description of the project, enter text in the Project Info box.
2 Click Save. Change the location of local project files 1 In the Edit Properties dialog box, expand Local Project Files to view the location of local project files on your

computer.
2 Click Change Location and choose the new location for local project files on your computer.

Note: Do not move the project folder manually in the file system to change the location of local project files.
3 Click Save.

Change a project’s shared status
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. By default, Version Cue CS3 projects are private; however, you can change a project’s shared status at any time. You can use Version Cue Server Administration to require login for shared projects, thus restricting access to specific users.

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97 “Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration” on page 119

FLASH CS3 99
User Guide

Share or unshare a project 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, select the project in the Adobe dialog box, and

then choose Edit Properties from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu.
2 Select or deselect Share This Project With Others, and click Save. Share or unshare a project from Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 Select the project, and do one of the following:

• Choose View > Inspector Panel, and click Edit Properties in the Tasks area of the Inspector panel. • Choose Tools > Version Cue > Edit Properties.
3 Select or deselect Share This Project With Others, and click Save.

Change the location of project backups
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You must shut down the Version Cue Server before you change the backup folder location. Do not move this folder manually.
1 Shut down the Version Cue Server (see “Version Cue Server Administration” on page 114. 2 Do one of the following to access Version Cue preferences:

• In Windows, double-click the Version Cue icon • In Mac OS, click the Version Cue icon
Preferences from the menu.

in the system tray at the lower-right of the screen.

in the menu bar at the top of the screen, and choose Version Cue CS3

• Open the Control Panel and double-click Adobe Version Cue CS3 (Windows) or click Adobe Version Cue CS3 in
System Preferences (Mac OS).
3 Click the Locations tab in the Adobe Version Cue CS3 dialog box. 4 Click the Choose button next to the Backup Folder location, and select a new location for the folder. You must choose a location on the computer on which the Version Cue Server is installed. 5 Click OK. 6 Click OK (Windows) or Apply Now (Mac OS). If prompted, click Yes (Windows) or Restart (Mac OS) to restart the Version Cue Server.

Add files and folders to a project
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. To save versions of a file, share the file with your workgroup, and take advantage of Version Cue file management, you must add the file to a Version Cue project. You can add both Adobe and non-Adobe files to Version Cue projects. Add files one at a time from within a Version Cue-enabled Adobe Creative Suite component by using the Adobe dialog box, or add groups of files by using the Add Files command in Bridge.

FLASH CS3 100
User Guide

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97
Add a file to a project 1 Open the file in Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop. 2 Choose File > Save As. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 3 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel, open the project to which you want to add the file, and click Save As. 4 Enter a version comment in the Check In or Save A Version (Acrobat) dialog box and click OK. Add a file or folder to a project in Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel and open the project to which you want to add files. 2 Do one of the following:

• Drag files or folders from Explorer (Windows) or the Finder (Mac OS) to the project in Bridge. (You cannot drag
empty folders to a Version Cue project in Bridge.)

• Choose Tools > Version Cue > Add Files. In the Open dialog box, select one or more files and click Open.
3 Enter a version comment in the Check In dialog box and click OK.

Delete projects
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can delete a Version Cue project in Bridge or any Version Cue-enabled Adobe Creative Suite component, or by using Version Cue Server Administration. You can’t delete a project if any user has files that are marked as Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat). Note: Remove file locks to remove the Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat) status of files designated as such. See “Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123. Deleting a project permanently erases all of its files (including versions) and folders from the Version Cue Server, and erases shortcuts to the project and the local project files on your computer. (The local project files created on other users’ computers are not deleted until they disconnect from the deleted project.)

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97 “Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration” on page 119
Delete a project
❖ In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, select the project you want to delete in the Adobe

dialog box, and then click the Delete icon
Delete a project in Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel.

.

FLASH CS3 101
User Guide

2 Select the project you want to delete, and then click the Delete Item icon

.

Disconnect from projects
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. Disconnecting from a project erases the local project files on your computer, while leaving the master copies on the Version Cue Server intact. Disconnecting also removes shortcuts to the project from Bridge and the Adobe dialog box. You may want to disconnect to free up more space on your hard drive (new local project files are created the next time you open, download, edit, or synchronize a file). You may also disconnect from a project to erase your local project files from a project deleted by someone else in your workgroup. If an administrator deletes a project in which you have local project files with Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat) status, you must manually delete the local project files folder from your hard drive. You can then disconnect from the project.

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97
Disconnect from a project 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel of the

Adobe dialog box.
2 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the project from which you want to disconnect, and then choose Disconnect. Disconnect from a project in Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the project from which you want to disconnect, and then choose Disconnect.

Working with files in Version Cue
About local project files
When you work in files from a Version Cue project, you’re editing a local copy of the file in the project folder on your hard drive, not the master file on the Version Cue Server, which remains protected and untouched. Local project files also allow you to work on a file simultaneously with others. Important: To relocate local project files on your hard drive, use the Change Location feature (don’t move the project folder manually in the file system). For instructions, see “Edit project properties” on page 97. As you work, use the Save command to save changes periodically and update your local project file. A new version is added to the master file on the Version Cue Server when you choose the Check In or Save A Version (Acrobat) command, or when you synchronize your files with the Version Cue Server.

FLASH CS3 102
User Guide

See also
“Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86 “About Version Cue projects” on page 95 “About versions” on page 109 “Synchronize files” on page 113

File statuses
Files that are managed by Version Cue are marked with a status icon that describes the state of the file on the Version Cue Server. You can view a file’s status while browsing the files in a Version Cue project, in Bridge, and also in the document window’s status area after opening a file in a Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component (in Acrobat, the status is displayed in the lower-left corner of the navigation pane). If you don’t see the Version Cue status in the document window’s status area, click the status bar and choose Show > Version Cue Status. A file can have more than one status at the same time.
Open

The file is open on your computer. The Open status is indicated only for files on your computer.

Checked Out By Me

You are editing the file. Version Cue assigns this status when you make an edit that changes the file’s content. You can mark a file as checked out before you edit it to alert other users that you intend to make changes to the content. Another user is editing the file and has not yet saved a new version.

Checked Out By <user name>

To quickly view all files checked out in a particular project, open the project and click Checked Out Files beneath the Version Cue entry in the Favorites panel of the Adobe dialog box.
Synchronized The latest known version of the file is available for editing and you have a local copy of it on your computer. Version Cue assigns this status when you check in a version of the file you’re editing, or when you synchronize a project. Conflicting New File

There is a version conflict, or both you and another user are editing the file.

The file in the local project folder is the only copy known to Version Cue and has not been synchronized with the Version Cue Server. This status may be applied, for instance, if a file is saved in an existing project for the first time while the Version Cue Server is offline. You can edit the file, but it’s important to check in or synchronize the file after you save your changes. A A local project file exists, but there is a newer version of the file on the Version Cue Server. This status indicates that it will take a few moments to download an up-to-date local project file before you can edit the file.

Newer Version On Server

Server Offline

There is a local project file, but the Version Cue Server is offline, or you are offline and not able to access the server. There is no way of checking whether the local project file is synchronized with the latest version on the Version Cue Server. You can edit an offline copy and save these changes; however, you must check in a version or synchronize the file when the Version Cue Server comes back online.

Deleted The file or folder has been deleted from the project, but not yet permanently erased. (You can restore a deleted file or folder.)

FLASH CS3 103
User Guide

See also
“Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86 “Editing and synchronizing offline files” on page 112 “Delete files or folders from a project” on page 108 “Edit files checked out by another user” on page 104

Open a file in a project
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can open files only from projects that are stored on a local Version Cue Server or from shared projects on a remote server that is configured to be visible to others.

See also
“Open a project” on page 97 “Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87
Open a project file 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, choose File > Open and click Version Cue in the

Favorites panel of the Adobe dialog box.
2 Double-click the project that contains the file you want to open. 3 Select the file, and click Open.

Note: To reveal a file in Bridge, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the file in the Adobe dialog box, and choose Reveal In Bridge.
Open a project file from Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 Double-click the project that contains the file you want to open, and then double-click the file. The file opens in

its native application.

Save changes to a local project file
If you want to save changes, but aren't ready to save a new version as you edit a file you have opened from a Version Cue project, you can use the File > Save command to save your changes to the local project file on your computer. Until you save a new version to the shared Version Cue Server, these changes won’t be available to any other user. You can also close the file once you save changes, and then reopen the file and check in a version later.
❖ To save changes to your local project file, choose File > Save.

See also
“Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86 “Check in versions” on page 109

FLASH CS3 104
User Guide

Remove local project files
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can remove files that are not checked out by you from your local project folder if you want to free up more space on your hard drive, for example. Removing local project files does not affect checked in files that are stored on the Version Cue Server. Version Cue creates new local project files the next time you synchronize the project. Disconnecting from a project also removes local project files; however, the Disconnect command also removes shortcuts to the project from Bridge and the Adobe dialog box.

• In Bridge, select a Version Cue project or project file, and choose Tools > Version Cue > Clear Local Files. • In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, select a Version Cue project or project file, and
choose Clear Local Files from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu.

See also
“Disconnect from projects” on page 101

Edit files checked out by another user
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. If someone is editing a local copy of a master file, Version Cue changes the file’s status to Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat), informs you that the file is already checked out when you try to edit your local project file, and allows you to decide whether or not to continue working with the file. When finished with the file, both users can save a new version of the file to the Version Cue Server. Version Cue alerts all current users of the file about the presence of a new version in the Version Cue Server and gives them the option of downloading the latest version or continuing their edits. Use Version Cue Server Administration to assign lock protection to a Version Cue project. Only the first user to edit an available file in a lock-protected project can check in a version of that file to the Version Cue project. For more information, see “Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration” on page 119.
Edit a file checked out by another user 1 Open the file, and choose one of the following options when the Checked Out By or In Use By (Acrobat) alert

appears:
Discard Changes Displays the most recent version of the file from the Version Cue Server and discards your changes

to the local project file.
Continue Editing Lets you edit the local project file without overwriting the changes made in another user’s local

copy of the same file (Version Cue will prompt each user to save a new version of the file).
2 If you continue working with the document and make a change to the content, Version Cue displays an alert to remind you that there is the possibility of creating conflicting copies. Choose one of the following:
No, Close Document Closes the file without any alterations. Yes, Keep Open Keeps the file open so that you can work on the document.

FLASH CS3 105
User Guide

3 If the project doesn’t have lock protection applied to it, you can save a new version of your edits. Version Cue displays an alert, warning you that conflicting edits will occur if you continue. Choose one of the following:
Cancel Returns you to the open document without checking in a version. Check In Updates the master file in the Version Cue Server with the new version. (Version Cue displays an alert to the other user to note that a newer version of the file has been created.)

At any point, you can close the document and discard any changes you made.
Update a file with the most recent version

If another user creates a new version of a file that you have open or that is still marked as Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat), Version Cue prompts you to update your document with the latest version when you open it or attempt to make changes to it, or when you bring the document window frontmost in a group of documents.
❖ When the prompt appears, choose one of the following: Discard Changes Updates the document with the most recent version from the Version Cue project. You can

continue editing the file after it is updated. You lose any changes you made even if you have already used the Save command to save those changes to the local project file.
Continue Editing Leaves the document as is. You can continue editing the file without overwriting the changes in

the more recent version. Instead, you’re prompted either to save a new version of the file when you close it or to discard your changes.

Move and copy Version Cue files
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. Use the Move To or Copy To commands in Bridge to move or copy Version Cue files within a project, among projects, or from a project to a desktop folder. When you copy or move a file, Version Cue copies or moves only the most current version.

See also
“Open a project” on page 97 “Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87
Copy Version Cue files
❖ Do any of the following:

• Select the file in Bridge and choose Edit > Copy. • Right-click the file in Bridge, choose Copy To, and choose a project or folder from the context menu (to specify a
folder not listed, choose Folder, select a desktop or project folder, and click OK).

• Ctrl-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac OS) the files to a different location. • Drag the files from one project to another (if you drag the files to a different location in the same project, they are
moved).

FLASH CS3 106
User Guide

Move Version Cue files
❖ Do any of the following:

• Right-click the file in Bridge, choose Move To, and choose a project or project folder from the context menu (to
specify a folder not listed, choose Folder, select a folder, and click OK). Note: Bridge moves files if you use the Move To command within the same Version Cue project. If you use the Move To command to move files from one Version Cue project to another or from a Version Cue project to a desktop folder, Bridge copies the files.

• Drag a file to a different location in the same project (if you drag the files from one project to another, they are
copied).

Search for Version Cue files
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can locate files in a Version Cue project by searching for specific metadata such as titles, authors, copyright data, keywords, dates, and locations. Metadata is added to Version Cue project files as you work with them. In addition, you can add other metadata to files in Adobe Creative Suite components through the File Info dialog box. Adobe Creative Suite components can contain specific metadata fields; for example, fonts and colors in InDesign files and colors in Illustrator files. You can search for files deleted from projects as well as existing files. In Bridge, you can search for Version Cue project files by version comment and past versions. (For instructions on searching in Bridge, see “Search for files and folders” in Bridge Help.) Note: Bridge doesn’t search metadata for Version Cue version comments unless you choose Checkin Comment from the Criteria menu in the Find dialog box.
1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel of the Adobe dialog box and double-click the project you want to search. 2 Click Project Search

.

3 Choose an option from the Search Category menu and enter criteria in the adjacent box. 4 Click Search.

See also
“Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86 “Open a project” on page 97 “View, promote, and delete versions” on page 110

Placing Version Cue files
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. While you’re working with a Version Cue project in Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, you can add a Version Cue file to a document just as you would place a non-Version Cue file—by using the Place command. You can also drag a file from a Version Cue project in Bridge to an open Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop file.

FLASH CS3 107
User Guide

Always add assets to a Version Cue project before placing them in a Version Cue-managed file. When you place a file that is not managed by Version Cue into a file that is, you cannot keep track of the placed asset's versions or status. The Links panel (in Illustrator, InCopy, and InDesign) displays additional information about placed files from Version Cue projects, identifying whether a linked file is being edited and which user is doing the editing. You can also use the Links panel to determine whether the linked file needs to be updated to a newer version from the Version Cue Server. For complete information on placing files into documents, see the specific application’s Help.
Replace a placed file with a previous version

You may find yourself working with multiple versions of a document that includes a link to a file with multiple versions. If you decide to promote an earlier version of the document that includes a link to an earlier version of the file, Version Cue links to the current version of the file in the promoted document. For example, suppose you create an InDesign document, place a Photoshop file in the document, and create multiple versions of both the InDesign document and the Photoshop file. If you then decide to promote an earlier version of the InDesign document, the link to the placed Photoshop file points to the current version of the file—not the version of the file to which you originally linked in the promoted InDesign document.To resolve this, replace the linked file with a previous version. Note: Illustrator, InCopy, or InDesign may display a thumbnail of the version of the file to which you originally linked in the promoted document, but the link actually points to the most current version of the file. For example, when you package an InDesign document that displays a thumbnail of the correct version, InDesign replaces the thumbnail of the file with the most current (but incorrect) version.
1 In Illustrator, InCopy, or InDesign, select the file in the Links panel. 2 Choose Versions from the Links panel menu. 3 Select a version and click Promote To Current. Enter a version comment if desired, and click Save. View files and versions in the Links panel

When Version Cue is enabled in Illustrator, InCopy, or InDesign, the Links panel identifies who is editing a linked file from a Version Cue project. The Links panel functions the same with files that are managed with Version Cue as with files that are not. For example, if a newer version of a linked file is on the Version Cue Server, the Modified Artwork icon appears; if a file is missing, the Missing Artwork icon appears. To update a linked file from a Version Cue project, you use the same procedures used for files that aren’t managed by Version Cue. The Links panel also displays a Version Cue status icon that describes the state of the file on the Version Cue Server (see “File statuses” on page 102), and displays a linked file’s versions so you can promote and use previous versions. You can even create versions of linked non-Adobe files.
❖ Do one of the following:

• To view versions of a placed file, choose Versions from the Links panel menu. • To view a tool tip that displays the versions of a placed file, place the pointer over the name of the file in the Links
panel. See Illustrator Help, InCopy Help, or InDesign Help for more information about working with the Links panel and placed files.

FLASH CS3 108
User Guide

Delete files or folders from a project
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can delete files or folders in Bridge or any Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component. Deleting a file or folder from Version Cue is a two-step process that safeguards against accidental deletions. The first step is deleting the file or folder and giving it Deleted status. Deleting hides the file or folder from normal view but does not erase it. The second step is permanently deleting and erasing the file or folder and its previous versions. Note: Any user with appropriate privileges can delete files and folders unless the files or folders are marked as Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat). If you’re in a workgroup and a user is editing a file that you need to delete, you can reset the file’s lock by using Version Cue Server Administration. In Bridge and Version Cue-enabled components of Adobe Creative Suite, you can view project files with Deleted status in Project Trash view. You can restore files or folders that have Deleted status to reinstate Version Cue management. Restored files and folders appear in their previous location in the project folder hierarchy.

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97 “About local project files” on page 101 “Delete projects” on page 100 “Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123
Delete files or folders 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel in the

Adobe dialog box, and open the project that contains the files or folders you want to delete.
2 Select the file or folder you want to delete and click the Delete

icon in the toolbar.

Delete files or folders in Bridge 1 In Bridge, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel and open the project that contains the files you want to delete. 2 Select the file and click the Delete

icon in the toolbar.

Restore a deleted file or folder 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, open the project containing the file or folder that

you want to restore in the Adobe dialog box.
2 Click Project Trash in the Favorites panel, right-click the file you want to restore, and choose Restore. 3 Choose Refresh from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu to update the dialog box.

The file or folder is restored to its original location in the Version Cue project. Note: To restore a file in a previously deleted folder, you must first restore the folder. Doing so restores the folder and all its contents.

FLASH CS3 109
User Guide

Restore a deleted file or folder in Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel and open the project that contains the files you want to restore. 2 Choose Tools > Version Cue > View Project Trash. 3 Select the file you want to restore, and choose Tools > Version Cue > Restore.

The file or folder is restored to its original location in the Version Cue project.
Delete a file or folder permanently 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, open the project containing the file or folder that

you want to delete permanently in the Adobe dialog box.
2 Click Project Trash in the Favorites panel, right-click the file you want to delete permanently, and choose Delete Permanent. 3 Click OK. Delete a file permanently in Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel and open the project that contains the files you want to delete perma-

nently.
2 Choose Tools > Version Cue > View Project Trash. 3 Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Mac OS) the file you want to permanently delete, and click Delete Permanent.

Version Cue versions
About versions
Versions track changes to a file: each version is a snapshot of the file at a particular point in time. When you edit a file from the Version Cue Server, you’re editing the last version saved to the Version Cue Server. When you’re ready to save changes to the Version Cue Server, you check in a version. You don’t have to check in a version every time you save your changes: check in a version only when you want to create a snapshot of the file. You can save comments with versions to help you track changes. You can also promote a previous version to be the current version, letting you recover from unwanted changes. You can compare multiple versions of the same file, and delete versions as they become obsolete or to save disk space. For a video on managing versions, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0115.

See also
“Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86 “About local project files” on page 101 “Save changes to a local project file” on page 103

Check in versions
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86.

FLASH CS3 110
User Guide

To check in a new version of a file, use the Check In or Save A Version (Acrobat) command, which saves your changes to the Version Cue Server and removes the Checked Out or In Use By (Acrobat) status from the file. When you check in a version, Version Cue transfers and saves only the changes you’ve made to the file. You can check in versions of non-Adobe files only if the files are in a Version Cue project and the files have been opened through Bridge. After you check in versions of non-Adobe files, you can access them from the Versions dialog box in Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite components and from the Inspector or Content panel in Bridge. Note: You can save versions of nonembedded graphics, image, and text files in InCopy, InDesign, and Illustrator by using the Edit Original command in the Links panel. After editing the file, save it in its native application. Then, in the Links panel, select the file and use the Save Link Version command to check in a version in the Version Cue project. For more information, see InCopy Help, InDesign Help, or Illustrator Help.

See also
“Open a project” on page 97
Check in a version 1 Do one of the following:

• In Flash, InCopy, Illustrator, InDesign, or Photoshop, choose File > Check In. • In Acrobat, choose File > Save A Version. • In Bridge, select the file or files you want to check in and click the Check In button.
2 In the Check In dialog box, enter comments that you want to associate with the version, and then click OK. Check in a non-Adobe file 1 Start Bridge. 2 In Bridge, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel and then open the project containing the file that you want to check out. 3 Double-click the file to check it out and open it. 4 When the file opens in its native application, make your changes, and save and close the file. 5 In Bridge, click the Check In button. 6 In the Check In dialog box, enter comments that you want to associate with the version, and then click OK.

View, promote, and delete versions
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. Versions are treated as separate files, which you can access through the Versions dialog box in all Version Cueenabled Creative Suite components or through the Content panel in Bridge. The Versions dialog box and Bridge display thumbnails of all file versions (numbered sequentially) with comments, dates, and the login name of the user who created the version. If you want to compare versions in detail, you can choose to view each version in its native application. If you want both a previous version and the current version to be available for simultaneous use in a project, save the previous version as a separate asset.

FLASH CS3 111
User Guide

Viewing versions in the Adobe dialog box

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97 “Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123
View versions 1 In Acrobat, Flash, InCopy, Illustrator, InDesign, or Photoshop, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel of the

Adobe dialog box and open the project that contains the file whose versions you want to view.
2 Select the file whose versions you want to view. 3 Choose Versions from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu

.

Versions appear in the Versions dialog box. You can view versions of a file while it’s open in a Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component: Choose Versions from the status menu at the bottom of the document window.
View versions in Bridge 1 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 Open the project containing the file for which you want to view versions, and select the file. 3 Choose Tools > Version Cue > Versions, or click the Versions button in the Content panel. Versions appear in the Content panel. View a previous version in its native application

If you view a previous version in its native application, changes you make won’t be reflected in the current version (unless you promote the previous version to be the current version). You can, however, save edits to a previous version as a new asset.
❖ Do one of the following:

• In the Versions dialog box, click the version that you want to open and click View. • In Bridge, double-click the version you want to open.

FLASH CS3 112
User Guide

Version Cue opens the previous version in its native application. The version number appears in the file’s title bar to remind you that it is not the current version. The file status is Never Saved, because the previous version is only a snapshot of a previous stage of the file.
Promote a version

Promoting a previous version saves a copy of the previous version as the current version. This process keeps the previous version intact, should you decide to return to it again in the future. Any changes made between its creation and promotion don’t appear in the new current version.
1 Do one of the following:

• In the Versions dialog box, select the version you want to promote, and click Promote To Current Version. • In Bridge, select the version you want to promote, and click Promote.
2 Type a version comment in the Check In dialog box and click Continue. Delete a version
❖ Do one of the following:

• In the Versions dialog box, select the version you want to delete and click Delete. • In Bridge, select the version you want to delete, and click Delete This Version.
Note that the remaining versions are not renumbered. Using Version Cue Server Administration, you can delete multiple previous versions of all files in a project simultaneously. By using this method, you can retain past versions by date or by number of versions to keep. See “Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123.

Editing and synchronizing offline files
About offline files
When you need to work on files from a Version Cue project while the Version Cue Server is unavailable, you can edit local project files on your computer. When the Version Cue Server is available again, you must synchronize your files with the Version Cue Server to save your latest version to the Version Cue Server. You can synchronize an entire project, or just a folder or a file in the project. To prepare to work with offline files, it’s best to first synchronize the entire Version Cue project while the server is still online to ensure that you have local project files. You can then edit the offline files and synchronize them once the server is back online.

Edit offline files
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can edit offline files from an unavailable Version Cue Server by opening offline copies. If you know that you’ll be working with an offline file, you should first check the file out before going offline (see “Manually check out a file,” below).

FLASH CS3 113
User Guide

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97
Edit local project files from an offline project 1 In Acrobat, Flash, InCopy, Illustrator, InDesign, or Photoshop, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel of the

Adobe dialog box and open the project that contains the file you want to edit. It may take Version Cue a few seconds to verify that the Version Cue Server is unavailable.
2 Double-click the file to open it (the Offline Copy status allows you to open the file). 3 When you finish editing the file, choose File > Save to save the changes to the local project file. When the

Version Cue Server becomes available again, synchronize your files. If the Version Cue Server becomes available while you’re editing an offline file in an Adobe application, Version Cue will automatically mark the file as Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat).
Manually check out a file

If you intend to work on a file from an offline Version Cue Server, you should first manually mark the file as Checked Out before the server goes offline. When you mark a file as Checked Out, Version Cue creates a local project file for you and protects the file from editing by other users.
❖ Do one of the following:

• In Bridge, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel, navigate to the file, and click the Check Out button. • In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel of the
Adobe dialog box and open the project that contains the file. Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the file, and then choose Check Out or Mark In Use (Acrobat). Click Cancel to close the Adobe dialog box.

Synchronize files
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. If you’ve worked with offline files, you must synchronize your files with the Version Cue Server to save your latest version to the Version Cue Server. You may also want to synchronize if another user has saved a newer version of a file to the Version Cue Server.

See also
“Use the Adobe dialog box” on page 87 “Open a project” on page 97
Synchronize files 1 In Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, or Photoshop, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel of the

Adobe dialog box and select the project, folder, or file you want to synchronize. Do one of the following:

• To download assets from the Version Cue Server for which you have no corresponding local project files, choose
Download from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu synchronized). Project Tools (Acrobat) menu . (if Download is not available, the assets are already

• To both upload and download assets to and from the Version Cue Server, choose Synchronize from the Tools or

FLASH CS3 114
User Guide

2 If prompted, choose an option in the File Conflict dialog box. Synchronize files in Bridge 1 In Bridge, click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 Select a project, folder, or file, and do one of the following:

• To download assets from the Version Cue Server for which you have no corresponding local project files, choose
Tools > Version Cue > Download (if Download is not available, the assets are already synchronized).

• To both upload and download assets to and from the Version Cue Server, choose Tools > Version Cue >
Synchronize (or click the Synchronize button in the toolbar).
3 If prompted, choose an option in the File Conflict dialog box. File conflict options

If the master file on the Version Cue Server is newer than your local project file and you’ve made changes to the local project file, a File Conflict dialog box appears with the following options:
Apply The Following Action To All Subsequent Conflicts Automatically applies the selected option every time there

is a file conflict.
Check In Saves your local project file as a new version to the Version Cue Server. Skip This File Prevents the most recent version from the Version Cue Server from being downloaded. (This option

also prevents a version of your local project file from being saved to the server.) Choose this option only if you want to keep your edits and disregard the other changes in the master file.

Version Cue Server Administration
About Version Cue Server Administration
Use Version Cue Server Administration to create, edit, and delete projects; manage user and group access; view logs and reports; initiate and manage web-based PDF reviews; and perform advanced server administration tasks such as deleting file versions, removing file locks, configuring plug-ins, and backing up the Version Cue Server. The Version Cue Server Administration web page is divided into four tabs. Each tab contains controls that enable you to configure Version Cue. You can access Version Cue Server Administration from the Version Cue icon, from a web browser, or from any Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component.

FLASH CS3 115
User Guide

A

B

Users/Groups and Projects tabs of Version Cue Server Administration A. Tabs B. Controls

Version Cue Server Administration software requirements
Version Cue Server Administration for Windows requires the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.5 or later to import projects from folders. You can download the Java Runtime Environment from the Sun Microsystems Java website at www.java.com/en/download/manual.jsp. Version Cue Server Administration for both Windows and Mac OS requires Adobe Flash Player 9 for user and group administration. When you first create users and groups, Version Cue will prompt you to install Flash Player.

Log in to Version Cue Server Administration
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. When you turn on the Version Cue Server for the first time, Version Cue automatically creates a default login name (system) with administrator privileges and asks you to specify a password. This login name and password let you log in to Version Cue Server Administration. Other users with administrator privileges can also log in to Version Cue Server Administration.
Log in from the Version Cue icon 1 Do one of the following:

• (Windows) Right-click the Version Cue icon in the system tray and choose Server Administration.

On Windows, right-click the Version Cue icon.

• (Mac OS) Click the Version Cue icon at the top of the screen, and then click Server Administration.
2 Type your Version Cue login name and password in the boxes, and click Log In. Log in from a Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component

You can also log in to Version Cue Server Administration from Acrobat, Flash, InCopy, InDesign, Illustrator, and Photoshop.
1 Choose File > Open, and click Use Adobe Dialog.

FLASH CS3 116
User Guide

2 Choose Connect To Server from the Tools menu or Connect To from the Project Tools menu (Acrobat), type the IP or DNS address and port of the Version Cue Server you want to administer, and click OK. The default port number is 3703 (50900 if you’re connecting to a Version Cue CS3 server that’s installed on the same system as a Version Cue CS2 workspace). 3 Choose Edit Properties from the Tools or Project Tools (Acrobat) menu 4 Click Server Administration in the Edit Properties dialog box. 5 Type your Version Cue login name and password in the boxes, and click Log In. Log in from a web browser 1 In a web browser, type the IP or DNS address of the computer on which the Version Cue Server is installed.

.

Precede the address with http:// and follow it with a colon and the default port number, for example, http://153.32.235.230:3703 (IP) or http://myserver.mycompany.com:3703 (DNS). The default port number is 3703 (50900 if you’re connecting to a Version Cue CS3 server that’s installed on the same system as a Version Cue CS2 workspace). Note: If the server is installed locally, type http://localhost:3703.
2 A browser window displays the Adobe Version Cue Server Administration login page. Type your Version Cue

login name and password in the boxes, and click Log In.

Create and manage users
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. Only users who have been granted System Administrator access privileges can create, import, export, and edit Version Cue users. If you didn’t enable automatic user account creation when you turned on the Version Cue Server, you need to create Version Cue user names to let other users access projects on the Version Cue Server. To restrict the Version Cue projects that a user can access, you can require login for the project and assign user names and permissions to that project. Adobe Flash Player 9 is required to create and manage users in Version Cue Server Administration. When you first create users, Version Cue will prompt you to install Adobe Flash Player 9.

See also
“Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration” on page 119
Create, edit, or delete users

Create users to let them access projects on the Version Cue Server.
1 Click the Users/Groups tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click New in the Users area. 2 In the New User dialog box, enter a user name, login, password, and choose the level of access to give the user from the Admin Access Level menu:

• None denies the user access to Version Cue Server Administration. • User grants standard access to Version Cue Server Administration. Users with standard access can create new
projects (if also granted project creation permissions) and modify projects they have created.

• System Administrator grants full access to all tasks in Version Cue Server Administration.

FLASH CS3 117
User Guide

3 Select Project Creation to enable the user to create new Version Cue projects. 4 (Optional) Type a phone number, an e-mail address, and comments in the remaining boxes. Make sure to enter an e-mail address if the user will participate in Version Cue PDF reviews. 5 Click Save.

To edit a user, select the user, click Edit, change settings in the Edit [User Name] dialog box, and click Save. To delete a user, select the user, and click Delete.
Create, edit, or delete a user group

Create user groups to group users with similar permissions. For example, create a user group named “Designers” to group all users who are contributing artwork to a design project. The default group “Everyone” contains all users in the system.
1 Click the Users/Groups tab in Version Cue Server Administration. 2 Click New in the Groups area. 3 In the New Group dialog box, enter a name for the group. Optionally, enter a comment, and then click Save. 4 Add users to the group by dragging them from the Users area to the new group.

To change the name of a group, select it, click Edit, and enter a new name in the Groupname box. To delete a group, select it, and click Delete.
Assign permissions to users and groups

You can assign permissions to individual users, or to a group of users. Permissions are different from access levels: Access levels control access to Version Cue Server Administration, while permissions control access to the Version Cue Server, projects, and Version Cue PDF reviews. Note that permissions you assign to users or groups may be overwritten by permissions you assign to users for specific projects.
1 Do either of the following:

• To assign permissions to a user, select the user in the Users/Groups tab of Version Cue Server Administration. • To assign permissions to all users in a group, select the group in the Users/Groups tab of Version Cue Server
Administration.
2 Select Allow or Deny for each permissions category in the Global Permissions section:

To allow or deny all permissions, choose Allow or Deny from the Presets menu. To display the default permissions assigned to a user or group, select the user or group and click Effective Permissions.

• Read allows viewing projects and the files, versions, and file information within them. • Write allows adding files to a project and saving versions and file information. • Delete allows deleting projects or the files within them. • Review Initiator allows initiating PDF reviews in Version Cue Server Administration (see “Start a Version Cue
PDF review” on page 126).

• Project Administration allows administering projects (for example, duplicating, backing up, exporting, and
deleting projects).
3 Click Save Permissions.

FLASH CS3 118
User Guide

Import users from an LDAP directory

LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is a method of querying directory systems that contain information, such as user names and passwords, about users. You can import users from an LDAP server and map their user attributes (such as user name and password) to Version Cue user attributes. Users that you import from an LDAP server appear with a user icon that is different from the typical user icon . Note: If you enabled Automatic User Account Creation when you configured the Version Cue Server and then subsequently enable LDAP support, LDAP users are automatically imported when they access the server with their LDAP account name. Users imported in this fashion are added to the Everyone group, given a user access level of None, and are not able to log into Version Cue Server Administration. Use this technique to automatically assign LDAP users default access rights to projects on a Version Cue server without having to explicitly import users.
1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration. 2 Click LDAP Preferences. 3 Click Enable LDAP Support, and then enter information about the LDAP server:

• Enter the server name in the LDAP Server box. • Enter the server port in the Server Port box. • Enter the starting point in the LDAP hierarchy for the directory on the LDAP server in the Searchbase box. • If the LDAP server requires authentication, enter a user name and password in the Username and Password boxes. • Select Use LDAP with SSL if you want to connect via SSL to an SSL-enabled LDAP server. • Enter LDAP attributes in the User-Id, Displayname, E-Mail, Info, and Phone boxes. Version Cue maps these to the
corresponding Version Cue Server attributes.

• To specify that the Version Cue Server periodically synchronizes with the LDAP server, select Enable Automatic
Synchronization and specify a synchronization period.
4 Click Save. 5 In the Users/Groups tab of Version Cue Server Administration, click Click To Maximize in the Users area. 6 Click Import External Users. 7 Type the first few letters of the LDAP user name or names you want to import in the External User dialog box. (Version Cue auto-completes the entry.) 8 Select the name or names, and click Add. 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 until you’ve added all desired LDAP users, and then click Import User. Export a list of users

To add a set of users to another Version Cue Server, export a list of users and then copy it to the UsersExport folder in the Version Cue application folder of the other computer with a Version Cue Server. You can then use the export list to import users.
1 Click the Users/Groups tab in Version Cue Server Administration. 2 Click To Maximize in the Users area. 3 Click Export Users. 4 Select the users you want to export (Shift-click to select contiguous users, Ctrl-click to select noncontiguous users). 5 Type a name for the list in the filename box. Optionally, type remarks in the Comments box.

FLASH CS3 119
User Guide

6 Click Export.

The location of the user list appears under the Export Users heading. To import this list into another Version Cue Server, copy this file into the destination server’s Data/UsersExport folder in the Version Cue application folder.
Import users from a list 1 Click the Users/Groups tab in Version Cue Server Administration and then click Import Users. 2 Click the user list that you want to import. 3 Select the check box next to each user name that you want to import, or select the check box next to the User Name column label to select all user names. 4 Click Next.

Create and manage projects in Version Cue Server Administration
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. You can create a new blank Version Cue project, a project from files in a folder on the computer where the Version Cue Server is installed, or a project from a WebDAV or FTP server. Once you’ve created a project, you can edit its properties in the Projects tab at any time.
Create a new Version Cue project 1 Click the Projects tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click New:

• Click Blank Project to create an empty Version Cue project. • Click Import From Folder to create a project that contains files from a folder of files on the hard drive. • Click Import From FTP Server or Import From WebDAV Server to import a website or to import files from a
folder on an FTP or WebDAV server.
2 Type a project name in the New Project Name box. 3 Specify Version Cue project properties (see “Version Cue project properties” below). 4 Click Create (if you’ve created a new blank project) or Next (if you’ve created a project from a folder of files on an FTP or WebDAV server or on your hard drive). 5 If you chose to import a project from a folder, do the following, and then click Import:

• If the content you’re importing is a website, select Import Folder As A Website. • To specify the folder to import from, click Browse and select a folder.
Note: Don’t navigate away from Version Cue Server Administration after you click Import. If you navigate away before all files have been imported into the project, Version Cue will create the project, but the project won’t contain all files.
6 If you chose to import a project from an FTP or WebDAV server, do the following, and then click Import:

• If the content you’re importing is a website, select Import FTP Directory As A Website or Import WebDAV
Directory As A Website.

• In the FTP Server or WebDAV Server box, specify the server from which to import files, and type the port number
in the Port box.

• To specify a folder, click Browse and select a folder. • If a user name and password are required to access the server, type them in the User Name and Password boxes.

FLASH CS3 120
User Guide

• To use a proxy server to connect to the server, select Use Proxy. • To use passive mode to connect to the server, select Use Passive Mode.
7 If you chose to require login for the project, click Assign Permissions and assign permissions to users (see “Assign user permissions,” below). Version Cue project properties

Specify these options when creating or editing Version Cue projects in Version Cue Server Administration:
Share This Project With Others Users can be on your subnet, or they can be given the Version Cue Server IP or DNS address and port number to gain access to the Version Cue Server. Require Login For This Project Ensures that only users with a Version Cue login ID and password have access to the

project. Note: If you select this option after other users have already accessed the project without being authenticated, those users can still access the project without logging in to it. Make sure that you change their privileges as needed in the project’s list of assigned users.
Enable Lock Protection For This Project Restricts file versioning to sequential versions. Only the first user to edit an

available file in a lock-protected project can check in a version of that file to the Version Cue project. Other users can’t check in a version until the first user saves a version and closes the file or reverts to the project version of the file and closes it—other users must save their changes as completely new files with their own version thread.
Maximize Compatibility With CS2 Applications And Acrobat 8 Creates a project that uses the Version Cue CS2 project structure so that Adobe Creative Suite 2 or Acrobat 8 users can work with Version Cue CS3 projects. Comments Stores any remarks you type about the project.

Assign user permissions

If you chose to require login when creating a project, you need to assign permissions to users to define their access to the project.
1 In the Assign Permissions area of Version Cue Server Administration, select the user or the group that contains the users for which you want to assign permissions. 2 Select Allow or Deny for each permissions category in the Permissions for [user name] section:

To allow or deny all permissions, choose Allow or Deny from the Presets menu. To display the effective global and project permissions assigned to a user or group, select the user or group and click Effective Permissions.

• Read lets the user see files, versions, and file information in the project. • Write lets the user create files, versions, and file information in the project. • Delete lets the user delete files from the project. • Review Initiator lets the user initiate PDF reviews in Version Cue Server Administration (see “Start a Version Cue
PDF review” on page 126).

• Project Administration lets the user administer projects (for example, duplicating, backing up, exporting, and
deleting projects).
3 Click Set Permissions.

FLASH CS3 121
User Guide

Duplicate a Version Cue project

Duplicate a project to start a new project with the same users and privileges. Version Cue duplicates the folder hierarchy within the project structure.
1 Click the Projects tab in Version Cue Server Administration. 2 Select the check box next to the project you want to duplicate, and click Duplicate. 3 In the Duplicate Project page, type a unique name for the project. 4 Edit project properties, and click Duplicate. Delete a Version Cue project 1 Click the Projects tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and do one of the following:

• To delete one or more projects, select the check box next to each project you want to delete. • To delete all listed projects, select the check box next to the Project Name column label.
2 Click Delete. The Delete Project page appears. 3 Select User Locks Will Be Ignored to delete the project even if a user has files checked out. 4 Click Delete. Export a Version Cue project to your computer or to an FTP or WebDAV server

You can export the most recent version of all project files from the Version Cue Server. Export if you want to move files from one host computer (or server) to another, create a package of the most recent files for output, or simply create an archive of the final versions. Version Cue still manages projects moved between computers. Note: If you want to move a project, first decide whether to back it up (so that all past versions are also moved) or to export it (so that only the current versions of project files are moved).
1 Click the Projects tab in Version Cue Server Administration. Select the check box next to the project you want to

export, and click Export.
2 In the Export Project page, choose a protocol by which to export the project. 3 Do one of the following:

• If you chose Export Project To Folder in step 2, specify the folder to which you want to export the project. • If you chose Export Project To FTP Server or Export Project To WebDAV Server in step 2, specify the server
address in the Server Address box, specify a folder in the Directory box, and enter a user name and password (if required). To use a proxy server to connect, select Use Proxy. If you are connecting to the server through a firewall, or if you specified a port other than 21, select Use Passive Mode. (This is an option only if you choose FTP in the Protocol menu.)
4 Click Export.

Back up and restore projects
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86.

FLASH CS3 122
User Guide

When you back up a Version Cue project, Version Cue Server Administration creates backups of all the information in a Version Cue project, including all versions of all files in the project. Use a project backup to move a project from one Version Cue Server to another while retaining all the versions of that project. You can restore a backup copy that represents a Version Cue project as it was on a specific date. Restored project backups do not replace the original Version Cue project. You can customize a backup configuration for your projects in the Version Cue project preferences. You can back up a project using a new configuration or an existing configuration. A backup configuration includes the ability to schedule a recurring backup for the project. By default, project backups are stored in the Program Files/Common Files/Adobe/Adobe Version Cue CS3/Server/Backups folder (Windows) or the Library/Application Support/Adobe/Adobe Version Cue CS3/Server/Backups folder (Mac OS).
Back up a Version Cue project 1 Click the Projects tab in Version Cue Server Administration. 2 Click the check box next to the project name, and then click Back Up. 3 In the Backup Name box, accept the backup name, or type a new name. 4 Choose the project components that you want to back up: Project Content (which is always selected) to back up files, Project File Versions to back up all versions of the files, Project Metadata to back up embedded information entered in Adobe Creative Suite components, and Users/User Assignments to back up information about the users and their project privileges. 5 Click Back Up. Restore a Version Cue project backup copy 1 Click the Projects tab in Version Cue Server Administration. 2 Click Project Backups. 3 Select the backup that you want to restore. 4 In the New Project Name box, type a name that is different from those of other projects in the Version Cue Server. 5 Do any of the following, and then click Restore:

• To retain the list of users that were assigned to the project, select Restore Users. • To retain the same privileges for each assigned user, select Restore User Assignments. • To add remarks, type them in the Comments box.
Create a new backup configuration

When you create a new configuration, it becomes the default for the project.
1 Click the Projects tab in Version Cue Server Administration. 2 Click the project for which you want to create a new backup configuration. 3 Click Backup Configurations, and then click New. 4 Type a name for the backup configuration in the Backup Name box.

FLASH CS3 123
User Guide

5 Select what to back up in the Include list of options: Project Content (which is always selected) to back up files, Project File Versions to back up all the versions of the project, Project Metadata to back up embedded information entered in Adobe Creative Suite components, and Users/User Assignments to back up information about the users and their project privileges. 6 (Optional) Add remarks to the backup file in the Comments box. 7 Click Schedule, and choose an option from the Repeat menu if you want backups to occur automatically (choose Don’t Repeat if you want to back up the project manually). 8 Click Save.

Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks
Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set. See “Accessing Version Cue features” on page 86. Perform advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks, such as backing up the server, specifying proxies, and enabling SSL, in the Advanced tab of Version Cue Server Administration.

See also
“Change the location of the Data folder” on page 93
View Version Cue Server and plug-in information and log files

You can display the Version Cue Server version, name, Java version, database version, Version Cue URL (IP or DNS address), and WebDAV URL with Version Cue Server Administration. You can also view the Version Cue Server log file, which tracks all server operations according to the level of detail you specify. Log files are saved in the Logs folder in the Version Cue application folder.
❖ Click the Advanced tab of Version Cue Server Administration and do any of the following:

• To view Version Cue Server information, click Server Info. • To view information about installed Version Cue plug-ins, click Plugins Overview. • To view the Version Cue Server log file, click Server Log. • To specify the log level (Error, Warning, or Info), specify the maximum log size, or reduce the log size by saving
it as a compressed file, click Preferences and set these options.
View a Version Cue import or export report 1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Reports. 2 Choose the type of report you want to view from the Report menu. 3 To view available reports from a single project, choose the project name from the Filter By menu. To view available reports from all projects on the Version Cue Server, choose All. 4 Click the project’s name in the Project Name column to display the report. 5 To print a copy of the report, click Print View. 6 To return to the report list, click File List.

To delete a report, select it in the Report List and click Delete.

FLASH CS3 124
User Guide

Back up the Version Cue Server

You can back up the complete Version Cue Server to move a complete server from one computer to another. Important: If you restore a backup copy of the Version Cue Server, all current data on the server, including Version Cue projects, files, and versions, is replaced by the backup. Server backup files are saved to the default Backups folder in the Version Cue application folder.
1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Back Up Version Cue Data. 2 To add remarks about the server backup, type them in the Comments box. 3 Click Save. After the backup is complete, click OK to view the list of server backups. Replace a project with a previous backup

To replace current projects on a Version Cue Server with a previous version, you first restore the backup. When you do this, Version Cue Server Administration shuts down.
1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Administer Backups. 2 Click the backup you want to restore and then click Restore. The Version Cue Server shuts down. Close the browser. (Notice that the Version Cue icon in the system tray indicates that it’s off .) 3 Start the Version Cue Server. 4 log in to Version Cue Server Administration. Change the name of the Version Cue Server 1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Preferences. 2 Type a name in the Server Name box. Specify HTTP and FTP proxies 1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Preferences. 2 Specify the default FTP proxy server for users importing projects from or exporting projects to an FTP server. 3 Specify the default HTTP Proxy server for users importing projects from or exporting projects to a WebDAV server. Remove file locks from a Version Cue project

Remove file locks to remove the Checked Out or In Use (Acrobat) status of files designated as such. A user with system administrator access or with project-specific Project Administration privileges can remove file locks.
1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Reset Locks (under Maintenance).

• Choose a project from the Project Name menu. • Choose a user from the User Name menu.
2 Click Reset Locks to remove the specified file locks. Delete file versions in a project

Delete file versions to improve performance. Each time you check in a version, it’s stored in the Version Cue Server database. This database creates a file version history that lets you quickly return to any former state of the file. An extensive history takes up disk space and can degrade the performance of the Version Cue Server.
1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Remove Old Versions.

FLASH CS3 125
User Guide

2 Choose a project from the Project Name menu. 3 To delete versions, select Delete All Versions Older Than, and then choose a month, day, and year. 4 To specify the maximum number of versions to remain in the server after you click Delete, select Number Of Versions To Keep, and then type a number in the box. 5 Click Delete. Grant access to the server without an existing user account

If you select this option, Version Cue creates a new user account without a password when a new user accesses the Version Cue Server.
1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Preferences. 2 Select Automatic User Creation to enable users to access the server without an existing user account. Enable SSL

Enabling Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the Version Cue Server enables secure communication between the server and Bridge or a Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component. When you enable SSL, the Version Cue Server sends data over an encrypted connection. Note: Acrobat 8 and Creative Suite 2 components can’t connect to a Version Cue CS3 Server that uses SSL.
1 Click the Advanced tab in Version Cue Server Administration, and then click Security Preferences.

• To enable SSL, select Use SSL. • To view the existing SSL certificate, click View The Currently Installed SSL Certificate. • To load a custom SSL certificate, click Import A Custom SSL Certificate, select the certificate you want to use, and
click Import.
2 Click Save. Restart the Version Cue Server 1 In the Advanced tab of Version Cue Server Administration, click Restart Server. 2 Click Restart.

You can also restart the Version Cue Server in Version Cue Preferences.

Version Cue PDF reviews
About Version Cue PDF reviews
Using Version Cue Server Administration, you can set up and conduct web-based reviews of PDF documents that are on a Version Cue Server. You can conduct Version Cue PDF reviews for Adobe Illustrator (AI) files that have been saved with the Enable PDF Compatibility option without first converting them to PDF. The AI files appear with PDF files in the Document List when you start a Version Cue PDF review.

FLASH CS3 126
User Guide

As the review progresses, reviewers upload their comments to the Version Cue Server. When a review is complete, you can view all comments either in the context of the original document or as a list in Version Cue Server Administration.

• To use Version Cue PDF review, reviewers need a Version Cue login name and privileges that allow them to log in
to the Version Cue Server hosting the review.

• To view the PDF and add comments, users need Acrobat 7.0 Professional or later. For more information about
commenting in Acrobat, see Acrobat Help.

Start a Version Cue PDF review
You can start a Version Cue PDF review for any version of any PDF document that is on a Version Cue Server, provided that you have appropriate privileges to access Version Cue Server Administration. Only one version of a PDF document may be in review at any point in time.
1 Log in to Version Cue Server Administration. (For instructions, see “Log in to Version Cue Server Administration” on page 115.) 2 Click the Version Cue CS3 PDF Review link at the top of the page.

• In the main Version Cue CS3 PDF review page, click Start A Review. • Click the Documents tab, and choose Not Started from the Review Status menu.
3 In the Document List, click the name of the PDF document you want to review. 4 Choose the version you want to review, and then click Start Review. 5 In the Start Review page, enter review information:

• To set an end date for the review, select Deadline, and then choose the end date from the Year, Month, and Day
menus.

• To let reviewers see each other’s comments, select Open under Review Mode. Select Private if you want reviewers
to see only their own comments.

• Type a description of the review in the Description box. • To add reviewers, select the reviewers’ names in the Reviewers section. (Click the check box next to the Reviewers
column label to select or deselect all reviewers.) Note: If a reviewer is outside your workgroup and doesn’t have a Version Cue login, you need to set one up in advance. You must also provide network access—typically through a firewall—for outside reviewers.
6 Click Next. 7 To send an e-mail invitation to reviewers, select Send E-Mail Invitation, and then modify the Mail Subject and Mail Message as desired. In the E-Mail Recipients section, choose reviewers that you wish to invite by e-mail. 8 Click Start Review. 9 If you chose to invite reviewers by e-mail, Version Cue starts your e-mail program and displays an e-mail message addressed to the reviewers. The e-mail includes a direct link to the document being reviewed. Confirm the contents of the review e-mail, and send it.

Manage PDF reviews
After you locate a PDF review, you can open it, view or delete review comments, edit review settings, stop or restart a review, or delete the review from the Version Cue Server.

FLASH CS3 127
User Guide

Locate PDF reviews 1 log in to Version Cue Server Administration. (For instructions, see “Log in to Version Cue Server Administration”

on page 115.)
2 Click the Version Cue CS3 PDF Review link at the top of the page. 3 Do one of the following:

• If you don’t know the name of the PDF document under review, or want to view all active reviews, click Active
Reviews in the Home tab.

• If you don’t know the name of the PDF document for which a review has been completed, or want to view all
completed reviews, click Finished Reviews in the Home tab.

• If you want to search for a PDF document that is under review or for which a review has been completed, click
Search Documents in the Home tab, and choose search criteria from the Project Name, Review Status, and List Entries menus. To find a PDF document by its name, enter the name or part of it in the Document Name field. Click Search.
Open an active or completed PDF review 1 Locate the review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List, and then select any of the versions in the Document History list. Stop a PDF review 1 Locate the review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List. 3 In the Document History list, select the active review and click Stop Review.

To restart a completed review, click Start Review in the Document History list. Note: After you click Start Review, you see a series of screens that refer to starting, rather than restarting, a review. However, this procedure does restart the review of the existing document.
Delete a PDF review

When you delete a review, Version Cue permanently removes the review comments. However, review comments for a PDF file are also deleted if you permanently delete the file itself from the Version Cue Server. Note that if you delete only a version of a PDF file from the server, the review comments for that version are deleted.
1 Locate the review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List. 3 In the Document History list, select a version and click Delete Review. 4 When Version Cue prompts you to delete the review, click Delete. Edit review settings 1 Locate the review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List. 3 Select one of the versions in the Document History list, and click Edit Review Settings.

• To set or change an end date for the review, select Deadline, and then choose the end date from the Year, Month,
and Day menus.

FLASH CS3 128
User Guide

• To let reviewers see each other’s comments, select Open under Review Mode. Select Private if you want reviewers
to see only their own comments.

• To add or edit a description of the review, type the information in the Description box. • To add or remove reviewers, select or deselect the reviewers’ names in the Reviewers section (click the check box
next to the Reviewers column heading to select or deselect all reviewers).
4 Click Next. 5 To send an e-mail invitation to reviewers, select Send E-Mail Invitation, and then modify Mail Subject and Mail Message as desired. In the E-Mail Recipients section, choose reviewers that you wish to invite by e-mail. 6 Click Save Review. If you chose to invite reviewers by e-mail, Version Cue starts your e-mail program and displays an e-mail message addressed to the reviewers. This e-mail includes a direct link to the document being reviewed. Confirm the contents of the review e-mail, and send it. Set viewing options in the Document List

• To display only PDF documents in a specific project, choose that project from the Project menu. • To limit the number of documents displayed, choose an option from the List Entries menu (use the arrows to the
right of the List Entries menu to view additional files).

• To limit the list according to document name, enter part of a document name in the Document Name field and
press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS). (To view all files again, delete the text in the Document Name field and press Enter or Return.)

• To sort the list by the entries in a column, click the column heading. (Click the heading again to reverse the sort
order.)

View or delete PDF review comments
Review comments include, in addition to the text of the comment itself, information about who created the comment and when, what type of comment was created, and what page of the document the comment appears on. You can use any of the Acrobat commenting tools in a Version Cue PDF review. Version Cue stores review comments on the Version Cue Server. You can view comments in Version Cue Server Administration or directly in the PDF document. To view all review comments directly in the document, you must access the document either by using the link from the review invitation or by opening the review document from Version Cue Server Administration. (If you open the review document from the Open dialog box in Acrobat or from Bridge, the review comments aren’t visible.) For more information about Acrobat commenting tools, search for “commenting” in Acrobat Help.
1 Locate the review. 2 Click the PDF document in the Document List. 3 Do one of the following:

• To view all review comments directly in the PDF document, click the version name. • To view review comments in Version Cue Server Administration, select the version in the Document History list
and click View Comments. To view any of the comments in the context of the PDF document, select a comment and then click Open In Acrobat.

FLASH CS3 129
User Guide

• To delete review comments in Version Cue Server Administration, select the comment and click Delete
Comments. (To select all comments, click the check box next to the Page column heading.)

See also
“Manage PDF reviews” on page 126

Troubleshooting
Multiple local project files folders

If you accessed a project that has the same name on two different Version Cue Servers, Version Cue may create multiple copies of what appear to be the project’s local project files folder, but are actually the local project files folders of the two different projects accessed from the different servers. Version Cue names these folders with the project name and a number (for example, project_001, project_002). You can delete these folders after you save versions of your local project files to the Version Cue Server. (Or, you can simply ignore the multiple local project file folders.) To delete the local project files folders, use Adobe Bridge to disconnect from each project (see “Disconnect from projects” on page 101).
Offline projects

If your network access becomes unavailable while you’re working with a Version Cue project (for example, if you’re traveling with a laptop computer), Version Cue may show the project as offline the next time you connect. To reestablish a connection to a Version Cue Server, select the Version Cue icon in the Favorites panel of the Adobe dialog box or Adobe Bridge (this forces Version Cue to reset its network connection to available servers). Then, locate the Version Cue project that contains your files.
Incomplete actions

In some cases, less frequently used commands don’t automatically update the Version Cue information displayed in Adobe Bridge or in the Adobe dialog box. If you don’t see the results of an action you have completed, refresh the view by doing one of the following:

• Change the focus in the Bridge window or Adobe dialog box by selecting another item. • Change to a different folder momentarily. • Resize the Bridge window or the Adobe dialog box, or bring the Bridge window to the foreground (updates may
not appear in the Bridge window if it’s in the background).

• Choose the Refresh command using the Tools menu or the Project Tools (Acrobat) menu in the Adobe dialog box
or the View menu in Adobe Bridge.
Project recovery

In the very unlikely event that you’re completely unable to access a Version Cue project, you can recover the current versions of files found in the local project files folders on the computers of workgroup members who have accessed the project. Local project files are located in the Version Cue folder in your My Documents (Windows) or Documents (Mac OS) folder.

FLASH CS3 130
User Guide

Files don’t appear in projects behind firewalls

Version Cue uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) to communicate between Version Cue Servers and Adobe Creative Suite components. Rarely, older firewall software may not handle SOAP interactions properly. If you see folders but not files in your Version Cue projects, try disabling your proxy server. If disabling the proxy server resolves the problem, you may need to update your firewall.
Disconnecting from projects with files checked out

If you have local project files with the Checked Out By Me status, you can’t disconnect from a project until you check in a version of those files. If you can’t check in a version of the files because the Version Cue Server is unavailable, there are two ways to proceed. You can wait until the server is available, synchronize the files, and then disconnect from the project. Or, you can delete the local project files folder from your hard drive and then disconnect from the project when the server is available. (Other users who access the project will still see the files marked as Checked Out. Users can save their own versions, or a user with Administrator privileges can reset locks on the project, which changes the status of the files to Synchronized.)
Unable to see thumbnails for InDesign files in the Adobe dialog box or Bridge

If you don’t see thumbnails for InDesign files in the Adobe dialog box or in Bridge, select Always Save Preview Images With Documents in either the File Handling preferences or the Save As dialog box in InDesign.
Unable to migrate from Version Cue CS2 to Version Cue CS3 on Intel-based Macintosh computers

To migrate projects from Version Cue CS2 to Version Cue CS3 on an Intel-based Macintosh computer, first back up the project in the Version Cue CS2 Advanced Administration utility on a PowerPC-based Macintosh computer. (For instructions, see Version Cue CS2 Help.) Then, transfer the project from the PowerPC-based Macintosh to the project backup directory on the Intel-based Macintosh computer, restart the server, and restore the project in Version Cue CS3 (see “Back up and restore projects” on page 121). Note: You cannot migrate Version Cue CS2 server backups to a Version Cue CS3 Server. You can, however, migrate Version Cue CS2 projects to a Version Cue CS3 Server. See “Migrate projects to the Version Cue 3.0 Server” on page 94
Unable to connect to the Version Cue CS3 Server

Try any of the following:

• Make sure that your network connection is functioning properly. • If you’re trying to connect to the server from Acrobat 8 or from a Version Cue-enabled Adobe Creative Suite 2
component, make sure that you haven’t enabled SSL for the server. In addition, Acrobat 8 and Adobe Creative Suite 2 components can’t connect to Version Cue CS3 Servers installed on the same computer (that is, a local Version Cue CS3 Server).

• Try to connect to the server from a different Version Cue-enabled Creative Suite component. • Temporarily disable firewalls or proxies. • Restart the server (see “Shut down or restart the Version Cue Server” on page 95). • Consult the server log file for details that may indicate the cause of the problem. You can access the log file from
the Advanced tab of Version Cue Server Administration (see “Advanced Version Cue Server Administration tasks” on page 123).

FLASH CS3 131
User Guide

Forgotten Version Cue system administrator password

If you’ve forgotten your system administrator password, you’ll need to remove and reinstall Version Cue, creating a new system administrator user name and password in the process. There is no way to remove Version Cue without losing all Version Cue project files and data.
Version Cue Server performs slowly or stops responding

Try either of the following:

• Increase the RAM allocated to Version Cue (see “Set Version Cue Server preferences” on page 92). • If Version Cue stops responding while you’re backing up project files, make sure that you’re backing up to a drive
with enough free hard drive space to store the files.
Unable to see Version Cue projects on a Version Cue CS3 Server

Try any of the following:

• Make sure that the project to which you’re trying to connect is shared. If the project creator chose to keep the
project private, you won’t be able to access it.

• Make sure that the Version Cue Server that hosts the project is configured to be visible to other users (see “Set
Version Cue Server preferences” on page 92).

• If you’re using Acrobat 8 or a Version Cue-enabled Adobe Creative Suite 2 component to access the project, make
sure the creator of the project specified that it be compatible with CS2. Otherwise, you won’t be able to see the project on the Version Cue CS3 Server.

Keyboard shortcuts
About keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts let you quickly select tools and execute commands without using a menu. When available, the keyboard shortcut appears to the right of the command name in the menu. This is not a complete list of keyboard shortcuts. These tables list only those shortcuts that are not displayed in menu commands or tool tips. In addition to using keyboard shortcuts, you can access many commands using context-sensitive menus. Contextsensitive menus display commands that are relevant to the active tool, selection, or palette. To display a contextsensitive menu, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) in the document window or palette.
Keys for selecting in Version Cue
Result Select all Select entries (selective) Select entries (range) Select next entry Select previous entry Select next entry (additive) Select previous entry (additive) Select first entry Windows Control+A Control-click Shift-click Down Arrow Up Arrow Shift + Down arrow Shift + Up Arrow Page Up or Home Mac OS Command+A Command-click Shift-click Down Arrow Up Arrow Shift + DownAarrow Shift + Up Arrow Page Up or Home

FLASH CS3 132
User Guide

Result Select last entry Select an entry and all entries above Select an entry and all entries below

Windows Page Down or End Shift + Page Up or Home Shift + Page Down or End

Mac OS Page Down or End Shift + Page Up or Home Shift + Page Down or End

Keys for navigation in Version Cue
Result Open folder New folder Up one level Open selected file Delete selected file or files Cancel dialog Go forward Go back Go to My Computer Go to desktop Go to network Go to Version Cue Windows Control + O Control + N Backspace Enter Delete Escape Control + Right Arrow Control + Left Arrow Control + Shift + C Control + Shift + D Control + Shift + K Control + Shift + V Mac OS Command + O Command + N Command + Up Arrow Return Command + backspace Escape Command + Right Arrow Command + Left Arrow Command + Shift + C Command + Shift + D Command + Shift + K Command + Shift + V

Keys for viewing in Version Cue
Result Details Icons Thumbnails Tiles Windows Control + 1 Control + 2 Control + 3 Control + 4 Mac OS Command + 1 Command + 2 Command + 3 Command + 4

133

Chapter 5: Using imported artwork
A key advantage of Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional is that you can import artwork created in other applications, and use those assets in your flash documents. You can import vector graphics and bitmap images in a variety of file formats, making Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional a versatile media arts tool. When you import a bitmap, you can apply compression and anti-aliasing, place the bitmap directly in an Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional document, use the bitmap as a fill, edit the bitmap in an external editor, break the bitmap apart into pixels and edit it in Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional, or convert the bitmap to vector artwork.

Placing artwork into Flash
About importing artwork into Flash
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional can use artwork created in other applications. You can import vector graphics and bitmaps in a variety of file formats. If you have QuickTime 4 or later installed on your system, you can import additional vector or bitmap file formats. You can import Adobe® FreeHand® files (version MX and earlier) and Adobe® Fireworks® PNG files directly into Flash, preserving attributes from those formats. Graphic files that you import into Flash must be at least 2 pixels x 2 pixels in size. To load JPEG files into a Flash SWF file during runtime, use the loadMovie action or method. For detailed information, see loadMovie (MovieClip.loadMovie method) in ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference or “Working with Movie Clips” in Programming ActionScript 3.0. Flash imports vector graphics, bitmaps, and sequences of images as follows:

• When you import Adobe® Illustrator® and Adobe® Photoshop® files into Flash, you can specify import options that
let you preserve most of your artwork's visual data, and the ability to maintain the editability of certain visual attributes with the Flash authoring environment.

• When you import vector images into Flash from FreeHand, select options for preserving FreeHand layers, pages,
and text blocks.

• When you import PNG images from Fireworks, import files as editable objects to modify in Flash, or as flattened
files to edit and update in Fireworks.

• Select options for preserving images, text, and guides.
Note: If you import a PNG file from Fireworks by cutting and pasting, the file is converted to a bitmap.

• Vector images from SWF and Windows Metafile Format (WMF) files that you import directly into a Flash
document (instead of into a library) are imported as a group in the current layer.

• Bitmaps (scanned photographs, BMP files) that you import directly into a Flash document are imported as single
objects in the current layer. Flash preserves the transparency settings of imported bitmaps. Because importing a bitmap can increase the file size of a SWF file, consider compressing imported bitmaps. Note: Bitmap transparency might not be preserved when bitmaps are imported by dragging and dropping from an application or desktop to Flash. To preserve transparency, use the File > Import To Stage or Import To Library command for importing.

FLASH CS3 134
User Guide

• Any sequence of images (for example, a PICT and BMP sequence) that you import directly into a Flash document
is imported as successive keyframes of the current layer. For a video tutorial about the Flash and Fireworks workflow, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0194.

See also
“Working with imported bitmaps” on page 156 “Working with video” on page 301 “Working with sound” on page 292 “Set bitmap properties” on page 156

Place artwork in Flash
Flash lets you import artwork in various file formats either directly to the stage, or to the library.

See also
“Using symbols, instances, and library assets” on page 208
Import a file into Flash 1 Do one of the following:

• To import a file directly into the current Flash document, select File > Import > Import To Stage. • To import a file into the library for the current Flash document, select File > Import > Import To Library. (To use
a library item in a document, drag it onto the Stage.
2 Select a file format from the Files Of Type (Windows) or Show (Macintosh) pop-up menu. 3 Navigate to the desired file and select it. If an imported file has multiple layers, Flash might create new layers (depending on the import file type). Any new layers appear in the Timeline. 4 Click Open. 5 If the name of the file you are importing ends with a number, and additional sequentially numbered files are in the same folder, do one of the following:

• To import all the sequential files, click Yes. • To import only the specified file, click No.
The following are examples of filenames that can be used as a sequence: Frame001.gif, Frame002.gif, Frame003.gif Bird 1, Bird 2, Bird 3 Walk-001.ai, Walk-002.ai, Walk-003.ai
Paste a bitmap from another application directly into the current Flash document 1 Copy the image in the other application. 2 In Flash, select Edit > Paste In Center.

FLASH CS3 135
User Guide

Importing file formats for vector or bitmap files
Flash can import different vector or bitmap file formats depending on whether QuickTime 4 or later is installed on your system. Using Flash with QuickTime 4 installed is especially useful for collaborative projects in which authors work on both Windows and Macintosh platforms. QuickTime 4 extends support for certain file formats (including PICT, QuickTime Movie, and others) to both platforms. You can import the following vector or bitmap file formats into Flash 8 or later, regardless of whether QuickTime 4 is installed:
File type Adobe Illustrator (version 10 or earlier Adobe Photoshop; AutoCAD DXF Bitmap Enhanced Windows Metafile FreeHand FutureSplash Player GIF and animated GIF JPEG PNG Flash Player 6/7 Windows Metafile Extension .ai Windows • Macintosh •

.psd .dxf .bmp .emf

• • • •

• • •

.fh7, .fh8, .fh9, .fh10, .fh11 • .spl .gif .jpg .png .swf .wmf • • • • • •

• • • • • • •

You can import the following bitmap file formats into Flash only if QuickTime 4 or later is installed:
File type MacPaint PICT QuickTime Image Silicon Graphics Image TGA TIFF Extension .pntg .pct, .pic .qtif .sgi .tga .tif Windows • • (As bitmap) • • • • Macintosh • • • • • •

Working with Illustrator and Flash
You can move Illustrator artwork into the Flash editing environment or directly into Flash Player. You can copy and paste artwork, save files in SWF format, or export artwork directly to Flash. In addition, Illustrator provides support for Flash dynamic text and movie clip symbols. You can also use Device Central to see how Illustrator artwork will appear in Flash Player on different handheld devices.

FLASH CS3 136
User Guide

Pasting Illustrator artwork

You can create graphically rich artwork in Illustrator and copy and paste it into Flash simply, quickly, and seamlessly. When you paste Illustrator artwork into Flash, the following attributes are preserved:

• Paths and shapes • Scalability • Stroke weights • Gradient definitions • Text (including OpenType fonts) • Linked images • Symbols • Blending modes
In addition, Illustrator and Flash support pasted artwork in the following ways:

• When you select entire top-level layers in Illustrator artwork and paste them into Flash, the layers are preserved
along with their properties (visibility and locking).

• Non-RGB Illustrator colors (CMYK, grayscale, and custom) convert to RGB in Flash. RGB colors paste as
expected.

• When you import or paste Illustrator artwork, you can use various options to preserve effects (such as drop
shadow on text) as Flash filters.

• Flash preserves Illustrator masks.
Exporting SWF files from Illustrator

From Illustrator, you can export SWF files that match the quality and compression of SWF files exported from Flash. When you export, you can choose from a variety of presets to ensure optimal output, and you can specify how to handle symbols, layers, text, and masks. For example, you can specify whether Illustrator symbols are exported as movie clips or graphics, or you can choose to create SWF symbols from Illustrator layers.
Importing Illustrator files into Flash

When you want to create complete layouts in Illustrator and then import them into Flash in one step, you can save your artwork in the native Illustrator format (AI) and import it, with high fidelity, into Flash using the File > Import To Stage or File > Import To Library commands in Flash. When you import Illustrator artwork as an AI, EPS, or PDF file, Flash preserves the same attributes as for pasted Illustrator artwork. In addition, when an imported Illustrator file contains layers, you can import them in any of the following ways:

• Convert Illustrator layers to Flash layers • Convert Illustrator layers to Flash frames • Convert all Illustrator layers to a single Flash layer

FLASH CS3 137
User Guide

Symbol workflow

Symbol workflow in Illustrator is similar to symbol workflow in Flash.
Symbol creation When you create a symbol in Illustrator, the Symbol Options dialog box lets you name the symbol and set options specific to Flash: movie clip symbol type (which is the default for Flash symbols), Flash registration grid location, and 9-slice scaling guides. In addition, you can use many of the same symbol keyboard shortcuts in Illustrator and Flash (such as F8 to create a symbol). Isolation mode for symbol editing In Illustrator, double-click a symbol to open it in isolation mode for easier

editing. In isolation mode, only the symbol instance is editable—all other objects on the artboard are dimmed and unavailable. After you exit isolation mode, the symbol in the Symbols panel, and all instances of that symbol are updated accordingly. In Flash, symbol-editing mode and the Library panel work in a similar fashion.
Symbol properties and links Using the Symbols panel or the Control panel, you can easily assign names to symbol

instances, break links between instances and symbols, swap a symbol instance with another symbol, or create a copy of the symbol. In Flash, the editing features in the Library panel work in a similar way.
Static, dynamic, and input text objects

When you bring static text from Illustrator into Flash, Flash converts the text to outlines. In addition, you can set up your text in Illustrator as dynamic text. Dynamic text enables you to edit text content programmatically in Flash, and easily manage projects that require localization in multiple languages. In Illustrator, you can specify individual text objects as static, dynamic, or input text. Dynamic text objects in Illustrator and Flash have similar properties. For example, both use kerning that affects all characters in a text block rather than individual characters, both anti-alias text the same way, and both can be linked to an external XML file containing text.

About importing Fireworks PNG files
Import Fireworks PNG files into Flash as flattened images or as editable objects. When you import a PNG file as a flattened image, the entire file (including any vector artwork) is rasterized, or converted to a bitmap image. When you import a PNG file as editable objects, vector artwork in the file is preserved in vector format. Choose to preserve placed bitmaps, text, filters (called effects in FireWorks) and guides in the PNG file when you import it as editable objects. For a video tutorial about the Flash and Fireworks workflow, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0194.

Using Fireworks effects and blend modes in Flash
Flash 8 and later provides support for Fireworks filters, blend modes, and text. When you import Fireworks PNG files, you can retain many of the filters and blend modes applied to objects in Fireworks, and continue to modify those filters and blends using Flash 8 or later versions. Flash only supports modifiable filters and blends for objects imported as text and movie clips. If an effect or blend mode is not supported, Flash 8 and later versions rasterizes or ignores it when it is imported. To import a Fireworks PNG file that contains filters or blends that Flash does not support, rasterize the file during the import process. After this operation, you cannot edit the file. For a video tutorial about the Flash and Fireworks workflow, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0194.

FLASH CS3 138
User Guide

Import text from Fireworks into Flash
When you import text from Fireworks into Flash 8 or later, the text is imported with the default anti-alias setting of the current document. If you import the PNG file as a flattened image, you can start Fireworks from Flash and edit the original PNG file (with vector data). When you import multiple PNG files in a batch, you select import settings one time. Flash uses the same settings for all files in the batch. Note: To edit bitmap images in Flash convert the bitmap images to vector artwork or break apart the bitmap images. For a video tutorial about the Flash and Fireworks workflow, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0194.
1 Select File > Import > Import To Stage or Import To Library. 2 Select PNG Image from the Files Of Type (Windows) or Show (Macintosh) pop-up menu. 3 Navigate to a Fireworks PNG image and select it. 4 Click Open. 5 Select one of the following for Location:
Import All Page(s) into New Scence(s) Imports all pages in the PNG file as scenes within a movie clip, with all of its frames and layers intact inside the movie clip symbol. A new layer is created that uses the name of the Fireworks PNG file name. The first frame (page) of the PNG document is placed on a keyframe that starts at the last keyframe; all other frames (pages) follow. Import One Page into Current Layer Imports the selected page (idenified in the Page Name pop-up menu) of the

PNG file into the current Flash document in a single new layer as a movie clip. The contents of the selected page is imported as a movie clip, with all of its original layer and frame structure intact. If the page movieclip has frames inside it, each frame is a movieclip in itself.
Page Name Specifies the Fireworks page you want to import into the current scene.

6 Select one of the following for File Structure:
Import As Movie Clip And Retain Layers Imports the PNG file as a movie clip, with all of its frames and layers intact

inside the movie clip symbol.
Import Page(s) as New Layer(s) Imports the PNG file into the current Flash document in a single new layer at the

top of the stacking order. The Fireworks layers are flattened into the single layer. The Fireworks frames are contained in the new layer.
7 For Objects, select one of the following:
Rasterize If Necessary To Maintain Appearance Preserves Fireworks fills, strokes, and effects in Flash. Keep All Paths Editable Keeps all objects as editable vector paths. Some Fireworks fills, strokes, and effects are lost

on import.
8 For Text, select one of the following:
Rasterize If Necessary To Maintain Appearance Preserves Fireworks fills, strokes, and effects in text imported into

Flash.
Keep All Paths Editable Keeps all text editable. Some Fireworks fills, strokes, and effects are lost on import.

9 To flatten the PNG file into a single bitmap image, select Import As A Single Flattened Bitmap. When this option is selected, all other options are dimmed.

FLASH CS3 139
User Guide

10 Click OK.

See also
“Edit bitmaps in an external editor” on page 158 “Convert bitmaps to vector graphics” on page 159 “Break apart a bitmap” on page 158

Import FreeHand MX files
You can import FreeHand files in version 7 or later directly into Flash. FreeHand is a good choice for creating vector graphics for import into Flash, because you can preserve FreeHand layers, text blocks, library symbols, and pages, and choose a page range to import. If the imported FreeHand file is in CMYK color mode, Flash converts the file to RGB. Keep the following guidelines in mind when importing FreeHand files:

• When importing a file with overlapping objects to preserve as separate objects, place the objects on separate layers
in FreeHand, and select Layers in the FreeHand Import dialog box in Flash. (If overlapping objects on a single layer are imported into Flash, the overlapping shapes are divided at intersection points, just as with overlapping objects that you create in Flash.)

• Flash can support up to eight colors in a gradient fill. If a FreeHand file contains a gradient fill with more than
eight colors, Flash creates clipping paths to simulate the appearance of a gradient fill. Clipping paths can increase file size. To minimize file size, use gradient fills with eight colors or fewer in FreeHand.

• Flash imports each step in a blend as a separate path. Thus, the more steps a blend has in a FreeHand file, the larger
the imported file size is in Flash.

• When you import files with strokes that have square caps, Flash converts the caps to round caps. • Flash converts placed grayscale images to RGB images. This conversion can increase the imported file’s size. • When you import files with placed EPS images, select the Convert Editable EPS When Imported option in
FreeHand Import Preferences before you place the EPS into FreeHand. If you do not select this option, the EPS image is not viewable when imported into Flash. In addition, Flash does not display information for an imported EPS image (regardless of the Preferences settings used in FreeHand).
1 Select File > Import > Import To Stage or File > Import To Library. 2 Select FreeHand from the Files Of Type (Windows) or Show (Macintosh) pop-up menu. 3 Navigate to a FreeHand file and select it. 4 Click Open. 5 For Mapping Pages, select a setting:
Scenes Converts each page in the FreeHand document to a scene in the Flash document. Keyframes Converts each page in the FreeHand document to a keyframe in the Flash document.

6 For Mapping Layers, select one of the following:
Layers Converts each layer in the FreeHand document to a layer in the Flash document. Keyframes Converts each layer in the FreeHand document to a keyframe in the Flash document. Flatten Converts all layers in the FreeHand document to a single flattened layer in the Flash document.

FLASH CS3 140
User Guide

7 For Pages, do one of the following:

• To import all pages from the FreeHand document, select All. • To import a page range from the FreeHand document, enter page numbers for From and To.
8 For Options, select any of the following options:
Include Invisible Layers Imports all layers (visible and hidden) from the FreeHand document. Include Background Layer Imports the background layer with the FreeHand document. Maintain Text Blocks Preserves text in the FreeHand document as editable text in the Flash document.

9 Click OK.

About AutoCAD DXF files
Flash supports the AutoCAD DXF format in AutoCAD 10. DXF files do not support the standard system fonts. Flash tries to map fonts appropriately, but the results can be unpredictable, particularly for text alignment. Because the DXF format does not support solid fills, filled areas are exported as outlines only. For this reason, the DXF format is most appropriate for line drawings, such as floor plans and maps. You can import two-dimensional DXF files into Flash. Flash does not support three-dimensional DXF files. Although Flash doesn’t support scaling in a DXF file, all imported DXF files produce 12-inch x 12-inch files that you can scale using Modify > Transform > Scale. Also, Flash supports only ASCII DXF files. If your DXF files are binary, convert them to ASCII before importing them into Flash.

Working with Illustrator AI files
About Adobe Illustrator AI files
Flash lets you import Illustrator AI files, and to a large extent preserves your artwork's editability and visual fidelity. The AI Importer also provides you with a great degree of control in determining how your Illustrator artwork is imported into Flash, letting you specify how to import specific objects into an AI file. The Flash AI Importer provides the following key features:

• Preserves editability of the most commonly used Illustrator effects as Flash filters. • Preserves editability of blend modes that Flash and Illustrator have in common. • Preserves the fidelity and editability of gradient fills. • Maintains the appearance of RGB (red, green, blue) colors. • Imports Illustrator Symbols as Flash Symbols. • Preserves the number and position of Bezier control points. • Preserves the fidelity of clip masks. • Preserves the fidelity of pattern strokes and fills. • Preserves object transparency.

FLASH CS3 141
User Guide

• Converts the AI file layers to individual Flash layers, keyframes, or a single Flash layer. You can also import the AI
file as a single bitmap image, in which case Flash flattens (rasterizes) the file.

• Provides an improved copy-and-paste workflow between Illustrator and Flash. A copy-and-paste dialog box
provides settings to apply to AI files being pasted onto the Flash stage. For video tutorials, see:

• Using symbols between Illustrator and Flash: www.adobe.com/go/vid0198 • Using text between Illustrator and Flash: www.adobe.com/go/vid0199
Compatibility between Flash and Illustrator

Certain visual attributes can either not be accurately imported, or, after they are imported, lose their ability to be further edited in the Flash authoring environment. The AI Importer provides you with several options to import and place artwork to best maintain its visual appearance and editability. However, certain visual attributes cannot be preserved. Use the following guidelines to improve the appearance of AI files imported into Flash:

• Flash supports only the RGB color space, and not the CMYK color space, which is common in printing. Flash can
convert CMYK images to RGB, however, colors are better preserved if you convert the colors to RGB in Illustrator.

• To preserve the drop shadow, inner glow, outer glow, and Gaussian blur AI effects as editable Flash filters, Flash
imports the objects to which they are applied as a Flash movie clip. If you attempt to import an object with these attributes as something other than a movie clip, Flash displays an incompatibility alert, and recommends importing the object as a movie clip.

Import Adobe Illustrator files
Flash can import Illustrator AI files in version 10 or earlier. If the raster file in Illustrator is linked, only JPEG, GIF, or PNG is imported with native format reserved. All other files are converted to PNG format in Flash. Additionally, conversion to PNG depends on the version of QuickTime installed. Note: To import an Illustrator EPS or Adobe Acrobat PDF file, open the file in Illustrator CS 3, save it as a CS 3compatible AI file, and import the resulting AI file into Flash Note: The AI Importer was developed to import AI files created with Illustrator CS3. While there are no known issues importing AI files created in earlier versions of Illustrator, we recommend importing AI files created using Illustrator CS 3. If you encounter issues importing AI files created in earlier version of Illustrator, open the file in Illustrator CS 3, and save the AI file as a CS 3 compatible file and re-import it into Flash. For video tutorials, see:

• Importing Illustrator files: www.adobe.com/go/vid0197 • Using symbols between Illustrator and Flash: www.adobe.com/go/vid0198 • Using text between Illustrator and Flash: www.adobe.com/go/vid0199
In certain instances, you may need to ungroup all the Illustrator objects on all layers when Flash cannot group items on import. After all the objects are ungrouped, they can be manipulated like any other Flash object.

FLASH CS3 142
User Guide

A

B

Illustrator AI Importer dialog box A. Layers panel B. Import options available for the selected object

Choose from the following options when importing Adobe Illustrator files:

• Convert layers to Flash layers or keyframes, or single Flash layers. • Import text as editable text, vector outlines, or bitmaps. • Import as a single bitmap image. Choosing this option imports the AI file as a single bitmap image, and disables
the layers list and import options within the AI import dialog box.
1 Select File > Import To Stage or Import To Library. 2 Navigate to the AI file to import, select it, and click OK. The Import Illustrator Document To Stage or The Import Illustrator Document To Library dialog box appears.

This dialog box provides options to import the Illustrator file. Depending on the types of objects in the Illustrator file you’re importing, the options available to you vary.
3 (Optional) To generate a list of items in the AI file that are incompatible with Flash, click Incompatibility Report. The Incompatibility Report button appears only if incompatibilities exist with Flash in the AI file.

The Incompatibility Report analyzes possible incompatibilities between Illustrator and Flash. The Import Options area (next to the Alert button) of the AI Importer dialog box displays recommendations to obtain the maximum compatibility for any incompatible item. The Incompatibility Report includes an Apply Recommended Import Settings checkbox. If checked, Flash automatically applies the recommended import options to any incompatible objects within the AI file. The exceptions to this, are when the AI document is larger in size than that supported by Flash, and when the AI document uses the CMYK color mode. To correct either of these incompatibilities, reopen the document in Illustrator CS 3, and adjust the size of the document, or change the color mode to RGB.
4 (Optional) In the AI Import dialog box, select layers, groups, and individual objects, and choose how to import each item. For information on the import options available for the different types of Illustrator layers and objects, see “Illustrator object import options” on page 146.

FLASH CS3 143
User Guide

5 For Convert Layers To, select one of the following:
Flash Layers Converts each layer in the imported document to a layer in the Flash document. Keyframes Converts each layer in the imported document to a keyframe in the Flash document. Single Flash Layer Converts all layers in the imported document to a single flattened layer in the Flash document.

6 For the remaining options, select from the following:
Place Objects At Original Position The contents of the AI file retain the exact position that they had in Illustrator. For

example, if an object was positioned at X = 100 Y = 50 in Illustrator, it assumes the same coordinates on the Flash Stage. If this option is not selected, the imported Illustrator layers are centered within the current view. The items in the AI file remain relative to each other when imported; however, all objects are centered as one block in the current view. This feature can be useful if you are zoomed in to an area of the Stage, and are importing a specific object for that area of the Stage. If you imported the object using the original coordinates, you might not see it imported, because it might be placed outside of the current stage view. Note: When importing the AI file into the Flash library, this option is not available.
Set Stage Size To Same Size As Illustrator Artboard The Flash stage size resizes to the same size as the Illustrator artboard (or active crop area) used to create the AI file. This option is not selected by default.

Note: When importing the AI file into the Flash library, this option is not available.
Import Unused Symbols Any symbols in the AI file’s library that have no instances on the artboard are imported into

the Flash library. If this option is not selected, the unused symbols are not imported into Flash.
Import As A Single Bitmap Image Imports the AI file as a single bitmap image, and disables the layers list and import

options within the AI import dialog box.
7 Click OK.

See also
“Import Photoshop PSD files” on page 150 “Exporting Flash content, images, and video” on page 448

Importing AI files to the Flash library
Importing an AI file into the library is similar to importing to the Stage, the difference being that the entire AI file is encapsulated as a Flash symbol. The content is imported into the library and organized by the layering and grouping structure of the AI file. When you import an AI file into the library, the root folder uses the name of the AI file. After the AI file is imported into the library, you can change the name of the root folder, or move the layers out of the folder. Note: The Library orders the contents of the imported AI file alphabetically. The hierarchical grouping and folder structure remains the same, but the library reorders them alphabetically. When converting AI layers to keyframes, the AI file is imported as a movie clip; converting the AI layers to Flash layers, or as a single Flash layer, imports the AI file as a graphic symbol. The resulting movie clip or graphic symbol contains all of the content of the AI file imported to its timeline, as if the content were imported to the stage. Almost all movie clips have a bitmap or other asset associated with them. To minimize confusion and naming conflicts, these assets are stored in an Assets folder in the same folder as the movie clip.

FLASH CS3 144
User Guide

Note: When you import to the library, the AI file's contents are imported to the movie clip's timeline, not the main Flash timeline.

Flash Library after importing an AI file.

AI File Importer preferences
The Flash Preferences dialog box lets you set import preferences for AI files and the AI File Importer dialog box. The preferences you specifiy for importing AI files affects the options the AI Import dialog box is initially populated with for the Illustrator object types. Note: To override the preferences specified for different layer types on an object by object basis, use the AI Import dialog box. Select the layer, object, or group to change its import options, and specify the necessary options.
General AI File Importer Preferences Preferences that affect how the AI Importer will respond when importing AI

files:

• Show Import Dialog Box Specifies that the AI File Importer dialog box appears. • Exclude Object Outside Crop Area Excludes objects on the Illustrator canvas which fall outside the artboard or
crop area.

• Import Hidden Layers Specifies that hidden layers be imported by default.
Import Text As Lets you specify the following import preferences for text objects:

• Editable Text Specifies that Illustrator text import as editable Flash text. The appearance of the text may be compromised to maintain the editability of the text. • Vector Outlines Converts text to vector paths. Use this option to preserve the visual appearance of the text. Some
visual effects might be sacrificed—such as unsupported blend modes and filters—but visual attributes such as text on a path are maintained if the text is imported as a movie clip. The text itself is no longer editable, but opacity and compatible blend modes maintain their editability. Note: To preserve the drop shadow, inner glow, outer glow, and Gaussian blur that AI effects applied to text as editable Flash filters, select Create Movie Clip Import to import the text as a movie clip.

• Bitmaps Rasterizes the text into a bitmap to preserve the exact appearance of the text as it was in Illustrator. If filters or other effects are applied that are not compatible with Flash, importing the text as a bitmap preserves the visual appearance. Rasterized text is no longer editable. • Create Movie Clips Specifies that text objects be imported inside a movie clip. To maintain supported blend modes, AI effects, and transparency of less than 100% between Illustrator and Flash, specify that the text object be imported as a movie clip.

FLASH CS3 145
User Guide

Import Paths As Lets you specify the following path import preferences:

• Editable Paths Creates an editable vector path. Supported blend modes, effects, and object transparency are
preserved, but attributes not supported in Flash are discarded.

• Bitmaps Rasterizes the path into a bitmap to preserve the exact appearance of the path in Illustrator. A rasterized image is no longer editable. • Create Movie Clips Specifies that path objects be imported inside a movie clip.
Images Lets you specify the import preference for images:

• Flatten Bitmaps To Maintain Appearance Rasterizes the image into a bitmap to preserve the appearance of
blending modes and effects that are not supported in Flash. A rasterized image is no longer editable.

• Create Movie Clips Specifies that images be imported inside a movie clip.
Groups Lets you specify the import preferences for groups:

• Import As Bitmaps Rasterizes the group into a bitmap to preserve the appearance of the objects as they appeared in Illustrator. After a group is converted to a bitmap, the objects in it cannot be selected or renamed. • Create Movie Clips Specifies that all objects in the group be encapsulated into a single movie clip.
Layers Lets you specify the import preferences for layers:

• Import As Bitmaps Rasterizes the layer into a bitmap to preserve the appearance of the objects as they appeared
in Illustrator.

• Create Movie Clips Specifies that the layer is encapsulated into a movie clip.
Movie Clip Registration Specifies a global registration point for movies that are created. This setting applies to the

registration point for all object types. This option can be changed on an object by object basis in the AI File Importer dialog box; this is the initial setting for all object types. For more information on movie clip registration, see “Edit symbols” on page 211.

See also
“Set preferences in Flash” on page 27

Copy and pasting between Illustrator and Flash
If you copy-and-paste (or drag-and-drop) artwork between Illustrator and Flash, the Paste dialog box appears, which provides import settings for the AI file being copied (or pasted).
Paste As Bitmap Flattens the file being copied into a single bitmap object. Paste Using AI File Importer Preferences Imports the file using the AI file import setting specified in Flash Prefer-

ences (Edit > Preferences).
Apply Recommended Import Settings To Resolve Incompatibilities Enabled by default when Paste Using AI File

Importer Preferences is selected. Automatically fixes any incompatibilities detected in the AI file.
Maintain Layers Enabled by default when Paste Using AI File Importer Preferences is selected. Specifies that layers in the AI file be converted to Flash layers (the same as if you selected Convert To Flash Layers from the AI Import dialog box). If deselected, all layers are flattened into a single layer.

FLASH CS3 146
User Guide

Illustrator object import options
Layers manage all the items that make up Illustrator artwork. By default, all items are organized in a single, parent layer. Import all items in a given parent layer as a single, flattened bitmap, or, individually select each object and specify import options specific to the type of object it is (text, path, group, and so on). The AI Importer provides options to select layers in the artwork you are importing, and specify individual import options based on preserving the visual appearance of an object, or its editability in Flash.
Correcting incompatible graphic effects 1 To generate an incompatibility report, click Incompatibility Report. The incompatibility report lists items in the

AI file that are incompatible with Flash.
2 Select Change Import Settings To Resolve Object Incompatibilities. Many incompatibilities between Illustrator and Flash can be automatically corrected using the incompatibility report, and the import recommendations suggested in the Import options area of the AI Import dialog box. Select individual objects 1 Select the object to specify import options for. Illustrator objects that you can select include layers, groups,

individual paths, text, and images.
2 Review the import options available for the type of object you’ve selected in the object options section of the dialog box. Note if any incompatibilities are listed, and what the recommended correction is to import the object. 3 Select the desired import options, and select another object to specify import options for, or click OK. Selecting layers

The Layers panel lists the objects in a document. By default, every Illustrator document contains at least one layer, and each object in a given file is listed under that layer. When an item in the Layers panel contains other items, a triangle appears to the left of the item’s name. To show or hide the content, click the triangle. If no triangle appears, the layer contains no additional items. Note: You can expand or collapse all groups and layers using the AI Importer context menu. Right-click to display the context menu, and select Expand All or Collapse All.
Selection column Controls whether items are selected for import or not. If an item is checked, you can select that

layer and specify import options; if Edit is not checked, the layer is dimmed, and you cannot specify any import setting for the item in that layer.
Object Type column An icon indicates what the Flash object type located on that layer will be when imported, and, if visible, that the item is selected. The object types are:

• Text • Path • Group • Movie clip • Graphic symbol • Image

FLASH CS3 147
User Guide

Text import options

Flash lets you import text as editable text, vector outlines, and a flattened bitmap. To maintain supported blend modes, AI effects, and transparency of less than 100% between Illustrator and Flash, use import text as a movie clip. Importing text as a movie clip preserves the editability of compatible visual effects.
Editable Text By default, Illustrator text imports as editable Flash text. The appearance of the text can be compromised to maintain the editability of the text. Vector Outlines Converts text to vector paths. Use this option to preserve the visual appearance of the text. Some

visual effects might be sacrificed—such as unsupported blend modes and filters—but visual attributes such as text on a path are maintained if the text is imported as a movie clip. The text itself is no longer editable, but opacity and compatible blend modes maintain their editability. Note: To preserve the drop shadow, inner glow, outer glow, and Gaussian blur that AI effects applied to text as editable Flash filters, select Create Movie Clip Import to import the text as a movie clip.
Bitmap Rasterizes the text into a bitmap to preserve the exact appearance of the text as it was in Illustrator. If filters or other effects are applied that are not compatible with Flash, importing the text as a bitmap preserves the visual appearance. Rasterized text is no longer editable.

Path import options

A path is the line that results from drawing in Illustrator. A path is either open, like an arc, or closed, like a circle. For an open path, the starting and ending anchor points for the path are called endpoints. Editable paths can be imported into Flash, however, if certain blend modes, filters, or other effects are applied to the path, those effects might not be compatible with Flash.
Bitmap Rasterizes the path into a bitmap to preserve the exact appearance of the path in Illustrator. A rasterized image is no longer editable. Editable Path Creates an editable vector path. Supported blend modes, effects, and object transparency are preserved, but attributes not supported in Flash are discarded.

Image import options

Bitmap images are the most common electronic medium for continuous-tone images, such as photographs or digital paintings. Illustrator creates bitmap effects by using filters, effects, and graphic styles. While many of these effects are compatible with Flash, some might need to be flattened—or rasterized—to preserve their visual appearance. Note: If a raster file in Illustrator is linked, only JPEG, GIF, or PNG is imported with their native format preserved. All other file types are converted to the PNG format in Flash. Additionally, the conversion (to PNG) depends on the version of QuickTime installed on your computer.
Flatten Bitmap To Maintain Appearance Rasterizes the image into a bitmap to preserve the appearance of blending modes and effects that are not supported in Flash. A rasterized image is no longer editable. Create Movie Clip Imports the Illustrator images as movie clips.

Group import options

Groups are collections of graphic objects that are treated as a single unit. Grouping lets you move or transform a number of objects without affecting their attributes or relative positions. For example, you might group the objects in a logo design so that you can move and scale the logo as one unit. Groups can also be nested. That is, they can be grouped in other objects or groups to form larger groups.

FLASH CS3 148
User Guide

Groups appear as <Group> items in the Import panel. When an item such as a group contains other items, a triangle appears to the left of the item’s name. Click the triangle to show or hide the contents of the group. If no triangle appears, the item contains no additional items.
Import As Bitmap Rasterizes the group into a bitmap to preserve the appearance of the objects as they appeared in Illustrator. After a group is converted to a bitmap, the objects in it cannot be selected or renamed. Create Movie Clip Encapsulates all objects in the group into a single movie clip.

Working with Photoshop PSD files
Working with Photoshop and Flash
You can use Adobe® Photoshop® and Adobe® Flash® together to create visually compelling web-based applications, animations, or interactive messaging elements. Photoshop lets you create still images and artwork, providing a high degree of creative control. Flash lets you bring those still images together and incorporate them into interactive Internet content. The Photoshop drawing and selection tools provide you with a greater degree of creative control than the tools found in Flash. If you have to create complex visual images, or retouch photographs for use in interactive presentations, use Photoshop to create your artwork, and then import the finished images into Flash.
Importing still images into Flash

Flash can import still images in many formats, but you usually use the native Photoshop PSD format when importing still images from Photoshop into Flash. When importing a PSD file, Flash can preserve many of the attributes that were applied in Photoshop, and provides options for maintaining the visual fidelity of the image and further modifying the image. When you import a PSD file into Flash, you can choose whether to represent each Photoshop layer as a Flash layer, individual keyframes, or a single, flattened image. You can also encapsulate the PSD file as a movie clip.
Exchanging movies

You can exchange QuickTime video files between Photoshop and Flash. For example, you can render a QuickTime movie directly from Photoshop, and then import it into Flash, converting it into an FLV (Flash Video) file, which can be played in Flash® Player. When you use Photoshop to modify video footage, you can paint nondestructively on its frames. When you save a Photoshop file with a video layer, you are saving the edits that you made to the video layer, not edits to the footage itself. Note: When you import a QuickTime video file from Photoshop to Flash, use the Import Video dialog box (File > Import Video). Using the Photoshop PSD import feature to import video only imports the first frame of a video file. You can also export Flash documents as QuickTime video, and import them into Photoshop where you can paint nondestructively on the video frames. For example, you can create an animated sequence in Flash, export the Flash document as a QuickTime video, and then import the video into Photoshop.
Color

Flash works internally with colors in the RGB or HSB (hue, saturation, brightness) color space. Although Flash can convert CMYK images to RGB, you should create Photoshop artwork in RGB. Before you import CMYK artwork from Photoshop into Flash, convert the image to RGB in Photoshop.

FLASH CS3 149
User Guide

See also
“Import Photoshop PSD files” on page 150 “Exporting QuickTime” on page 454

About Photoshop PSD files
Flash lets you import Photoshop PSD files, and preserves most of your artwork's data. The PSD Importer also lets you control how your Photoshop artwork is imported into Flash, both letting you specify how to import specific objects in a PSD file, as well as specifying that the PSD file be converted to a Flash movie clip. The Flash PSD Importer provides the following key features:

• PSD files imported into Flash maintain their color fidelity from Photoshop. • Preserves editability of blend modes that both Flash and Photoshop have in common. • Smart Objects in the PSD file are rasterized, and imported into Flash as bitmaps, which preserves object transparency.

• Converts the PSD file layers to individual Flash layers or keyframes. Or, import the PSD file as a single bitmap
image, in which case Flash flattens (rasterizes) the file.

• Drag-and-drop from Photoshop to Flash invokes the PSD file importer, letting you choose how to import your
Photoshop artwork. For a video tutorial about designing website with Photoshop and Flash, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0201.
Compatibility between Flash and Photoshop

Certain visual attributes can either not be accurately imported, or, after they are imported, lose their ability to be further edited in the Flash authoring environment. The PSD Importer provides you with several options to import and place artwork to best maintain its visual appearance and editability. However, certain visual attributes cannot be preserved. Use the following guidelines to improve the appearance of PSD files imported into Flash:

• Flash supports only the RGB color space, and not the CMYK color space, which is common in printing. Flash can
convert CMYK images to RGB, however, colors are better preserved if you convert the colors to RGB in Photoshop.

• Flash can import the following photoshop blend modes, and maintain their editability: Normal, Darken, Multiply,
Lighten, Screen, Hard Light, Difference, and Overlay. If you use a blend mode that Flash does not support, you can rasterize the layer to maintain its visual appearance, or remove the blend mode from the layer.

• Flash cannot import Photoshop Smart Objects as editable objects. To preserve the visual attributes of Smart
Objects, they are rasterized and imported into Flash as bitmaps.

• Flash can only import the first frame of Photoshop Video layers. • Image and Fill layers are always rasterized when imported into Flash. • When importing objects containing transparent areas as flattened bitmaps, any objects on the layers behind the
transparent portion of the object will be visible through the transparent area—assuming the objects behind the object containing transparency are also being imported. To prevent this, import only the transparent object as a flattened bitmap.

FLASH CS3 150
User Guide

To import multiple layers and maintain transparency without having any visible remnants of the layers behind the transparency, import the PSD file using the Bitmap Image With Editable Layer Styles option. This will encapsulate the imported objects as a movie clip, and use the movie clip's transparency. This is particularly useful if you need to animate the different layers in Flash.

Import Photoshop PSD files
Photoshop format (PSD) is the default Photoshop file format. Flash can directly import PSD files and preserve many Photoshop features, retaining the image quality and editability of the PSD file in Flash. You can also flatten PSD files when importing them, creating a single bitmap image file that retains the image’s visual effects, but removes the hierarchical layer information native to the PSD file format. For a video tutorial about designing website with Photoshop and Flash, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0201.

A

B

The PSD importer dialog box A. Layers in the PSD file being imported B. Import options available for the selected layer or object.

1 Select File > Import To Stage or Import To Library. 2 Navigate to the Adobe Photoshop PSD file to import, select it, and click OK. 3 (Optional) In the PSD Import dialog box, select layers, groups, and individual objects and choose how to import each item. 4 For Convert Layers To, select one of the following:
Flash Layers All selected layers in the Select Photoshop layers list are placed on their own layer. Each layer is labeled

with the name of the layer in the Photoshop file. The layers in Photoshop are objects on the individual layers. The objects also have the name of the layer in Photoshop when put into the Library.
Keyframes All selected layers in the Select Photoshop layers list are placed in individual keyframes on a new layer. The new layer is named for the Photoshop file (for example, myfile.psd). The layers in Photoshop become objects on the individual keyframes. The objects also have the name of the layer in Photoshop when put into the Library.

FLASH CS3 151
User Guide

5 For the remaining options, select from the following:
Place Layers At Original Position The contents of the PSD file retain the exact position that they had in Photoshop. For example, if an object was positioned at X = 100 Y = 50 in Photoshop, it assumes the same coordinates on the Flash stage.

If this option is not selected, the imported Photoshop layers are centered on the stage. The items in the PSD file remain relative to each other when imported; however, all objects are centered as one block in the current view. This feature can be useful if you are zoomed in to an area of the Stage, and are importing a specific object for that area of the stage. If you imported the object using the original coordinates, you might not see it imported, because it might be placed outside of the current stage view. Note: When you import the PSD file to the Flash library, this option is not available.
Set Stage Size To Same Size As Photoshop Canvas The Flash Stage size resizes to the same size as the Photoshop

document size (or active crop area) used to create the PSD file. This option is not selected by default. Note: When you import the PSD file to the Flash library, this option is not available.
6 Click OK.

Importing PSD files to the Flash library
Importing a PSD file into the library is similar to importing to the Stage. When you import a PSD file into the library, the root folder uses the name of the PSD file. After the PSD file is imported into the library, you can change the name of the root folder, or move the layers out of the folder. Note: The library orders the contents of the imported PSD file alphabetically. The hierarchical grouping and folder structure remains the same, but the library reorders them alphabetically. A movie clip is created that contains all of the content of the PSD file imported to its timeline, as if the content were imported to the stage. Almost all movie clips have a bitmap or other asset associated with them. To minimize confusion and naming conflicts, these assets are stored in an Assets folder in the same folder as the movie clip. Note: When you import to the library, the PSD file's contents are imported to the movie clip's timeline, not the main Flash timeline.

PSD file import preferences
The Flash Preferences dialog box lets you set import preferences for PSD files. The preferences you specify for importing PSD files affects the options the PSD Import dialog box is initially populated with for the Photoshop layer types. Note: To override the preferences specified for different layer types on an object by object basis, use the PSD Import dialog box. Select the layer to change import options for, and specify the necessary options.

See also
“Set preferences in Flash” on page 27
Image Layer Import Preferences

These options specify how the import options for image layers will initially be set.
Bitmap Images With Editable Layer Styles Creates a movie clip with a bitmap clipped inside. Specifying this option

maintains supported Blend modes and opacity, but other visual attributes that cannot be reproduced in Flash will be removed. If this option is selected, the object must be converted into a movie clip.

FLASH CS3 152
User Guide

Flattened Bitmap Images Rasterizes the text into a flattened bitmap image to maintain the exact appearance the text

layer had in Photoshop.
Create Movie Clips Specifies that the image layers be converted to a movie clip when imported into Flash. This

option can be changed in the PSD Import dialog box on an object by object basis if you do not want all of the image layers to be movie clips.
Text layer import preferences

These options specify how the import options for image layers will initially be set.
Editable Text Creates an editable text object from the text on the Photoshop text layer. The appearance of the text will be sacrificed to maintain the editability of the text. If this option is selected, the object must be converted into a movie clip. Vector Outlines Vectorizes the text into paths. The appearance of the text may be altered, but visual attributes will

be maintained. If this option is selected, the object must be converted into a movie clip.
Flattened Bitmap Images Rasterize the text to maintain the exact appearance the text layer had in Photoshop. Create Movie Clips Automatically converts the text layer to a movie clip when imported into Flash. This option can

be changed in the PSD Import dialog box on an object by object basis if you do not want all of the text layers to be movie clips. This option is enabled by default when any option other than Flattened Bitmap Images is selected, as the other options have to be converted to a movie clip.
Text layer import preferences

These options specify how the import options for text layers will initially be set.
Editable Text Creates an editable text object from the text on the Photoshop text layer. The appearance of the text will be sacrificed to maintain the editability of the text. If this option is selected, the object must be converted into a movie clip. Vector Outlines Vectorizes the text into paths. The appearance of the text may be altered, but visual attributes will

be maintained. If this option is selected, the object must be converted into a movie clip.
Flattened Bitmap Images Rasterize the text to maintain the exact appearance the text layer had in Photoshop. Create Movie Clips Automatically converts the text layer to a movie clip when imported into Flash. This option can

be changed in the PSD Import dialog box on an object by object basis if you do not want all of the text layers to be movie clips. This option is enabled by default when any option other than Flattened bitmap images is selected, as the other options have to be converted to a movie clip.
Shape layer import preferences

These options specify how the import options for shape layers will initially be set.
Maintain Editable Paths And Layer Styles This option will create an editable vector shape with a bitmap clipped inside the vector shape. Supported blend modes and opacity will also be maintained with this option, but other visual attributes that cannot be reproduced in Flash will be sacrificed. If this option is selected, then the object must be converted into a movie clip. Convert To Bitmap This option will rasterize the shape and maintain the exact appearance the shape layer had in

Photoshop.
Create Movie Clips This option will set the shape layers to be converted to a movie clip when imported into Flash.

This option can be changed on an object by object basis, if you do not want some shape layers to be movie clips. This option is disabled if the Maintain editable paths and layers styles checkbox is checked.

FLASH CS3 153
User Guide

Layer group import preferences

This option specifies how the options for layer groups will initially be set.
Create Movie Clips Specifies that all groups be converted to a movie clip when imported into Flash. This can be

changed on an object by object basis if you do not want some layer groups to be movie clips.
Merged bitmap import preferences

This option specifies how the import options for merged bitmaps will initially be set.
Create Movie Clips This option will set the shape layers to be converted to a movie clip when imported into Flash.

This option can be changed on an object by object basis, if you do not want some merged bitmaps to be movie clips. This option is disabled if the Maintain Editable Paths And Layers Styles checkbox is checked.
Movie clip registration import preferences

Specifies a global registration point for movies that are created. This setting applies to the registration point for all object types. This option can be changed on an object by object basis in the PSD Import dialog box; this is the initial setting for all object types. For more information on movie clip registration, see “Edit symbols” on page 211.
Publish setting import preferences

The Publish settings preferences let you specify the degree of compression and document quality to apply to the image when publishing the Flash document as a SWF file. These settings take effect only when you publish the document as a SWF file, and have no effect on the image when you import it to the Flash stage or library.
Compression Lets you choose either lossy or lossless compression formats:

• Lossy Lossy (JPEG) compresses the image in JPEG format. To use the default compression quality specified for the imported image, select Use Publish Setting. To specify a new quality compression setting, select the Custom option, and enter a value between 1 and 100 in the Quality text field. (A higher setting preserves greater image integrity but yields a larger file size.). • Lossless Lossless (PNG/GIF) compresses the image with lossless compression, in which no data is discarded from
the image. Note: Use Lossy compression for images with complex color or tonal variations, such as photographs or images with gradient fills. Use Lossless compression for images with simple shapes and relatively few colors.

Photoshop Import options
When you import a Photoshop PSD file that contains multiple layers, you can set the following options:
Layer Comp If the Photoshop file contains layer comps, you can specify which version of the image to import. A layer

comp is a snapshot of a state of the Photoshop Layers palette. Layer comps record three types of layer options, all of which are imported into Flash:

• Layer visibility: whether a layer is displayed or hidden. • Layer position in the document. • Layer appearance: whether a layer style is applied to the layer and the layer’s blending mode.
If no layer comps are present, this pop-up menu is hidden. Flash supports all aspects of the layer comp’s fidelity, including visibility, position, and layer style.

FLASH CS3 154
User Guide

Select Photoshop Layers Lists all layers, groups, and layer effects in an image. To select which layers to import, use

the options to the left of the layer’s thumbnail. By default, all layers visible in Photoshop are checked, and invisible layers are not checked. Note: Adjustment layers do not have a compatible layer type in Flash. For this reason, when importing as a flattened bitmap, the visual effect of the adjustment layer is applied to maintain the appearance of the Photoshop layer being imported. If you’ve selected other import options, the adjustment layers will not be applied.
Merge Layers Merge (or collapse) two or more layers into a single bitmap, and then import the resulting single bitmap object rather than individual objects. You can only merge layers that are on the same level, and the selection must be contiguous. For example, you cannot select an item inside a folder and an item outside a folder and merge them. Instead, select the folder and the item outside the folder to merge them. You cannot Control-click individual items that are out of sequence and merge them.

Note: If you select a merged bitmap object, the Merge Layers button changes to the Separate button. To separate any merged bitmap objects you create, select the resulting single bitmap, and click the Separate button.
Importing text objects

Text objects are text layers in PhotoShop. Choose how to import text into Flash.
Editable Text Creates an editable text object from the text on the selected Photoshop layer. The appearance of the text might be compromised to maintain the editability of the text. If you import the text as a movie clip, the movie clip contains an editable text object.

Note: When importing editable text into the library, it must be inside a movie clip. Only movie clips, bitmaps, and graphic symbols can be stored in the library. When Editable Text is selected as an option for a text layer being imported into the library, it is automatically imported as a graphic symbol.
Vector Outlines Converts text to vector paths to preserve the visual appearance of the text. The text itself is no longer editable, but opacity and compatible blend mode maintain their editability. If this option is selected, the object must be converted to a movie clip. Flattened Bitmap Image Rasterizes the text into a bitmap to preserve the exact appearance of the text layer in

Photoshop. Rasterized text is no longer editable. Note: When importing text on a path you must import it as a flattened bitmap image to preserve the visual fidelity of the object.
Importing shape objects

A Shape Layer object is an object that was originally a shape layer in Photoshop or an image layer with a vector clipping mask on it.
Editable Paths And Layer Styles Creates an editable vector shape with a bitmap clipped inside the vector. Supported blend modes, filters, and opacity are maintained. Unsupported blend modes that cannot be reproduced in Flash are removed. The object must be converted to a movie clip. Flattened Bitmap Image Rasterizes the shape into a bitmap to preserve the exact appearance of the shape layer in

Photoshop. A rasterized image is no longer editable.

FLASH CS3 155
User Guide

Importing image or fill layers

If the image or fill layer is associated with a vector mask, it is treated as a shape layer object.
Bitmap Image With Editable Layer Styles Creates a movie clip with a bitmap inside. Supported Blend modes, filters,

and opacity are maintained. Unsupported blend modes that cannot be reproduced in Flash are removed. The object must be converted to a movie clip.
Flattened Bitmap Image Rasterizes the image into a bitmap to preserve the exact appearance of the image or fill

layer in Photoshop.
Importing merged bitmap objects and objects in a merged bitmap

A merged bitmap is an object that contains more than one Photoshop layer that is flattened (or merged) into a single bitmap when imported into Flash. Objects in a merged bitmap represent layers in Photoshop. To create a merged bitmap, select two or more layers, and select the Merge Layers button.
Importing multiple objects of different types

If you import multiple objects of different types, Flash only lets you import the selected objects with the import options they share in common, such as Create Movie Clip and Registration.
Importing multiple objects of the same type

If you import multiple objects of the same type, the import options displayed are the same as if a single object of that type was selected. If the objects do not share the same attributes, the import options displayed are in an indeterminate state, and your results may not be as expected.
Importing a Group folder

When you import a group folder, you can import it as a movie clip, or place each layer in the group on its own layer or keyframe on the timeline. If you select Import As Movie Clip, each layer in the group folder is placed on a layer in a movie clip, which is then placed on its own layer or keyframe on the timeline. The movie clip uses the same name as that group folder had in Photoshop, and if you import the movie clip to a Flash layer, the layer uses the same name. If you do not place the group in a movie clip, each layer is converted to the type that is currently set for it, and each layer in the group is imported to its own Flash layer. The Flash layers are named for the individual layers in the PSD file.
Importing and merging layers

The PSD importer lets you merge two or more layers into a merged bitmap that is imported as a single bitmap file rather than individual objects. The layers you select to create a merged bitmap must be a continuous range of two or more layers at the same level. For example, you cannot select one layer inside a group, and a layer outside that group, and merge them. Instead, you must select the entire group and the separate layer.
Setting publish options

The Publish settings in the PSD Importer let you specify the degree of compression and document quality to apply to the image when publishing the Flash document as a SWF file. These settings take effect only when you publish the document as a SWF file, and have no effect on the image when you import it to the Flash Stage or library.
Compression Lets you choose either lossy or lossless compression formats:

• Lossy Lossy (JPEG) compresses the image in JPEG format. To use the default compression quality specified for
the imported image, select Use Publish Setting. To specify a new quality compression setting, select the Custom

FLASH CS3 156
User Guide

option, and enter a value between 1 and 100 in the Quality text field. (A higher setting preserves greater image integrity but yields a larger file size.).

• Lossless Lossless (PNG/GIF) compresses the image with lossless compression, in which no data is discarded from
the image. Note: Use Lossy compression for images with complex color or tonal variations, such as photographs or images with gradient fills. Use Lossless compression for images with simple shapes and relatively few colors.
Calculate Bitmap Size Determines the number of bitmaps that are created for a given layer based on your import selections, and the compressed size in kilobytes of the resulting bitmaps on the layer. For example, if you select a layer with a drop shadow and a blur, and maintain layer styles, the Calculate Bitmap Size information states that three bitmaps will result from the import—one for each filter effect, and another for the image itself. To calculate the size of all the bitmaps to be imported, select all of the layers and click Calculate Bitmap Size.

Imported bitmaps
Working with imported bitmaps
When you import a bitmap into Flash, you can modify that bitmap and use it in your Flash document in a variety of ways. If a Flash document displays an imported bitmap at a size larger than the original, the image may be distorted. To be sure that images are displayed properly, preview imported bitmaps.

Use the Property inspector to work with bitmaps
When you select a bitmap on the Stage, the Property inspector displays the bitmap’s symbol name and its pixel dimensions and position on the Stage. Using the Property inspector, you can swap an instance of a bitmap—that is, replace the instance with an instance of another bitmap in the current document.
Display the Property inspector with bitmap properties 1 Select an instance of a bitmap on the Stage. 2 Select Window > Properties > Properties. Replace an instance of a bitmap with an instance of another bitmap 1 Select a bitmap instance on the Stage. 2 Select Window > Properties > Properties, and click Swap. 3 Select a bitmap to replace the one currently assigned to the instance.

Set bitmap properties
You can apply anti-aliasing to an imported bitmap to smooth the edges in the image. You can also select a compression option to reduce the bitmap file size and format the file for display on the web.
1 Select a bitmap in the Library panel and click the Properties button at the bottom of the Library panel. 2 Select Allow Smoothing.

FLASH CS3 157
User Guide

3 For Compression, select one of the following options:
Photo (JPEG) Compresses the image in JPEG format. To use the default compression quality specified for the

imported image, select Use Document Default Quality. To specify a new quality compression setting, deselect Use Document Default Quality and enter a value between 1 and 100 in the Quality text field. (A higher setting preserves greater image integrity but yields a larger file size.)
Lossless (PNG/GIF) Compresses the image with lossless compression, in which no data is discarded from the image.

Note: Use Photo compression for images with complex color or tonal variations, such as photographs or images with gradient fills. Use Lossless compression for images with simple shapes and relatively few colors.
4 To determine the results of the file compression, click Test. To determine if the selected compression setting is

acceptable, compare the original file size to the compressed file size.
5 Click OK.

Note: JPEG Quality settings that you select in the Publish Settings dialog box do not specify a quality setting for imported JPEG files. Specify a quality setting for each imported JPEG file in the Bitmap Properties dialog box.

Import bitmaps at runtime
To add bitmaps to a document at runtime, use the ActionScript™ 2.0 or the ActionScript 3.0 BitmapData command. To do so, specify a linkage identifier for the bitmap. For more information, see Assigning linkage to assets in the library in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or Exporting library symbols for ActionScript in Programming ActionScript 3.0.
1 Select the bitmap in the Library panel. 2 Do one of the following:

• Select Linkage from the Panel menu in the upper-right corner of the panel. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the bitmap name in the Library panel, and select Properties
from the context menu. If the Linkage properties aren’t visible in the Properties dialog box, click Advanced.
3 For Linkage, select Export For ActionScript. 4 Enter an identifier string in the text field, and click OK.

Apply a bitmap as a fill
To apply a bitmap as a fill to a graphic object, use the Color panel. Applying a bitmap as a fill tiles the bitmap to fill the object. The Gradient Transform tool allows you to scale, rotate, or skew an image and its bitmap fill.
1 To apply the fill to existing artwork, select a graphic object or objects on the Stage. 2 Select Window > Color. 3 Select Bitmap from the pop-up menu in the center of the panel. 4 To use a larger preview window to display more bitmaps in the current document, click the arrow in the lowerright corner to expand the Color panel. 5 Click a bitmap to select it.

The bitmap becomes the current fill color. If you selected artwork in step 1, the bitmap is applied as a fill to the artwork.

FLASH CS3 158
User Guide

See also
“Transform gradient and bitmap fills” on page 191

Edit bitmaps in an external editor
If you are editing a Fireworks PNG file imported as a flattened image, edit the PNG source file for the bitmap, when available. Note: You cannot edit bitmaps from Fireworks PNG files imported as editable objects in an external image editor. If you have Fireworks 3 or later or another image-editing application installed on your system, you can start the application from Flash to edit an imported bitmap.
Edit a bitmap with Fireworks 3 or later 1 In the Library panel, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the bitmap’s icon and select Edit With

Fireworks 3.
2 Specify whether to open the PNG source file or the bitmap file. 3 Perform the desired modifications to the file in Fireworks. 4 In Fireworks, select File > Update. 5 Return to Flash.

The file is automatically updated in Flash.
Edit a bitmap with another image-editing application 1 In the Library panel, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the bitmap’s icon, and select Edit With. 2 Select an image-editing application to open the bitmap file, and click OK. 3 Perform the desired modifications to the file in the image-editing application. 4 Save the file in the image-editing application.

The file is automatically updated in Flash.
5 Return to Flash to continue editing the document.

Break apart a bitmap
Breaking apart a bitmap separates the pixels in the image into discrete areas that can be selected and modified separately. When you break apart a bitmap, you can modify the bitmap with the Flash drawing and painting tools. Using the Lasso tool with the Magic Wand modifier, you can select areas of a bitmap that are broken apart. To paint with a broken-apart bitmap, select the bitmap with the Eyedropper tool and apply the bitmap as a fill with the Paint Bucket tool or another drawing tool.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Tools panel” on page 187
Break a bitmap apart 1 Select a bitmap in the current scene. 2 Select Modify > Break Apart.

FLASH CS3 159
User Guide

Change the fill of areas of a broken-apart bitmap 1 Select the Lasso tool, click the Magic Wand modifier, and set the following options:.

• For Threshold, enter a value between 1 and 200 to define how closely the color of adjacent pixels must match to
be included in the selection. A higher number includes a broader range of colors. If you enter 0, only pixels of the exact same color as the first pixel you click are selected.

• For Smoothing, select an option to define how much the edges of the selection are smoothed.
2 To select an area, click the bitmap. To add to the selection, continue clicking. 3 To fill the selected areas in the bitmap, select the fill to use. 4 To apply the new fill, select the Paint Bucket tool and click anywhere in the selected area. Use the Eyedropper tool to apply a fill 1 Select the Eyedropper tool and click the broken-apart bitmap on the Stage. The Eyedropper tool sets the bitmap

to be the current fill and changes the active tool to the Paint Bucket.
2 Do one of the following:

• To apply the bitmap as a fill, click an existing graphic object with the Paint Bucket tool. • Select the Oval, Rectangle, or Pen tool, and draw a new object. The object is filled with the broken-apart bitmap.
To scale, rotate, or skew the bitmap fill, use the Paint Bucket tool.

Convert bitmaps to vector graphics
The Trace Bitmap command converts a bitmap into a vector graphic with editable, discrete areas of color. You manipulate the image as a vector graphic, and you can reduce file size. When you convert a bitmap to a vector graphic, the vector graphic is no longer linked to the bitmap symbol in the Library panel. Note: If the imported bitmap contains complex shapes and many colors, the converted vector graphic might have a larger file size than the original bitmap. To find a balance between file size and image quality, try a variety of settings in the Trace Bitmap dialog box. You can also break apart a bitmap to modify the image with Flash drawing and painting tools.
1 Select a bitmap in the current scene. 2 Select Modify > Bitmap > Trace Bitmap. 3 Enter a Color Threshold value.

When two pixels are compared, if the difference in the RGB color values is less than the color threshold, the two pixels are considered the same color. As you increase the threshold value, you decrease the number of colors.
4 For Minimum Area, enter a value to set the number of surrounding pixels to consider when assigning a color to a pixel. 5 For Curve Fit, select an option to determine how smoothly outlines are drawn. 6 For Corner Threshold, select an option to determine whether sharp edges are retained or smoothed out.

To create a vector graphic that looks most like the original bitmap, enter the following values:

• Color Threshold: 10 • Minimum Area: 1 pixel • Curve Fit: Pixels • Corner Threshold: Many Corners

160

Chapter 6: Drawing
The drawing tools in Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional let you create and modify shapes for the artwork in your documents. Before you draw and paint in Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional, it is important to understand how Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional creates artwork, how drawing tools work, and how drawing, painting, and modifying shapes can affect other shapes on the same layer.

Drawing Basics
About drawing
The drawing tools in Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional let you create and modify shapes for the artwork in your documents. For a text tutorial about drawing, see “Draw in Flash” on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials. For a video tutorial about drawing, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0119.

About vector and bitmap graphics
Computers display graphics in either vector or bitmap format. Understanding the difference between the two formats helps you work more efficiently. Using Flash, you can create and animate compact vector graphics. Flash also imports and manipulates vector and bitmap graphics that were created in other applications.
Vector graphics

Vector graphics describe images by using lines and curves, called vectors, that also include color and position properties. For example, the image of a leaf is described by points through which lines pass, creating the leaf ’s outline. The color of the leaf is determined by the color of the outline and the color of the area enclosed by the outline.

Lines in vector art

When you edit a vector graphic, you modify the properties of the lines and curves that describe its shape. Move, resize, reshape, and change the color of a vector graphic without changing the quality of its appearance. Vector graphics are resolution independent; that is, they can be displayed on output devices of varying resolutions without losing any quality.

FLASH CS3 161
User Guide

Bitmap graphics

Bitmap graphics describe images using colored dots, called pixels, arranged in a grid. For example, the image of a leaf is described by the specific location and color value of each pixel in the grid, creating an image in much the same manner as a mosaic.

Pixels in bitmap art

When you edit a bitmap graphic, you modify pixels rather than lines and curves. Bitmap graphics are resolution dependent, because the data describing the image is fixed to a grid of a particular size. Editing a bitmap graphic can change the quality of its appearance. In particular, resizing a bitmap graphic can make the edges of the image ragged as pixels are redistributed within the grid. Displaying a bitmap graphic on an output device that has a lower resolution than the image itself also degrades its quality.

About the Flash drawing models
Flash provides two drawing models that give you a great deal of flexibility when drawing shapes:
Merge Drawing model The default drawing model automatically merges shapes that you draw when you overlap them. If you select a shape that is merged with another, and move it, the shape below it is permanently altered. For example, if you draw a circle and overlay a smaller circle on top of it, and then select the circle and move it, the portion of the second circle that overlaid the first circle is removed.

Shapes created with the merge drawing mode merge together when they overlap. Selecting a shape and moving it results in the overlaid shape being altered.

Object Drawing model Draws shapes as separate objects that do not automatically merge together when overlaid.

This overlaps shapes without altering their appearance if you move them apart, or rearrange their appearance. Flash creates each shape as a separate object that you can individually manipulate.

FLASH CS3 162
User Guide

When you select a shape created using the Object Drawing model, Flash surrounds the shape with a rectangular bounding box. Use the Pointer tool to move the object by clicking the bounding box and dragging the shape to position it on the Stage. Note: Set preferences for contact sensitivity when selecting shapes created using the Object Drawing model.

Shapes created with the Object Drawing model remain as separate objects the you can individually manipulate.

About overlapping shapes
When you use the Pencil, Pen, Line, Oval, Rectangle, or Brush tool to draw a line across another line or painted shape, the overlapping lines are divided into segments at the intersection points. To select, move, and reshape each segment individually, use the Selection tool.

A fill; the fill with a line drawn through it; and the three line segments created by segmentation

When you paint on top of shapes and lines, the portion underneath is replaced by whatever is on top. Paint of the same color merges together. Paint of different colors remains distinct. To create masks, cutouts, and other negative images, use these features. For example, the following cutout is made by moving the ungrouped kite image onto the green shape, deselecting the kite, and then moving the filled portions of the kite away from the green shape.

FLASH CS3 163
User Guide

Making a cutout with the kite image

To avoid inadvertently altering shapes and lines by overlapping them, group the shapes or use layers to separate them.

See also
“Group objects” on page 202 “About layers” on page 36

Use the Object Drawing model
By default, Flash uses the Merge Drawing model. To draw shapes using the Object Drawing model, click the Object Drawing button in the Tools panel.
Enable the object drawing model 1 Select a drawing tool that supports the Object Drawing model (the Pencil, Line, Pen, Brush, Oval, Rectangle, and

Polygon tools).
2 Select the Object Drawing button from the Options category of the Tools panel, or press the J key to toggle between the Merge and Object Drawing models. The Object Drawing button toggles between the Merge and Object Drawing models. Set preferences for contact sensitivity when you select shapes created by using the Object Drawing model. Convert a Merge Drawing model created shape to an Object Drawing model shape 1 Select the shape on the Stage. 2 To convert the shape into a Object Drawing model shape, select Modify > Combine Objects > Union. After

conversion, the shape is treated like a vector-based drawing object that does not alter its appearance by interacting with other shapes. To join two or more shapes into a single, object-based shape, use the Union command.

Select objects
Select objects with the Pointer, Subselection, and Lasso tools.

FLASH CS3 164
User Guide

The Pointer, Subselection, and Lasso tools select objects by clicking on them. The Pointer and Subselection tools select objects by dragging a rectangular selection marquee around the object. The Lasso tool selects objects by dragging a free-form selection marquee around the object. When an object is selected, a rectangular box appears around the object.
1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh). 2 In the General category of the Preferences dialog box, do one of the following:

• To select only objects and points that are completely enclosed by the selection marquee, deselect Contact-Sensitive
Selection and Lasso tools. Points that lie within the selection area will still be selected.

• To select objects or groups that are only partially enclosed by the selection marquee, select Contact-Sensitive
Selection and Lasso tools.

Combining objects
To create new shapes by combining or altering existing objects, use the Combine Objects commands in the Modify menu (Modify > Combine Objects). In some cases, the stacking order of selected objects determines how the operation works. The Combine Objects commands are:
Union Joins two or more shapes into a single shape. The result is a single Object Drawing model shape consisting of all the portions visible on the shapes before they were unified. The unseen, overlapping portions of the shapes are deleted.

Note: Unlike when you use the Group command (Modify > Group), you cannot break apart shapes joined by using the Union command.
Intersect Creates an object from the intersection of two or more objects. The resulting Object Drawing shape consists of the overlapping portions of the combined shapes. Any part of the shape that doesn’t overlap is deleted. The resulting shape uses the fill and stroke of the top-most shape in the stack. Punch Removes portions of a selected object as defined by the overlapping portions of another selected object

positioned in front of it. Any part of a shape that is overlapped by the top-most shape is deleted, and the top-most shape is deleted entirely. The resulting shapes remain as separate objects, and are not combined into a single object (unlike the Union or Intersect commands, which join the objects together).
Crop Uses the shape of one object to crop another object. The front or topmost object defines the shape of the

cropped area. Any part of an underlying shape that overlaps with the top-most shape remains, while all other portions of the underlying shapes are deleted, and the top-most shape is deleted entirely. The resulting shapes remain as separate objects, and are not combined into a single object (unlike the Union or Intersect commands, which join the objects).

Specify drawing preferences
Set drawing settings to specify snapping, smoothing, and straightening behaviors. Change the tolerance setting for each option, and turn each option off or on. Tolerance settings are relative, depending on the resolution of your computer screen and the current magnification of the scene. By default, each option is on and set to Normal tolerance.
Set drawing settings 1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh) and select Editing.

FLASH CS3 165
User Guide

2 Under Drawing Settings, select from the following options:
Connect Lines Determines how close the end of a line being drawn must be to an existing line segment before the end point snaps to the nearest point on the other line. This setting also controls horizontal and vertical line recognition—that is, how nearly horizontal or vertical a line must be drawn before Flash makes it exactly horizontal or vertical. When Snap To Objects is turned on, this setting controls how close objects must be to snap to one another. Smooth Curves Specifies the amount of smoothing applied to curved lines drawn with the Pencil tool when the drawing mode is set to Straighten or Smooth. (Smoother curves are easier to reshape, whereas rougher curves match the original line strokes more closely.)

Note: To further smooth existing curved segments, use Modify > Shape > Smooth and Modify > Shape > Optimize.
Recognize Lines Defines how nearly straight a line segment drawn with the Pencil tool must be before Flash recognizes it as a straight line and makes it perfectly straight. If Recognize Lines is off while you draw, straighten lines later by selecting one or more line segments and selecting Modify > Shape > Straighten. Recognize Shapes Controls how precisely to draw circles, ovals, squares, rectangles, and 90- and 180-degree arcs for them to be recognized as geometric shapes and redrawn accurately. The options are Off, Strict, Normal, and Tolerant. Strict requires that the shape be drawn very close to straight; Tolerant specifies that the shape can be somewhat rough, and Flash will redraw the shape. If Recognize Shapes is off while you draw, straighten lines later by selecting one or more shapes (for example, connected line segments) and selecting Modify > Shape > Straighten. Click Accuracy Specifies how close to an item the pointer must be before Flash recognizes the item.

Specify the Selection, Subselection, and Lasso tool contact-sensitivity options when you create shapes using the Object Drawing model. By default, objects are only selected when the tool’s marquee rectangle completely surrounds the object. Deselecting this option selects entire objects when they are only partially enclosed by the selection marquee of the Selection, Subselection, or Lasso tools.
Set Selection, Subselection, and Lasso tool contact options 1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh). 2 In the General category, do one of the following:

• To select only objects and points that are completely enclosed by the selection marquee, deselect Contact-Sensitive
Selection and Lasso tools. Points that lie within the selection area are still selected.

• To select objects or groups that are only partially enclosed by the selection marquee, select Contact-Sensitive
Selection and Lasso tools. Note: The Subselection tools use the same contact-sensitive setting.

Using Flash drawing and painting tools
About Flash drawing and painting tools
When you use most Flash tools, the Property inspector changes to present the settings associated with that tool. For example, if you select the Text tool, the Property inspector displays text properties, making it easy to select the desired text attributes. When you use a drawing or painting tool to create an object, the tool applies the current stroke and fill attributes to the object. To change the stroke and fill attributes of existing objects, use the Paint Bucket and Ink Bottle tools in the Tools panel or the Property inspector.

FLASH CS3 166
User Guide

Reshape lines and shape outlines in a variety of ways after you create them. Fills and strokes are treated as separate objects. Select fills and strokes separately to move or modify them. To automatically align elements with each other and with the drawing grid or guides, use snapping. To change the display of tools, customize the Tools panel.

See also
“Using Flash authoring panels” on page 40 “Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Tools panel” on page 187 “Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187 “Reshaping lines and shape outlines” on page 178 “About the main toolbar and edit bar” on page 26 “Use the Tools panel” on page 26

Draw with the Pencil tool
To draw lines and shapes, use the Pencil tool, in much the same way that you use a real pencil to draw. To apply smoothing or straightening to the lines and shapes as you draw, select a drawing mode for the Pencil tool.
1 Select the Pencil tool

.

2 Select Window > Properties > Properties and select a stroke color, line weight, and style. 3 Select a drawing mode under Options in the Tools panel:

• To draw straight lines and convert approximations of triangles, ovals, circles, rectangles, and squares into these
common geometric shapes, select Straighten .

• To draw smooth curved lines, select Smooth . • To draw freehand lines with no modification applied, select Ink
.

Lines drawn with Straighten, Smooth, and Ink mode, respectively.

4 To draw with the Pencil tool, Shift-drag to constrain lines to vertical or horizontal directions, click the Stage, and drag.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187

Draw straight lines
To draw one straight line segment at a time, use the Line tool.
1 Select the Line tool

.

2 Select Window > Properties > Properties and select stroke attributes.

FLASH CS3 167
User Guide

Note: You cannot set fill attributes for the Line tool.
3 Click the Object Drawing button in the Options section of the Tools panel, to select either the Merge or Object drawing model. When the Object Drawing button is depressed, the Line tool is in Object drawing mode. 4 Position the pointer where the line is to begin, and drag to where the line is to end. To constrain the angle of the line to multiples of 45 degrees, Shift-drag.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187 “About the Flash drawing models” on page 161

Draw rectangles and ovals
The Oval and Rectangle tools let you create these basic geometric shapes, and apply strokes, fills, and specify rounded corners. In addition to the Merge and Object drawing model, the Oval and Rectangle tools also provide the Primitive Object drawing mode. When you create rectangles or ovals using the Primitive Rectangle or Primitive Oval tools, Flash draws the shapes as separate objects not unlike the shapes created when you use object drawing mode. The Primitive shape tools let you specify the corner radius of rectangles, and the start and end angle and the inner radius of ovals using controls in the Property inspector. After you create a primitive shape, alter the radiuses and dimensions by selecting the shape on the Stage, and adjusting the controls in the Property inspector. Note: When either of the Primitive Object drawing tools is selected, the Property inspector retains the values of the last primitive object that you edited. For example, if you modify a rectangle, and then draw a second rectangle.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187
Draw primitive rectangles 1 To select the Rectangle Primitive tool, click and hold the mouse button on the Rectangle tool

, and select the

Rectangle Primitive tool

from the pop-up menu.

2 To create a primitive rectangle, drag the Rectangle Primitive tool on the Stage.

Note: To change the corner radius while dragging with the Primitive Rectangle tool, press the Up Arrow key or Down Arrow key. When the corners achieve the desired roundness, release the key.
3 With the primitive rectangle selected on the Stage, you can use the controls found in the Property inspector to further modify the shape, or specify fill and stroke colors.

Properties for a rectangle primitive

The Property inspector controls specific to the Rectangle Primitive tool are:

FLASH CS3 168
User Guide

Rectangle Corner Radius Controls Lets you specify the corner radiuses for the rectangle. You can enter a numerical value for the inner radius in the box, or click the slider and interactively adjust the size of the radius. Entering a negative value creates an inverse radius. You can also deselect the constrain corner radius icon, and adjust each corner radius individually. Reset Resets all of the Rectangle Primitive tool’s controls, and returns the primitive rectangle shape drawn on the stage to its initial size and shape.
4 To specify a different corner radius for each corner of the rectangle, deselect the Lock icon located in the Primitive Rectangle radius controls sections of the Property inspector. When locked, the radius controls are restrained so that each corner uses the same radius. 5 To reset the corner radiuses, click the Reset button in the Property inspector. Draw primitive ovals 1 Click and hold the mouse button on the Rectangle tool

, and select the Oval Primitive tool

.

2 To create a primitive oval, drag the Primitive Oval tool on the Stage. To constrain the shape to a circle, Shift-drag. 3 With the primitive oval selected on the Stage, you can use the controls found in the Property inspector to further modify the shape, or specify fill and stroke colors.

Properties for an oval primitive

The Property inspector controls specific to the Primitive Oval tool are: Start angle and End angle Let you specify the angle of the start and end points of the oval. Using these controls, you can easily modify the shape of ovals and circles into pie slices, half circles, and other creative shapes. Inner radius Lets you specify an inner radius (or oval) within the oval. You can either enter a numerical value for the inner radius in the box, or click the slider and interactively adjust the size of the inner radius. The numerical values you can enter for the inner radius range from 0 to 99, and represent the percentage of the oval’s fill that is removed. Close path Lets you specify whether the path (or paths, if you are specifying an inner radius) of the oval is closed. If you specify an open path, no fill is applied to the resulting shape, only the stroke is drawn. Close path is selected by default. Reset Resets all of the Oval Primitive tool’s controls, and returns the primitive oval shape drawn on the stage to its initial size and shape.
Draw ovals and rectangles

The Oval and Rectangle tools create these basic geometric shapes.
1 To select the Rectangle tool

or Oval tool

, click and hold the mouse button on the Rectangle tool and drag.

2 To create a rectangle or oval, drag the Rectangle or Oval tool on the Stage. 3 For the Rectangle tool, specify rounded corners by clicking the Round Rectangle modifier and entering a corner radius value. A value of zero (0) creates square corners.

FLASH CS3 169
User Guide

4 Drag on the Stage. If you are using the Rectangle tool, press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys while dragging to adjust the radius of rounded corners.

For the Oval and Rectangle tools, Shift-drag to constrain the shapes to circles and squares. To specify a specific size of Oval or Rectangle in pixels, press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) with the Oval or Rectangle tool selected, and click the Stage to display the Oval And Rectangle Settings dialog box.

• For ovals, specify the width and height in pixels, and whether to draw the oval from the center. • For rectangles, specify the width and height in pixels, the radius of the rectangle corners for rounded corners, and
whether to draw the rectangle from the center.

Draw polygons and stars
The PolyStar tool draws polygons or stars.
1 To select the PolyStar tool

from the pop-up menu, click and hold the mouse button on the Rectangle tool and drag.

2 Select Window > Properties > Properties and select stroke and fill attributes. 3 Click Options and do the following:

• For Style, select Polygon or Star. • For Number Of Sides, enter a number between 3 and 32. • For Star Point Size, enter a number between 0 and 1 to specify the depth of the star points. A number closer to 0
creates deeper points (like needles). If you are drawing a polygon, leave this setting unchanged. (It does not affect the polygon shape.)
4 Click OK. 5 Drag on the Stage.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187

Paint with the Brush tool
The Brush tool draws brush-like strokes, as if you were painting. It creates special effects, including calligraphic effects. Select a brush size and shape using the Brush tool modifiers. Brush size for new strokes remains constant even when you change the magnification level for the Stage, so the same brush size appears larger when the Stage magnification is lower. For example, suppose you set the Stage magnification to 100% and paint with the Brush tool using the smallest brush size. Then, you change the magnification to 50% and paint again using the smallest brush size. The new stroke that you paint appears 50% thicker than the earlier stroke. (Changing the magnification of the Stage does not change the size of existing brush strokes.) Use an imported bitmap as a fill when painting with the Brush tool. See “Break apart groups and objects” on page 203. If you have a Wacom pressure-sensitive tablet connected to your computer, vary the width and angle of the brush stroke by using the Brush tool Pressure and Tilt modifiers, and varying pressure on the stylus.

FLASH CS3 170
User Guide

The Pressure modifier varies the width of brush strokes when you vary the pressure on the stylus. The Tilt modifier varies the angle of brush strokes when you vary the angle of the stylus on the tablet. The Tilt modifier measures the angle between the top (eraser) end of the stylus and the top (north) edge of the tablet. For example, if you hold the pen vertically against the tablet, the Tilt is 90. The Pressure and Tilt modifiers are both fully supported for the eraser function of the stylus.

A variable-width brush stroke drawn with a stylus

1 Select the Brush tool

.

2 Select Window > Properties > Properties and select a fill color. 3 Click the Brush Mode modifier and select a painting mode:
Paint Normal Paints over lines and fills on the same layer. Paint Fills Paints fills and empty areas, leaving lines unaffected. Paint Behind Paints in blank areas of the Stage on the same layer, leaving lines and fills unaffected. Paint Selection Applies a new fill to the selection when you select a fill in the Fill Color control or the Fill box of the Property inspector, the same as selecting a filled area and applying a new fill. Paint Inside Paints the fill in which you start a brush stroke and never paints lines. If you start painting in an empty area, the fill doesn’t affect any existing filled areas.

4 Select a brush size and brush shape from the Brush tool modifiers. 5 If a Wacom pressure-sensitive tablet is attached to your computer, select the Pressure modifier, the Tilt modifier, or both, to modify brush strokes.

• Select the Pressure modifier to vary the width of your brush strokes by varying the pressure on your stylus. • To vary the angle of your brush strokes by varying the angle of the stylus on the Wacom pressure-sensitive tablet,
select the Tilt modifier.
6 Drag on the Stage. To constrain brush strokes to horizontal and vertical directions, Shift-drag.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187

About paths
Whenever you draw a line or shape in Flash, you create a line called a path. A path is made up of one or more straight or curved segments. The beginning and end of each segment are marked by anchor points, which work like pins holding a wire in place. A path can be closed (for example, a circle), or open, with distinct endpoints (for example, a wavy line). You change the shape of a path by dragging its anchor points, the direction points at the end of direction lines that appear at anchor points, or the path segment itself.

FLASH CS3 171
User Guide

A

C B D F

E

Components of a path A. Selected (solid) endpoint B. Selected anchor point C. Unselected anchor point D. Curved path segment E. Direction line F. Direction point

Paths can have two kinds of anchor points: corner points and smooth points. At a corner point, a path abruptly changes direction. At a smooth point, path segments are connected as a continuous curve. You can draw a path using any combination of corner and smooth points. If you draw the wrong kind of point, you can always change it.

A

B

C

Points on a path A. Four corner points B. Four smooth points C. Combination of corner and smooth points

A corner point can connect any two straight or curved segments, while a smooth point always connects two curved segments.

A corner point can connect both straight segments and curved segments.

Note: Don’t confuse corner and smooth points with straight and curved segments. A paths outline is called a stroke. A color or gradient applied to an open or closed paths interior area is called a fill. A stroke can have weight (thickness), color, and a dash pattern. After you create a path or shape, you can change the characteristics of its stroke and fill.

About direction lines and direction points
When you select an anchor point that connects curved segments (or select the segment itself), the anchor points of the connecting segments display direction handles, which consist of direction lines that end in direction points. The angle and length of the direction lines determine the shape and size of the curved segments. Moving the direction points reshapes the curves. Direction lines don’t appear in the final output.

FLASH CS3 172
User Guide

After selecting an anchor point (left), direction lines appear on any curved segments connected by the anchor point (right).

A smooth point always has two direction lines, which move together as a single, straight unit. When you move a direction line on a smooth point, the curved segments on both sides of the point are adjusted simultaneously, maintaining a continuous curve at that anchor point. In comparison, a corner point can have two, one, or no direction lines, depending on whether it joins two, one, or no curved segments, respectively. Corner point direction lines maintain the corner by using different angles. When you move a direction line on a corner point, only the curve on the same side of the point as that direction line is adjusted.

Adjusting direction lines on a smooth point (left) and a corner point (right)

Direction lines are always tangent to (perpendicular to the radius of) the curve at the anchor points. The angle of each direction line determines the slope of the curve, and the length of each direction line determines the height, or depth, of the curve.

Moving and resizing direction lines changes the slope of curves.

FLASH CS3 173
User Guide

Drawing with the Pen tool
Interacting with the Pen tool
To draw precise paths as straight lines or smooth, flowing curves, use the Pen tool. When you draw with the Pen tool, click to create points on straight line segments, and drag to create points on curved line segments. Adjust straight and curved line segments by adjusting points on the line. Convert curves to straight lines and the reverse, and display points on lines that you create with other Flash drawing tools, such as the Pencil, Brush, Line, Oval, or Rectangle tools, to adjust those lines. The Pen tool provides feedback about its current drawing state by displaying different pointers. The various drawing states are indicated by the following pointers:
Initial Anchor Point pointer The first pointer you see when you select the Pen tool. Indicates that the next mouse click on the stage will create an initial anchor point, which is the beginning of a new path (all new paths begin with an initial anchor point). Any existing drawing paths are terminated. Sequential Anchor Point pointer Indicates that the next mouse click will create an anchor point with a line connecting it to the previous anchor point. This pointer is displayed during the creation of all user-defined anchor points except the initial anchor point of a path. Add Anchor Point pointer

Indicates that the next mouse click will add an anchor point to an existing path. To add an anchor point, the path must be selected, and the Pen tool must not be over an existing anchor point. The existing path is redrawn based on the additional anchor point. Only one anchor point can be added at a time.

Delete Anchor Point pointer

Indicates that the next mouse click on an existing path will remove an anchor point. To remove an anchor point, the path must be selected with the Selection tool, and the pointer must be over an existing anchor point. The existing path is redrawn based on the removal of the anchor point. Only one anchor point can be removed at a time.

Continue Path pointer Extends a new path from an existing anchor point. For this pointer to be activated, the mouse must be over an existing anchor point on a path. This pointer is only available when you are not currently drawing a path. The anchor point does not have to be one of the terminal anchor points of a path; any anchor point can be the location of a continued path. Close Path pointer Closes the path you’re drawing on the starting point of the path. You can only close a path that you are currently drawing, and the existing anchor point must be the starting anchor point of the same path. The resulting path does not have any specified fill color settings applied to the enclosed shape; apply fill color separately.

Similar to the Close Path Tool except that the mouse must not be over the initial anchor point of the same path. The pointer must be over either of the terminal points of a unique path. The segment may or may not be selected.
Join Paths pointer

Note: Joining paths may or may not result in a closed shape.
Retract Bezier Handle pointer

Appears when the mouse is over an anchor point whose Bezier handles are displayed. Clicking the mouse retracts the Bezier handles, and causes the curved path across the anchor point to revert to straight segments. Converts a corner point without direction lines to a corner point with independent direction lines. To enable the convert anchor point pointer, use the Shift + C modifier keys to toggle the Pen tool. For a video tutorial about the Pen tool, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0120.

Convert Anchor Point pointer

FLASH CS3 174
User Guide

See also
“Reshaping lines and shape outlines” on page 178

Set Pen tool preferences
Specify preferences for the appearance of the Pen tool pointer, for previewing line segments as you draw, and for the appearance of selected anchor points. Selected line segments and anchor points use the outline color of the layer on which the lines and points appear.
1 Select the Pen tool Editing.

, then select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh) and click

2 In the Category list, select Drawing. 3 Set the following options for the Pen tool:
Show Pen Preview Previews line segments as you draw. A preview of the line segment appears as you move the

pointer around the Stage, before you click to create the end point of the segment. If this option is not selected, a line segment does not appear until you create the end point.
Show Solid Points Displays selected anchor points as hollow and deselected anchor points as solid. If this option is

not chosen, selected anchor points are solid, and deselected anchor points are hollow.
Show Precise Pointers Specifies that the Pen tool pointer appears as a cross-hair pointer, rather than the default Pen Tool icon, for more precise placement of lines. To display the default Pen Tool icon with the Pen Tool, deselect the option.

Note: To switch between the cross-hair pointer and the default Pen Tool icon, press the Caps Lock key.
4 Click OK.

Draw straight lines with the Pen tool
The simplest path you can draw with the Pen Tool is a straight line, made by clicking the Pen Tool to create two anchor points. Continue to click to create a path made of straight line segments connected by corner points.
1 Select the Pen Tool

.

2 Position the Pen Tool where the straight segment is to begin, and click to define the first anchor point. If direction lines appear, you accidentally dragged the Pen Tool; choose Edit > Undo and click again.

Note: The first segment you draw is not visible until you click a second anchor point (unless you’ve specified Show Pen Preview in the Drawing category of the Preferences dialog box).
3 Click again where you want the segment to end (Shift-click to constrain the angle of the segment to a multiple of 45˚). 4 Continue clicking to set anchor points for additional straight segments.

Clicking pen tool creates straight segments

FLASH CS3 175
User Guide

5 To complete the path as an open or closed shape, do one of the following:

• To complete an open path, double-click the last point, click the Pen Tool in the Tools panel, or Control-click
(Windows) or Command-click (Macintosh) anywhere away from the path.

• To close the path, position the Pen Tool over the first (hollow) anchor point. A small circle appears next to the Pen
Tool pointer when it is positioned correctly. Click or drag to close the path.

• To complete the shape as is, select Edit > Deselect All, or select a different tool in the Tools panel.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187

Draw curves with the Pen tool
To create a curve, add an anchor point where a curve changes direction, and drag the direction lines that shape the curve. The length and slope of the direction lines determine the shape of the curve. Curves are easier to edit and your system can display and print them faster if you draw them using as few anchor points as possible. Using too many points can also introduce unwanted bumps in a curve. Instead, draw widely spaced anchor points, and practice shaping curves by adjusting the length and angles of the direction lines.
1 Select the Pen tool

.

2 Position the Pen tool where the curve is to begin, and hold down the mouse button.

The first anchor point appears, and the Pen tool pointer changes to an arrowhead. (In Photoshop, the pointer changes only after you’ve started dragging.)
3 Drag to set the slope of the curve segment you’re creating, and then release the mouse button.

In general, extend the direction line about one third of the distance to the next anchor point you plan to draw. (You can adjust one or both sides of the direction line later.) Hold down the Shift key to constrain the tool to multiples of 45˚.

A

B

C

Drawing the first point in a curve A. Positioning Pen tool B. Starting to drag (mouse button pressed) C. Dragging to extend direction lines

4 Position the Pen tool where the curve segment is to end, and do one of the following:

• To create a C-shaped curve, drag in a direction opposite to the previous direction line and release the mouse
button.

FLASH CS3 176
User Guide

A

B

C

Drawing the second point in a curve A. Starting to drag second smooth point B. Dragging away from previous direction line, creating a C curve C. Result after releasing mouse button

• To create an S-shaped curve, drag in the same direction as the previous direction line and release the mouse
button.

A

B

C

Drawing an S curve A. Starting to drag new smooth point B. Dragging in the same direction as previous direction line, creating an S curve C. Result after releasing mouse button

5 To create a series of smooth curves, continue dragging the Pen tool from different locations. Place anchor points at the beginning and end of each curve, not at the tip of the curve.

To break out the direction lines of an anchor point, Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Macintosh) direction lines.
6 To complete the path, do one of the following:

• To close the path, position the Pen tool over the first (hollow) anchor point. A small circle appears next to the Pen
tool pointer when it is positioned correctly. Click or drag to close the path.

• To leave the path open, Ctrl-click (Windows) or Command-click (Macintosh) anywhere away from all objects,
select a different tool, or choose Edit > Deselect All.

Add or delete anchor points
Adding anchor points can give you more control over a path or it can extend an open path. However, it’s a good idea not to add more points than necessary. A path with fewer points is easier to edit, display, and print. To reduce the complexity of a path, delete unnecessary points. The toolbox contains three tools for adding or deleting points: the Pen tool the Delete Anchor Point tool . , the Add Anchor Point tool , and

By default, the Pen tool changes to the Add Anchor Point tool as you position it over a selected path, or to the Delete Anchor Point tool as you position it over an anchor point. Note: Don’t use the Delete, Backspace, and Clear keys or the Edit > Cut or Edit > Clear commands to delete anchor points; these keys and commands delete the point and the line segments that connect to that point.

FLASH CS3 177
User Guide

Add or delete anchor points 1 Select the path to modify. 2 Click and hold the mouse button on the Pen tool Delete Anchor Point tool .

, then select the Pen tool

, Add Anchor Point tool

, or the

3 To add an anchor point, position the pointer over a path segment, and click. To delete an anchor point, position the pointer over an anchor point, and click.

Adjust anchor points on paths
When you draw a curve with the Pen tool, you create curve points—anchor points on a continuous, curved path. When you draw a straight line segment, or a straight line connected to a curved segment, you create corner points— anchor points on a straight path or at the juncture of a straight and a curved path. By default, selected curve points appear as hollow circles, and selected corner points appear as hollow squares. To convert segments in a line from straight segments to curve segments or the reverse, convert corner points to curve points or the reverse.

Dragging a direction point out of a corner point to create a smooth point

Move, add, or delete anchor points on a path. To move anchor points, use the Subselection tool to adjust the length or angle of straight segments or the slope of curved segments. Nudge selected anchor points to make small adjustments. Deleting unneeded anchor points on a curved path optimizes the curve and reduces the file size.

• To move an anchor point, drag the point with the Subselection tool
to move the point or points. Shift-click to select multiple points.

.

• To nudge an anchor point or points, select the point or points with the Subselection tool and use the arrow keys • To convert a corner point to a curve point, use the Subselection tool to select the point, then Alt-drag (Windows)
or Option-drag (Macintosh) the point to place the tangent handles.

• To convert a curve point to a corner point, click the point with the Pen tool. The carat ^ marker next to the
pointer indicates when it is over the curve point.

• To add an anchor point, click a line segment with the Pen tool. A plus (+) sign appears next to the Pen tool

if an anchor point can be added to the selected line segment. If the line segment is not yet selected, click it with the Pen tool to select it, and then add an anchor point. anchor point can be deleted from the selected line segment. If the line segment is not yet selected, click it with the Pen tool to select it, and then delete the anchor point.

• To delete a corner point, click the point once with the Pen tool. A minus (-) sign appears next to the Pen tool if an

FLASH CS3 178
User Guide

• To delete a curve point, click the point once with the Pen tool. A minus (-) sign appears next to the Pen tool if an
anchor point can be deleted from the selected line segment. If the line segment is not yet selected, click it with the Pen tool to select it, and then delete the corner point. (Click once to convert the point to a corner point, and once more to delete the point.)

• Select the point with the Subselection tool and press Delete.

Adjust segments
To change the angle or length of the segment, or adjust curved segments to change the slope or direction of the curve, adjust straight segments. When you move a tangent handle on a curve point, the curves on both sides of the point adjust. When you move a tangent handle on a corner point, only the curve on the same side of the point as the tangent handle adjusts.

• To adjust a straight segment, select the Subselection tool

, and select a straight segment. Use the Subselection tool to drag an anchor point on the segment to a new position.

• To adjust a curve segment, select the Subselection tool and drag the segment.
Note: When you click the path, Flash shows the anchor points. Adjusting a segment with the Subselection tool can add points to the path.

• To adjust points or tangent handles on a curve, select the Subselection tool, and select an anchor point on a curved
segment.

• To adjust the shape of the curve on either side of the anchor point, drag the anchor point, or drag the tangent
handle. To constrain the curve to multiples of 45º, shift-drag. To drag tangent handles individually, Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Macintosh).

Drag the anchor point, or drag the direction point.

Reshaping lines and shape outlines
Display and adjust points with the Subselection tool
1 Select the Subselection tool

.

2 Click the line or shape outline.

See also
“Adjust anchor points on paths” on page 177

FLASH CS3 179
User Guide

Reshape using the Selection tool
To reshape a line or shape outline, drag any point on a line using the Selection tool. The pointer changes to indicate what type of reshaping it can perform on the line or fill. Flash adjusts the curve of the line segment to accommodate the new position of the moved point. If the repositioned point is an end point, lengthen or shorten the line. If the repositioned point is a corner, the line segments forming the corner remain straight as they become longer or shorter.

When a corner appears next to the pointer, you can change an end point. When a curve appears next to the pointer, you can adjust a curve.

Some brush stroke areas are easier to reshape if you view them as outlines. If you are having trouble reshaping a complex line, smooth it to remove some of its details, making reshaping easier. Increasing the magnification can also make reshaping easier and more accurate.
1 Select the Selection tool 2 Do one of the following:

.

• To reshape the segment, drag from any point. • To drag a line to create a new corner point, control-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh).

Straighten and smooth lines
To reshape lines and shape outlines, straighten or smooth them. Note: To adjust the degree of automatic smoothing and straightening, specify preferences for drawing settings. Straightening makes small straightening adjustments to lines and curves you already drew. It has no effect on segments that are already straight. To make Flash recognize shapes, use the straightening technique. If you draw any oval, rectangular, or triangular shapes with the Recognize Shapes option turned off, use the Straightening option to make the shapes geometrically perfect. Shapes that are touching, and thus connected to other elements, are not recognized.

Shape recognition turns the top shapes into the bottom shapes.

FLASH CS3 180
User Guide

Smoothing softens curves and reduces bumps or other variations in a curve’s overall direction. It also reduces the number of segments in a curve. Smoothing is relative, however, and has no effect on straight segments. It is particularly useful when you are having trouble reshaping a number of very short curved line segments. Selecting all the segments and smoothing them reduces the number of segments, producing a gentler curve that is easier to reshape. Repeated application of smoothing or straightening makes each segment smoother or straighter, depending on how curved or straight each segment was originally.

• To smooth the curve of each selected fill outline or curved line, select the Selection tool and click the Smooth
modifier in the Options section of the Tools panel, or select Modify > Shape > Smooth. in the Options section of the Tools panel, or select Modify > Shape > and click the Straighten modifier , or select Modify >

• To make small straightening adjustments on each selected fill outline or curved line, select the Selection tool
and click the Straighten modifier Straighten. Shape > Straighten.

• To use shape recognition, select the Selection tool

See also
“Specify drawing preferences” on page 164

Optimize curves
Optimizing smooths curves by refining curved lines and filling outlines, reducing the number of curves used to define these elements. Optimizing curves also reduces the size of the Flash document (FLA file) and the exported Flash application (SWF file). Apply optimization to the same elements multiple times.
1 Select the drawn elements to optimize and select Modify > Shape > Optimize. 2 To specify the degree of smoothing, drag the Smoothing slider. The results depend on the curves selected. Generally, optimizing produces fewer curves, with less resemblance to the original outline. 3 Set additional options:
Use Multiple Passes Repeats the smoothing process until no further optimization can be accomplished; this is the same as repeatedly selecting Optimize with the same elements selected. Show Totals Message Indicates the extent of the optimization when smoothing is complete.

4 Click OK.

Erase
Erasing with the Eraser tool removes strokes and fills.
Quickly delete everything on the Stage
❖ Double-click the Eraser tool

.

Remove stroke segments or filled areas 1 Select the Eraser tool, and then click the Faucet modifier 2 Click the stroke segment or filled area to delete. Erase by dragging 1 Select the Eraser tool.

.

FLASH CS3 181
User Guide

2 Click the Eraser Mode modifier and select an erasing mode:
Erase Normal Erases strokes and fills on the same layer. Erase Fills Erases only fills; strokes are not affected. Erase Lines Erases only strokes; fills are not affected. Erase Selected Fills Erases only the currently selected fills and does not affect strokes, selected or not. (Select the fills

to erase before using the Eraser tool in this mode.)
Erase Inside Erases only the fill on which you begin the eraser stroke. If you begin erasing from an empty point,

nothing is erased. Strokes are unaffected by the eraser in this mode.
3 Click the Eraser Shape modifier and select an eraser shape and size. Make sure that the Faucet modifier is not selected. 4 Drag on the Stage.

Modify shapes
1 To convert lines to fills, select a line or multiple lines and select Modify > Shape > Convert Lines To Fills. Selected lines are converted to filled shapes, which allows you to fill lines with gradients or to erase a portion of a line. Converting lines to fills can make file sizes larger, but it can also speed up drawing for some animations. 2 To expand the shape of a filled object, select a filled shape, and select Modify > Shape > Expand Fill. Enter a value in pixels for Distance and select Expand or Inset For Direction. Expand enlarges the shape, and Inset reduces it.

This feature works best on a single, small, filled color shape with no stroke, that does not contain many small details.
3 To soften the edges of an object, select a filled shape, and select Modify > Shape > Soften Fill Edges. Set the following options:
Distance The width, in pixels, of the soft edge. Number Of Steps Controls how many curves are used for the soft edge effect. The more steps you use, the smoother

the effect. Increasing steps also creates larger files and slows drawing.
Expand Or Inset Controls whether the shape is enlarged or reduced to soften the edges.

This feature works best on a single filled shape that has no stroke, and can increase the file size of a Flash document and the resulting SWF file.

Snapping
About snapping
To automatically align elements with one another, use snapping. Flash provides three ways for you to align objects on the Stage:

• Object snapping snaps objects directly to other objects along their edges. • Pixel snapping snaps objects directly to individual pixels or lines of pixels on the Stage. • Snap alignment snaps objects to a specified snap tolerance, a preset boundary between objects and other objects
or between objects and the edge of the Stage. Note: You can also snap to the grid or to guides.

FLASH CS3 182
User Guide

See also
“About the main toolbar and edit bar” on page 26

Use object snapping
To turn on object snapping, use the Snap To Objects modifier for the Selection tool, or the Snap To Objects command in the View menu. If the Snap To Objects modifier for the Selection tool is on, a small black ring appears under the pointer when you drag an element. The small ring changes to a larger ring when the object is within snapping distance of another object.

See also
“Specify drawing preferences” on page 164
Turn object snapping on or off
❖ Select View > Snapping > Snap To Objects. A check mark appears next to the command when it is on.

When you move or reshape an object, the position of the Selection tool on the object provides the reference point for the snap ring. For example, if you move a filled shape by dragging near its center, the center point snaps to other objects. This is particularly useful for snapping shapes to motion paths for animating. Note: For better control of object placement when snapping, begin dragging from a corner or center point.
Adjust object snapping tolerances 1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh), and click Editing. 2 Under Drawing Settings, adjust the Connect Lines setting.

Use pixel snapping
To turn on pixel snapping, use the Snap To Pixels command in the View menu. If Snap To Pixels is on, a pixel grid appears when the view magnification is set to 400% or higher. The pixel grid represents the individual pixels that appears in your Flash application. When you create or move an object, it is constrained to the pixel grid. If you create a shape whose edges fall between pixel boundaries—for example, if you use a stroke with a fractional width, such as 3.5 pixels—Snap To Pixels snaps to pixel boundaries, and not to the edge of the shape.

• To turn pixel snapping on or off, select View > Snapping > Snap To Pixels. If the magnification is set to 400% or
higher, a pixel grid is displayed. A check mark appears next to the command when it is on.

• To turn pixel snapping on or off temporarily, press the C key. When you release the C key, pixel snapping returns
to the state you selected with View > Snapping > Snap To Pixels.

• To temporarily hide the pixel grid, press the X key. When you release the X key, the pixel grid reappears.

Use snap alignment
To turn on Snap Alignment, use the Snap Align command in the View menu. To select settings for Snap Alignment, use the Edit Snap Align command in the View menu. When you select Snap Alignment settings, set the snap tolerance between horizontal or vertical edges of objects, and between objects’ edges and the Stage border. You can also turn on snap alignment between the horizontal and the vertical centers of objects. All Snap Alignment settings are measured in pixels.

FLASH CS3 183
User Guide

When Snap Alignment is turned on, dotted lines appear on the Stage when you drag an object to the specified snap tolerance. For example, if you set Horizontal snap tolerance to 18 pixels (the default setting), a dotted line appears along the edge of the object you are dragging when the object is exactly 18 pixels from another object. If you turn on Horizontal Center Alignment, a dotted line appears along the horizontal center vertices of two objects when you precisely align the vertices.
Select settings for Snap Alignment 1 Select View > Snapping > Edit Snap Align. 2 In the Snap Align dialog box, do any of the following:

• To set the snap tolerance between objects and the Stage border, enter a value for Movie Border. • To set the snap tolerance between horizontal or vertical edges of objects, enter a value for Horizontal, Vertical, or both. • To turn on Horizontal or Vertical Center Alignment, select Horizontal or Vertical Center Alignment or both.
Turn on Snap Alignment
❖ Select View > Snapping > Snap Align. A check mark appears next to the command when it is on.

184

Chapter 7: Working with color, strokes, and fills
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional includes many tools for creating your own artwork and for controlling the colors, strokes, and fills of your drawings. With Flash you can control and manipulate these aspects of your artwork both during and after its creation.

Working with color
About color
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional lets you apply, create, and modify colors. Using the default palette or a palette you create, you can choose colors to apply to the stroke or fill of an object you are about to create, or an object already on the Stage. When applying a stroke color to a shape, you can do any of the following:

• Apply a solid color, gradient, or bitmap to a shape’s fill. To apply a bitmap fill to a shape, you must import a bitmap
into the current file. Select any solid color, gradient, and the style and weight of the stroke.

• Create an outlined shape with no fill by using No Color as a fill. • Create a filled shape with no outline by using No Color as an outline. • Apply a solid color fill to text.
With the Color panel, you can create and edit solid colors and gradient fills in RGB and HSB modes. To access the system color picker, Alt-double-click (Windows) or Option-double-click (Macintosh) the Stroke Color or Fill Color control in the Tools panel, the shape Property inspector, or the Color panel.

See also
“Setting text attributes” on page 272

About the Color panel
The Color panel lets you change the color of strokes and fills, including the following:

• Import, export, delete, and otherwise modify the color palette for a file by using the Swatches panel. • Select colors in hexadecimal mode. • Create multicolor gradients. • Use gradients to produce a wide range of effects, such as giving an illusion of depth to a two-dimensional object.

FLASH CS3 185
User Guide

The Color panel with the gradient controls displayed.

Color panel options
Stroke Color Changes the color of the stroke, or the border, of a graphic object. Fill Color Changes the color of the fill. The fill is the area of color that fills up the shape. Type Menu Changes the fill style:

• None Removes the fill. • Solid Provides a solid, single fill color. • Linear Produces a gradient that blends on a linear path. • Radial Produces a gradient that blends outward in a circular path from a central focal point. • Bitmap Tiles the selected fill area with a bitmap image that you can select. When you choose Bitmap, a dialog box lets you select a bitmap image on your local computer, and add it to the library. You can apply this bitmap as a fill; the appearance is similar to a mosaic tile pattern with the image repeated within the shape.
RGB Lets you change the density of the red, green, and blue (RGB) colors in a fill. Alpha Sets the opacity for a solid fill, or the currently selected slider for a gradient fill. An alpha value of 0% creates

an invisible (or transparent) fill; an alpha value of 100% creates an opaque fill.
Current Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color. If you select a gradient fill type (Linear or Radial) from

the fill Type menu, the Current Color Swatch displays the color transitions within the gradient you create.
System Color Picker Lets you select a color visually. Click System Color Picker and drag the cross-hair pointer until

you find the color you want.
Hexadecimal value Displays the current color’s hexadecimal value. To change the color using the hexadecimal value,

type in a new value. Hexadecimal color values (also called hex values) are 6-digit alphanumeric combinations that represent a color.
Overflow Lets you control colors applied past the limits of a linear or radial gradient.

• Extend (Default) Applies the colors you specify past the end of the gradient. • Reflect Causes the gradient colors to fill the shape using a reflective mirroring effect. The gradients you specify are repeated in a pattern from the beginning of the gradient to the end, and then repeated in the opposite sequence from the end of the gradient to the beginning, and then back to the beginning of the gradient to the end until the selected shape is filled. • Repeat Repeats the gradient from the beginning of the gradient to the end until the selected shape is filled.

FLASH CS3 186
User Guide

Note: Overflow modes are supported only in Flash Player 8 and later.
Linear RGB Creates a Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)-compliant linear or radial gradient.

Modifying color palettes
About color palettes
Each Flash file contains its own color palette, stored in the Flash document. Flash displays a file’s palette as swatches in the Fill Color and Stroke Color controls and in the Swatches panel. The default color palette is the web-safe palette of 216 colors. To add colors to the current color palette, use the Color panel. You can import and export both solid and gradient color palettes between Flash files, as well as between Flash and other applications.

See also
“Work with solid colors and gradient fills in the Color panel” on page 189

Duplicate, delete, and clear colors
Duplicate colors in the palette, delete individual colors, or clear all colors from the palette.

• To duplicate or delete a color, select Window > Swatches, click the color to duplicate or delete, and select Duplicate
Swatch or Delete Swatch from the panel menu. When duplicating a swatch, the paint bucket appears. Click in the empty area of the Swatches panel with the paint bucket to make a duplicate of the selected color.

• To clear all colors from the color palette, in the Swatches panel, select Clear Colors from the panel menu. All colors
except black and white are removed from the palette.

Use the default palette and the web-safe palette
Save the current palette as the default palette, replace the current palette with the default palette defined for the file, or load the web-safe palette to replace the current palette.

• To load or save the default palette, in the Swatches panel, select one of the following commands from the menu in
the upper-right corner:
Load Default Colors Replaces the current palette with the default palette. Save As Default Saves the current color palette as the default palette. The new default palette is used when you create

new files.

• To load the web-safe 216-color palette, in the Swatches panel, select Web 216 from the menu in the upper-right
corner

Sort color by hue in the palette
To make it easier to locate a color, sort colors in the palette by hue.
❖ In the Swatches panel, select Sort by Color from the menu in the upper-right corner.

FLASH CS3 187
User Guide

Import and export color palettes
To import and export both RGB colors and gradients between Flash files, use Flash Color Set files (CLR files). Import and export RGB color palettes by using Color Table files (ACT files). You can also import color palettes, but not gradients, from GIF files. You cannot import or export gradients from ACT files.
Import a color palette 1 In the Swatches panel, select one of the following commands from the menu in the upper-right corner:

• To append the imported colors to the current palette, select Add Colors. • To replace the current palette with the imported colors, select Replace Colors.
2 Navigate to the desired file, select it, and click OK. Export a color palette 1 In the Swatches panel, select Save Colors from the menu in the upper-right corner and enter a name for the color

palette.
2 For Save As Type (Windows) or Format (Macintosh), select Flash Color Set or Color Table. Click Save.

Strokes, fills, and gradients
Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Tools panel
The Tools panel Stroke Color and Fill Color controls set the painting attributes of new objects you create with the drawing and painting tools. To use these controls to change the painting attributes of existing objects, first select the objects on the Stage. Note: Gradient swatches appear only in the Fill Color control.

• Click the triangle next to the Stroke or Fill color control, and select a color swatch. You can select gradients only
for the fill color.

• Click the System Color Picker button in the pop-up window, and select a color. • Type a color’s hexadecimal value in the box. • To return to the default color settings (white fill and black stroke), click the Black And White button in the Tools
panel.

• To remove any stroke or fill, click the No Color button.
Note: The No Color button appears only when you are creating an oval or rectangle. You can create an object without a stroke or fill, but you cannot use the No Color button with an existing object. Instead, select the existing stroke or fill and delete it.

• To Swap colors between the fill and the stroke, click the Swap Colors button in the Tools panel.

Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector
To change the stroke color, style, and weight for a selected object, use the Stroke Color control in the Property inspector. For stroke style, choose from styles that are preloaded with Flash, or create a custom style. To select a solid color fill, use the Fill Color control in the Property inspector.

FLASH CS3 188
User Guide

Select a stroke color, style, and weight by using the Property inspector 1 Select an object or objects on the Stage (for symbols, first double-click to enter symbol-editing mode). 2 Select Window > Properties > Properties. 3 To select a stroke style, click the triangle next to the Style menu and select an option from the menu. To create a custom style, select Custom from the Property inspector, select options in the Stroke Style dialog box, and click OK.

Note: Selecting a stroke style other than Solid can increase file size.
4 To select a stroke weight, click the triangle next to the Weight menu and set the slider. 5 Specify a stroke height by doing one of the following:

• Select one of the preset values from the Height menu. Preset values appear in points. • Type a value from 0 to 200 in the height text field, and press Enter.
6 To enable stroke hinting, select the Stroke Hinting check box. Stroke hinting adjusts line and curve anchors on full pixels, preventing blurry vertical or horizontal lines. 7 To set the style for a path end, select a Cap option:
None Is flush with the path’s end Round Adds a round cap that extends beyond the path end by half the stroke width Square Adds a square cap that extends beyond the path by half the stroke width

8 (Optional) If you are drawing lines using the Pencil or Brush tools with the drawing mode set to Smooth, use the Smoothing slider to specify the degree to which Flash smooths the lines you draw.

By default, the Smoothing value is set to 50, but you can specify a value from 0 to 100. The greater the smoothing value, the smoother the resulting line. Note: When the drawing mode is set to Straighten or Ink, the Smoothing slider is disabled.
9 To define how two path segments meet, select a Join option. To change the corners in an open or closed path, select a path and select another join option.

Miter, round, and bevel joins

10 To avoid beveling a Miter join, enter a Miter limit.

Line lengths exceeding this value are squared instead of pointed. For example, a Miter limit of 2 for a 3-point stroke means that when the length of the point is twice the stroke weight, Flash removes the limit point.

Applying a Miter limit

Apply a solid color fill by using the Property inspector 1 Select a closed object or objects on the Stage.

FLASH CS3 189
User Guide

2 Select Window > Properties > Properties. 3 To select a color, click the triangle next to the Fill color control and do one of the following:

• Select a color swatch from the palette. • Type a color’s hexadecimal value in the box.

Creating gradients
A gradient is a multicolor fill in which one color gradually changes into another color. Flash lets you apply up to 15 color transitions to a gradient. Flash can create two types of gradients: Linear gradients change color along a single axis (horizontal or vertical). Radial gradients change color in an outward direction starting from a central focal point. You can adjust the direction of a gradient, its colors, the location of the focal point, and many other properties of the gradient. Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional provide additional control over linear and radial gradients for use with Flash Player. These controls, called overflow modes, let you specify how colors are applied beyond the gradient. For a sample of gradients, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimationAndGradients folder to access the sample.

Work with solid colors and gradient fills in the Color panel
You can create any color using the Color panel. If an object is selected on the Stage, the color modifications you make in the Color panel are applied to the selection. You can select colors in RGB or HSB, or you can expand the panel to use hexadecimal mode. You can also specify an alpha value to define the degree of transparency for a color. In addition, you can select a color from the existing color palette. You can expand the Color panel to display a larger color space in place of the color bar, a split color swatch showing the current and previous colors, and a Brightness slider to modify color brightness in all color modes.
Create or edit a solid color with the Color panel 1 To apply the color to existing artwork, select an object or objects on the Stage, and select Window > Color. 2 To select a color mode display, select RGB (the default setting) or HSB from the panel menu in the upper-right corner. 3 Click the Stroke or Fill icon to specify which attribute to modify.

Note: Click the icon, not the color control, or the Color Picker opens.
4 If you selected the Fill icon in step 3, verify that Solid is selected in the Type menu. 5 If an object is selected on the Stage, the color modifications you make in the Color panel are applied to the selection. Do one of the following:

• To select a color, click in the color space in the Color panel. To adjust the brightness of the color, drag the
Brightness slider. Note: To create colors other than black or white, make sure the Brightness slider is not set to either extreme.

• Enter values in the color value boxes: Red, Green, and Blue values for RGB display; Hue, Saturation, and
Brightness values for HSB display; or hexadecimal values for hexadecimal display. Enter an Alpha value to specify the degree of transparency, from 0 for complete transparency to 100 for complete opacity.

FLASH CS3 190
User Guide

• To return to the default color settings, black and white (white fill and black stroke), click the Default Stroke and
Fill button.

• To swap colors between the fill and the stroke, click the Swap Stroke and Fill button. • To apply no color to the fill or stroke, click the No Color button.
Note: You cannot apply a stroke or fill of No Color to an existing object. Instead, select the existing stroke or fill, and delete it.

• Click the Stroke or Fill color control, and select a color.
6 To add the color defined in step 7 to the color swatch list for the current document, select Add Swatch from the menu in the upper-right corner. Create or edit a gradient fill with the Color panel 1 To apply a gradient fill to existing artwork, select an object or objects on the Stage. 2 If the Color panel is not visible, select Window > Color. 3 To select a color mode display, select RGB (the default setting) or HSB. 4 Select a gradient type from the Type menu:
Linear Creates a gradient that shades from the starting point to the end point in a straight line. Radial Produces a gradient that blends outward in a circular path from a central focal point.

Note: When you select a linear or radial gradient, the Color panel also includes two other options if you are publishing for Flash Player 8. First, the Overflow menu appears below the Type menu. Use the Overflow menu to control the colors applied past the limits of the gradient. Second, the gradient definition bar appears, with pointers below the bar indicating the colors in the gradient.
5 (Optional) To apply to the gradient, select an overflow mode: Extend (the default mode), Reflect, and Repeat. 6 (Optional) To create an SVG-compliant (Scalable Vector Graphics) linear or radial gradient, select the Linear RGB check box. 7 To change a color in the gradient, select one of the color pointers below the gradient definition bar and doubleclick the color space that appears directly below the gradient bar to display the Color Picker. Drag the Brightness slider to adjust the lightness of the color. 8 To add a pointer to the gradient, click on or below the gradient definition bar. Select a color for the new pointer, as described in step 7.

You can add up to 15 color pointers, letting you create a gradient with up to 15 color transitions.
9 To reposition a pointer on the gradient, drag the pointer along the gradient definition bar. Drag a pointer down and off of the gradient definition bar to remove it. 10 To save the gradient, click the triangle in the upper-right corner of the Color panel, and select Add Swatch from

the menu. The gradient is added to the Swatches panel for the current document.

Modify strokes with the Ink Bottle tool
To change the stroke color, width, and style of lines or shape outlines, use the Ink Bottle tool. You can apply only solid colors, not gradients or bitmaps, to lines or shape outlines.

FLASH CS3 191
User Guide

Using the Ink Bottle tool, rather than selecting individual lines, makes it easier to change the stroke attributes of multiple objects at one time.
1 Select the Ink Bottle tool from the Tools panel. 2 Select a stroke color. 3 Select a stroke style and stroke width from the Property inspector. 4 To apply the stroke modifications, click an object on the Stage.

Apply solid, gradient, and bitmap fills with the Paint Bucket tool
The Paint Bucket tool fills enclosed areas with color. This tool lets you do the following:

• Fill empty areas, and change the color of already painted areas. • Paint with solid colors, gradient fills, and bitmap fills. • Use the Paint Bucket tool to fill areas that are not entirely enclosed. • Have Flash close gaps in shape outlines as you use the Paint Bucket tool.
1 Select the Paint Bucket tool from the Tools panel. 2 Select a fill color and style. 3 Click the Gap Size modifier and select a gap size option:

• Don’t Close Gaps to close gaps manually before filling the shape. Closing gaps manually can be faster for complex
drawings.

• A Close option to have Flash fill a shape that has gaps.
Note: If gaps are too large, you might have to close them manually.
4 Click the shape or enclosed area to fill.

See also
“Use the Stroke Color and Fill Color controls in the Property inspector” on page 187 “Working with imported bitmaps” on page 156

Transform gradient and bitmap fills
You can transform a gradient or bitmap fill by adjusting the size, direction, or center of the fill.
1 Select the Gradient Transform tool

from the Tools panel.

2 Click an area filled with a gradient or bitmap fill. A bounding box with editing handles appears. When the pointer is over any one of these handles, it changes to indicate the function of the handle.
Center point The rollover icon for the center point handle is a four-way arrow. Focal point The focal point handle appears only when you select a radial gradient. The rollover icon for the focal

point handle is an inverted triangle.
Size The rollover icon for the size handle (middle handle icon on the edge of the bounding box) is a circle with an

arrow inside of it.
Rotation Adjusts the rotation of the gradient. The rollover icon for the rotation handle (the bottom handle icon on the edge of the bounding box) is four arrows in the shape of a circle.

FLASH CS3 192
User Guide

Width Adjusts the width of the gradient. The rollover icon for the width handle (the square handle) is a double-

ended arrow.

A

B C D E

Radial Gradient controls A. Center point B. Width C. Rotation D. Size E. Focal point

Press Shift to constrain the direction of a linear gradient fill to multiples of 45˚.
3 Reshape the gradient or fill in any of the following ways:

• To reposition the center point of the gradient or bitmap fill, drag the center point.

• To change the width of the gradient or bitmap fill, drag the square handle on the side of the bounding box. (This
option resizes only the fill, not the object containing the fill.)

FLASH CS3 193
User Guide

• To change the height of the gradient or bitmap fill, drag the square handle at the bottom of the bounding box.

• To rotate the gradient or bitmap fill, drag the circular rotation handle at the corner. You can also drag the lowest
handle on the bounding circle of a circular gradient or fill.

• To scale a linear gradient or a fill, drag the square handle at the center of the bounding box.

• To change the focal point of a circular gradient, drag the middle circular handle on the bounding circle.

FLASH CS3 194
User Guide

• To skew or slant a fill within a shape, drag one of the circular handles on the top or right side of the bounding box.

• To tile a bitmap inside a shape, scale the fill.

Note: To see all the handles when working with large fills or fills close to the edge of the Stage, select View > Pasteboard.

Copy strokes and fills with the Eyedropper tool
Use the Eyedropper tool to copy fill and stroke attributes from one object and immediately apply them to another object. The Eyedropper tool also lets you sample the image in a bitmap to use as a fill.
1 To apply the attributes of a stroke or filled area to another stroke or filled area, select the Eyedropper tool and click the stroke or filled area whose attributes you want to apply.

When you click a stroke, the tool automatically changes to the Ink Bottle tool. When you click a filled area, the tool automatically changes to the Paint Bucket tool with the Lock Fill modifier turned on.
2 Click another stroke or filled area to apply the new attributes.

See also
“Break apart groups and objects” on page 203

Lock a gradient or bitmap to fill the Stage
You can lock a gradient or bitmap fill to make it appear that the fill extends over the entire Stage and that the objects painted with the fill are masks revealing the underlying gradient or bitmap. When you select the Lock Fill modifier with the Brush or Paint Bucket tool and paint with the tool, the bitmap or gradient fill extends across the objects you paint on the Stage.

Using the Lock Fill modifier creates the appearance of a single gradient or bitmap fill being applied to separate objects on the Stage.

See also
“Apply solid, gradient, and bitmap fills with the Paint Bucket tool” on page 191

FLASH CS3 195
User Guide

Use a locked gradient fill 1 Select the Brush or Paint Bucket tool and select a gradient or bitmap as a fill. 2 Select Linear or Radial from the Type menu in the Color panel. 3 Click the Lock Fill modifier

.

4 First paint the areas where you want to place the center of the fill, and then move to other areas. Use a locked bitmap fill 1 Select the bitmap to use. 2 Select Bitmap from the Type menu in the Color panel. 3 Select the Brush or Paint Bucket tool. 4 Click the Lock Fill modifier

.

5 First paint the areas where you want to place the center of the fill, and then move to other areas.

196

Chapter 8: Working with graphic objects
In Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional, you can work with several different kinds of graphic objects. Each kind has its own advantages and disadvantages. By understanding the capabilities of the different object types, you can make good decisions about which types of objects to use in your work.

About graphic objects
Understanding graphic objects in Flash
In Flash, graphic objects are items on the Stage. Flash lets you move, copy, delete, transform, stack, align, and group graphic objects. Modifying lines and shapes can alter other lines and shapes on the same layer. Note: “Graphic objects” in Flash are different from “ActionScript objects,” which are part of the ActionScript™ programming language. Do not confuse the two uses of the term “objects.” For more information on objects in the programming language, see About data types in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash, or Data types in Programming ActionScript 3.0.

See also
“Drawing” on page 160

About shapes
Shapes are one type of graphic object you can create in Flash. When you draw shapes that overlap each other in the same layer, the topmost shape cuts away the part of the shape underneath it that it overlaps. In this way, drawing shapes is a destructive drawing mode. When a shape has both a stroke and a fill, these are considered separate graphic elements, which can be selected and moved independently. Depending on the type of drawing you are doing, you may find that this behavior well suited to the final art you want to create.
To draw shapes 1 Deselect the Object Drawing option in the Tools panel. 2 Select a drawing tool, and draw on the Stage.

Do not select the Rectangle Primitive or Oval Primitive tools, as these tools create shape primitives instead of standard shapes.

About drawing objects
Drawing objects are graphic elements you create with the Flash drawing tools in object drawing mode. When a tool is in object drawing mode, the shapes you create with it are self-contained. The stroke and fill of a shape are not separate elements, and shapes that overlap do not alter one another.

FLASH CS3 197
User Guide

Depending on your drawing style and the content you want to create, object drawing mode may be best suited to your goals.
To enter object drawing mode 1 Select the Object Drawing option in the Tools panel. 2 Select a drawing tool from the Tools panel and draw on the Stage.

About primitive objects
Primitive objects are graphic shapes that allow you to adjust their characteristics in the Property inspector. This lets you precisely control the size, corner radius, and other properties of the shape at any time after you have created it without having to re-draw it from scratch. Two types of primitives are available, rectangles and ovals.
To draw a primitive object 1 Select the Rectangle Primitive Tool 2 Draw on the Stage.

or Oval Primitive Tool

from the Tools panel.

Selecting objects
Selecting objects
To modify an object, select it first. You can group individual objects to manipulate them as a single object. Modifying lines and shapes can alter other lines and shapes on the same layer. When you select objects or strokes, Flash highlights them with a marquee. You can choose to select only an object’s strokes or only its fills. You can hide selection highlighting to edit objects without viewing highlighting. When you select an object, the Property inspector displays the following:

• The object’s stroke and fill, its pixel dimensions, and the x and y coordinates of the object’s transformation point • A mixed selection, if you select multiple items. The pixel dimensions and x and y coordinates of the selected set
of items. You can use a shape’s Property inspector to change that object’s stroke and fill. To prevent a group or symbol from being selected and accidentally changed, lock the group or symbol.

See also
“Drawing” on page 160 “Working with color, strokes, and fills” on page 184 “Group objects” on page 202 “Symbols overview” on page 208

FLASH CS3 198
User Guide

Select objects with the Selection tool
The Selection tool lets you select entire objects by clicking an object or dragging to enclose the object within a rectangular selection marquee. Note: To select the Selection tool, you can also press the V key. To temporarily switch to the Selection tool when another tool is active, hold down the Control key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh). To disable the Shift-selecting option, deselect the option in Flash General Preferences. See “Set preferences in Flash” on page 27. Instances, groups, and type blocks must be completely enclosed to be selected.

• To select a stroke, fill, group, instance, or text block, click the object. • To select connected lines, double-click one of the lines. • To select a filled shape and its stroked outline, double-click the fill. • To select objects within a rectangular area, drag a marquee around the object or objects to select. • To add to a selection, hold down the Shift key while making additional selections. • To select everything on every layer of a scene, select Edit > Select All, or press Control+A (Windows) or
Command+A (Macintosh). Select All doesn’t select objects on locked or hidden layers, or layers not on the current Timeline.

• To deselect everything on every layer, select Edit > Deselect All, or press Control+Shift+A (Windows) or
Command+Shift+A (Macintosh).

• To select everything on one layer between keyframes, click a frame in the Timeline. • To lock or unlock a group or symbol, select the group or symbol, and then select Modify > Arrange > Lock. Select
Modify > Arrange > Unlock All to unlock all locked groups and symbols.

Select objects with the Lasso tool
When you use the Lasso tool and its Polygon Mode modifier, you can switch between the freehand and straightedged selection modes.
Draw a freehand selection area 1 Drag the Lasso tool around the area. 2 End the loop approximately where you started, or let Flash automatically close the loop with a straight line. Draw a straight-edged selection area 1 Select the Lasso tool’s Polygon Mode modifier 2 Click to set the starting point. 3 Position the pointer where you want the first line to end, and click. Continue setting end points for additional line segments. 4 To close the selection area, double-click. Draw a selection area with both freehand and straight-line edges 1 Deselect the Polygon Mode modifier of the Lasso tool. 2 To draw a freehand segment, drag the Lasso tool on the Stage. 3 To draw straight-edged segments, hold down the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) and click to set start and end points for each new line segment.

in the options area of the Tools panel.

FLASH CS3 199
User Guide

4 To close the selection area, do one of the following:

• Release the mouse button; Flash will close the selection area for you. • Double-click on the starting end of the selection area line.

Hide selection highlighting
Hiding highlighting while you are selecting and editing objects lets you see how artwork appears in its final state.
❖ Select View > Hide Edges.

Select the command again to show selection highlighting.

Set custom bounding box colors for selected objects
You can set different colors to be used for the bounding box rectangles that appear around different kinds of selected objects on the Stage.
1 Select Edit > Preferences. 2 Click the General category. 3 In the Highlight Color section, select a color for each type of object and click OK.

Moving, copying, and deleting objects
Moving and copying objects
When you move an object, the Property inspector indicates the new position. Copy an object by dragging it, pasting it, or by using the Transform panel.

Move objects
To move an object, you can drag the object, use the arrow keys, use the Property inspector, or use the Info panel.
Move objects by dragging 1 Select an object or multiple objects. 2 Select the Selection tool

, position the pointer over the object, and do one of the following:

• To move the object, drag it to the new position. • To copy the object and move the copy, Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Macintosh). • To constrain the object’s movement to multiples of 45˚, Shift-drag.
Move objects by using the arrow keys 1 Select an object or multiple objects. 2 Do one of the following:

• To move the selection 1 pixel at a time, press the arrow key for the direction in which you want the object to move. • To move the selection 10 pixels at a time, press Shift+arrow key.

FLASH CS3 200
User Guide

Note: When Snap To Pixels is selected, the arrow keys move objects by pixel increments on the document’s pixel grid, not by pixels on the screen.
Move objects by using the Property inspector 1 Select an object or multiple objects. 2 If the Property inspector is not visible, select Window > Properties > Properties. 3 Enter x and y values for the location of the upper-left corner of the selection.

The units are relative to the upper-left corner of the Stage. Note: The Property inspector uses the units specified for the Ruler Units option in the Document Properties dialog box.
Move objects by using the Info panel 1 Select an object or multiple objects. 2 If the Info Panel is not visible, select Window > Info. 3 Enter x and y values for the location of the upper-left corner of the selection.

The units are relative to the upper left corner of the Stage.

Move and copy objects by pasting
To move or copy objects between layers, scenes, or other Flash files, use the pasting technique. You can paste an object in a position relative to its original position.
1 Select an object or multiple objects. 2 Select Edit > Cut or Edit > Copy. 3 Select another layer, scene, or file, and then select Edit > Paste In Place to paste the selection in the same position relative to the Stage. Select Edit > Paste In Center to paste the selection in the center of the work area.

Copying objects with the clipboard
Elements copied to the clipboard are anti-aliased, so they look as good in other applications as they do in Flash. This feature is particularly useful for frames that include a bitmap image, gradients, transparency, or a mask layer. Graphics pasted from other Flash documents or programs are placed in the current frame of the current layer. How a graphic element is pasted into a Flash scene depends on the type of element it is, its source, and the preferences you have set:

• Text from a text editor becomes a single text object. • Vector-based graphics from any drawing program become a group that can be ungrouped and edited. • Bitmaps become a single grouped object just like imported bitmaps. You can break apart pasted bitmaps or convert
pasted bitmaps to vector graphics. Note: Before pasting graphics from Illustrator into Flash, convert colors to RGB in Illustrator.

Copy transformed objects
You can create a scaled, rotated, or skewed copy of an object.
1 Select an object. 2 Select Window > Transform.

FLASH CS3 201
User Guide

3 Enter scale, rotation, or skew values. 4 Click the Create Copy button

in the Transform panel.

Delete objects
Deleting an object removes it from the file. Deleting an instance of an object on the Stage does not delete the symbol from the library.
1 Select an object or multiple objects. 2 Do one of the following:

• Press Delete or Backspace. • Select Edit > Clear. • Select Edit > Cut. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the object, and select Cut from the context menu.

See also
“Scale objects” on page 206 “Skew objects” on page 207 “Rotate objects” on page 206 “Create or open a document and set its properties” on page 53 “Convert bitmaps to vector graphics” on page 159 “Use pixel snapping” on page 182

Arranging objects
Stack objects
In a layer, Flash stacks objects in the order in which they are created, placing the most recently created object at the top of the stack. The stacking order of objects determines how they appear when they overlap. You can change the stacking order of objects at any time. Drawn lines and shapes always appear below groups and symbols on the stack. To move them up the stack, you must group them or make them into symbols. Layers also affect the stacking order. Everything on Layer 2 appears in front of everything on Layer 1, and so on. To change the order of layers, drag the layer name in the Timeline to a new position.
1 Select the object. 2 Do one of the following:

• Select Modify > Arrange > Bring To Front Or Send To Back to move the object or group to the top or bottom of
the stacking order.

• Select Modify > Arrange > Bring Forward Or Send Backward to move the object or group forward or backward
one position in the stacking order.

FLASH CS3 202
User Guide

If more than one group is selected, the groups move in front of or behind all unselected groups, while maintaining their order relative to each other.

See also
“About layers” on page 36

Align objects
The Align panel lets you align selected objects along the horizontal or vertical axis. You can align objects vertically along the right edge, center, or left edge of the selected objects, or horizontally along the top edge, center, or bottom edge of the selected objects. For a tutorial about the layout tools in Flash, see Use Layout Tools on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials.
1 Select the objects to align. 2 Select Window > Align. 3 To apply alignment modifications relative to Stage dimensions, in the Align panel, select To Stage. 4 To modify the selected object(s), select alignment buttons.

Group objects
To manipulate elements as a single object, group them. For example, after creating a drawing, you might group the elements of the drawing so that you can easily select and move the drawing as a whole. When you select a group, the Property inspector displays the x and y coordinates of the group and its pixel dimensions. You can edit groups without ungrouping them. You can also select an individual object in a group for editing without ungrouping the objects.
Group and ungroup objects
❖ Select the objects to group. You can select shapes, other groups, symbols, text, and so on.

• To group objects, select Modify > Group, or press Control+G (Windows) or Command+G (Macintosh). • To ungroup objects, select Modify > Ungroup, or press Control+Shift+G (Windows) or Command+Shift+G
(Macintosh).
Edit a group or an object within a group 1 Select the group, and then select Edit > Edit Selected, or double-click the group with the Selection tool.

Everything on the page that is not part of the group is dimmed, indicating that elements outside the group are inaccessible.
2 Edit any element within the group. 3 Select Edit > Edit All, or double-click a blank spot on the Stage with the Selection tool.

Flash restores the group to its status as a single entity, and you can work with other elements on the Stage.

FLASH CS3 203
User Guide

Break apart groups and objects
To separate groups, instances, and bitmaps into ungrouped, editable elements, you break them apart, which significantly reduces the file size of imported graphics. Although you can select Edit > Undo immediately after breaking apart a group or object, breaking apart is not entirely reversible. It affects objects as follows:

• Severs a symbol instance’s link to its master symbol • Discards all but the current frame in an animated symbol • Converts a bitmap to a fill • Places each character into a separate text block when applied to text blocks • Converts characters to outlines when applied to a single text character.
Do not confuse the Break Apart command with the Ungroup command. The Ungroup command separates grouped objects, returning grouped elements to the state they were in before grouping. It does not break apart bitmaps, instances, or type, or convert type to outlines.
1 Select the group, bitmap, or symbol to break apart. 2 Select Modify > Break Apart.

Note: Breaking apart animated symbols, or groups in an interpolated animation is not recommended and might have unpredictable results. Breaking apart complex symbols and large blocks of text can take a long time. You might need to increase the application’s memory allocation to properly break apart complex objects.

See also
“Break text apart” on page 271

Transforming objects
Transforming objects
You can transform graphic objects, as well as groups, text blocks, and instances, by using the Free Transform tool or the options in the Modify > Transform menu. Depending on the type of element you select, you can transform, rotate, skew, scale, or distort the element. You can change or add to a selection during a transformation operation. When you transform an object, group, text box, or instance, the Property inspector for that item displays any changes made to the item’s dimensions or position. A bounding box appears during transform operations that involve dragging. The bounding box is rectangular (unless it was modified with the Distort command or the Envelope modifier) with its edges initially aligned parallel to the edges of the Stage. Transformation handles are located on each corner and in the middle of each side. As you drag, the bounding box previews the transformations.

Move, realign, change, and track the transformation point
During a transformation, a transformation point appears at the center of a selected element. The transformation point is initially aligned with the object’s center point. You can move the transformation point, return it to its default location, and move the default point of origin.

FLASH CS3 204
User Guide

For scaling, skewing, or rotating graphic objects, groups, and text blocks, the point opposite the point you drag is the point of origin by default. For instances, the transformation point is the point of origin by default. You can move the default point of origin for a transformation. You begin a transformation by selecting the Free Transform tool , or selecting one of the Modify > Transform commands. Once you have begun a transformation, you can track the location of the transformation point in the Info panel and in the Property inspector.

• To move the transformation point, drag it from within the selected graphic object. • To realign the transformation point with the element’s center point, double-click the transformation point. • To switch the point of origin for a scale or skew transformation, hold down the Alt key (Windows) or Option key
(Macintosh) while dragging your chosen object control point during the transformation.

• To display the transformation point coordinates in the Info panel, click the Registration/Transformation Point
button in the Info panel. The lower-right square in the button becomes a circle to indicate the registration point coordinates are being displayed. When you select the center square, the X and Y values to the right of the coordinate grid in the Info panel display the x and y coordinates of the transformation point. In addition, the X and Y values for the transformation point appear in the Property inspector for the symbol.

Coordinate grid; Info panel with Registration/Transformation Point button in transformation mode, and with x and y coordinates of selection transformation point visible

By default, the Registration/Transformation Point button is in registration mode, and the X and Y values display the location of the upper-left corner of the current selection, relative to the upper-left corner of the Stage. Note: For symbol instances, the X and Y values display the location of the symbol registration point, or the location of the upper-left corner of the symbol instance.

Transform objects freely
You can perform individual transformations or combine several transformations, such as moving, rotating, scaling, skewing, and distortion. Note: The Free Transform tool cannot transform symbols, bitmaps, video objects, sounds, gradients, or text. If a multiple selection contains any of these items, only the shape objects are distorted. To transform a text block, first convert the characters to shape objects.
1 Select a graphic object, group, instance, or text block on the Stage. 2 Click the Free Transform tool

.

Moving the pointer over and around the selection changes the pointer to indicate which transformation function is available.

FLASH CS3 205
User Guide

3 To transform the selection, drag the handles:

• To move the selection, position the pointer over the object within the bounding box, and drag the object to a new
position. Do not drag the transformation point.

• To set the center of rotation or scaling, drag the transformation point to a new location. • To rotate the selection, position the pointer just outside a corner handle and drag. The selection rotates around
the transformation point. Shift-drag to rotate in 45˚ increments.

• To rotate around the opposite corner, Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Macintosh). • To scale the selection, drag a corner handle diagonally to scale in two dimensions. Shift-drag to resize proportionally.

• To scale in the respective direction only, drag a corner handle or a side handle horizontally or vertically. • To skew the selection, position the pointer on the outline between the transformation handles and drag. • To distort shapes, press Control (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) and drag a corner handle or a side handle. • To taper the object—to move the selected corner and the adjoining corner equal distances from their origins, shiftControl-click to drag (Windows) or Shift-Command-click to drag (Macintosh) a corner handle.
4 To end the transformation, click outside the selected item.

Distort objects
When you apply a Distort transformation to a selected object, dragging a corner handle or an edge handle on the bounding box moves the corner or edge and realigns the adjoining edges. Shift-drag a corner point to constrain the distortion to a taper—that is, move that corner and the adjoining corner an equal distance and in the opposite direction from each other. The adjoining corner is the corner on the same axis as the direction you drag. Controlclick (Windows) or Command-click (Macintosh) to drag a middle point on an edge to move the entire edge freely. You can distort graphic objects by using the Distort command. You can also distort objects when performing a free transform on them. Note: The Distort command cannot modify symbols, shape primitives, bitmaps, video objects, sounds, gradients, object groups, or text. If a multiple selection contains any of these items, only the shape objects are distorted. To modify text, first convert the characters to shape objects.
1 Select a graphic object or objects on the Stage. 2 Select Modify > Transform > Distort. 3 Place the pointer on one of the transformation handles and drag. 4 To end the transformation, click outside the selected object or objects.

Modify shapes with the Envelope modifier
The Envelope modifier lets you warp and distort objects. An envelope is a bounding box that contains one or more objects. Changes made to an envelope’s shape affect the shape of the objects in the envelope. You edit the shape of an envelope by adjusting its points and tangent handles. Note: The Envelope modifier cannot modify symbols, bitmaps, video objects, sounds, gradients, object groups, or text. If a multiple selection contains any of these items, only the shape objects are distorted. To modify text, first convert the characters to shape objects.
1 Select a shape on the Stage.

FLASH CS3 206
User Guide

2 Select Modify > Transform > Envelope. 3 Drag the points and tangent handles to modify the envelope.

Scale objects
Scaling an object enlarges or reduces the object horizontally, vertically, or both.
1 Select a graphic object or objects on the Stage. 2 Select Modify > Transform > Scale. 3 Do one of the following:

• To scale the object both horizontally and vertically, drag one of the corner handles. Proportions are maintained as
you scale. Shift-drag to scale nonuniformly.

• To scale the object either horizontally or vertically, drag a center handle.

4 To end the transformation, click outside the selected object or objects.

Note: When you increase the size of a number of items, items near the edges of the bounding box might be moved off the Stage. If this occurs, select View > Pasteboard to see the elements that are beyond the edges of the Stage.

See also
“About 9-slice scaling and movie clip symbols” on page 223 “Edit movie clip symbols with 9-slice scaling” on page 224

Rotate objects
Rotating an object turns it around its transformation point. The transformation point is aligned with the registration point, which defaults to the center of the object, but you can move the point by dragging it. You can rotate an object with the following methods when using the Rotate commands:

• Dragging with the Free Transform tool

(you can skew and scale the object in the same operation).

• By specifying an angle in the Transform panel (you can scale the object in the same operation).
Rotate and skew objects by dragging 1 Select the object or objects on the Stage. 2 Select Modify > Transform > Rotate And Skew.

FLASH CS3 207
User Guide

3 Do one of the following:

• Drag a corner handle to rotate the object. • Drag a center handle to skew the object.
4 To end the transformation, click outside the selected object or objects. Rotate objects by 90˚ 1 Select the object or objects. 2 Select Modify > Transform > Rotate 90˚ CW to rotate clockwise, or Rotate 90˚ CCW to rotate counterclockwise.

Skew objects
Skewing an object transforms it by slanting it along one or both axes. You can skew an object by dragging or by entering a value in the Transform panel.
1 Select the object or objects. 2 Select Window > Transform. 3 Click Skew. 4 Enter angles for the horizontal and vertical values.

Flip objects
You can flip objects across their vertical or horizontal axis without moving their relative position on the Stage.
1 Select the object. 2 Select Modify > Transform > Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal.

Restore transformed objects
When you use the Transform panel to scale, rotate, and skew instances, groups, and fonts, Flash saves the original size and rotation values with the object. This process lets you remove the transformations you applied and restore the original values. You can undo only the most recent transformation performed in the Transform panel when you select Edit > Undo. You can reset all transformations performed in the Transform panel by clicking the Reset button in the panel before you deselect the object.
Restore a transformed object to its original state 1 Select the transformed object. 2 Select Modify > Transform > Remove Transform. Reset a transformation performed in the Transform panel
❖ With the transformed object still selected, click the Reset button

in the Transform panel.

208

Chapter 9: Using symbols, instances, and library assets
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional allows you to import and create many kinds of assets to populate your Flash documents. These assets are managed in Flash as symbols, instances, and library assets. Understanding how the types of assets work together lets you make good choices about how and when to use them, and anticipate the best design options for your work.

Working with symbols
Symbols overview
A symbol is a graphic, button, or movie clip that you create once in the Flash authoring environment or by using the Button (AS 2.0), SimpleButton (AS 3.0), and MovieClip classes. You can then reuse the symbol throughout your document or in other documents. A symbol can include artwork that you import from another application. Any symbol that you create automatically becomes part of the library for the current document. An instance is a copy of a symbol located on the Stage or nested inside another symbol. An instance can be different from its symbol in color, size, and function. Editing the symbol updates all of its instances, but applying effects to an instance of a symbol updates only that instance. Using symbols in your documents dramatically reduces file size; saving several instances of a symbol requires less storage space than saving multiple copies of the contents of the symbol. For example, you can reduce the file size of your documents by converting static graphics, such as background images, into symbols and then reusing them. Using symbols can also speed SWF file playback, because a symbol needs to be downloaded to Flash Player only once. Share symbols among documents as shared library assets during authoring or at runtime. For runtime shared assets, you can link assets in a source document to any number of destination documents, without importing the assets into the destination document. For assets shared during authoring, you can update or replace a symbol with any other symbol available on your local network. If you import library assets with the same name as assets already in the library, you can resolve naming conflicts without accidentally overwriting existing assets. For a video tutorial about using symbols and instances, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0122. For a text tutorial about symbols and instances, see Create Symbols and Instances on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials.

See also
“Working with button symbols” on page 221 “Using shared library assets” on page 219 “Managing media assets with the Flash document library” on page 65

FLASH CS3 209
User Guide

Types of symbols
Each symbol has a unique Timeline and Stage, complete with layers. You can add frames, keyframes, and layers to a symbol Timeline, just as you can to the main Timeline. When you create a symbol you choose the symbol type.

• Use graphic symbols

for static images and to create reusable pieces of animation that are tied to the main Timeline. Graphic symbols operate in sync with the main Timeline. Interactive controls and sounds won’t work in a graphic symbol’s animation sequence. Graphic symbols add less to the FLA file size than buttons or movie clips because they have no timeline. to create interactive buttons that respond to mouse clicks, rollovers, or other actions. You define the graphics associated with various button states, and then assign actions to a button instance. For more information, see Handling events in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or Handling events in Programming ActionScript 3.0. to create reusable pieces of animation. Movie clips have their own multiframe Timeline that is independent from the main Timeline—think of them as nested inside a main Timeline that can contain interactive controls, sounds, and even other movie clip instances. You can also place movie clip instances inside the Timeline of a button symbol to create animated buttons. In addition, movie clips are scriptable with ActionScript™.

• Use button symbols

• Use movie clip symbols

• Use font symbols to export a font and use it in other Flash documents.
Flash provides built-in components, movie clips with defined parameters, that you can use to add user interface elements, such as buttons, check boxes, or scroll bars, to your documents. For more information, see About components in Using ActionScript 2.0 Components, or About ActionScript 3.0 components in Using ActionScript 3.0 Components. Note: To preview animation in component instances and scaling of 9-slice-scaled movie clips in the Flash authoring environment, select Control > Enable Live Preview.

See also
“Embed and share fonts” on page 269

Create symbols
You can create a symbol from selected objects on the Stage, create an empty symbol and make or import the content in symbol-editing mode, and create font symbols in Flash. Symbols can contain all the functionality that Flash, including animation. Using symbols that contain animation lets you create Flash applications with a lot of movement while minimizing file size. Consider creating animation in a symbol that has a repetitive or cyclic action—the up-and-down motion of a bird’s wings, for example. To add symbols to your document, use shared library assets during authoring or at runtime. A tutorial entitled Create Symbols and Instances is available on the Flash Tutorials web page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials. Download and decompress the Tutorials zip file and navigate to the Basic Tasks\Create Symbols and Instances directory.

FLASH CS3 210
User Guide

See also
“About changing instance properties” on page 214 “Using shared library assets” on page 219 “Embed and share fonts” on page 269
Convert selected elements to a symbol 1 Select an element or several elements on the Stage. Do one of the following:

• Select Modify > Convert To Symbol. • Drag the selection to the Library panel. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) and select Convert To Symbol from the context menu.
2 In the Convert To Symbol dialog box, type the name of the symbol and select the behavior. 3 Click in the registration grid to position the registration point for the symbol. 4 Click OK.

Flash adds the symbol to the library. The selection on the Stage becomes an instance of the symbol. Once you have created a symbol, you can edit it in symbol edit mode by choosing Edit > Edit Symbols, or you can edit it in the context of the Stage by choosing Edit > Edit In Place. You can also change the registration point of a symbol.
Create an empty symbol 1 Do one of the following:

• Select Insert > New Symbol. • Click the New Symbol button at the lower left of the Library panel. • Select New Symbol from the Library Panel menu in the upper-right corner of the Library panel.
2 In the Create New Symbol dialog box, type the name of the symbol and select the behavior. 3 Click OK.

Flash adds the symbol to the library and switches to symbol-editing mode. In symbol-editing mode, the name of the symbol appears above the upper left corner of the Stage, and a cross hair indicates the symbol’s registration point.
4 To create the symbol content, use the Timeline, draw with the drawing tools, import media, or create instances of

other symbols.
5 To return to document-editing mode, do one of the following:

• Click the Back button. • Select Edit > Edit Document. • Click the scene name in the Edit bar.
When you create a symbol, the registration point is placed at the center of the window in symbol-editing mode. You can place the symbol contents in the window in relation to the registration point. To change the registration point, when you edit a symbol, move the symbol contents in relation to the registration point.

FLASH CS3 211
User Guide

Convert animation on the Stage into a movie clip
To reuse an animated sequence on the Stage, or to manipulate it as an instance, select it and save it as a movie clip symbol.
1 On the main Timeline, select every frame in every layer of the animation on the Stage that you want to use. For information on selecting frames, see “Manage frames and keyframes in the Timeline” on page 70. 2 Do one of the following to copy the frames:

• Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) any selected frame, and select Copy Frames from the context
menu. To delete the sequence after converting it to a movie clip, select Cut.

• Select Edit > Timeline > Copy Frames. To delete the sequence after converting it to a movie clip, select Cut Frames.
3 Deselect your selection and make sure nothing on the Stage is selected. Select Insert > New Symbol. 4 Name the symbol. For Type, select Movie Clip, then click OK. 5 On the Timeline, click Frame 1 on Layer 1, and select Edit > Timeline > Paste Frames.

This action pastes the frames (and any layers and layer names) you copied from the main Timeline to the Timeline of this movie clip symbol. Any animation, buttons, or interactivity from the frames you copied now becomes an independent animation (a movie clip symbol) that you can reuse.
6 To return to document-editing mode, do one of the following:

• Click the Back button. • Select Edit > Edit Document. • Click the scene name in the Edit bar above the Stage.

Duplicate symbols
Duplicating a symbol lets you use an existing symbol as a starting point for creating a symbol. To create versions of the symbol with different appearances, also use instances.
Duplicate a symbol using the Library panel
❖ Select a symbol in the Library panel and do one of the following:

• Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select Duplicate from the context menu. • Select Duplicate from the Library Panel menu.
Duplicate a symbol by selecting an instance 1 Select an instance of the symbol on the Stage. 2 Select Modify > Symbol > Duplicate Symbol.

The symbol is duplicated, and the instance is replaced with an instance of the duplicate symbol.

Edit symbols
When you edit a symbol, Flash updates all the instances of that symbol in your document. Edit the symbol in the following ways:

• In context with the other objects on the Stage by using the Edit In Place command. Other objects are dimmed to
distinguish them from the symbol you are editing. The name of the symbol you are editing appears in an Edit bar at the top of the Stage, to the right of the current scene name.

FLASH CS3 212
User Guide

• In a separate window, using the Edit In New Window command. Editing a symbol in a separate window lets you
see the symbol and the main Timeline at the same time. The name of the symbol you are editing appears in the Edit bar at the top of the Stage. You edit the symbol by changing the window from the Stage view to a view of only the symbol, using symbol-editing mode. The name of the symbol you are editing appears in the Edit bar at the top of the Stage, to the right of the current scene name. When you edit a symbol, Flash updates all instances of the symbol throughout the document to reflect your edits. While editing a symbol, use any of the drawing tools, import media, or create instances of other symbols.

• Change the registration point of a symbol (the point identified by the coordinates 0, 0) by using any symbolediting method.
Edit a symbol in place 1 Do one of the following:

• Double-click an instance of the symbol on the Stage. • Select an instance of the symbol on the Stage and right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select
Edit in Place.

• Select an instance of the symbol on the Stage, and select Edit > Edit In Place.
2 Edit the symbol. 3 To change the registration point, drag the symbol on the Stage. A cross hair indicates the location of the registration point. 4 To exit edit-in-place mode and return to document-editing mode, do one of the following:

• Click the Back button. • Select the current scene name from the Scene menu in the Edit bar. • Select Edit > Edit Document. • Double-click outside the symbol content.
Edit a symbol in a new window: 1 Select an instance of the symbol on the Stage and right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select

Edit In New Window.
2 Edit the symbol. 3 To change the registration point, drag the symbol on the Stage. A cross hair indicates the location of the regis-

tration point.
4 Click the Close box in the upper-right corner (Windows) or upper-left corner (Macintosh) to close the new window, and click in the main document window to return to editing the main document. Edit a symbol in symbol-editing mode 1 Do one of the following to select the symbol:

• Double-click the symbol’s icon in the Library panel. • Select an instance of the symbol on the Stage, and right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select
Edit from the context menu.

• Select an instance of the symbol on the Stage and select Edit > Edit Symbols.

FLASH CS3 213
User Guide

• Select the symbol in the Library panel and select Edit from the Library Panel menu, or right-click (Windows) or
Control-click (Macintosh) the symbol in the Library panel and select Edit.
2 Edit the symbol. 3 To exit symbol-editing mode and return to editing the document, do one of the following:

• Click the Back button at the left of the Edit bar at the top of the Stage. • Select Edit > Edit Document. • Click the scene name in the Edit bar at the top of the Stage. • Double-click outside the symbol content.

Working with symbol instances
Create instances
After you create a symbol, you can create instances of that symbol throughout your document, including inside other symbols. When you modify the symbol, Flash updates all instances of the symbol. You can give names to instances from the Property inspector. Use the instance name to refer to an instance in ActionScript. To control instances with ActionScript, give each instance within a single timeline a unique name. For more information, see Handling events in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or Handling events in Programming ActionScript 3.0. To specify color effects, assign actions, set the graphic display mode, or change the behavior of new instances, use the Property inspector. The behavior of the instance is the same as the symbol behavior, unless you specify otherwise. Any changes you make affect only the instance and not the symbol. For a video tutorial about using symbols and instances, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0122. For a text tutorial about symbols and instances, see Create Symbols and Instances on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials.
Create an instance of a symbol 1 Select a layer in the Timeline. Flash can place instances only in keyframes, always on the current layer. If you don’t

select a keyframe, Flash adds the instance to the first keyframe to the left of the current frame. Note: A keyframe is a frame in which you define a change in the animation. For more information, see “Manage frames and keyframes in the Timeline” on page 70.
2 Select Window > Library. 3 Drag the symbol from the library to the Stage. 4 If you created an instance of a graphic symbol, to add the number of frames that will contain the graphic symbol, select Insert > Timeline > Frame. Apply a custom name to an instance 1 Select the instance on the Stage. 2 Select Window > Properties > Properties, and enter a name in the Instance Name box.

FLASH CS3 214
User Guide

About changing instance properties
Each symbol instance has its own properties that are separate from the symbol. You can change the tint, transparency, and brightness of an instance; redefine how the instance behaves (for example, change a graphic to a movie clip); and specify how animation plays inside a graphic instance. You can also skew, rotate, or scale an instance without affecting the symbol. In addition, you can name a movie clip or button instance so that you can use ActionScript to change its properties. For more information, see Classes in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or Objects and classes in Programming ActionScript 3.0. To edit instance properties, you use the Property inspector (Windows > Properties > Properties). The properties of an instance are saved with it. If you edit a symbol or relink an instance to a different symbol, any instance properties you’ve changed still apply to the instance.

Change the color and transparency of an instance
Each instance of a symbol can have its own color effect. To set color and transparency options for instances, use the Property inspector. Settings in the Property inspector also affect bitmaps placed in symbols. When you change the color and transparency for an instance in a specific frame, Flash makes the change as soon as it displays that frame. To make gradual color changes, apply a motion tween. When tweening color, you enter different effect settings in starting and ending keyframes of an instance, and then tween the settings to make the instance’s colors shift over time. Note: If you apply a color effect to a movie clip symbol that has multiple frames, Flash applies the effect to every frame in the movie clip symbol.
1 Select the instance on the Stage, and select Window > Properties > Properties. 2 In the Property inspector, select one of the following options from the Color menu:
Brightness Adjusts the relative lightness or darkness of the image, measured on a scale from black (–100%) to white (100%). To adjust brightness, click the triangle and drag the slider or enter a value in the box. Tint Colors the instance with the same hue. To set the tint percentage from transparent (0%) to completely saturated (100%), use the Tint slider in the Property inspector. To adjust tint, click the triangle and drag the slider or enter a value in the box. To select a color, enter red, green, and blue values in the respective boxes, or click the color control and select a color from the Color Picker. Alpha Adjusts the transparency of the instance, from transparent (0%) to completely saturated (100%). To adjust the

alpha value, click the triangle and drag the slider or enter a value in the box.
Advanced Separately adjusts the red, green, blue, and transparency values of an instance. This is most useful to

create and animate subtle color effects on objects such as bitmaps. The controls on the left let you reduce the color or transparency values by a specified percentage. The controls on the right let you reduce or increase the color or transparency values by a constant value. The current red, green, blue, and alpha values are multiplied by the percentage values, and then added to the constant values in the right column, producing the new color values. For example, if the current red value is 100, setting the left slider to 50% and the right slider to 100% produces a new red value of 150 ([100 x .5] + 100 = 150). Note: The Advanced settings in the Effect panel implement the function (a * y+ b)= x where a is the percentage specified in the left set of boxes, y is the color of the original bitmap, b is the value specified in the right set of boxes, and x is the resulting effect (between 0 and 255 for RGB, and 0 and 100 for alpha transparency).

FLASH CS3 215
User Guide

You can also change the color of an instance using the ActionScript ColorTransform object. For detailed information on the Color object, see ColorTransform in ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference or ActionScript 3.0 Language and Components Reference.

See also
“Add a motion tween to instances, groups, or type” on page 242

Swap one instance for another
To display a different instance on the Stage and preserve all the original instance properties, such as color effects or button actions, assign a different symbol to an instance. For example, suppose you’re creating a cartoon with a rat symbol for your character, but decide to change the character to a cat. You could replace the rat symbol with the cat symbol and have the updated character appear in roughly the same location in all your frames.

See also
“Working with button symbols” on page 221
Assign a different symbol to an instance 1 Select the instance on the Stage, and select Window > Properties > Properties. 2 Click the Swap button in the Property inspector. 3 Select a symbol to replace the symbol currently assigned to the instance. To duplicate a selected symbol, click Duplicate Symbol and click OK.

Duplicating lets you base a new symbol on an existing one in the library and minimizes copying if you’re making several symbols that differ slightly.
Replace all instances of a symbol
❖ Drag a symbol with the same name as the symbol you are replacing from one Library panel into the Library panel

of the FLA file you are editing and click Replace. If you have folders in the Library, the new symbol must be dragged into the same folder as the symbol you are replacing.

Change an instance’s type
To redefine an instance’s behavior in a Flash application, change its type. For example, if a graphic instance contains animation that you want to play independently of the main Timeline, redefine the graphic instance as a movie clip instance.
1 Select the instance on the Stage, and select Window > Properties > Properties. 2 Select Graphic, Button, or Movie Clip from the menu in the Property inspector.

Set looping for graphic instances
To determine how animation sequences inside a graphic instance play in your Flash application, set options in the Property inspector.

FLASH CS3 216
User Guide

An animated graphic symbol is tied to the Timeline of the document in which the symbol is placed. In contrast, a movie clip symbol has its own independent Timeline. Animated graphic symbols, because they use the same Timeline as the main document, display their animation in document-editing mode. Movie clip symbols appear as static objects on the Stage and do not appear as animations in the Flash editing environment.
1 Select a graphic instance on the Stage, and select Window > Properties > Properties. 2 Select an animation option from the menu below the instance name:
Loop Loops all the animation sequences contained in the current instance for as many frames as the instance

occupies.
Play Once Plays the animation sequence beginning from the frame you specify to the end of the animation and then

stops.
Single Frame Displays one frame of the animation sequence. Specify which frame to display.

Break apart an instance symbol
To break the link between an instance and a symbol and make the instance into a collection of ungrouped shapes and lines, you break apart the instance. This feature is useful for changing the instance substantially without affecting any other instance. If you modify the source symbol after breaking apart the instance, the instance is not updated with the changes.
1 Select the instance on the Stage. 2 Select Modify > Break Apart. This action breaks the instance into its component graphic elements. 3 To modify these elements, use the painting and drawing tools.

Get information about instances on the Stage
The Property inspector and Info panel display the following information about instances selected on the Stage:

• In the Property inspector, view the instance’s behavior and settings—for all instance types, color effect settings,
location, and size; for graphics, the loop mode and first frame that contains the graphic; for buttons, the instance name (if assigned) and tracking option; for movie clips, the instance name (if assigned). For location, the Property inspector displays the x and y coordinates of either the symbol’s registration point or the symbol’s upper left corner, depending on which option is selected in the Info panel.

• In the Info panel, view the instance’s size and location; the location of its registration point; its red (R), green (G),
blue (B), and alpha (A) values (if the instance has a solid fill); and the location of the pointer. The Info panel also displays the x and y coordinates of either the symbol’s registration point or the symbol’s upper-left corner, depending on which option is selected. To display the coordinates of the registration point, click the center square in the Coordinate grid in the Info panel. To display the coordinates of the upper-left corner, click the upper-left square in the Coordinate grid.

• In the Movie Explorer, view the contents of the current document, including instances and symbols.
View any actions assigned to a button or movie clip in the Actions panel.

See also
“Using the Movie Explorer with screens” on page 371
Get information about an instance 1 Select the instance on the Stage.

FLASH CS3 217
User Guide

2 Display the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties) or panel to use:

• To display the Info panel, select Window > Info. • To display the Movie Explorer, select Window > Movie Explorer. • To display the Actions panel, select Window > Actions.
View the symbol definition for the selected symbol in the Movie Explorer 1 Click the Show Buttons, Movie Clips, and Graphics button at the top of the Movie Explorer. 2 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select Show Symbol Instances and Go To Symbol Definition; or select these options from the menu in the upper-right corner of the Movie Explorer. Jump to the scene containing instances of a selected symbol 1 Display the symbol definitions. 2 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select Show Movie Elements and Go To Symbol Definition; or select these options from the menu in the upper-right corner of the Movie Explorer.

Library assets
Copy library assets between documents
Copy library assets from a source document into a destination document in a variety of ways: by copying and pasting the asset, by dragging and dropping the asset, or by opening the library of the source document in the destination document and dragging the source document assets into the destination document. Share symbols between documents as shared library assets during authoring or at runtime. If you attempt to copy assets that have the same name as existing assets in the destination document, the Resolve Library Conflicts dialog box lets you choose whether to overwrite the existing assets or to preserve the existing assets and add the new assets with modified names. Organize library assets in folders to minimize name conflicts when copying assets between documents.

See also
“Work with folders in the Library panel” on page 67 “Working with button symbols” on page 221 “Using shared library assets” on page 219
Copy a library asset by copying and pasting 1 Select the asset on the Stage in the source document. 2 Select Edit > Copy. 3 Make the destination document the active document. 4 To paste the asset in the center of the visible pasteboard, place the pointer on the Stage and select Edit > Paste In Center. To place the asset in the same location as in the source document, select Edit > Paste In Place.

FLASH CS3 218
User Guide

Copy a library asset by dragging
❖ With the destination document open, select the asset in the Library panel in the source document and drag the

asset into the Library panel in the destination document.
Copy a library asset by opening the source document library in the destination document 1 With the destination document active, select File > Import > Open External Library. 2 Select the source document, and click Open. 3 Drag an asset from the source document library onto the Stage or into the library of the destination document.

Conflicts between library assets
If you import or copy a library asset into a document that already contains a different asset of the same name, choose whether to replace the existing item with the new item. This option is available with all the methods for importing or copying library assets. The Resolve Library Items dialog box appears when you attempt to place items that conflict with existing items in a document. A conflict exists when you copy an item from a source document that already exists in the destination document and the items have different modification dates. Avoid naming conflicts by organizing your assets inside folders in your document’s library. The dialog box also appears when you paste a symbol or component into your document’s Stage and you already have a copy of the symbol or component that has a different modification date from the one you’re pasting. If you choose not to replace the existing items, Flash attempts to use the existing item instead of the conflicting item that you are pasting. For example, if you copy a symbol named Symbol 1 and paste the copy into the Stage of a document that already contains a symbol named Symbol 1, Flash creates an instance of the existing Symbol 1. If you choose to replace the existing items, Flash replaces the existing items (and all their instances) with the new items of the same name. If you cancel the Import or Copy operation, the operation is canceled for all items (not just those items that conflict in the destination document). Only identical library item types may be replaced with each other. That is, you cannot replace a sound named Test with a bitmap named Test. In such cases, the new items are added to the library with the word Copy appended to the name. Note: Replacing library items using this method is not irreversible. Save a backup of your FLA file before you perform complex paste operations that are resolved by replacing conflicting library items. If the Resolve Library Conflict dialog box appears when you are importing or copying library assets into a document, resolve the naming conflict.

Resolve naming conflicts between library assets
❖ Do one of the following:

• To preserve the existing assets in the destination document, click Don’t Replace Existing Items. • To replace the existing assets and their instances with the new items of the same name, click Replace Existing
Items.

FLASH CS3 219
User Guide

Using shared library assets
About shared library assets
Shared library assets let you use assets from a source document in multiple destination documents:

• For runtime shared assets, assets from a source document are linked as external files in a destination document.
Runtime assets are loaded into the destination document during document playback—that is, at runtime. The source document containing the shared asset does not need to be available on your local network when you author the destination document. The source document must be posted to a URL for the shared asset to be available to the destination document at runtime.

• For shared assets during authoring, update or replace any symbol in a document you are authoring with any other
symbol available on your local network. Update the symbol in the destination document as you author the document. The symbol in the destination document retains its original name and properties, but its contents are updated or replaced with those of the symbol you select. Using shared library assets can optimize workflow and document asset management.

Working with runtime shared assets
Using runtime shared library assets involves two procedures. First, the author of the source document defines a shared asset in the source document and enters an identifier string for the asset and a URL (HTTP or HTTPS only) where the source document will be posted. Second, the author of the destination document defines a shared asset in the destination document and enters an identifier string and URL identical to those used for the shared asset in the source document. Alternatively, the destination document author can drag the shared assets from the posted source document into the destination document library. The ActionScript version set in the Publish settings must match that of the source document. In either scenario, the source document must be posted to the specified URL for the shared assets to be available for the destination document.

Define runtime shared assets in a source document
To define sharing properties for an asset in a source document, and make the asset accessible for linking to destination documents, use the Symbol Properties dialog box or the Linkage Properties dialog box.
1 With the source document open, select Window > Library:

• Select a movie clip, button, or graphic symbol in the Library panel, and select Properties from the Library Panel
menu. Click Advanced.

• Select a font symbol, sound, or bitmap, and select Linkage from the Library Panel menu.
2 For Linkage, select Export For Runtime Sharing to make the asset available for linking to the destination document. 3 Enter an identifier for the symbol. Do not include spaces. This is the name Flash uses to identify the asset when linking to the destination document.

Note: Flash also uses the linkage identifier to identify a movie clip or button that is used as an object in ActionScript. See Working with movie clips in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or Working with movie clips in Programming ActionScript 3.0.
4 Enter the URL where the SWF file containing the shared asset will be posted, and click OK.

FLASH CS3 220
User Guide

When you publish the SWF file, you must post the SWF file to the URL you specified, so that the shared assets are available to destination documents.

Link to runtime shared assets from a destination document

Link a shared asset to a destination document by entering the identifier and URL 1 In the destination document, select Window > Library.

• Select a movie clip, button, graphic symbol, bitmap, or sound in the Library panel, and select Properties from the
Library Panel menu. Click Advanced.

• Select a font symbol, and select Linkage from the Library Panel menu.
2 For Linkage, select Import For Runtime Sharing to link to the asset in the source document. 3 Enter an identifier for the symbol, bitmap, or sound that is identical to the identifier used for the symbol in the source document. Do not include spaces. 4 Enter the URL where the SWF source file containing the shared asset is posted, and click OK. Link a shared asset to a destination document by dragging 1 In the destination document, do one of the following:

• Select File > Open. • Select File > Import > Open External Library.
2 Select the source document and click Open. 3 Drag the shared asset from the source document Library panel into the Library panel or onto the Stage in the destination document. Turn off sharing for a symbol in a destination document 1 In the destination document, select the linked symbol in the Library panel and do one of the following:

• If the asset is a movie clip, button, or graphic symbol, select Properties from the Library Panel menu. • If the asset is a font symbol, select Linkage from the Library Panel menu.
2 Deselect Import For Runtime Sharing, and click OK.

Update or replace symbols
You can update or replace a movie clip, button, or graphic symbol in a document with any other symbol in a FLA file accessible on your local network. The original name and properties of the symbol in the destination document are preserved, but the contents of the symbol are replaced with the contents of the symbol you select. Any assets that the selected symbol uses are also copied into the destination document.
1 With the document open, select a movie clip, button, or graphic symbol and select Properties from the Library Panel menu. 2 If the Linkage and Source areas of the Symbol Properties dialog box are not showing, click Advanced. 3 To select a new FLA file, click Browse. 4 Navigate to a FLA file that contains the symbol to use to update or replace the selected symbol in the Library panel, and click Open.

FLASH CS3 221
User Guide

5 Navigate to a symbol, and click OK. 6 In the Symbol Properties dialog box, under Source, select Always Update Before Publishing and click OK.

Working with button symbols
Create a button
Buttons are actually four-frame interactive movie clips. When you select the button behavior for a symbol, Flash creates a Timeline with four frames. The first three frames display the button’s three possible states; the fourth frame defines the active area of the button. The Timeline doesn’t actually play; it reacts to pointer movement and actions by jumping to the appropriate frame. To make a button interactive, you place an instance of the button symbol on the Stage and assign actions to the instance. You must assign the actions to the instance of the button in the document, not to frames in the button’s Timeline. Each frame in the Timeline of a button symbol has a specific function:

• The first frame is the Up state, representing the button whenever the pointer is not over the button. • The second frame is the Over state, representing the button’s appearance when the pointer is over the button. • The third frame is the Down state, representing the button’s appearance as it is clicked. • The fourth frame is the Hit state, defining the area that responds to the mouse click. This area is invisible in the
SWF file. Create a button using a movie clip symbol or a button component. Using each type of button has advantages. Creating a button using a movie clip lets you add more frames to the button or add more complex animation. However, movie clip buttons have a larger file size than button symbols. Using a button component allows you to bind the button to other components, to share and display data in an application. Button components also include prebuilt features, such as accessibility support, and can be customized. Button components include the Button, RadioButton, and CheckBox. For more information, see Button component in ActionScript 2.0 Components Language Reference or Using the Button in Using ActionScript 3.0 Components. For a text tutorial about buttons, see Add Button Navigation and Animation on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials.
1 Select Edit > Deselect All to ensure that nothing is selected on the Stage. 2 Select Insert > New Symbol, or press Control+F8 (Windows) or Command+F8 (Macintosh).

To create the button, you convert the button frames to keyframes.
3 In the Create New Symbol dialog box, enter a name for the new button symbol, and for Type select Button.

Flash switches to symbol-editing mode. The Timeline header changes to display four consecutive frames labeled Up, Over, Down, and Hit. The first frame, Up, is a blank keyframe.
4 To create the Up state button image, select the Up frame in the Timeline and then use the drawing tools, import

a graphic, or place an instance of another symbol on the Stage. You can use a graphic or movie clip symbol in a button, but you cannot use another button in a button. Use a movie clip symbol to animate the button.
5 Click the Over frame, and select Timeline > Keyframe.

FLASH CS3 222
User Guide

Flash inserts a keyframe that duplicates the contents of the Up frame.
6 Change or edit the button image for the Over state. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the Down frame and the Hit frames.

The Hit frame is not visible on the Stage, but it defines the area of the button that responds when clicked. The graphic for the Hit frame must be a solid area large enough to encompass all the graphic elements of the Up, Down, and Over frames. It can also be larger than the visible button. If you do not specify a Hit frame, the image for the Up state is used as the Hit frame. To create a disjoint rollover, in which moving the pointer over a button causes another graphic on the Stage to change, place the Hit frame in a different location than the other button frames.
8 To assign a sound to a state of the button, select that state’s frame in the Timeline, select Window > Properties > Properties, and then select a sound from the Sound menu in the Property inspector. 9 When you finish, select Edit > Edit Document. To create an instance of the button in the document, drag the button symbol from the Library panel.

See also
“Using sounds in Flash” on page 292

Enable, edit, and test buttons
By default, Flash keeps buttons disabled as you create them, to make it easier to select and work with them. When a button is disabled, clicking the button selects it. When a button is enabled, it responds to the mouse events that you’ve specified as if the SWF file were playing. You can still select enabled buttons. Disable buttons as you work, and enable buttons to quickly test their behavior. For a text tutorial about buttons, see Add Button Navigation and Animation on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials.
Enable and disable buttons
❖ Select Control > Enable Simple Buttons. A check mark appears next to the command to indicate buttons are

enabled. Select the command again to disable buttons. Any buttons on the Stage now respond. As you move the pointer over a button, Flash displays the Over frame; when you click within the button’s active area, Flash displays the Down frame.
Select, move, or edit an enabled button
❖ Do one of the following:

• Use the Selection tool to drag a selection rectangle around the button. • Use the arrow keys to move the button. • If the Property inspector is not visible, select Window > Properties > Properties to edit the button in the Property
inspector, or Alt+double-click (Windows) or Option+double-click the button (Macintosh).
Test a button
❖ Do one of the following:

• Select Control > Enable Simple Buttons. Move the pointer over the enabled button to test it. • Select the button in the Library panel, and click the Play button in the Library preview window.

FLASH CS3 223
User Guide

• Select Control > Test Scene or Control > Test Movie.
Movie clips in buttons are not visible in the Flash authoring environment.

Scaling and caching symbols
About 9-slice scaling and movie clip symbols
9-slice scaling allows you to specify how scaling is applied to specific areas of a movie clip. With 9-slice scaling, you can ensure that the movie clip looks correct when scaled. With normal scaling, Flash scales all parts of a movie clip equally, and in both the horizontal and vertical dimension. For many movie clips, this equal scaling can make the clip’s graphics look strange, especially at the corners of rectangular movie clips. This is often true of movie clips used as user interface elements, such as buttons. The movie clip is visually divided into nine sections with a grid-like overlay, and each of the nine areas is scaled independently. To maintain the visual integrity of the movie clip, corners are not scaled, while the remaining areas of the image are scaled (as opposed to being stretched) larger or smaller, as needed. When a movie clip symbol has 9-slice scaling applied, it appears in the Library panel preview with the guides displayed. If Enable Live Preview is turned on (Control > Enable Live Preview) when you scale instances of the movie clip on the Stage, you see the 9-slice scaling applied on the Stage. Note: 9-slice scaling cannot be applied to Graphic or Button symbols. Bitmaps inside 9-slice enabled movie clips are scaled normally, without 9-slice distortion, while the other movie clip contents are scaled according to the 9-slice guides. A 9-slice-enabled movie clip can contain nested objects within it, but only certain types of objects inside the movie clip properly scale in the slice-9 manner. To make a movie clip with internal objects that also adhere to 9-slice scaling when the movie clip is scaled, those nested objects must be shapes, drawing objects, groups, or graphic symbols.

A 9-slice-enabled symbol in the Library and scaled on the Stage.

For video tutorials about 9-slice scaling, see:

• www.adobe.com/go/vid0204 • www.adobe.com/go/vid0205

FLASH CS3 224
User Guide

Edit movie clip symbols with 9-slice scaling
By default, slice guides are placed at 25% (or one-fourth) of the symbol’s width and height from the edge of the symbol. In symbol-editing mode, the slice guides appear as dotted lines superimposed on the symbol. The slice guides don’t snap when you drag them on the pasteboard. The guides do not appear when the symbol is on the Stage. You cannot edit 9-slice-enabled symbols in place on the Stage. You must edit them in symbol-editing mode. Note: Instances made from a 9-slice-enabled movie clip symbol can be transformed, but should not be edited. Editing these instances can have unpredictable results. For video tutorials about 9-slice scaling, see:

• www.adobe.com/go/vid0204 • www.adobe.com/go/vid0205
Enable 9-slice scaling for an existing movie clip symbol 1 With the source document open, select Window > Library. 2 Select a movie clip, button, or graphic symbol in the Library panel. 3 Select Properties from the Library Panel menu. 4 Select Enable Guides for 9-slice Scaling. Edit a 9-slice-enabled movie clip symbol 1 Enter symbol-editing mode by doing one of the following:

• Select an instance of the symbol on the Stage and right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select Edit. • Select the symbol in the Library and right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh), and select Edit. • Double-click the symbol in the Library.
2 To move the horizontal or vertical guides, drag and release a guide. The new position of the guide is updated in the Library preview for the symbol.

About runtime bitmap caching movie clip and button symbols
Runtime bitmap caching lets you optimize playback performance by specifying that a static movie clip (for example, a background image) or button symbol be cached as a bitmap at runtime. Caching a movie clip as a bitmap prevents Flash Player from having to continually redraw the image, which provides a significant improvement in playback performance. For example, when you create animations with a complex background, create a movie clip for the background. The background is rendered as a bitmap stored at the current screen depth. It can be drawn quickly, letting the animation play faster and more smoothly. Without bitmap caching, the animation might play back too slowly. Bitmap caching lets you use a movie clip and freeze it in place automatically. If a region changes, vector data updates the bitmap cache. This process minimizes the number of redraws that Flash Player must perform, and provides smoother, faster playback performance. Only use runtime bitmap caching on static, complex movie clips in which the position, but not the content, of the movie clip changes on each frame in an animation. The playback or runtime performance improvement from using runtime bitmap caching is only noticeable on complex-content movie clips. Runtime bitmap caching with simple movie clips does not enhance performance.

FLASH CS3 225
User Guide

For more information, see When to enable caching in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash. Note: You can only use the Use Runtime Bitmap Caching option for movie clip and button symbols. Under the following circumstances, a movie clip does not use a bitmap (even if Use Runtime Bitmap Caching is selected) but instead renders the movie clip or button symbol by using vector data:

• The bitmap is too large (greater than 2880 pixels in either direction). • The bitmap fails to allocate (producing an out of memory error).

Specify bitmap caching for a movie clip
1 Select the movie clip or button symbol on the Stage. 2 In the Property inspector, select Use Runtime Bitmap Caching.

Symbols and ActionScript
About controlling instances and symbols with ActionScript
To control movie clip and button instances, use ActionScript. The movie clip or button instance must have a unique instance name to be used with ActionScript. To control movie clip or button symbols, use ActionScript. For more information, see Handling events in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or Handling events in Programming ActionScript 3.0.

See also
“Edit symbols” on page 211

Controlling instances with behaviors
In FLA files where the ActionScript Publish setting is set to ActionScript 2.0, you can use behaviors to control movie clip and graphic instances in a document without writing ActionScript. Behaviors are prewritten ActionScript scripts that let you add ActionScript coding to your document without having to create the ActionScript code yourself. Behaviors are not available for ActionScript 3.0. You can use behaviors with an instance to arrange it in the stacking order on a frame, as well as to load or unload, play, stop, duplicate, or drag a movie clip, or to link to a URL. In addition, you can use behaviors to load an external graphic or an animated mask into a movie clip. Flash includes the behaviors in the following table.

FLASH CS3 226
User Guide

Behavior Load Graphic

Purpose Loads an external JPEG file into a movie clip or screen.

Select or input Path and filename of JPEG file. Instance name of movie clip or screen receiving the graphic. URL of external SWF file. Instance name of movie clip or screen receiving the SWF file. Instance name of movie clip to duplicate. X-offset and Y-offset of pixels from original to copy.

Load External Movieclip

Loads an external SWF file into a target movie clip or screen.

Duplicate Movieclip

Duplicates a movie clip or screen.

Goto And Play at frame or label

Plays a movie clip from a particular frame.

Instance name of target clip to play. Frame number or label to play.

Goto And Stop at frame or label

Stops a movie clip, optionally moving the playhead to a particular frame. Brings target movie clip or screen to the top of the stacking order. Brings target movie clip or screen one position higher in the stacking order.

Instance name of target clip to stop. Frame number or label to stop. Instance name of movie clip or screen. Instance name of movie clip or screen.

Bring To Front

Bring Forward

Send To Back

Sends the target movie clip to the Instance name of movie clip or bottom of the stacking order. screen. Sends the target movie clip or screen one position lower in the stacking order. Starts dragging a movie clip. Instance name of movie clip or screen.

Send Backward

Start Dragging Movieclip

Instance name of movie clip or screen.

Stop Dragging Movieclip Unload Movieclip

Stops the current drag. Removes a movie clip that was loaded by means of loadMovie() from Flash Player. Instance name of movie clip.

See also
“Control sounds using behaviors” on page 299 “Control video playback using behaviors” on page 323

Add and configure a behavior
Be sure you are working in a FLA file whose ActionScript Publish setting is ActionScript 2.0 or earlier.
1 Select the object, such as a button, to trigger the behavior. 2 In the Behaviors panel (Window > Behaviors), click the Add (+) button and select the desired behavior from the Movieclip submenu.

FLASH CS3 227
User Guide

3 Select the movie clip to control with the behavior. 4 Select a relative or absolute path. 5 If required, select or input settings for the behavior parameters and click OK. Default settings for the behavior appear in the Behaviors panel. 6 Under Event, click On Release (the default event) and select a mouse event from the menu. To use the On Release event, leave the option unchanged.

See also
“About relative paths” on page 73 “About absolute paths” on page 72

Create custom behaviors
To write custom behaviors, create an XML file that contains the ActionScript 2.0 code to perform the desired behavior, and save the file in the Behaviors folder of your local computer. Behaviors are stored in the following location:

• Windows: C:\Documents and Settings\user name\Local Settings\Application Data\Adobe\Flash
CS3\language\Configuration\Behaviors

• Macintosh: Macintosh HD/Users/user name/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Flash CS3/language/Configuration/Behaviors/ Before you create your own behaviors, examine the Behavior XML files to develop an understanding of the syntax of the XML files, as well as the ActionScript code used to create behaviors. If you are new to writing behaviors, familiarize yourself with the XML tags used to create user interface elements (such as dialog boxes), and with ActionScript, the coding language used to create behaviors. To learn about the XML used to create interface elements, see Extending Flash. To learn about ActionScript, see Programming ActionScript 3.0 or Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash. You can also download behaviors that other Flash users have created from the Adobe Flash Exchange website. You can visit the Adobe Exchange at: www.adobe.com/go/flash_exchange.
1 Using an XML editor, open an existing behavior’s XML file, and rename the file appropriately for the behavior you intend to create. 2 Enter a new value for the category attribute of the behavior_devinition tag in the XML file.

The following XML code creates a category named myCategory in the Flash Behaviors panel under which the behavior will be listed.
<behavior_definition dialogID="Trigger-dialog" category="myCategory" authoringEdition="pro" name="behaviorName">

3 Enter a new value for the name attribute of the behavior_definition tag. This will be the name of the behavior as it will appear in the Flash authoring environment. 4 (Optional) If your custom behavior requires a dialog box, enter parameters using the <properties> and
<dialog> tags.

To learn about the tags and parameters used to create your own custom dialog boxes, see Extending Flash.
5 In the <actionscript> tag, insert the ActionScript code to create the behavior.

If you are new to ActionScript, see Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or Programming ActionScript 3.0.

FLASH CS3 228
User Guide

For example (from the Movieclip_loadMovie.xml behavior file) (ActionScript 2.0):
<actionscript> <![CDATA[ //load Movie Behavior if($target$ == Number($target$)){ loadMovieNum($clip$,$target$); } else { $target$.loadMovie($clip$); } //End Behavior ]]> </actionscript>

6 Save the file and test the behavior.

See also
“Break apart an instance symbol” on page 216

229

Chapter 10: Creating animation
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional provides several ways to create animation and special effects; Timeline effects, tweened animation, changing the contents of successive frames in the Timeline, and frame-by-frame animation all provide you with different possibilities to create engaging, animated content.

Animation basics
Creating motion
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional offers several ways to include animation and special effects in a document, such as Timeline effects, tweened animation, changing the contents of successive frames in the Timeline, and frame-byframe animation.

See also
“About tweened animation” on page 240

About layers in animation
Each scene in a Flash document can consist of any number of layers. Layers and layer folders organize the components of an animation sequence and separate animated objects so they don’t erase, connect, or segment each other. To tween the movement of more than one group or symbol at once, each must be on a separate layer. Typically, the background layer contains static artwork, and each additional layer contains one separate animated object. When a document has several layers, tracking and editing the objects on one or two of them can be difficult. This task is easier if you work with the contents of one layer at a time. Layer folders help you organize layers into manageable groups.

Creating keyframes
Changes in the animation are defined in a keyframe. When you create frame-by-frame animation, every frame is a keyframe. In tweened animation, you define keyframes at significant points in the animation and Flash creates the contents of frames between. The interpolated frames of a tweened animation appear as light blue or light green with an arrow drawn between keyframes. Because Flash documents save the shapes in each keyframe, create keyframes only at those points in the artwork where something changes. Keyframes are indicated in the Timeline: a solid circle represents a keyframe with content on it, and an empty circle before the frame represents an empty keyframe. Subsequent frames added to the same layer have the same content as the keyframe.

Create keyframes
❖ Do one of the following:

• Select a frame in the Timeline, and select Insert > Timeline > Keyframe. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) a frame in the Timeline and select Insert Keyframe.

FLASH CS3 230
User Guide

About representations of animation in the Timeline
Flash distinguishes tweened animation from frame-by-frame animation in the Timeline as follows:

• A black dot at the beginning keyframe indicates motion tweens; a black arrow with a light blue background
indicates intermediate tweened frames.

• A black dot at the beginning keyframe indicates shape tweens; a black arrow with a light green background
indicates intermediate frames.

• A dashed line indicates that the tween is broken or incomplete, such as when the final keyframe is missing.

• A black dot indicates a single keyframe. Light gray frames after a single keyframe contain the same content with
no changes and have a black line with a hollow rectangle at the last frame of the span.

• A small a indicates that the frame is assigned a frame action with the Actions panel.

• A red flag indicates that the frame contains a label.

• A green double slash indicates that the frame contains a comment.

• A gold anchor indicates that the frame is a named anchor.

About frame rates
The frame rate, the speed the animation is played at, is measured in number of frames per second (fps). A frame rate that’s too slow makes the animation appear to stop and start; a frame rate that’s too fast blurs the details of the animation. A frame rate of 12 fps usually gives the best results on the web. QuickTime and AVI movies generally have a frame rate of 12 fps, while the standard motion-picture rate is 24 fps. The complexity of the animation and the speed of the computer the animation is being played on affect the smoothness of the playback. To determine optimum frame rates, test your animations on a variety of machines. Because you specify only one frame rate for the entire Flash document, set this rate before you begin creating animation.

FLASH CS3 231
User Guide

See also
“Create or open a document and set its properties” on page 53

About frame-by-frame animation
Frame-by-frame animation changes the contents of the Stage in every frame and is best suited to complex animation in which an image changes in every frame instead of moving across the Stage. Frame-by-frame animation increases file size more rapidly than tweened animation. In frame-by-frame animation, Flash stores the values for each complete frame.

Create frame-by-frame animations
To create a frame-by-frame animation, define each frame as a keyframe and create a different image for each frame. Each new keyframe initially contains the same contents as the keyframe preceding it, so you can modify the frames in the animation incrementally.
1 Click a layer name to make it the active layer, and select a frame in the layer where the animation is to start. 2 If the frame isn’t already a keyframe, select Insert > Timeline > Keyframe. 3 Create the artwork for the first frame of the sequence. Use the drawing tools, paste graphics from the Clipboard, or import a file. 4 To add a new keyframe whose contents are the same as those of the first keyframe, click the next frame to the right in the same row and select Insert > Timeline > Keyframe, or right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) and select Insert Keyframe. 5 To develop the next increment of the animation, alter the contents of this frame on the Stage. 6 To complete your frame-by-frame animation sequence, repeat steps 4 and 5 until you’ve built the desired motion. 7 To test the animation sequence, select Control > Play or click the Play button on the Controller.

Edit animations
Only keyframes are editable. You can view tweened frames, but you can’t edit them directly. To edit tweened frames, change one of the defining keyframes or insert a new keyframe between the beginning and ending keyframes. Drag items from the Library panel onto the Stage to add the items to the current keyframe. To display and edit more than one frame at a time, use onion skinning.
Insert frames in the Timeline

• To insert a new frame, select Insert > Timeline > Frame. • To create a new keyframe, select Insert > Timeline > Keyframe, or right-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Macintosh) the frame where you want to place a keyframe, and select Insert Keyframe.

• To create a new blank keyframe, select Insert > Timeline > Blank Keyframe, or right-click (Windows) or
Control-click (Macintosh) the frame where you want to place the keyframe, and select Insert Blank Keyframe.
Delete or modify a frame or keyframe

• To delete a frame, keyframe, or frame sequence, select it and right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh)
and select Remove Frames. Surrounding frames remain unchanged.

• To move a keyframe or frame sequence and its contents, select it and drag to the desired location.

FLASH CS3 232
User Guide

• To extend the duration of a keyframe, Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Macintosh) it to the final frame of the
new sequence.

• To copy and paste a frame or frame sequence, select it and select Edit > Timeline > Copy Frames. Select a frame
or sequence to replace, and select Edit > Timeline > Paste Frames.

• To convert a keyframe to a frame, select the keyframe and select Modify > Timeline > Clear Keyframe, or rightclick (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) it and select Clear Keyframe. The cleared keyframe and all frames up to the subsequent keyframe are replaced with the contents of the frame preceding the cleared keyframe.

• To copy a keyframe or frame sequence by dragging, select it and Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Macintosh)
to the new location.

• To change the length of a tweened sequence, drag the beginning or ending keyframe left or right. • To add a library item to the current keyframe, drag the item from the Library panel onto the Stage. • To reverse an animation sequence, select the appropriate frames in one or more layers and select Modify >
Timeline > Reverse Frames. Keyframes must be at the beginning and end of the sequence.

Use onion skinning
Usually, one frame of the animation sequence at a time appears on the Stage. To help position and edit a frame-byframe animation, view two or more frames on the Stage at once. The frame under the playhead appears in full color, while surrounding frames are dimmed, making it appear as if each frame were drawn on a sheet of translucent onionskin paper and the sheets were stacked on top of each other. Dimmed frames cannot be edited.
Simultaneously view several frames of an animation on the Stage
❖ Click the Onion Skin button

. All frames between the Start Onion Skin and End Onion Skin markers (in the Timeline header) are superimposed as one frame in the Document window.
Control onion skinning display

• To display onion skinned frames as outlines, click the Onion Skin Outlines button
markers move in conjunction with the current frame pointer.)

.

• To change the position of either onion skin marker, drag its pointer to a new location. (Normally, the onion skin • To enable editing of all frames between onion skin markers, click the Edit Multiple Frames button
. Usually, onion skinning lets you edit only the current frame. However, you can display the contents of each frame between the onion skin markers, and make each available for editing, regardless of which is the current frame.

Note: Locked layers (those with a padlock icon) aren’t displayed when onion skinning is turned on. To avoid a multitude of confusing images, lock or hide the layers you don’t want to be onion skinned.
Change the display of onion skin markers
❖ Click the Modify Onion Markers

button and select an item:

Always Show Markers Displays the onion skin markers in the Timeline header whether or not onion skinning is on. Anchor Onion Locks the onion skin markers to their current position in the Timeline header. Usually, the onion skin

range is relative to the current frame pointer and the onion skin markers. Anchoring the onion skin markers prevents them from moving with the current frame pointer.
Onion 2 Displays two frames on either side of the current frame. Onion 5 Displays five frames on either side of the current frame.

FLASH CS3 233
User Guide

Onion All Displays all frames on either side of the current frame.

Move an entire animation
Move the graphics in all frames and layers at once to avoid realigning everything.
1 Unlock all layers. To move everything on one or more layers but nothing on other layers, lock or hide all the layers you don’t want to move. 2 Click the Edit Multiple Frames button

.

3 Drag the onion skin markers so that they enclose all the frames to select, or click Modify Onion Markers and select Onion All. 4 Select Edit > Select All. 5 Drag the entire animation to the new location on the Stage.

Copy and paste a motion tween
Copy and paste motion lets you copy a motion tween, and paste (or apply) the frames, tween, and symbol information to another object.
1 Select the frames in the Timeline that contain the motion tween to copy. The frames you select must be on the same layer, however, they do not have to span a single motion tween. The selection can span a tween, empty frames, or two or more tweens. 2 Select Edit > Timeline > Copy Motion. 3 Select the symbol instance to receive the copied motion tween. 4 Select Edit > Timeline > Paste Motion.

The necessary frames, tween, and symbol information are inserted to match the original, copied tween. To copy a symbol’s motion tween to the Actions panel or use it in another project as ActionScript™, use the Copy Motion As ActionScript command.

Paste motion tween properties
Paste motion tween properties lets you copy a motion tween, and paste only specific properties to apply to another object.
1 Select the frames in the Timeline that contain the motion tween to copy. The frames you select must be on the same layer, however, they do not have to span a single motion tween. The selection can span a tween, empty frames, or two or more tweens. 2 Select Edit > Timeline > Copy Motion. 3 Select the symbol instance to receive the copied motion tween. 4 Select Edit > Timeline > Paste Motion Special. Select the specific motion tween properties to paste to the symbol instance. The tween properties are:
X Position How far an object moves in the x direction. Y Position How far an object moves in the y direction. Horizontal Scale The ratio between the object's current size and its natural size in the horizontal direction (X). Vertical Scale Specifies the ratio between the object's current size and its natural size in the vertical direction (Y).

FLASH CS3 234
User Guide

Rotation And Skew The rotation and skew of the object. These properties must be jointly applied to an object. Skew is a measurement of rotation in degrees, and when you rotate and skew, each property affects the other. Color All color values such as Tint, Brightness, and Alpha are applied to the object. Filters All filter values and changes for the selected span. If filters are applied to an object, the filter is pasted with all

values intact, and its state (enabled or disabled) applies to the new object as well.
Blend Mode Applies the blend mode of the object. Override Target Scale Properties When unchecked, specifies that all properties be pasted relative to the target object. When checked, this option overrides the scale properties of the target. Override Target Rotation And Skew Properties When unchecked, specifies that all properties be pasted relative to

the target object. When checked, the pasted properties override the existing rotation and scale properties of the object. The necessary frames, tween, and symbol information are inserted to match the original, copied tween. To copy a symbol’s motion tween to the Actions panel or use it in another project as ActionScript, use the Copy Motion As ActionScript command.

Copy motion as ActionScript
Copy the properties that define a motion tween in the Timeline as ActionScript 3.0 and apply that motion to another symbol, either in the Actions panel or in the source files (such as class files) for a Flash document that uses ActionScript 3.0. Use the fl.motion classes to customize the Flash-generated ActionScript for your specific project. For more information, see the fl.motion classes in the ActionScript 3.0 Language and Components Reference. Copy Motion As ActionScript 3.0 can capture the following properties of a motion tween:

• Position • Scale • Skew • Rotation • Transformation Point • Color • Blend Mode • Orientation To Path • Scale • Cache As Bitmap Setting • Frame Labels • Motion Guides • Custom Easing • Filters

FLASH CS3 235
User Guide

For a video tutorial about copying and pasting motion as ActionScript, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0126.
1 Select the frames in the Timeline that contain the motion tween to copy. The frames you select must be on the same layer, however, they do not have to span a single motion tween. The selection can span a tween, empty frames, or two or more tweens. 2 Select Edit > Timeline > Copy Motion As ActionScript 3.0.

Provide the name of the instance to attach the motion tween to. Flash generates ActionScript specific to that instance name. Edit the Flash-generated ActionScript later for different instances. Flash copies to your system’s clipboard the ActionScript code that describes the selected motion tween. Paste the code into the Actions panel of a Flash document that contains the instance to receive the copied tween. The ActionScript code contains the following items:

• An import of the fl.motion.Animator class • An XML object for the provided instance (instance_xml:XML) • An Animator object for the instance (instance_animator:Animator) • A call to the Animator.play() method to begin the animation
Note: When working with motion guides, some differences might occur between the XML that the Copy Motion command and the Copy Motion As ActionScript 3.0 command generate. If a motion guide and custom easing is applied to a tween, the Copy Motion XML tags include the properties of the Bezier curves for the easing, and the XML uses only two keyframes. For the same tween, using the Copy Motion As ActionScript 3.0 command creates keyframes for each frame, and applies the correct values to each keyframe. If you remove the motion guide, the same XML code appears describing the custom easing for both commands.

Extend still images
When you create a background for animation, a still image might remain the same for several frames. Adding a span of new frames (not keyframes) to a layer extends the contents of the last keyframe in all the new frames. To manually extend a still image through multiple frames, or to use a shortcut, create an image in the first keyframe of the sequence and do one of the following:

• Select a frame to the right, marking the end of the span of frames to add and select Insert > Timeline > Frame. • Alt-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Macintosh) the keyframe to the right. This creates a span of new frames with
a keyframe at the end point.

About mask layers
For spotlight effects and transitions, use a mask layer to create a hole through which underlying layers are visible. A mask item can be a filled shape, a type object, an instance of a graphic symbol, or a movie clip. Group multiple layers under a single mask layer to create sophisticated effects. To create dynamic effects, animate a mask layer. For a filled shape used as a mask, use shape tweening; for a type object, graphic instance, or movie clip, use motion tweening. When using a movie clip instance as a mask, animate the mask along a motion path. To create a mask layer, place a mask item on the layer to use as a mask. Instead of having a fill or stroke, the mask item acts as a window that reveals the area of linked layers beneath it. The rest of the mask layer conceals everything except what shows through the mask item. A mask layer can contain only one mask item. A mask layer cannot be inside a button, and you cannot apply a mask to another mask.

FLASH CS3 236
User Guide

To create a mask layer from a movie clip, use ActionScript. A mask layer created with ActionScript can be applied only to another movie clip. See Using movie clips as masks in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash. For a video tutorial about animating masks, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0127. For a sample of scriptable masks, see the Flash Samples web page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Masking\ScriptableMasks folder to access the sample.

Work with mask layers
You can use mask layers to reveal portions of a picture or graphic in the layer below. To create a mask, you specify that a layer is a mask layer, and either draw or place a filled shape on that layer. You can use any filled shape, including groups, text, and symbols, as a mask. The mask layer reveals the area of linked layers beneath the filled shape. For a video tutorial about animating masks, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0127. For a sample of scriptable masks, see the Flash Samples web page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Masking\ScriptableMasks folder to access the sample.

See also
“Tweened animation” on page 240 “Add a motion tween to instances, groups, or type” on page 242 “Tween motion along a path” on page 245
Create a mask layer 1 Select or create a layer containing the objects to appear inside the mask. 2 Select Insert > Timeline > Layer to create a new layer above it. A mask layer always masks the layer immediately below it; create the mask layer in the proper place. 3 Place a filled shape, text, or an instance of a symbol on the mask layer. Flash ignores bitmaps, gradients, transparency, colors, and line styles in a mask layer. Any filled area is completely transparent in the mask; any nonfilled area is opaque. 4 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the mask layer’s name in the Timeline, and select Mask. A mask

layer icon indicates the mask layer. The layer immediately below it is linked to the mask layer, and its contents show through the filled area on the mask. The masked layer name is indented, and its icon changes to a masked layer icon.
5 To display the mask effect in Flash, lock the mask layer and the masked layer. Mask additional layers after creating a mask layer

• Drag an existing layer directly below the mask layer. • Create a new layer anywhere below the mask layer. • Select Modify > Timeline > Layer Properties, and select Masked.
Unlink layers from a mask layer
❖ Select the layer to unlink and do one of the following:

• Drag the layer above the mask layer.

FLASH CS3 237
User Guide

• Select Modify > Timeline > Layer Properties, and select Normal.
Animate a filled shape, type object, or graphic symbol instance on a mask layer 1 Select the mask layer in the Timeline. 2 To unlock the mask layer, click in the Lock column. 3 Do one of the following:

• If the mask object is a filled shape, apply shape tweening to the object. • If the mask object is a type object or graphic symbol instance, apply motion tweening to the object.
4 When the animation operation is complete, click in the Lock column for the mask layer to relock the layer. Animate a movie clip on a mask layer 1 Select the mask layer in the Timeline. 2 To edit the movie clip in place and to display the movie clip’s Timeline, double-click the movie clip on the Stage. 3 Apply motion tweening to the movie clip. 4 When the animation procedure is complete, click the Back button to return to document-editing mode. 5 To lock the layer again, click in the Lock column for the mask layer.

Using Timeline effects
About Timeline effects
Prebuilt Timeline effects let you create complex animations with a minimal number of steps. You can apply Timeline effects to the following objects:

• Text • Graphics, including shapes, groups, and graphic symbols • Bitmap images • Button symbols
Note: When you apply a Timeline effect to a movie clip, the effect is nested in the movie clip.

Add a Timeline effect
When you add a Timeline effect to an object, Flash creates a layer and transfers the object to the new layer. The object is placed inside the effect graphic, and all tweens and transformations required for the effect reside in the graphic on the newly created layer. The new layer automatically receives the same name as the effect, appended with a number that represents the order in which the effect is applied, out of all effects in your document.

FLASH CS3 238
User Guide

When you add a Timeline effect, a folder with the effect’s name is added to the library, containing elements used in creating the effect.
1 Do one of the following:

• Select the object to add the Timeline effect to. Select Insert > Timeline Effects, make a selection, and select an
effect from the list.

• Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the object to add the Timeline effect to. Select Timeline
Effects, make a selection, and select an effect.
2 View the effect preview based on default settings. Modify the default settings, and click Update Preview to view the effect with the new settings. 3 When the desired Timeline effect appears in the preview window, click OK.

Timeline effect settings
Each Timeline effect manipulates a graphic or symbol in a specific way and allows you to change individual parameters for a desired effect. The preview window shows the changes made when you alter settings.
Motion effect name and description Copy to grid Duplicates a selected object by the number of columns and then multiplies the columns by the number of rows to create a grid of the elements. Settings

• • • •

Number of rows Number of columns Distance between rows, in pixels Distance between columns, in pixels

Distributed duplication Duplicates a selected object the number of times entered in the settings. The first element is a copy of the original object. The objects are modified in increments until the final object reflects the parameters entered in the settings.

• • • • • • • • • •

Number of copies Offset distance, x position, in pixels Offset distance, y position, in pixels Offset rotation, in degrees Offset start frame, in frames across Timeline Exponential scaling by x, y scale, in delta percentage Linear scaling by x, y scale, in delta percentage Final alpha, in percentage Change color, select/deselect Final color, in RGB hex value (final copy has this color value; intermediate copies gradually transition to it) Duplication delay, in frames (results in pause between copies)

•
Blur

FLASH CS3 239
User Guide

Motion effect name and description Creates a motion blur effect by changing the alpha value, position, or scale of an object over time.

Settings

• • • • • •

Effect duration, in frames Allow horizontal blur Allow vertical blur Direction of blur Number of steps Starting scale

Drop shadow Creates a shadow below the selected element.

• • •

Color, in hex RGB value Alpha transparency, in percentage Shadow offset, in x, y offset, in pixels

Expand Expands, contracts, or expands and contracts objects over time. This effect works best with two or more objects grouped together or combined in a movie clip or graphic symbol. Objects containing text or letters work well with this effect.

• • • • • •

Expand duration, in frames Expand, squeeze, both Expand direction, to left, from center, to right Fragment offset, in pixels Shift group center by, x, y offset, in pixels Change fragment size by, height, width, in pixels

Explode Gives the illusion of an object exploding. Elements of text or a complex group of objects (symbols, shapes or video clips) break apart, spin, and arc outward.

• • • • • •

Effect duration, in frames Direction of explosion, upward to left, center, or right, downward to left, center, or right Arc size, x, y offset in pixels Rotate fragments by, in degrees Change fragments size by, in degrees Final alpha, in percentage

Transform

FLASH CS3 240
User Guide

Motion effect name and description Adjusts the position, scale, rotation, alpha, and tint of the selected elements. Use Transform to apply a single effect or a combination of effects to create Fade In/Out, Fly In/Out, Grow/Shrink, and Spin Left/Right effects.

Settings

• • • •

Effect duration, in frames Move to position, x, y offset, in pixels Change position by, x, y offset, in pixels Scale, lock to equally apply change, in percentage, unlock to apply x and/or y axis change separately, in percentage Rotate, in degrees Spin, number of times Times, counterclockwise, clockwise Change color, select/deselect Final color, in RGB hex value Final alpha, in percentage Motion ease

• • • • • • •
Transition Wipes in or wipes out selected objects by fading, wiping, or a combination of both.

• • • • •

Effect duration, in frames Direction, toggle between in (coming in) and out (going out), select up, down, left, or right Fade, select/deselect Wipe, select/deselect Motion ease

Edit a Timeline effect
1 Select the object associated with the effect on the Stage and do one of the following:

• In the Property inspector, click Edit. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the object, and select Timeline Effects > Edit Effect.
2 Edit the settings and click OK.

Delete a Timeline effect
❖ On the Stage, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the object that has the Timeline effect to

remove, and select Timeline Effects > Remove Effect.

Tweened animation
About tweened animation
Flash can create two types of tweened animation:

• In motion tweening, you define properties such as position, size, and rotation for an instance, group, or text block
at one specific time, and change those properties at another specific time. You can also apply a motion tween along a path.

FLASH CS3 241
User Guide

• In shape tweening, you draw a shape at one specific time, and change that shape or draw another shape at another
specific time. Flash interpolates the values or shapes for the frames in between, creating the animation. Note: To apply shape tweening to groups, instances, or bitmap images, break these elements apart. To apply shape tweening to text, break the text apart twice to convert the text to objects. Tweened animation is an effective way to create movement and changes over time while minimizing file size. In tweened animation, only the values for the changes between frames are stored. To quickly prepare elements in a document for tweened animation, distribute objects to layers. To create a dynamic mask, apply tweened animation to an object on a mask layer. For video tutorials about animation, see the following:

• Creating shape tweens: www.adobe.com/go/vid0124 • Creating motion tweens: www.adobe.com/go/vid0125 • Copying and pasting ActionScript from an animation: www.adobe.com/go/vid0126 • Creating and animating masks: www.adobe.com/go/vid0127
For a text tutorial about timeline animation, see Create a Timeline Animation on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials. For samples of animation, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. The following samples are available:

• Animated Drop Shadow: Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimatedDropShadow folder to access the sample.

• Animation and Gradients: Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimationAndGradients folder to access the sample.

See also
“About mask layers” on page 235 “Break text apart” on page 271 “Break apart groups and objects” on page 203

Distributing objects to layers for tweened animation
To separate layers to apply tweened animation to the objects, distribute selected objects in a frame. Flash distributes each object to a new, separate layer. Any objects that you don’t select (including objects in other frames) are preserved in their original positions. You can apply the Distribute To Layers command to any type of element on the Stage, including graphic objects, instances, bitmaps, video clips, and broken-apart text blocks.

See also
“Break text apart” on page 271

FLASH CS3 242
User Guide

About new layers
New layers created during the Distribute To Layers operation are named according to the name of the element that each contains:

• A new layer containing a library asset (such as a symbol, bitmap, or video clip) receives the same name as the asset. • A new layer containing a named instance receives the name of the instance. • A new layer containing a character from a broken-apart text block is named with the character. • A new layer containing a graphic object (which has no name) is named Layer1 (or Layer2, and so on), because
graphic objects do not have names. Flash inserts new layers below any selected layers. The new layers are arranged top to bottom, in the order that the selected elements were originally created. The layers in broken-apart text are arranged in the order of the characters, whether left-to-right, right-to-left, or top-to-bottom. For example, if you break apart the text FLASH and distribute it to layers, the new layers, named F, L, A, S, and H, are arranged top to bottom, immediately below the layer that initially contained the text.

Distribute objects to layers
1 Select the objects to distribute to layers. The objects can be in a single layer, or in several layers, including noncontiguous layers. 2 Do one of the following:

• Select Modify > Timeline > Distribute To Layers. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) one of the selected objects, and select Distribute To Layers.

See also
“Tweened animation” on page 240

Add a motion tween to instances, groups, or type
To tween the changes in properties of instances, groups, and type, use motion tweening. Flash can tween position, size, rotation, and skew of instances, groups, and type. Additionally, Flash can tween the color of instances and type, creating gradual color shifts or making an instance fade in or out. To tween the color of groups or type, make them into symbols. To animate individual characters in a block of text separately, place each character in a separate text block. If you apply a motion tween and then change the number of frames between the two keyframes, or move the group or symbol in either keyframe, Flash automatically tweens the frames again. For a video tutorial about motion tweens, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0125. For a text tutorial about motion tweens, see Create a Timeline Animation on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials. For samples of animation, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. The following samples are available:

• Animated Drop Shadow: Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimatedDropShadow folder to access the sample.

• Animation and Gradients: Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimationAndGradients folder to access the sample.

FLASH CS3 243
User Guide

See also
“Create symbols” on page 209 “Break text apart” on page 271 “Tweened animation” on page 240
Create a motion tween by using the Motion Tweening option 1 Click a layer name to make it the active layer, and select an empty keyframe in the layer where you want the

animation to start.
2 To create the first frame of the motion tween, do one of the following:

• Create a graphic object with the Pen, Oval, Rectangle, Pencil, or Brush tool, and then convert it to a symbol. • Create an instance, group, or text block on the Stage. • Drag an instance of a symbol from the Library panel.
3 Create a second keyframe where you want the animation to end, and leave the new keyframe selected. 4 To modify the item in the ending frame, do any of the following. To tween the color of elements other than instances or text blocks, use shape tweening:

• Move the item to a new position. • Modify the item’s size, rotation, or skew. • Modify the item’s color (instance or text block only).
5 Click any frame in the tween’s frame span and select Motion from the Tween pop-up menu in the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties). 6 If you modified the size of the item in step 4, select Scale to tween the size of the selected item. 7 To produce a more realistic sense of motion, apply easing to the motion tween. To apply easing to a motion tween, use the Ease slider to specify an easing value for each motion tween you create, or use the Custom Ease In/Ease Out dialog box to more precisely control the speed of the motion tween.

Drag the arrow next to the Easing value or enter a value to adjust the rate of change between tweened frames:

• To begin the motion tween slowly and accelerate the tween toward the end of the animation, drag the slider up or
enter a negative value between -1 and -100.

• To begin the motion tween rapidly and decelerate the tween toward the end of the animation, drag the slider down
or enter a positive value between 1 and 100.

• To produce a more complex change in speed within the tween’s frame span, use the Custom Ease In/Ease Out
dialog box. By default, the rate of change between tweened frames is constant. Easing creates a more natural appearance of acceleration or deceleration by gradually adjusting the rate of change.
8 To rotate the selected item while tweening, select an option from the Rotate menu:

• To prevent rotation, select None (the default setting). • To rotate the object once in the direction requiring the least motion, select Auto. • To rotate the object as indicated, and then enter a number to specify the number of rotations, select Clockwise
(CW) or Counterclockwise (CCW). Note: The rotation in step 8 is in addition to any rotation you applied to the ending frame in step 4.

FLASH CS3 244
User Guide

9 If you’re using a motion path, select Orient To Path to orient the baseline of the tweened element to the motion path. 10 To synchronize the animation of graphic symbol instances with the main Timeline, select the Sync option in the

Property inspector. Note: Modify > Timeline > Synchronize Symbols and the Sync option both recalculate the number of frames in a tween to match the number of frames allotted to it in the Timeline.
11 If you’re using a motion path, select Snap to attach the tweened element to the motion path by its registration

point.
Create a motion tween by using the Create Motion Tween command 1 Select an empty keyframe and draw an object on the Stage, or drag an instance of a symbol from the Library panel.

Note: To create a tween, you must have only one item on the layer.
2 Select Insert > Timeline > Create Motion Tween. If you drew an object in step 1, Flash automatically converts the object to a symbol and names it tween1. 3 Click inside the frame where you want the animation to end, and select Insert > Timeline > Frame. 4 Move the item on the Stage to the desired position. Adjust the size of the element to tween its scale. To tween its rotation, adjust the rotation of the element. Deselect the object when you complete adjustments.

A keyframe is automatically added to the end of the frame range.

5 To adjust the rate of change between tweened frames, drag the arrow next to the Easing value or enter a value:

• To begin the motion tween slowly and accelerate the tween toward the end of the animation, drag the slider up or
enter a value between -1 and -100.

• To begin the motion tween rapidly and decelerate the tween toward the end of the animation, drag the slider down
or enter a positive value between 1 and 100. By default, the rate of change between tweened frames is constant. Easing creates a more natural appearance of acceleration or deceleration by gradually adjusting the rate of change.

• To produce a more complex change in speed within the tween’s frame span, use the Custom Ease In/Ease Out
dialog box.
6 To rotate the selected item while tweening, select an option from the Rotate menu:

• To rotate the object once in the direction requiring the least motion, select Auto. • To rotate the object as indicated, and then enter a number to specify the number of rotations, select Clockwise
(CW) or Counterclockwise (CCW). Note: The rotation in step 6 is in addition to any rotation you applied to the ending frame in step 4.
7 If you’re using a motion path, select Orient To Path to orient the baseline of the tweened element to the motion path. 8 Select Synchronize to ensure that the instance loops properly in the main document.

Use the Synchronize command if the number of frames in the animation sequence inside the symbol is not an even multiple of the number of frames the graphic instance occupies in the document.
9 If you’re using a motion path, select Snap to attach the tweened element to the motion path by its registration point.

FLASH CS3 245
User Guide

Tween motion along a path
Motion guide layers let you draw paths along which tweened instances, groups, or text blocks can be animated. You can link multiple layers to a motion guide layer to have multiple objects follow the same path. A normal layer that is linked to a motion guide layer becomes a guided layer.

In this example, two objects on separate layers are attached to the same motion path.

For a video tutorial about motion tweens, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0125. For a tutorial about motion tweens, see Create a Timeline Animation on the Flash Tutorials web page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials. For samples of animation, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. The following samples are available:

• Animated Drop Shadow: Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimatedDropShadow folder to access the sample.

• Animation and Gradients: Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimationAndGradients folder to access the sample.
Create a motion path for a tweened animation 1 Create a motion-tweened animation sequence. If you select Orient To Path, the baseline of the tweened element

orients to the motion path. If you select Snap, the registration point of the tweened element snaps to the motion path.
2 Do one of the following:

• Select the layer containing the animation, and select Insert > Timeline > Motion Guide. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the layer containing the animation and select Add Motion
Guide. Flash creates a new layer above the selected layer with a motion guide icon to the left of the layer name.

Motion guide layer above selected layer

3 Use the Pen, Pencil, Line, Circle, Rectangle, or Brush tool to draw the desired path.

4 Snap the center to the beginning of the line in the first frame, and to the end of the line in the last frame.

Note: For best snapping results, drag the symbol by its registration point.
5 To hide the motion guide layer and the line so that only the object’s movement is visible while you work, click in the Eye column on the motion guide layer.

FLASH CS3 246
User Guide

The group or symbol follows the motion path when you play the animation.
Link layers to a motion guide layer
❖ Do one of the following:

• Drag an existing layer below the motion guide layer. The layer is indented under the motion guide layer. All objects
on this layer automatically snap to the motion path.

• Create a new layer under the motion guide layer. Objects you tween on this layer are automatically tweened along
the motion path.

• Select a layer below a motion guide layer. Select Modify > Timeline > Layer Properties, and select Guide.
Unlink layers from a motion guide layer
❖ Select the layer to unlink and do one of the following:

• Drag the layer above the motion guide layer. • Select Modify > Timeline > Layer Properties, and select Normal as the layer type.

Apply custom ease in/ease out to motion tweens
The Custom Ease In/Ease Out dialog box displays a graph representing the degree of motion over time. The horizontal axis represents frames, and the vertical axis represents percentage of change. The first keyframe is represented as 0%, and the last keyframe is represented as 100%. The slope of the graph’s curve represents the rate of change of the object. When the curve is horizontal (no slope), the velocity is zero; when the curve is vertical, an instantaneous rate of change occurs.

Custom Ease In/Ease Out graph showing constant velocity

Additional controls for the Custom Ease In/Ease Out dialog box
Use One Setting For All Properties check box The default is selected; the displayed curve is used for all properties,

and the Properties pop-up menu is disabled. When the check box is not selected, the Properties pop-up menu is enabled, and each property has a separate curve defining the velocity of that property.

FLASH CS3 247
User Guide

Property pop-up menu Enabled only when the Use One Setting for All Properties check box is not selected. When enabled, a separate curve is maintained for each of the five properties appearing in the menu. Selecting a property in the menu displays the curve for that property. The properties are:

• Position Specifies custom ease settings for the position of an animated object on the Stage. • Rotation Specifies custom ease settings for the rotation of an animated object. For example, you can fine-tune how quickly or slowly an animated character turns around to face the user on the Stage. • Scale Specifies custom ease settings for the scale of an animated object. For example, you can more easily customize the scale of an object so it appears to be moving away from the viewer, then coming closer, and then moving away again. • Color Specifies custom ease settings for color transitions applied to an animated object. • Filters Specifies custom ease settings for filters applied to an animated object. For example, you can control the ease setting of a drop shadow that simulates a change in the direction of a light source.
Play and Stop buttons Let you preview an animation on the Stage using all the current velocity curves defined in the

Custom Ease In/Ease Out dialog box.
Reset button Lets you reset the velocity curve to the default, linear state. Position of the selected control point In the lower-right corner of the dialog box, a numeric value displays the

keyframe and position of the selected control point. If no control point is selected, no value appears. To add a control point to the line, click the diagonal line once. To achieve a precise degree of control over the motion of an object, drag the positions of the control points. Using frame indicators (represented by square handles), click where you want an object to slow down or speed up. Clicking the square handle of a control point selects that control point, and displays the tangent points on either side of it. Hollow circles represent tangent points. Drag the control point or its tangent points with the mouse or use the keyboard’s arrow keys to position them. By default, the control points snap to a grid. You can turn off snapping by pressing the X key while dragging the control point. Clicking an area of the curve away from any control points adds a new control point to the curve at that point, without changing the shape of the curve. Clicking away from the curve and control points deselects the currently selected control point.
Use the Custom Ease In/Ease Out dialog box 1 Select a layer in the Timeline that has a motion tween applied to it. 2 Click the Edit button next to the Ease slider in the frame Property inspector. 3 (Optional) To display the curve for a property, deselect Use One Setting For All Properties, and select a property in the menu. 4 To add a control point, Control-click (Windows) or Command-click (Macintosh) the diagonal line. 5 To increase the speed of the object, drag the control point up; to slow down the speed of the object, drag it downwards. 6 To further adjust the ease curve, and fine tune the ease value of the tween, drag the vertex handles. 7 To view the animation on the Stage, click the play button in the lower-left corner. 8 Adjust the controls until you achieve the desired effect.

FLASH CS3 248
User Guide

Copy and paste an ease curve

• To copy the current ease curve, press Control+C (Windows) or Command+C (Macintosh). • To paste the copied curve into another ease curve, press Control+V (Windows) or Command+V (Macintosh).
You can copy and paste the ease curve. The copied curve remains available until you exit the Flash application.

Compatibility with current ease in/ease out settings
If you use the Custom Ease In/Ease Out dialog box to apply a custom ease to a frame, the edit box that shows the ease value shows '--'. If you use the Edit box or the pop-up slider to apply an ease value to a frame, the Custom Ease graph is set to the equivalent curve, and the Use One Setting For All Properties check box is selected.

Unsupported easing curves
Certain types of easing curves are not supported. No part of the graph can represent a nonlinear curve (such as a circle). The Custom Ease dialog box automatically prevents moving a control point or a tangent handle to a position that would render an invalid curve:

• All points must exist on the graph. Control points cannot be moved beyond the bounds of the graph. • All segments of the curve must exist within the graph. The shape of the curve is flattened to prevent it from
extending beyond the bounds of the graph.

Control shape changes with shape hints
To control more complex or improbable shape changes, you can use shape hints. Shape hints identify points that should correspond in starting and ending shapes. For example, if you are tweening a drawing of a face as it changes expression, you can use a shape hint to mark each eye. Then, instead of the face becoming an amorphous tangle while the shape change takes place, each eye remains recognizable and changes separately during the shift. Shape hints contain letters (a through z) for identifying which points correspond in the starting and ending shape. You can use up to 26 shape hints. Shape hints are yellow in a starting keyframe, green in an ending keyframe, and red when not on a curve. For best results when tweening shapes, follow these guidelines:

• In complex shape tweening, create intermediate shapes and tween them instead of just defining a starting and
ending shape.

• Make sure that shape hints are logical. For example, if you’re using three shape hints for a triangle, they must be
in the same order on the original triangle and on the triangle to be tweened. The order cannot be abc in the first keyframe and acb in the second.

• Shape hints work best if you place them in counterclockwise order beginning at the top-left corner of the shape.
For a video tutorial about shape tweens, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0124.
Use shape hints 1 Select the first keyframe in a shape-tweened sequence. 2 Select Modify > Shape > Add Shape Hint. The beginning shape hint appears as a red circle with the letter a somewhere on the shape. 3 Move the shape hint to a point to mark.

FLASH CS3 249
User Guide

4 Select the last keyframe in the tweening sequence. The ending shape hint appears somewhere on the shape as a green circle with the letter a. 5 Move the shape hint to the point in the ending shape that should correspond to the first point you marked. 6 To view how the shape hints change the shape tweening, play the animation again. To fine-tune the tweening, move the shape hints. 7 Repeat this process to add additional shape hints. New hints appear with the letters that follow (b, c, and so on). View all shape hints
❖ Select View > Show Shape Hints. The layer and keyframe that contain shape hints must be active for Show Shape

Hints to be available.
Remove a shape hint
❖ Drag it off the Stage.

Remove all shape hints
❖ Select Modify > Shape > Remove All Hints.

250

Chapter 11: Special effects
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional special effects include filters, which let you add visual effects to text, buttons, and movie clips; and blend modes, which let you create composite images.

About filters
Filter overview
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional filters (graphic effects) let you add interesting visual effects to text, buttons, and movie clips. A feature unique to Flash is that you can animate the filters you apply using motion tweens. Flash blend modes let you create composite images. Compositing is the process of varying the transparency or color interaction of two or more overlapping objects. Blending modes also add a dimension of control to the opacity of objects and images. You can use Flash blending modes to create highlights or shadows that let details from an underlying image show through, or to colorize a desaturated image.

About animating filters
You animate filters in the Timeline. Objects on separate keyframes joined by a tween have the parameters for corresponding filters tweened on intermediate frames. If a filter does not have a matching filter (a filter of the same type) at the opposite end of the tween, a matching filter is added automatically to ensure that the effect occurs at the end of the animation sequence. To prevent motion tweens from functioning incorrectly if a filter is missing at one end of the tween, or if filters are applied in a different order at each end, Flash does the following:

• If you apply a motion tween to a movie clip with filters applied to it, when you insert a keyframe at the opposite
end of the tween, the movie clip automatically has the same filters, with the same stacking order, on the last frame of the tween as it did at the beginning of the tween.

• If you place movie clips on two different frames with different filters applied to each, and you apply a motion tween
between the frames, Flash first processes the movie clip with the most filters. Flash then compares the filters applied to the first movie clip against the filters that the second movie clip uses. If no matching filters are found in the second movie clip, Flash generates a dummy filter with no parameters and the color of the existing filters.

• If a motion tween exists between two keyframes and you add a filter to the object in one keyframe, Flash automatically adds a dummy filter to the movie clip when it reaches the keyframe at the other end of the tween.

• If a motion tween exists between two keyframes and you remove a filter from an object in one keyframe, Flash
automatically removes the matching filter from the movie clip when it reaches the keyframe at the other end of the tween.

• If you set filter parameters inconsistently between the beginning and end of a motion tween, Flash applies the filter
settings of the starting frame to the interpolated frames. Inconsistent settings occur when the following parameters are set differently between the beginning and end of the tween: knockout, inner shadow, inner glow, and type of gradient glow and gradient bevel.

FLASH CS3 251
User Guide

For example, if you create a motion tween using the drop shadow filter, and apply a drop shadow with a knockout on the first frame of the tween, and an inner shadow on the last frame of the tween, Flash corrects the inconsistent use of the filter in the motion tween. In this case, Flash applies the filter settings used on the first frame of the tween— a drop shadow with a knockout.

About filters and Flash Player performance
The type, number, and quality of filters you apply to objects can affect the performance of SWF files as you play them. The more filters you apply to an object, the greater the number of calculations Adobe® Flash® Player must process to correctly display the visual effects you’ve created. Adobe® recommends that you apply a limited number of filters to a given object. Each filter includes controls that let you adjust the strength and quality of the applied filter. Using lower settings improves performance on slower computers. If you are creating content for playback on a wide range of computers, or are unsure of the computing power available to your audience, set the quality level to Low to maximize playback performance.

Apply filters
Each time you add a new filter to an object, it is added to the list of applied filters for that object in the Property inspector. You can apply multiple filters to an object, as well as remove filters that were previously applied. You can apply filters only to text, button, and movie clip objects. You can create a filter settings library that lets you easily apply the same filter or sets of filters to an object. Flash stores the filter presets you create in the Property inspector on the Filters tab in the Filters > Presets menu.

The Add Filter menu in the Property inspector.

Apply or remove a filter 1 Select a text, button, or movie clip object to apply a filter to or remove a filter from. 2 Select Filters, and do one of the following:

• To add a filter, click the Add Filter (+) button, and select a filter. Experiment with the settings until you get the
desired look.

• To remove a filter, select the filter to remove in the list of applied filters, and click the Remove Filter (-) button.
You can delete or rename any presets.
Copy and paste a filter 1 Select the object to copy a filter from, and select the Filters panel. 2 Select the filter to copy, and click the Copy Filter button

.

FLASH CS3 252
User Guide

3 Select the object to apply the filter to, and click the Paste Filter button Apply a preset filter to an object 1 Select the object to apply a filter preset to, and select the Filter tab. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Presets.

.

3 Select the filter preset to apply from the list of available presets at the bottom of the preset menu.

Note: When you apply a filter preset to an object, Flash replaces any filters currently applied to the selected objects with the filters used in the preset.
Enable or disable a filter applied to an object
❖ Click the enable or disable icon next to the filter name in the Filter list.

Note: To toggle the enable state of the other filters in the list, Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh) the enable icon in the Filter list. If you Alt-click the disable icon, the selected filter is enabled, and all others filters in the list are disabled.
Enable or disable all filters applied to an object
❖ Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Enable All or Disable All.

Note: To enable or disable all of the filters in the list, Control-click the enable or disable icon in the Filter list.

Create preset filter libraries
Save filter settings as preset libraries that you can easily apply to movie clip and text objects. Share your filter presets with other users by providing them with the filter configuration file. The filter configuration file is an XML file that is saved in the Flash Configuration folder in the following location:

• Windows: C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local Settings\Application Data\Adobe\Flash
CS3\language\Configuration\Effects\filtername.xml

• Macintosh: Macintosh HD/Users/username/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Flash CS3/language/Configuration/Effects/filtername.xml
Create a library of filters with preset settings 1 Apply the filter or filters to the object. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Presets > Save As. 3 Enter a name for the filter settings in the Save Preset As dialog box, and click OK. Rename a filter preset 1 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Presets > Rename. 2 Double-click the preset name to modify. 3 Enter a new preset name, and click Rename. Delete a filter preset 1 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Presets > Delete. 2 Select the preset to remove, and click Delete.

FLASH CS3 253
User Guide

Apply a drop shadow
The Drop Shadow filter simulates the look of an object casting a shadow onto a surface.

Text with the Drop Shadow filter applied.

For a sample of a drop shadow, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Graphics\AnimatedDropShadow directory.
1 Select the object to apply a drop shadow to, and select Filters. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Drop Shadow. 3 Edit the filter settings on the Filter tab:

• To set the width and height of the drop shadow, drag the Blur X and Y sliders. • To set the distance of the shadow from the object, drag the Distance slider. • To open the Color Picker and set the shadow color, click the color control. • To set the darkness of the shadow, drag the Strength slider. The higher the numerical value, the darker the shadow. • To set the angle of the shadow, enter a value, or click the angle selector and drag the angle dial. • Select Knockout to knock out (or visually hide) the source object and display only the drop shadow on the
knockout image.

• To apply the shadow within the boundaries of the object, select Inner shadow. • To hide the object and display only its shadow, select Hide Object. Hide Object lets you more easily create a
realistic shadow.

• Select the quality level for the drop shadow. High is approximate to that of a Gaussian blur. Low maximizes
playback performance.

Create a skewed drop shadow

Skewing the Drop Shadow filter to create a more realistic looking shadow.

1 Select the object with the shadow you want to skew. 2 Duplicate (select Edit > Duplicate) the source object. 3 Select the duplicated object, and skew it using the Free Transform tool (Modify > Transform > Rotate And Skew). 4 Apply the Drop Shadow filter to the duplicated movie clip or text object. (It will already be applied if the object you duplicated already had a drop shadow.) 5 In the Filters panel, select Hide Object to hide the duplicated object while leaving its shadow visible. 6 Select Modify > Arrange > Send Backward to place the duplicated object and its shadow behind the original object that you duplicated. 7 Adjust both the Drop Shadow filter settings and the angle of the skewed drop shadow until you achieve the desired look.

FLASH CS3 254
User Guide

Apply a blur
The Blur filter softens the edges and details of objects. Applying a blur to an object can make it appear as if it is behind other objects, or make an object appear to be in motion.

Text with the Blur filter applied.

1 Select an object to apply a blur to, and select Filters. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Blur. 3 Edit the filter settings on the Filter tab:

• To set the width and height of the blur, drag the Blur X and Y slider. • Select the quality level for the blur. High is approximate to that of a Gaussian blur. Low maximizes playback
performance.

Apply a glow
The Glow filter lets you apply a color around the edges of an object.

1 Select an object to apply a glow to, and select Filters. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Glow. 3 Edit the filter settings in the Filter tab:

• To set the width and height of the glow, drag the Blur X and Y slider. • To open the Color Picker and set the glow color, click the color control. • To set the sharpness of the glow, drag the Strength slider. • To knock out (or visually hide) the source object and display only the glow on the knockout image, select
Knockout.

Using the Glow filter with the Knockout option.

• To apply the glow within the boundaries of the object, select Inner Glow. • Select the quality level for the glow. High is approximate to that of a Gaussian blur. Low maximizes playback
performance.

FLASH CS3 255
User Guide

Apply a bevel
Applying a bevel applies a highlight to the object that makes it appear to be curved up above the background surface.

1 Select an object to apply a bevel to, and select Filters. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Bevel. 3 Edit the filter settings in the Filter tab:

• To apply a bevel to the object from the Type pop-up menu, select the bevel type. • To set the width and height of the bevel, drag the Blur X and Y slider. • Select a shadow and highlight color for the bevel from the pop-up color palette. • To set the opacity of the bevel without affecting its width, drag the Strength slider. • To change the angle of the shadow that the beveled edge casts, drag the Angle dial or enter a value. • To define the width of the bevel, enter a value for Distance. • To knock out (or visually hide) the source object and display only the bevel on the knockout image, select
Knockout.

Apply a gradient glow
Applying a gradient glow produces a glow look with a gradient color across the surface of the glow. The gradient glow requires one color at the beginning of the gradient with an Alpha value of 0. You cannot move the position of this color, but you can change the color.

1 Select an object to apply a gradient glow to, and select the Filters tab. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Gradient Glow. 3 Edit the filter settings on the Filter tab:

• Select the type of glow to apply to the object from the Glow Type pop-up menu. • To set the width and height of the glow, drag the Blur X and Y slider. • To set the opacity of the glow without affecting its width, drag the Strength slider. • To change the angle of the shadow that the glow casts, drag the Angle dial or enter a value. • To set the distance of the shadow from the object, drag the Distance slider. • To knock out (or visually hide) the source object and display only the gradient glow on the knockout image, select
Knockout.

• Specify a gradient color for the glow. A gradient contains two or more colors that fade or blend into one another.
The color you select for the beginning of the gradient is referred to as the alpha color.

FLASH CS3 256
User Guide

To change a color in the gradient, select one of the color pointers below the gradient definition bar and click the color space that appears directly below the gradient bar to display the Color Picker. Sliding these pointers adjusts the level and position of that color in the gradient. To add a pointer to the gradient, click on or below the gradient definition bar. To create a gradient with up to 15 color transitions, add up to 15 color pointers. To reposition a pointer on the gradient, drag the pointer along the gradient definition bar. To remove a pointer, drag it down and off the gradient definition bar.

• Select the quality level for the gradient glow. High is approximate to that of a Gaussian blur. Low maximizes
playback performance.

Apply a gradient bevel
Applying a gradient bevel produces a raised look that makes an object appear to be raised above the background, with a gradient color across the surface of the bevel. The gradient bevel requires one color in the middle of the gradient with an alpha value of 0.
1 Select an object to apply a gradient bevel to, and select the Filters tab. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Gradient Bevel. 3 Edit the filter settings on the Filter tab:

• Select the type of bevel to apply to the object from the Type pop-up menu. • To set the width and height of the bevel, drag the Blur X and Y slider. • To affect the smoothness of the bevel without affecting its width, enter a value for strength. • To set the angle of the light source, enter a value for Angle, or use the pop-up dial. • To knock out (or visually hide) the source object and display only the gradient bevel on the knockout image, select
Knockout.

• Specify a gradient color for the bevel. A gradient contains two or more colors that fade or blend into one another.
The middle pointer controls the alpha color of the gradient. You can change the color of the alpha pointer, but you cannot reposition this color in the gradient. To change a color in the gradient, select one of the color pointers below the gradient definition bar, and click the color space that appears directly below the gradient bar to display the Color Picker. To adjust the level and position of that color in the gradient, slide these pointers. To add a pointer to the gradient, click on or below the gradient definition bar. To create a gradient with up to 15 color transitions, add up to 15 color pointers. To reposition a pointer on the gradient, drag the pointer along the gradient definition bar. To remove a pointer, drag it down and off the gradient definition bar.

Apply the Adjust Color filter
To apply only the Brightness control to an object, use the color controls located in the Properties tab of the Property inspector. To provide improved performance to applying a filter, use the Brightness option in the Properties tab.
1 Select an object to adjust the color for, and select the Filters tab. 2 Click the Add Filter (+) button, and select Adjust Color. 3 Drag the slider for the color attributes to adjust, or enter a numerical value in the corresponding box. The attributes and their corresponding values are as follows:
Contrast Adjusts the highlights, shadows, and midtones of an image.

FLASH CS3 257
User Guide

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of an image. Saturation Adjusts the intensity of a color. Hue Adjusts the shade of a color.

4 To reset all of the color adjustments to 0 and return the object to its original state, click Reset.

See also
“Change the color and transparency of an instance” on page 214

About blend modes
Blend modes in Flash
Blend modes let you create composite images. Compositing is the process of varying the transparency or color interaction of two or more overlapping objects. Blending lets you create unique effects by blending the colors in overlapping movie clips. A blending mode contains the following elements:
Blend color The color applied to the blend mode. Opacity The degree of transparency applied to the blend mode. Base color The color of pixels underneath the blend color. Result color The result of the blend’s effect on the base color.

Blend modes depend on both the color of the object you’re applying the blend to and the underlying color. Adobe® recommends that you experiment with the different blend modes to achieve the desired effect.
Normal Applies color normally, with no interaction with the base colors. Layer Lets you stack movie clips on top of each other without affecting their color. Darken Replaces only the areas that are lighter than the blend color. Areas darker than the blend color don’t change. Multiply Multiplies the base color by the blend color, resulting in darker colors. Lighten Replaces only pixels that are darker than the blend color. Areas lighter than the blend color don’t change. Screen Multiplies the inverse of the blend color by the base color, resulting in a bleaching effect. Overlay Multiplies or screens the colors, depending on the base colors. Hard Light Multiplies or screens the colors, depending on the blend mode color. The effect is similar to shining a

spot light on the object.
Difference Subtracts either the blend color from the base color or the base color from the blend color, depending on which has the greater brightness value. The effect is similar to a color negative. Add Commonly used to create an animated lightening dissolve effect between two images. Subtract Commonly used to create an animated darkening dissolve effect between two images. Invert Inverts the base color. Alpha Applies an alpha mask.

FLASH CS3 258
User Guide

Erase Removes all base color pixels, including those in the background image.

Note: Erase and Alpha blend modes require that a Layer blend mode be applied to the parent movie clip. You cannot change the background clip to Erase and apply it because the object would appear invisible.

Blend mode examples
The following examples illustrate how different blend modes affect the appearance of an image. The resulting effect of a blend mode might be considerably different, depending on the color of the underlying image and the type of blend mode you apply.

Original image

Layer

Darken

Multiply

Lighten

Screen

Overlay

Hard Light

Add

Subtract

Difference

Invert

Apply a blend mode
To apply blends to selected movie clips, use the Property inspector. Note: You cannot apply different blend modes to different graphic symbols because Multiple graphic symbols are merged as a single shape when you publish the SWF file.

See also
“Change the color and transparency of an instance” on page 214
Apply a blend mode to a movie clip 1 Select the movie clip instance (on the Stage) to apply a blend mode to. 2 To adjust the color and transparency of the movie clip instance, use the Color pop-up menu in the Properties

panel.

FLASH CS3 259
User Guide

3 Select a blend mode for movie clips from the Blend pop-up menu in the Properties panel. The blend mode is applied to the selected movie clip instance. 4 Verify that the blend mode you selected is appropriate to the effect you’re trying to achieve.

Experiment with both the color and transparency settings of the movie clip and the different blend modes to achieve the desired effect.

About importing filters and blends from Fireworks PNG files
When you import Adobe® Fireworks® PNG files, you can retain many of the filters and blending modes applied to objects in Fireworks, and continue to modify those filters and blends using Flash. Flash only supports modifiable filters and blends for objects imported as text and movie clips. If an effect or blend mode is not supported, Flash rasterizes or ignores it when it is imported. To import a Fireworks PNG file that contains filters or blends that Flash does not support, rasterize the file during the import process. After this operation, you cannot edit the file. For a video tutorial about the Flash and Fireworks workflow, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0194.

Fireworks effects supported in Flash
Flash imports the following Fireworks effects as modifiable filters:
Fireworks effect Drop shadow Solid shadow Inner shadow Flash filter Drop shadow Drop shadow Drop shadow (with Inner shadow automatically selected) Blur (where blurX = blurY=1) Blur (where blurX = blurY=1) Blur Adjust color Adjust color

Blur Blur more Gaussian blur Adjust color brightness Adjust color contrast

For a video tutorial about the Flash and Fireworks workflow, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0194.

Fireworks blend modes supported in Flash
Flash imports the following Fireworks blend modes as modifiable blends:
Fireworks blending mode Normal Darken Multiply Lighten Screen Flash blending mode Normal Darken Multiply Lighten Screen

FLASH CS3 260
User Guide

Fireworks blending mode Overlay Hard light Additive Difference Invert Alpha Erase

Flash blending mode Overlay Hard light Add Difference Invert Alpha Erase

Flash ignores all other blending modes imported from Fireworks. The blending modes that Flash does not support are Average, Negation, Exclusion, Soft Light, Subtractive, Fuzzy Light, Color Dodge, and Color Burn. For a video tutorial about the Flash and Fireworks workflow, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0194.

261

Chapter 12: Working with text
This chapter describes the various ways that text can be incorporated into your Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional documents.

Text and fonts in Flash
About text
You can include text in your Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional applications in a variety of ways. You can create text fields containing static text, which you create when you author the document. You can also create dynamic text fields, which display updating text, such as stock quotes or news headlines, and input text fields, which allow users to enter text for forms or surveys. Flash provides many ways to work with text. For example, you can orient text horizontally or vertically; set attributes such as font, size, style, color, and line spacing; check spelling; transform text by rotating, skewing, or flipping; link text; make text selectable; animate text; control font substitution; and use a font as part of a shared library. Flash documents can use Type 1 PostScript fonts, TrueType, and bitmap fonts (Macintosh only). You can preserve rich text formatting in text fields, using HTML tags and attributes. When you use HTML text for the content of a dynamic or input text field, the text can flow around an image, such as a SWF or JPEG file or a movie clip. See Using HTML-formatted text in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash. Like movie clip instances, text field instances are ActionScript™ objects that have properties and methods. By giving a text field an instance name, you can manipulate it with ActionScript. However, you cannot write ActionScript code inside a text instance, because text instances don’t have Timelines. You can use ActionScript to format input and dynamic text, and to create scrolling text fields. ActionScript has events for dynamic and input text fields that you can capture and use to trigger scripts. For information on using ActionScript to control text, see Working with Text and Strings in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash. For a video tutorial about working with text, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0121. For a sample file about working with text, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Text\TextEnhancements folder to access the sample. For a video tutorial about using text with Illustrator and Flash, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0199.

See also
“About text fields” on page 265

Flash Text Anti-Aliasing
The Flash text rendering engine that provides clear, high-quality text rendering in Flash (FLA) documents and published SWF files. The Anti-alias for Readability setting makes text more legible, particularly at small font sizes. Custom anti-aliasing lets you specify the thickness and sharpness of fonts used in individual text fields.

FLASH CS3 262
User Guide

High quality anti-aliasing is automatically enabled whenever you publish to Flash Player 8 or later, and Anti-Alias For Readability or Custom Anti-Alias is selected. Anti-Alias For Readability may cause a slight delay when you load Flash SWF files, especially if you are using four or five different character sets in the first frame of a Flash document. High quality anti-aliasing may also increase Flash Player’s memory usage. Using four or five fonts, for example, can increase memory usage by approximately 4 MB. When the publish setting of your file is Adobe® Flash® Player 8 or later, and Anti-Alias For Readability or Custom Anti-Alias is your chosen anti-aliasing option, high-quality anti-aliasing applies to the following:

• Untransformed text that is scaled and rotated
Note: Although the text can be scaled or rotated, it must remain flat (that is, untransformed). For example, if you skew the fonts or otherwise manipulate the font shapes, Anti-Alias for Readability is automatically disabled.

• All font families (including bold, italic, and so on) • Display sizes of up to 255 points • Exporting to most non-Flash file formats (GIF or JPEG)
High quality anti-aliasing is disabled under the following conditions:

• Flash Player 7 or earlier is the selected version of Flash Player. • An anti-aliasing option other than Anti-Alias for Readability or Custom Anti-Alias is selected. • Text is skewed or flipped. • The FLA file is exported to a PNG file.

Unicode text encoding in Flash applications
Macromedia Flash Player 7 from Adobe and later supports Unicode text encoding for SWF files in Flash Player format. This support greatly enhances your ability to use multilanguage text in your SWF files, such as two languages within a single text field. Any user with Flash Player 7 or later can view multilanguage text in a Flash Player 7 or later application, regardless of the language used by the operating system running the player.

See also
“Creating multilanguage text” on page 276

Font outlines and device fonts
When you publish or export a Flash document, fonts in text fields are represented by embedded font outlines or by font names. Alternatively, you can use device fonts to specify a general type of font, such as sans serif.
Font outlines and names

For static text, Flash creates outlines of the font and embeds them in the SWF file. Flash Player then uses the outlines to display the text. For dynamic or input text, Flash stores the font names; Flash Player then locates identical or similar fonts on the user’s system when the Flash application is displayed. To ensure that users have the correct fonts for dynamic or input text, you can embed font outlines, but this can increase file size. Not all fonts displayed in Flash can be exported as outlines with a Flash application. To verify that a font can be exported, use the View > Preview Mode > Antialias Text command to preview the text; jagged type indicates that Flash does not recognize that font’s outline and will not export the text.

FLASH CS3 263
User Guide

Device fonts

Use generic device fonts as an alternative to embedding font outline information. Flash includes three generic device fonts, _sans (similar to Helvetica or Arial), _serif (similar to Times Roman), and _typewriter (similar to Courier). When you specify one of these fonts and then export the document, Flash Player uses the font on the user’s computer that most closely resembles the generic device font. Because device fonts are not embedded, they result in a smaller SWF file. They can also result in more legible text at small point sizes (below 10 points). However, if a user’s computer does not have an installed font corresponding to the device font, text may look different than expected.

See also
“Create and edit text fields” on page 266 “Use device fonts” on page 275

Masking device fonts
You can use a movie clip to mask device font text in another movie clip. (You cannot mask device fonts by using a mask layer on the Stage.) For this movie clip mask to function, the user must have Macromedia Flash Player 6 (6.0.40.0) from Adobe or later. When you use a movie clip to mask device font text, Flash uses the rectangular bounding box of the mask as the masking shape. That is, if you create a nonrectangular movie clip mask for device font text in the Flash authoring environment, the mask that appears in the SWF file takes the shape of the rectangular bounding box of the mask, not the shape of the mask itself. For more information on using a movie clip as a mask, see Using movie clips as masks in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash. For a sample about device font masking, see the Flash Samples web page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Masking\DeviceFontMasking folder to access the sample.

About anti-aliasing text
Anti-aliasing lets you smooth the edges of onscreen text. The anti-aliasing options are particularly effective for rendering smaller font sizes. When anti-aliasing is enabled, all text in the current selection is affected. Anti-aliasing operates with text of all point sizes in the same way. Anti-aliasing is supported for static, dynamic, and input text if the user has Flash Player 7 or later. It is supported only for static text if the user has an earlier version of Flash Player. When using small text in a Flash document, keep in mind the following guidelines:

• Sans serif text, such as Helvetica or Arial, appears clearer at small sizes than serif text. • Some type styles, such as bold and italic, can make text less legible at small sizes. • In some cases, text appears somewhat smaller than text of the same point size in other applications.

See also
“Work with text anti-aliasing” on page 274 “Font outlines and device fonts” on page 262

FLASH CS3 264
User Guide

Substituting missing fonts
If you work with a document that contains fonts that aren’t installed on your system, Flash uses the fonts available on your system. You can select which fonts are substituted for the missing fonts, or you can let Flash substitute missing fonts with the Flash System Default Font. When a font is substituted, the text is displayed on your system using the substitute font, but the missing font information is saved with the document. If the document is reopened on a system that includes the missing font, the text is displayed in that font. When you work with a document that includes missing fonts, the missing fonts appear in the font list in the Property inspector. When you select substitute fonts, the substitute fonts names also appear, enclosed by parentheses to identify them as substitute fonts. If you apply formatting (such as font size or kerning) to the substitute font, check the formatting when the text is displayed in the missing font, because it may not look as expected. If you install a previously missing font on your system and restart Flash, the font is displayed in documents that use the font, and the font is removed from the Missing Fonts dialog box.

Work with substitute fonts
If you see an alert box indicating missing fonts in a document, you can select substitute fonts in the Font Mapping dialog box.
Specify font substitution 1 When the Missing Fonts alert appears, do one of the following:

• Click Select Substitute Fonts to select substitute fonts from fonts installed on your system and proceed to step 2. • Click Use Default to use the Flash System Default Font to substitute all missing fonts and to dismiss the Missing
Fonts alert. You have finished specifying font substitution.
2 In the Font Mapping dialog box, click a font in the Missing Fonts column to select it. Shift-click to select multiple missing fonts to map them all to the same substitute font.

The default substitute fonts are displayed in the Mapped To column, until you select substitute fonts.
3 Select a font from the Substitute Font pop-up menu. 4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for all missing fonts. View all the missing fonts in a document and reselect substitute fonts 1 With the document active in Flash, select Edit > Font Mapping. 2 Click a font in the Missing Fonts column to select it. Shift-click to select multiple missing fonts to map them all to the same substitute font.

The default substitute fonts are displayed in the Mapped To column, until you select substitute fonts.
3 Select a font from the Substitute Font pop-up menu. 4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for all missing fonts. View or delete font mappings 1 Close all documents in Flash. 2 Select Edit > Font Mapping.

FLASH CS3 265
User Guide

3 To delete a font mapping, select the mapping and press Delete. Turn off the Missing Fonts alert

• To turn the alert off for the current document, in the Missing Fonts alert box select Don’t Show Again For This
Document, Always Use Substitute Fonts. Select Edit > Font Mapping to view mapping information for the document again.

• To turn the alert off for all documents, select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh),
and click the Warnings tab. Deselect Warn On Missing Font, and click OK. Select the option again to turn alerts on.

Creating text
About text fields
You can create three types of text fields: static, dynamic, and input. All text fields support Unicode.

• Static text fields display text that doesn’t change characters dynamically. • Dynamic text fields display dynamically updating text, such as stock quotes or weather reports. • Input text fields allow users to enter text in forms or surveys.
You can create horizontal text (with a left-to-right flow) or static vertical text (with either a right-to-left or left-toright flow). When creating static text, you can place text on a single line that expands as you type, or in a fixed-width field (for horizontal text) or fixed-height field (for vertical text) that expands and wraps words automatically. When creating dynamic or input text, you can place text on a single line, or create a text field with a fixed width and height. Flash displays a handle on the corner of a text field to identify the type of text field:

• For static horizontal text that extends, a round handle appears at the upper-right corner of the text field.

• For static horizontal text that has a fixed width, a square handle appears at the upper-right corner of the text field.

• For static vertical text that has right-to-left flow and extends, a round handle appears at the lower-left corner of
the text field.

• For static vertical text that has right-to-left flow and a fixed height, a square handle appears at the lower-left corner
of the text field.

FLASH CS3 266
User Guide

• For static vertical text that has left-to-right flow and extends, a round handle appears at the lower-right corner of
the text field.

• For static vertical text that has left-to-right flow and a fixed height, a square handle appears at the lower-right
corner of the text field.

• For dynamic or input text fields that extend, a round handle appears at the lower-right corner of the text field.

• For dynamic or input text that has a defined height and width, a square handle appears at the lower-right corner
of the text field.

• For dynamic scrollable text fields, the round or square handle becomes solid black instead of hollow.

Shift-double-click the handle of dynamic and input text fields to create text fields that don’t expand when you enter text on the Stage. This allows you to create a text field of a fixed size and fill it with more text than it can display to create scrolling text. After you use the Text tool to create a text field, use the Property inspector to specify the type of text field, and to set values that control how the text field and its contents appear in the SWF file. For a video tutorial about working with text, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0121. For a sample file about working with text, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Text\TextEnhancements folder to access the sample.

Create and edit text fields
Text is horizontal by default, however static text can also be aligned vertically. You can use most common word-processing techniques to edit text in Flash. Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to move text in a Flash file as well as between Flash and other applications. For a sample file about working with text, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Text\TextEnhancements folder to access the sample.

FLASH CS3 267
User Guide

See also
“Setting text attributes” on page 272
Add text to the Stage 1 Select the Text tool

.

2 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), select a text type from the pop-up menu to specify the type of text field:
Dynamic Text Creates a field that displays dynamically updating text. Input Text Creates a field in which users can enter text. Static Text Creates a field that cannot update dynamically.

3 For static text only: In the Property inspector, click Change Orientation Of Text orientation and flow. (Horizontal is the default setting.) 4 On the Stage, do one of the following:

and select a direction for text

• To create a text field that displays text in a single line, click where you want the text to start. • To create a text field with a fixed width (for horizontal text) or fixed height (for vertical text), position the pointer
where you want the text to start and drag to the desired width or height. Note: If you create a text field that extends past the edge of the Stage as you type, the text isn’t lost. To make the handle accessible again, add line breaks, move the text field, or select View > Pasteboard.
5 Select text attributes in the Property inspector. Change the size of a text field
❖ Drag the text field’s resize handle.

When text is selected, a blue bounding box lets you resize the text field by dragging one of its handles. Static text fields have four handles that let you resize the text field horizontally. Dynamic text fields have eight handles that let you resize the text field vertically, horizontally, or diagonally.
Switch a text field between fixed-width (or fixed-height) and extending
❖ Double-click a resize handle.

Select characters in a text field 1 Select the Text tool . 2 Do one of the following:

• Drag to select characters. • Double-click to select a word. • Click to specify the beginning of the selection, and Shift-click to specify the end of the selection. • Press Control+A (Windows) or Command+A (Macintosh) to select all the text in the field.
Select text fields
❖ Using the Selection tool

, click a text field. Shift-click to select multiple text fields.

FLASH CS3 268
User Guide

Set dynamic and input text options 1 Click in an existing dynamic text field. 2 In the Property inspector, make sure Dynamic or Input is displayed in the pop-up menu. 3 Enter an instance name for the text field. 4 Specify the height, width, and location of text. 5 Select the font and style. 6 In the Line Type box, specify one of the following options:
Multiline Displays the text in multiple lines. Single line Displays the text as one line. Multiline No Wrap Displays text in multiple lines that break only if the last character is a breaking character, such as

Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh).
7 To enable users to select dynamic text, click Selectable the dynamic text.

. Deselect this option to prevent users from selecting

8 To preserve rich text formatting (such as fonts and hyperlinks) with the appropriate HTML tags, click Render Text As HTML . 9 To display a black border and white background for the text field, click Show Border

.

10 (Optional) In the Var box, enter the variable name for the text field. (Use this option only when authoring for

Macromedia Flash Player 5 from Adobe or earlier.) Beginning with Macromedia Flash MX (version 6), you assign the text field an instance name using the Property inspector. Although you can use the variable name method with dynamic text fields for backwards compatibility to Macromedia Flash 5 and earlier versions, Adobe doesn't recommend this, because you can't control other text field properties, or apply style sheet settings.
11 Click Embed for embedded font outline options:
Don’t embed Specifies that no fonts be embedded. Auto fill Click Auto Fill to embed all of the characters from the selected text field.

Set preferences for vertical text 1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh) and click the Editing tab in the Prefer-

ences dialog box.
2 Under Vertical Text, set any of these options:
Default Text Orientation Automatically gives new text fields vertical orientation. Right to Left Text Flow Makes lines of vertical text fill the page from right to left. No Kerning Prevents kerning from being applied to vertical text. (Kerning remains enabled for horizontal text.)

Check spelling
You can check spelling in text throughout your Flash document. You can also customize the spell checker.
Use the spell checker 1 Select Text > Check Spelling to view the Check Spelling dialog box.

FLASH CS3 269
User Guide

The box in the upper-left corner identifies words not found in the selected dictionaries, and also identifies the type of element that contains the text (such as a text field or frame label).
2 Do one of the following:

• Click Add To Personal to add the word to your personal dictionary. • Click Ignore to leave the word unchanged. Click Ignore All to leave all occurrences of the word in the document
unchanged.

• Enter a word in the Change To box or select a word from the Suggestions scroll list. Then click Change to change
the word or click Change All to change all occurrences of the word in the document.

• Click Delete to delete the word from the document.
3 To end the spelling check, do one of the following:

• Click Close to end spelling before Flash reaches the end of the document. • Continue checking spelling until you see a notification that Flash has reached the end of the document, then click
No to end spelling checking. (Click Yes to continue the spelling check at the beginning of the document.)
Customize the spelling checker 1 Do one of the following:

• Select Text > Spelling Setup. (Use this option if you have not used the Check Spelling feature before.) • In the Check Spelling dialog box (Text > Check Spelling), click Setup.
2 Set any of the following options:
Document Options Use these options to specify which elements are to be checked. Dictionaries Lists the built-in dictionaries. You must select at least one dictionary to enable spelling checking. Personal Dictionary Enter a path or click the folder icon and browse to a document to use as a personal dictionary. (You can modify this dictionary.) Edit Personal Dictionary Adds words and phrases to your personal dictionary. In the Personal Dictionary dialog

box, enter each new item on a separate line in the text field.
Checking Options Use these options to control how Flash handles specific types of words and characters when

checking spelling.

Embed and share fonts
You can embed a font in your SWF file so that the font does not need to be present on the devices the SWF file eventually plays back on. To embed a font, create a font library item. Creating a font library item also allows you to use the font as a shared library item for sharing among multiple SWF files. You must also assign the font item a linkage identifier string and a URL where the document that contains the font symbol will be posted. In this way, you can link to the font and use it in a Flash application. When you use font symbols for dynamic or input text, embed the font outline information. After a font symbol in a Flash document has an assigned identifier string and URL, use the font symbol in another Flash document by copying the font symbol into the destination FLA file.

FLASH CS3 270
User Guide

See also
“Using shared library assets” on page 219 “Copy library assets between documents” on page 217
Create a font library item 1 Open the library to add a font symbol to. 2 Select New Font from the Library Panel menu. 3 Enter a name for the font item in the Name text field. 4 Select a font from the Font menu or enter the name of a font in the Font text field. 5 (Optional) Select Bold or Italic. 6 (Optional) To embed the font information as bitmap data rather than vector outline data, select the Bitmap Text option, and enter a font size in the Size text field. (Bitmap fonts cannot use anti-aliasing. You must choose Bitmap as the anti-aliasing option in the Property inspector for text that uses this font.)

Note: The Size setting applies only when you use the Bitmap Text option.
Assign an identifier string to a font library item 1 Select the font item in the Library panel. 2 Do one of the following:

• Select Linkage from the Library Panel menu. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the font symbol name in the Library panel, and select
Linkage.
3 Under Linkage, select Export for Runtime Sharing. 4 In the Identifier text field, enter a string to identify the font item. 5 In the URL text field, enter the URL of the SWF file that contains the font item.

Scrolling text
There are several ways to create scrolling text in Flash:

• Make dynamic or input text fields scrollable by using menu commands or the text field handle. • Add a ScrollBar component to a text field to make it scroll. For more information, see “UIScrollBar Component”
in the ActionScript 2.0 Components Language Reference.

• In ActionScript, use the TextField object’s scroll and maxscroll properties to control vertical scrolling and the
hscroll and maxhscroll properties to control horizontal scrolling in a text field. See Example: Creating scrolling

text in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash.

Make dynamic text scrollable
• Shift-double-click the handle on the dynamic text field. • Using the Selection tool
, select the dynamic text field and then select Text > Scrollable.

• Select the dynamic text field with the Selection tool. Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the
dynamic text field and select Text > Scrollable.

FLASH CS3 271
User Guide

Text effects
You can create text effects by transforming text fields. For example, you can rotate, skew, flip, and scale text fields. (When you scale a text field as an object, the Property inspector does not reflect increases or decreases in point size.) The text in a transformed text field can still be edited, although severe transformations may make it difficult to read. You can also animate text by using Timeline effects. For example, you can make text bounce, fade in or out, or explode.

See also
“Using Timeline effects” on page 237

Break text apart
You can break apart text to place each character in a separate text field. Then you can quickly distribute the text fields to separate layers and animate each field. (You cannot break apart text in scrollable text fields.) You can also convert the text to its component lines and fills to reshape, erase, and otherwise manipulate it. As with any other shape, you can individually group these converted characters, or change them to symbols and animate them. After you convert text to lines and fills, you can no longer edit the text. Note: The Break Apart command applies only to outline fonts such as TrueType fonts. Bitmap fonts disappear from the screen when you break them apart. PostScript fonts can be broken apart only on Macintosh systems.
1 Using the Selection tool

, click a text field.

2 Select Modify > Break Apart.

Each character in the selected text is placed in a separate text field. The text remains in the same position on the Stage.
3 Select Modify > Break Apart again to convert the characters to shapes on the Stage.

See also
“Distributing objects to layers for tweened animation” on page 241 “Creating animation” on page 229

Link horizontal text to a URL
1 Select text or a text field:

• Use the Text tool

to select text in a text field. to select a text field.

• To link all the text in a text field, use the Selection tool

2 In the Link text field of the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), enter the URL to which you want to link the text field.

Note: To create a link to an e-mail address, use the mailto: URL. For example, enter mailto:adamsmith@example.com.

FLASH CS3 272
User Guide

Setting text attributes
About text attributes
You can set the font and paragraph attributes of text. Font attributes include font family, point size, style, color, letter spacing, autokerning, and character position. Paragraph attributes include alignment, margins, indents, and line spacing. For static text, font outlines are exported in a published SWF file. For horizontal static text, you can use device fonts instead of exporting font outlines. For dynamic or input text, Flash stores the names of the fonts, and Flash Player locates identical or similar fonts on the user’s system. You can also embed font outlines in dynamic or input text fields. Embedding font outlines can increase file size, but it ensures that users have the correct font information. When creating new text, Flash uses the text attributes that are currently set in the Property inspector. When you select existing text, use the Property inspector to change font or paragraph attributes, and to direct Flash to use device fonts rather than embedding font outline information.

See also
“Font outlines and device fonts” on page 262 “Create and edit text fields” on page 266

Set a font, point size, style, and color
1 Using the Selection tool

, select one or more text fields on the Stage.

2 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), select a font from the Font pop-up menu, or enter a font name.

Note: The _sans, _serif, and _typewriter fonts and device fonts can be used only with static horizontal text.
3 Click the triangle next to the Point Size value and drag the slider to select a value, or enter a font size value.

Font size is set in points, regardless of the current ruler units.
4 To apply bold or italic style, click Bold or Italic. 5 Select a font rendering method from the Anti-Aliasing pop-up menu (directly below the Bold button) to optimize text. 6 To select a fill color for text, click the color control and do one of the following:

• Select a color from the Color Picker. • Type a color’s hexadecimal value in the box in the upper-left corner. • Click Color Picker
and select a color from the system color picker. (When setting the text color, use only solid colors, not gradients. To apply a gradient to text, break the text apart and convert the text to its component lines and fills.)

See also
“Font outlines and device fonts” on page 262

FLASH CS3 273
User Guide

Set letter spacing, kerning, and character position
Letter spacing inserts a uniform amount of space between characters. Use letter spacing to adjust the spacing of selected characters or entire blocks of text. Kerning controls the spacing between pairs of characters. Many fonts have built-in kerning information. For example, A and V are often closer together than A and D. Flash provides horizontal tracking and kerning (for horizontal text) and vertical tracking and kerning (for vertical text). For vertical text, you can disable kerning by default in Flash Preferences. If you do this and leave the kerning option selected in the Property inspector, kerning is applied to horizontal text only.
1 Using the Text tool

, select one or more sentences, phrases, or text fields on the Stage.

2 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), set the following options:

• To specify letter spacing (tracking and kerning), click the triangle next to the Letter Spacing value
slider to select a value, or enter a value in the text field.

and drag the

• To use a font’s built-in kerning information, select Auto-Kern. • To specify character position, click the triangle next to the Character Position option
and select a position from the menu: Normal places text on the baseline, Superscript places text above the baseline (horizontal text) or to the right of the baseline (vertical text), and Subscript places text below the baseline (horizontal text) or to the left of the baseline (vertical text).

Set alignment, margins, indents, and line spacing
Alignment determines the position of each line of text in a paragraph relative to edges of the text field. Horizontal text is aligned relative to the left and right edges of the text field, and vertical text is aligned relative to the top and bottom edges of the text field. Text can be aligned to one edge of the text field, centered in the text field, or aligned to both edges of the text field (full justification). Margins determine the amount of space between the border of a text field and its text. Indents determine the distance between the margin of a paragraph and the beginning of the first line. Line spacing determines the distance between adjacent lines in a paragraph. For vertical text, line spacing adjusts the space between vertical columns.
Work with horizontal text 1 Using the Text tool , select one or more text fields on the Stage. 2 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), set the following options:

• To set alignment, click Left, Center, Right, or Full Justification. • To set the left or right margin, click the Edit Format Options button (shaped like a paragraph symbol, next to the
Justify button) to display the Format options dialog box. Click the triangle next to the Left Margin or Right Margin value and drag the slider to select a value, or enter a value in the text field.

• To specify indents, click the Edit Format Options button (shaped like a paragraph symbol, next to the Justify
button) to display the Format options dialog box. Click the triangle next to the Indent value and drag the slider, or enter a value in the text field.

• To specify line spacing, click the Edit Format Options button (shaped like a paragraph symbol, next to the Justify
button) to display the Format options dialog box. Click the triangle next to the Line Spacing value and drag the slider to select a value, or enter a value in the text field.

FLASH CS3 274
User Guide

Work with vertical text 1 Using the Text tool , select one or more text fields on the Stage. 2 To apply settings to existing text, select text fields on the Stage. 3 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), set the following options:

• To set alignment, click Top, Center, Bottom, or Full Justification. • To set the top or bottom margin, click the Edit Format Options button (shaped like a paragraph symbol, next to
the Justify button) to display the Format options dialog box. Click the triangle next to the Top Margin or the Bottom Margin value and drag the slider to select a value, or enter a value in the text field.

• To specify indents, click the Edit Format Options button (shaped like a paragraph symbol, next to the Justify
button) to display the Format options dialog box. Click the triangle next to the Indent value and drag the slider to select a value, or enter a value in the text field. If the text flows left to right, the indent moves the leftmost line down; if the text flows right to left, the indent moves the rightmost line down.

• To specify line spacing, click the Edit Format Options button (shaped like a paragraph symbol, next to the Justify
button) to display the Format options dialog box. Click the triangle next to the Line Spacing value and drag the slider to select a value, or enter a value in the text field.

Work with text anti-aliasing
Flash provides improved font rasterization that lets you specify the anti-aliasing properties for fonts. The improved anti-aliasing capabilities are available only for SWF files published for Flash Player 8 or later. If you are publishing files for earlier versions of Flash Player, you can only use the Anti-Alias For Animation feature. Apply anti-aliasing for each text field rather than each character. Also, when you open existing FLA files in Flash 8 or later, the text is not automatically updated to the advanced anti-aliasing options; you must select individual text fields and manually change the anti-aliasing settings. When you open a FLA file created for use with Flash Player 7 or earlier, the text Property inspector sets the anti-alias option to its equivalent anti-aliasing option from Flash MX 2004. However, to use the advanced anti-aliasing features, you must upgrade the FLA content for Flash Player 8 or later.
Choose an anti-aliasing option for selected text
❖ In the Property inspector, choose one of the following options from the Anti-Aliasing pop-up menu: Use Device Fonts Specifies that the SWF file use the fonts installed on the local computer to display the fonts.

Typically, device fonts are legible at most font sizes. Although this option doesn’t increase the size of the SWF file, it forces you to rely on the fonts installed on the user’s computer for font display. When using device fonts, choose only commonly installed font families.
Bitmap Text (No Anti-Alias) Turns off anti-aliasing and provides no text smoothing. The text is displayed using sharp edges, and the resulting SWF file size is increased because the font outlines are embedded in the file. Bitmap text is sharp at the exported size, but scales poorly. Anti-Alias For Animation Creates a smoother animation by ignoring alignment and kerning information. This option creates a larger SWF file, because font outlines are embedded. For legibility, use 10-point or larger type when specifying this option. Anti-Alias For Readability Uses the Flash text rendering engine to improve the legibility of fonts, particularly at small

sizes. This option creates a larger SWF file, because font outlines are embedded. To use this option, you must publish to Flash Player 8 or later. (Do not use this option if you intend to animate text; instead, use Anti-Alias For Animation.)

FLASH CS3 275
User Guide

Custom Anti-Alias Lets you modify the font’s properties. Use Sharpness to specify the smoothness of the transition

between the text edges and the background. Use Thickness to specify how thick the font anti-aliasing transition appears. (Larger values cause the characters to look thicker.) Specifying Custom Anti-Alias creates a larger SWF file, because font outlines are embedded. To use this option, you must publish to Flash Player 8 or later.
Upgrade content for Flash 8 or later anti-aliasing 1 Open a FLA file created for use with Macromedia Flash Player 7 or earlier. 2 In the Publish Settings dialog box (File > Publish Settings), select Flash Player 8 or Flash Player 9 from the Version

pop-up menu.
3 Select the text field to apply the Anti-Alias For Readability or Custom Anti-Alias option to. 4 In the Property inspector, select Anti-Alias For Readability or Custom Anti-Alias from the Font Rendering Method pop-up menu.

Make text selectable
Static horizontal text or dynamic text can be selectable by users viewing your Flash application. (Input text is selectable by default.) After selecting text, the user can copy, cut, and then paste the text into a new document.
1 Using the Text tool

, select the horizontal text that you want to make selectable.

2 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), select Static Text or Dynamic Text. 3 Click Selectable

.

Use device fonts
You can use generic device fonts in text.
1 Using the Selection tool, select one or more text fields. 2 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties), select Static Text from the pop-up menu. 3 In the Font pop-up menu, select a device font:
_sans a font similar to Helvetica or Arial. _serif A font similar to Times Roman. _typewriter A font similar to Courier.

See also
“Font outlines and device fonts” on page 262 “Masking device fonts” on page 263

276

Chapter 13: Creating multilanguage text
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional provides several features that enhance the work flow for authoring multiple language Unicode-based applications.

Creating multilanguage text
About multilanguage text
You can include multilanguage text in your document in the following ways:

• The Strings panel lets localizers edit strings in a central location in Flash or in external XML files with their
preferred software or translation memory. Flash supports multiline strings in both the Strings panel and the XML files.

• Select which character sets to embed in your applications, which limits the number of character glyphs in your
published SWF file and reduces its size.

• Use a Western-style keyboard to create text on the Stage in Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. • If you have Unicode fonts installed on your system, enter text directly into a text field. Because the fonts are not
embedded, your users must also have Unicode fonts. Other, less common methods of including multilingual text in your Flash documents include the following:

• Include an external text file in a dynamic or input text field by using the #include action. • Load external text or XML files into a Flash application at runtime by using the loadVariables or getURL
actions, or the LoadVars or XML objects.

• Enter Unicode escape characters in the string value for a dynamic or input text field variable. • Create an embedded font as a symbol in your Library.
For Unicode-encoded text to appear correctly, users must have access to fonts containing the glyphs (characters) used in that text. For a sample of multilingual content, see the Flash Samples page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_samples. Download and decompress the Samples zip file and navigate to the Text\MultilingualContent folder to access the sample.

See also
“Workflow for authoring multilanguage text with the Strings panel” on page 282 “Multilanguage text and ActionScript” on page 289 “Create multilanguage documents using the #include action” on page 289 “Use ActionScript to load external files” on page 289 “Creating multilanguage documents by using text variables” on page 290 “Non-Unicode external files” on page 280 “Embed and share fonts” on page 269

FLASH CS3 277
User Guide

About fonts for Unicode-encoded text
When you use external files that are Unicode encoded, your users must have access to fonts containing all the glyphs used in your text files. By default, Flash stores the names of fonts used in dynamic or input text files. During SWF file playback, Flash Player 7 (and earlier versions) looks for those fonts on the operating system running the player. If the text in a SWF file contains glyphs that the specified font does not support, both Flash Player 7 and Flash Player 8 attempt to locate a font on the user’s system that supports those glyphs. The player cannot always locate an appropriate font. This behavior depends on the fonts available on the user’s system, as well as on the operating system running Flash Player.

Embedded fonts for dynamic or input text fields
For dynamic or input text fields, embed fonts. However, some fonts, particularly those used for Asian languages, can add significantly to the SWF file size when embedded. With Flash, you can select ranges of fonts to embed. You can also embed fonts by creating a font symbol in the library.

See also
“Embed and share fonts” on page 269
Select and embed a range of fonts 1 On the Stage, select a dynamic or input text field, show the Property inspector (Window > Properties >

Properties), and click Embed.
2 Select the range of font sets to embed by doing any of the following:

• Click a character set in the Character Set text field. • Select multiple ranges by Shift-clicking the first and last fonts of a contiguous range of fonts, or by Control-clicking
(Windows) or Command-clicking (Macintosh) to select noncontiguous fonts, click Auto Fill, and then click OK. Note: Select only the font sets to embed, so you do not exceed the internal maximum number of glyphs for the authoring tool (approximately 65.500). Flash does not perform error-checking to confirm that the selected character set contains glyphs. During the publish or export procedure, only glyphs that are present in the font are embedded in the SWF file.
Embed font sets from text on the Stage 1 On the Stage, select a dynamic or input text field, show the Property inspector (Window > Properties >

Properties), and click Embed.
2 Select the character sets to embed and click AutoFill. Remove embedded font sets 1 On the Stage, select a dynamic or input text field, show the Property inspector (Window > Properties >

Properties), and click Embed.
2 Click Don’t Embed to remove all of the embedded fonts. 3 Click OK to close the dialog box, or select other fonts sets to embed in the SWF file.

FLASH CS3 278
User Guide

XML font embedding table
When you select ranges of fonts to embed, the list of selected fonts is stored and maintained as an external XML file and resides in the user configuration folder. It is named Unicode_Table.xml and contains the one-to-many relationship between a particular language and all the necessary Unicode glyph ranges as shown in the following Korean examples. The font set groupings are based on the Unicode Blocks as defined by the Unicode Consortium. To provide a simpler workflow, when you select a particular language, all related glyph ranges are embedded even if they are scattered into disjointed groupings. For example, if you select Korean, the following Unicode character ranges are embedded: 3131-318E Hangul symbols 3200-321C Hangul specials 3260-327B Hangul specials 327F-327F Korean symbol AC00-D7A3 Hangul symbols If you select Korean + CJK, a larger font set is embedded: 3131-318E Hangul symbols 3200-321C Hangul specials 3260-327B Hangul specials 327F-327F Korean symbol 4E00-9FA5 CJK symbols AC00-D7A3 Hangul symbols F900-FA2D CJK symbols The following table gives more details about the font selections for embedded fonts:
Range Uppercase [A–Z] Lowercase [a–z] Numerals [0–9] Punctuation [!@#%...] Basic Latin Description Basic Latin uppercase glyphs Basic Latin lowercase glyphs Basic Latin numeral glyphs Basic Latin punctuation Basic Latin glyphs within the Unicode range 0x0021 to 0x007E Hiragana and Katakana glyphs (including half-width forms) Japanese Kanji characters Japanese Kana and Kanji (including punctuation and special characters)

Japanese Kana

Japanese Kanji – Level 1 Japanese (All)

FLASH CS3 279
User Guide

Range Basic Hangul

Description Most commonly used Korean characters, Roman characters, punctuations, and special characters/symbols 11,720 Korean characters (sorted by Hangul syllables), Roman characters, punctuations, and special characters/symbols) 5000 most commonly used Traditional Chinese characters used in Taiwan All Traditional Chinese characters used in Taiwan and Hong Kong, and punctuations 6000 most commonly used Simplified Chinese characters used in mainland of China and punctuations All Traditional and Simplified Chinese characters and punctuations All Thai glyphs All Devanagari glyphs Latin-1 Supplement range 0x00A1 to 0x00FF (including punctuation, superscripts and subscripts, currency symbols, and letter-like symbols) Latin Extended-A range 0x0100 to 0x01FF (including punctuation, superscripts and subscripts, currency symbols, and letter-like symbols) Latin Extended-B range 0x0180 to 0x024F (including punctuation, superscripts and subscripts, currency symbols, and letter-like symbols) Latin Extended Additional range 0x1E00 to 0x1EFF (including punctuation, superscripts and subscripts, currency symbols, and letter-like symbols) Greek and Coptic, plus Greek Extended (including punctuation, superscripts and subscripts, currency symbols, and letter-like symbols) Cyrillic (including punctuation, superscripts and subscripts, currency symbols, and letter-like symbols) Armenian plus ligatures Arabic plus Presentation Forms-A and Presentation Forms-B Hebrew plus Presentation Forms (including punctuation, superscripts and subscripts, currency symbols, and letter-like symbols)

Hangul (All)

Traditional Chinese – Level 1

Traditional Chinese (All)

Simplified Chinese – Level 1

Chinese (All)

Thai Devanagari Latin I

Latin Extended A

Latin Extended B

Latin Extended Add'l

Greek

Cyrillic

Armenian Arabic

Hebrew

FLASH CS3 280
User Guide

Non-Unicode external files
If you load external text or XML files that are not Unicode-encoded into a Flash Player 7 application, the text in the external files does not appear correctly when Flash Player attempts to show them as Unicode. To tell Flash Player to use the traditional code page of the operating system that is running the player, add the following code as the first line of code in the first frame of the Flash application that is loading the data:
system.useCodepage = true;

Set the system.useCodepage property only once in a document; do not use it multiple times in a document to make the player interpret some external files as Unicode and some as other encoding, because this can yield unexpected results. If you set the system.useCodepage property to true, the traditional code page of the operating system running the player must include the glyphs used in your external text file for the text to appear. For example, if you load an external text file that contains Chinese characters, those characters do not appear on a system that uses the CP1252 code page, because that code page does not include Chinese characters. To ensure that users on all platforms can view external text files used in your Flash applications, encode all external text files as Unicode and leave the system.useCodepage property set to false by default. This causes Flash Player to interpret the text as Unicode. For more information, see useCodepage (System.useCodepage property) in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference.

Enter Asian characters on a Western keyboard
With Flash, you can use Input Method Editors (IMEs) and standard Western keyboards to enter Asian characters on the Stage. Flash supports more than two dozen IMEs. For example, to create a website that reaches a broad range of Asian viewers, you can use a standard Western (QWERTY) keyboard and change the IME to create text in Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. Note: This feature affects only text input on the Stage, not text entered in the Actions panel. This feature is available for all supported Windows operating systems and Mac OS X.
1 Select Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Flash > Preferences (Macintosh), and click Text in the Category list. 2 Under Input Method, select one of the options to input characters from a Western keyboard. The default is Chinese and Japanese and it should also be selected for Western languages.

Encoding text formats
Text encoding
All text in a computer is encoded as a series of bytes. Many different forms of encoding (and therefore, different bytes) represent text. Different kinds of operating systems use different kinds of encoding for text. For example, Western Windows operating systems usually use CP1252 encoding; Western Macintosh operating systems usually use MacRoman encoding; Japanese Windows and Macintosh systems usually use Unicode encoding. Unicode can encode most languages and characters used throughout the world. The other forms of text encoding that computers use are subsets of the Unicode format, tailored to specific regions of the world. Some of these forms are compatible in some areas and incompatible in other areas, so using the correct encoding is critical. Unicode has several forms. Flash Player versions 6 and 7 and later support text or external files in the 8-bit Unicode format UTF-8, and in the 16-bit Unicode formats UTF-16 BE (Big Endian) and UTF-16 LE (Little Endian).

FLASH CS3 281
User Guide

Unicode and Flash Player
Flash Player 6 and later versions support Unicode text encoding. Users with Flash Player 6 or later can view multilanguage text, regardless of the language that the operating system running the player uses, if they have the correct fonts installed. Flash Player assumes that all external text files associated with a Flash Player application are Unicode encoded, unless you tell the player otherwise. For Flash applications in Flash Player 5 or earlier that are authored in Flash MX or earlier, Flash Player 6 and earlier versions display the text by using the traditional code page of the operating system running the player. For background information on Unicode, see Unicode.org.
Text encoding in Flash Player

By default, Flash Player 7 and later assumes that all text it encounters is Unicode encoded. If your document loads external text or XML files, the text in these files should be UTF-8 encoded. Create these files by using the Strings panel or using a text or HTML editor that can save the files in Unicode format.
Unicode encoding formats that Flash Player supports

When reading text data in Flash, Flash Player looks at the first two bytes in the file to detect a byte order mark (BOM), a standard formatting convention used to identify the Unicode encoding format. If no BOM is detected, the text encoding is interpreted as UTF-8 (an 8-bit encoding format). It is recommended that you use UTF-8 encoding in your applications. If Flash Player detects either of the following BOMs, the text encoding format is interpreted as follows:

• If the first byte of the file is OxFE and the second is OxFF, the encoding is interpreted as UTF-16 BE (Big Endian).
This is used for Macintosh operating systems.

• If the first byte of the file is OxFF and the second is OxFE, the encoding is interpreted as UTF-16 LE (Little
Endian). This is used for Windows operating systems. Most text editors that can save files in UTF-16BE or LE automatically add the BOMs to the files. Note: If you set the system.useCodepage property to true, the text is interpreted using the traditional code page of the operating system that is running the player; it is not interpreted as Unicode.
Encoding in external XML files

You cannot change the encoding of an XML file by changing the encoding tag. Flash Player identifies the encoding of an external XML file using the same rules as for all external files. If no BOM is encountered at the beginning of the file, the file is assumed to be in UTF-8 encoding. If a BOM is encountered, the file is interpreted as UTF-16BE or LE.

See also
“Non-Unicode external files” on page 280

FLASH CS3 282
User Guide

Authoring multilanguage text
Workflow for authoring multilanguage text with the Strings panel
The Strings panel lets you create and update multilingual content. You can specify content for text fields that span multiple languages, and have Flash automatically determine the content that should appear in a certain language based on the language of the computer running Flash Player. The following steps describe the general work flow:
1. Author a FLA file in one language.

Any text to enter in another language must be in a dynamic or input text field.
2. In the Strings Panel Settings dialog box, select the languages to include and designate one of them as the default language.

A column for the language is added to the Strings panel. When you save, test, or publish the application, a folder with an XML file is created for each language.
3. In the Strings panel, encode each text string with an ID. 4. Publish the application.

A folder is created for each language you select, and within each language folder is an XML file for that language.
5. Send the published FLA file and XML folders and files to your translators.

Author in your native language and let the translators make the translation. They can use translation software directly in the XML files or in the FLA file.
6. When you receive the translations from your translators, import the translated XML files back into the FLA file.

Select and remove languages for translation
As many as 100 languages can appear on the Stage and in the Strings panel for translation. Each language you select becomes a column in the Strings panel. To show the text on the Stage in any of the languages you selected, change the Stage language. The selected language appears when you publish or test the file. When selecting languages, use any of the languages provided in the menu, as well as any other Unicode-supported language.

See also
“Publishing overview” on page 419
Select a language 1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings, and click Settings. 2 Add a language by doing one of the following:

• In the Languages box, highlight a language to select, and click Add.

FLASH CS3 283
User Guide

• If the language does not appear in the Languages box, in the blank field below the Languages box, type a language
code in the format xx. (The language code is from ISO 639-1.) Click Add.
3 Repeat step 3 until you have added all the necessary languages. 4 Select a default language from the Default runtime language menu. This language appears on systems that do not have one of the active languages you selected. 5 To load an XML file for the languages from a different URL at runtime, type the URL in the URL text field and click OK.

A column for each selected language appears in the Strings panel. The columns appear in alphabetical order.
6 Save the FLA file. When you save the FLA file, a folder for each language you selected is created in the same folder indicated in the SWF publish path. If no SWF publish path has been selected, it is created in the folder the FLA file resides in. Within each language file an XML file is created that is used to load translated text. Remove a language 1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings, and click Settings. 2 In the Active languages field, highlight a language and click Remove. 3 Repeat step 3 until you have removed all the unwanted languages. 4 When you finish removing languages, click OK.

The column for each removed language no longer appears in the Strings panel. Note: When you remove a language from the Strings panel, the language XML file is not deleted from the local file system. This lets you add the language back into the Strings panel by using the previous XML file, and prevents accidental deletion. To completely remove the language, you must delete or replace the language XML file.

Add strings to the Strings panel
Assign text strings to the Strings panel in the following ways:

• Assign a string ID to a dynamic or input text field • Add a string to the Strings panel without assigning it to a text field • Assign an existing string ID to an existing dynamic or input text field

See also
“Creating text” on page 265
Assign a string ID to a text field 1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings. 2 Select the Text tool. On the Stage, create an input or dynamic text field. 3 While the text field is selected, type a unique ID in the ID field in the Strings panel. 4 Click the Settings button and select a language or languages from the list in the Settings dialog box. The languages you select should include the default language you wish to use and any other languages in which you plan to publish your work. 5 Click Apply.

FLASH CS3 284
User Guide

Note: If a static text field is selected on the Stage, the Stage text selection section on the Strings panel displays the message “Static text cannot have an ID associated with it.” If a nontext item is selected or multiple items are selected, the message “Current selection cannot have an ID associated with it” appears.
Add a string ID to the Strings panel without assigning it to a text field 1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings. 2 Click the Settings button and select a language or languages from the list in the Settings dialog box. The languages

you select should include the default language you wish to use and any other languages in which you plan to publish your work.
3 Type a new string ID and new string in the Strings panel, and click Apply. Assign an existing ID to a text field 1 Select the Text tool. On the Stage, create an input or dynamic text field. 2 Type the name of an existing ID in the ID section of the Strings panel, and click Apply.

Note: Press Shift+Enter to apply the ID to the text field, or Enter if the focus is on the ID field.

Change the language displayed on the Stage
1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings. 2 In the Stage Language menu, select the language to use for the Stage language. This must be a language you added as an available language.

After you change the Stage language, any new text you type on the Stage appears in that language. If you previously entered text strings for the language in the Strings panel, any text on the Stage appears in the selected language. If not, the text fields already on the Stage are blank.

Editing strings in the Strings panel
After you enter text strings in the Strings panel, use one of the following methods to edit the text strings:

• Directly in the Strings panel cells. • On the Stage in the language selected as the Stage language, using features such as find and replace and spelling
checking. Text that you change using these features is changed on the Stage and in the Strings panel.

• Edit the XML file directly.

See also
“Translate text in the Strings panel or an XML file” on page 288 “Find and Replace” on page 77 “Check spelling” on page 268

FLASH CS3 285
User Guide

Publishing multilanguage FLA files
When you save, publish, or test the FLA file, a folder with an XML file is created for each available language you selected in the Strings panel. The default location for the XML folders and files is the same folder indicated as the SWF publish path. If no SWF publish path was selected, the XML folder and files are saved in the folder in which the FLA file is located. For example, if you have a file named Test in the mystuff folder, and you selected English (en), German (de), and Spanish (es) as active languages, and you did not select a SWF publish path, when you save the FLA file, the following folder structure is created:
\mystuff\Test.fla \mystuff\de\Test_de.xml \mystuff\en\Test_en.xml \mystuff\es\Test_es.xml

When you start a SWF file, you also need to start the associated XML files with the string translations in the web server. The first frame that contains text cannot appear until the entire XML file is downloaded.

See also
“Publishing Flash documents” on page 419

Manually replace strings at publish time
Manually replace strings by using the Stage language when you publish your Flash SWF file. This method uses the Stage language to replace all instances of input and dynamic text with an associated string ID. In this case, text strings are only updated when you publish the SWF file; language detection is not automatic, and you must publish a SWF file for each language to support.
1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings, and click Settings. 2 Select the Replace Strings Automatically At Runtime check box.

Use automatic language detection with the default language
You can change the default runtime language to any language that you selected as an available language. When automatic language detection is on, and you view the SWF file on the system that uses the language, any system that is set to a language other than one of the active languages uses the default language. For example, if you set your default language to English and you select ja, en, and fr as active languages, users who have their system language set to Japanese, English, or French automatically see text strings in their chosen language. However, users who have their system language set to Swedish, which is not one of the selected languages, automatically see text strings in the default language you selected—in this case, English.
1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings, and click Settings. 2 In the Default language menu, select the default language. This must be a language you added as an available language. 3 To enable automatic language detection, select Replace Strings Automatically At Runtime, and click OK. 4 Flash generates the following ActionScript™, which stores the language XML file paths. Use this code as a starting point for your own language detection script.
import mx.lang.Locale; Locale.setFlaName("<flaFileName>"); Locale.setDefaultLang("langcode"); Locale.addXMLPath("langcode", "url/langcode/flaname_langcode.xml");

FLASH CS3 286
User Guide

Note: The ActionScript code that the Strings panel generates does not use the Locale.initialize function. Decide how to call this function based on the language detection customizations your project requires.

Use custom language detection
To access the language XML files to control text replacement at a time that you designate, create your own custom component or use ActionScript code. For example, you might create a pop-up menu that lets users select a language for viewing content. For information on writing ActionScript code to create custom language detection, see About the Strings panel in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash.
1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings, and click Settings. 2 In the Default Language menu, select the default language.

This must be a language you added as an available language.
3 Select the Replace Strings Via ActionScript check box, and click OK.

Flash generates the following ActionScript code, which stores the language XML file paths. Use this code as a starting point for your own language detection script.
import mx.lang.Locale; Locale.setFlaName("<flaFileName>"); Locale.setDefaultLang("langcode"); Locale.addXMLPath("langcode", "url/langcode/flaname_langcode.xml");

Note: The ActionScript that the Strings panel generates does not use the Locale.initialize function. Decide how to call this function based on the language detection customizations your project requires.

XML file format
About the XML file format
Exported XML is in UTF-8 format and follows the XML Localization Interchange File Format (XLIFF)1.0 standard. It defines a specification for an extensible localization interchange format that lets any software provider produce a single interchange format that can be delivered to, and understood by, any localization service provider. For more information about XLIFF, see www.oasis-open.org/committees/xliff/.

XLIFF examples
If any of the following characters are entered in the Strings panel, they are replaced by the appropriate entity reference when written to XML files:
Character & ' " < > Replaced by &amp; &apos; &quot; &lt; &gt;

FLASH CS3 287
User Guide

Exported XML file sample
The following examples show what an XML file that the Strings panel generates looks like in the source language— in this example, English—and in another language—in this example, French:
English source version sample
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!DOCTYPE xliff PUBLIC "-//XLIFF//DTD XLIFF//EN" "http://www.oasis-open.org/committees/xliff/documents/xliff.dtd" > <xliff version="1.0" xml:lang="en"> <file datatype="plaintext" original="MultiLingualContent.fla" source-language="EN"> <header></header> <body> <trans-unit id="001" resname="IDS_GREETINGS"> <source>welcome to our web site!</source> </trans-unit> <trans-unit id="002" resname="IDS_MAILING LIST"> <source>Would you like to be on our mailing list?</source> </trans-unit> <trans-unit id="003" resname="IDS_SEE YOU"> <source>see you soon!</source> </trans-unit> <trans-unit id="004" resname="IDS_TEST"> <source></source> </trans-unit> </body> </file> </xliff>

French version sample
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> <!DOCTYPE xliff PUBLIC "-//XLIFF//DTD XLIFF//EN" "http://www.oasis-open.org/committees/xliff/documents/xliff.dtd" > <xliff version="1.0" xml:lang="fr"> <file datatype="plaintext" original="MultiLingualContent.fla" source-language="EN"> <header></header> <body> <trans-unit id="001" resname="IDS_GREETINGS"> <source>Bienvenue sur notre site web!</source> </trans-unit> <trans-unit id="002" resname="IDS_MAILING LIST"> <source>Voudriez-vous être sur notre liste de diffusion?</source> </trans-unit> <trans-unit id="003" resname="IDS_SEE YOU"> <source>A bientôt!</source> </trans-unit> <trans-unit id="004" resname="IDS_TEST"> <source></source> </trans-unit> </body> </file> </xliff>

FLASH CS3 288
User Guide

Translate text in the Strings panel or an XML file
When sending files to translators, include not only the FLA file but also the folders for the XML files and the XML file for each language. Translators can either work directly in the language columns in the Strings panel or work in the XML files for each language to translate the FLA file to selected languages. If you translate directly in the XML file, you must either import the XML file to the Strings panel or save it in the default directory for that language.
Translate text in the Strings panel 1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings. 2 For each language to be translated, select the appropriate language column, then type the translated text for that language to be associated with each string ID. 3 To show the text on the Stage in the language you selected, select the language in the Stage Language field. 4 When you are finished, save, publish, or test the file.

All XML files for all languages are overwritten with the information in the Strings panel. Note: To preserve the translation in an XML file, save it in a different folder.
Translate text in an XML file 1 Using an XML file editor or translating software, open the folder for the desired language, then the XML file for

that language. The XML file is populated with the IDs for each text string.
2 Enter the text string for the language next to the ID. 3 If necessary, import the translated XML file into the Strings panel.

Import an XML file into the Strings panel
After you modify an XML file, if you place it in the folder specified in the Strings panel for that language, the XML file is loaded into the Flash document (FLA file) when it opens. Regardless of where the XML file you imported was located, when you save, test, or publish the FLA file, a folder for each language in the Strings panel and an XML file for each language are created in the location indicated for publishing SWF files. If no publish path is indicated, the folder and file are saved in the same folder in which the FLA file is located. The XML files that the Strings panel generates are always populated with the information in the Strings panel. Alternatively, import an XML file into the Strings panel from another location. After you import it, when you save, test, or publish the file, the XML file in the folder specified for that language is overwritten. You cannot import an XML file for a language unless it is already selected as an available language in the Strings panel. You can also add a language and import an XML file with the translation for that language.
1 Select Window > Other Panels > Strings, and click Import XML. 2 In the Select a Language menu, select the language of the XML file you are importing, and click OK. 3 Navigate to the folder and XML file to import.

The XML information is loaded into the column in the Strings panel for the language you selected in step 3. Note: Select the same language in steps 2 and 3. Otherwise, you could, for example, import a French XML file into the column for German.

FLASH CS3 289
User Guide

See also
“Publishing overview” on page 419

Multilanguage text and ActionScript
Use ActionScript to load external files
To load existing XML data, or use a different format for the XML file, use the loadVariables action, the getURL action, the LoadVars object, or the XML object to create a document that contains multilanguage text by placing the text in an external text or XML file and loading the file into the movie clip at runtime. Save the external file in UTF-8 (recommended), UTF-16BE, or UTF-16LE format, using an application that supports the format. If you are using UTF-16BE or UTF-16LE format, the file must begin with a BOM to identify the encoding format to Flash Player. The following table lists the BOM to include to identify the encoding: Note: Most text editors that can save files in UTF-16BE or LE automatically add the BOMs to the files.
UTF Format UTF-16BE UTF-16LE First Byte OxFE OxFF Second Byte OxFF OxFE

Note: If the external file is an XML file, you cannot use an XML encoding tag to change the file encoding. Save the file in a supported Unicode format.
1 In the Flash authoring application, create a dynamic or input text field to show the text in the document. 2 In the Property inspector, with the text field selected, assign an instance name to the text field. 3 Outside of Flash, create a text or XML file that defines the value for the text field variable. 4 Save the XML file in UTF-8 (recommended), UTF-16BE, or UTF-16LE format. 5 Use one of the following ActionScript procedures to reference the external file and load it into the dynamic or input text field:

• Use the loadVariables action to load an external file. • Use the getURL action to load an external file from a specified URL. • Use the LoadVars object (a predefined client-server object) to load an external text file from a specified URL. • Use the XML object (a predefined client-server object) to load an external XML file from a specified URL. For more
information, see XML in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference.

See also
“Using the XMLConnector component to connect to external XML files” on page 291 “Unicode and Flash Player” on page 281 “Working with text” on page 261

Create multilanguage documents using the #include action
To create a document that contains multiple languages, use the #include action.

FLASH CS3 290
User Guide

Use an application that supports UTF-8 encoding, such as Dreamweaver, to save the text file in UTF-8 format. To identify the file as Unicode to the Flash authoring tool, include the following header as the first line of the file:
//!-- UTF8

Note: Include a space after the second dash (-). By default, the Flash authoring application assumes that external files that use the #include action are encoded in the traditional code page of the operating system running the authoring tool. Using the //!-- UTF8 header in a file tells the authoring tool that the external file is encoded as UTF-8.
1 In the Flash authoring tool, create a dynamic or input text field to display the text in the document. 2 In the Property inspector, with the text field selected, assign an instance name to the text field. 3 Outside of Flash, create a text file that defines the value for the text field variable. Add the //!-- UTF8 header at

the beginning of the file.
4 Save the text file in UTF-8 format. 5 To include the external file in the dynamic or input text field, use the #include directive. For more information,

see #include directive in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference.

See also
“Working with text” on page 261

Creating multilanguage documents by using text variables
To include Unicode-encoded contents in text variables, use the syntax \uXXXX, where XXXX is the four-digit hexadecimal code point, or escape character, for the Unicode character. The Flash authoring tool supports Unicode escape characters through \uFFFF. To find the code points for Unicode characters, see the Unicode Standard at Unicode.org. You can use Unicode escape characters only in text field variables. You cannot include Unicode escape characters in external text or XML files; Flash Player 6 does not recognize Unicode escape characters in external files. For example, to set a dynamic text field (with the myTextVar instance name) that contains Japanese, Korean, Chinese, English, and Greek characters and the Euro sign, enter the following:
myTextVar.text = "\u304B\uD55C\u6C49hello\u03BB\u20AC";

When the SWF file plays, the following characters appear in the text field:

For best results when creating a text field that contains multiple languages, use a font that includes all the glyphs your text needs.

See also
“Non-Unicode external files” on page 280

FLASH CS3 291
User Guide

Using the XMLConnector component to connect to external XML files
Use the version 2 XMLConnector component to connect to an external XML document to bind to properties in the document. Its purpose is to read or write XML documents by using HTTP GET operations, POST operations, or both. It acts as a connector between other components and external XML documents. The XMLConnector communicates with components in your application by using either data-binding features in the Flash authoring environment or ActionScript code. For more information, see “XMLConnector component” in the ActionScript 2.0 Components Language Reference.

292

Chapter 14: Working with sound
You can use sound in Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional in several different ways to make your work more interesting and involving. You can import sounds and edit them after they are imported. You can attach sounds to different kinds of objects and trigger them in different ways, depending on your desired effect.

Using sounds in Flash
About sounds and Flash
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional offers several ways to use sound. Make sounds that play continuously, independent of the Timeline, or use the Timeline to synchronize animation to a sound track. Add sounds to buttons to make them more interactive, and make sounds fade in and out for a more polished sound track. There are two types of sounds in Flash: event sounds and stream sounds. An event sound must download completely before it begins playing, and it continues playing until explicitly stopped. Stream sounds begin playing as soon as enough data for the first few frames has been downloaded; stream sounds are synchronized to the Timeline for playing on a website. If you’re creating Flash content for mobile devices, Flash also lets you include device sounds in your published SWF file. Device sounds are encoded in the device’s natively supported audio format, such as MIDI, MFi, or SMAF. You can use shared libraries to link a sound to multiple documents. You can also use the ActionScript™ 2.0 onSoundComplete event to trigger an event based on the completion of a sound. You can load sounds and control sound playback using prewritten behaviors or media components; the latter also provide a controller for stop, pause, rewind, and so on. You can also use ActionScript 2.0 or 3.0 to load sounds dynamically. For more information, see attachSound (Sound.attachSound method) and loadSound (Sound.loadSound
method)in ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference or Sound class in ActionScript 3.0 Language and Components

Reference.

See also
“Using shared library assets” on page 219

Importing sounds
You place sound files into Flash by importing them into the library for the current document. You can import the following sound file formats into Flash:

• WAV (Windows only) • AIFF (Macintosh only) • mp3 (Windows or Macintosh)
If you have QuickTime 4 or later installed on your system, you can import these additional sound file formats:

• AIFF (Windows or Macintosh)

FLASH CS3 293
User Guide

• Sound Designer II (Macintosh only) • Sound Only QuickTime Movies (Windows or Macintosh) • Sun AU (Windows or Macintosh) • System 7 Sounds (Macintosh only) • WAV (Windows or Macintosh)
Flash stores sounds in the library along with bitmaps and symbols. You need only one copy of a sound file to use that sound multiple ways in your document. If you want to share sounds among Flash documents, you can include the sounds in shared libraries. Sounds can use large amounts of disk space and RAM. However, mp3 sound data is compressed and smaller than WAV or AIFF sound data. Generally, when using WAV or AIFF files, it’s best to use 16-22 kHz mono sounds (stereo uses twice as much data as mono), but Flash can import either 8- or 16-bit sounds at sample rates of 11, 22, or 44 kHz. Sounds recorded in formats that are not multiples of 11 kHz (such as 8, 32, or 96 kHz) are resampled when imported into Flash. Flash can convert sounds to lower sample rates on export. If you want to add effects to sounds in Flash, it’s best to import 16-bit sounds. If you have limited RAM, keep your sound clips short or work with 8-bit sounds instead of 16-bit sounds.

See also
“Work with common libraries” on page 69

Import a sound
1 Select File > Import > Import To Library. 2 In the Import dialog box, locate and open the desired sound file.

Note: You can also drag a sound from a common library into the library for the current document.

Add a sound to the Timeline
You can add a sound to a document using the library, or you can load a sound into a SWF file during runtime, using the loadSound method of the Sound object. For more information, see loadSound (Sound.loadSound method) in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference or Sound Class in the ActionScript 3.0 Language and Components Reference.
1 Import the sound into the library if it has not already been imported. 2 Select Insert > Timeline > Layer. 3 With the new sound layer selected, drag the sound from the Library panel onto the Stage. The sound is added to

the current layer. You can place multiple sounds on one layer or on layers containing other objects. However, it is recommended that each sound be placed on a separate layer. Each layer acts as a separate sound channel. The sounds on all layers are combined when you play the SWF file.
4 In the Timeline, select the first frame that contains the sound file. 5 Select Window > Properties > Properties, and click the arrow in the lower-right corner to expand the Property inspector. 6 In the Property inspector, select the sound file from the Sound pop-up menu.

FLASH CS3 294
User Guide

7 Select an effect option from the Effects pop-up menu:
None Applies no effects to the sound file. Select this option to remove previously applied effects. Left Channel/Right Channel Plays sound in the left or right channel only. Fade Left To Right/Fade Right To Left Shifts the sound from one channel to the other. Fade In Gradually increases the volume of a sound over its duration. Fade Out Gradually decreases the volume of a sound over its duration. Custom Lets you create custom in and out points of sound using the Edit Envelope.

8 Select a synchronization option from the Sync pop-up menu:

Note: If you are placing the sound on a frame other than Frame 1 in the main Timeline, select the Stop option.
Event Synchronizes the sound to the occurrence of an event. An event sound, such as a sound that plays when a user

clicks a button, plays when its starting keyframe first appears and plays in its entirety, independently of the Timeline, even if the SWF file stops playing. Event sounds are mixed when you play your published SWF file. If an event sound is playing and the sound is instantiated again (for example, by the user clicking the button again), the first instance of the sound continues to play and another instance begins to play simultaneously.
Start The same as Event, except that if the sound is already playing, no new instance of the sound plays. Stop Silences the specified sound. Stream Synchronizes the sound for playing on a website. Flash forces animation to keep pace with stream sounds.

If Flash can’t draw animation frames quickly enough, it skips frames. Unlike event sounds, stream sounds stop if the SWF file stops playing. Also, a stream sound can never play longer than the length of the frames it occupies. Stream sounds are mixed when you publish your SWF file. An example of a stream sound is the voice of a character in an animation that plays in multiple frames. Note: If you use an mp3 sound as a stream sound, you must recompress the sound for export. You can export the sound as an mp3 file, with the same compression settings that it had on import.
9 Enter a value for Repeat to specify the number of times the sound should loop, or select Loop to repeat the sound continuously.

For continuous play, enter a number large enough to play the sound for an extended duration. For example, to loop a 15-second sound for 15 minutes, enter 60. Looping stream sounds is not recommended. If a stream sound is set to loop, frames are added to the file and the file size is increased by the number of times the sound is looped.
10 To test the sound, drag the playhead over the frames containing the sound or use commands in the Controller

or the Control menu.

Synchronize a sound with animation
To synchronize a sound with animation, you start and stop the sound at keyframes.
1 Add a sound to a document. 2 To synchronize this sound with an event in the scene, select a beginning keyframe that corresponds to the keyframe of the event in the scene. You can select any of the synchronization options. 3 Create a keyframe in the sound layer’s Timeline at the frame where you want the sound to end. A representation of the sound file appears in the Timeline.

FLASH CS3 295
User Guide

4 Select Window > Properties > Properties, and click the arrow in the lower right-corner to expand the Property inspector. 5 In the Property inspector, select the same sound from the Sound pop-up menu. 6 Select Stop from the Sync pop-up menu.

When you play the SWF file, the sound stops playing when it reaches the ending keyframe.
7 To play back the sound, simply move the playhead.

Add a sound to a button
You can associate sounds with the different states of a button symbol. Because the sounds are stored with the symbol, they work for all instances of the symbol.
1 Select the button in the Library panel. 2 Select Edit from the Panel menu in the upper-right corner of the panel. 3 In the button’s Timeline, add a layer for sound (Insert > Timeline > Layer). 4 In the sound layer, create a regular or blank keyframe to correspond with the button state to which you want to add a sound (Insert > Timeline > Keyframe or Insert > Timeline > Blank Keyframe).

For example, to add a sound that plays when you click the button, create a keyframe in the frame labeled Down.
5 Click the keyframe you created. 6 Select Window > Properties > Properties. 7 In the Property inspector, select a sound file from the Sound pop-up menu. 8 Select Event from the Sync pop-up menu.

To associate a different sound with each of the button’s keyframes, create a blank keyframe and add another sound file for each keyframe. You can also use the same sound file and apply a different sound effect for each button keyframe.

Edit a sound
You can define the starting point of a sound or to control the volume of the sound as it plays. You can also change the point at which a sound starts and stops playing. This is useful for making sound files smaller by removing unused sections.
1 Add a sound to a frame, or select a frame that already contains a sound. 2 Select Window > Properties > Properties. 3 Click the Edit button on the right side of the Property inspector. 4 Do any of the following:

• To change the start and end points of a sound, drag the Time In and Time Out controls in the Edit Envelope. • To change the sound envelope, drag the envelope handles to change levels at different points in the sound.
Envelope lines show the volume of the sound as it plays. To create additional envelope handles (up to eight total), click the envelope lines. To remove an envelope handle, drag it out of the window.

• To display more or less of the sound in the window, click the Zoom In or Out buttons. • To switch the time units between seconds and frames, click the Seconds and Frames buttons.
5 To hear the edited sound, click the Play button.

FLASH CS3 296
User Guide

Using sounds in Flash Lite
Adobe® Flash® Lite supports two types of sound: standard Flash sounds, like those used in Flash desktop applications, and device sounds. Flash Lite 1.0 supports device sounds only; Flash Lite 1.1 and 2.x support both standard sounds and device sounds. Device sounds are stored in the published SWF file in their native audio format (such as MIDI or MFi); during playback, Flash Lite passes the sound data to the device, which decodes and plays the sound. Because you can’t import most device audio formats into Flash, you instead import a proxy sound in a supported format (such as mp3 or AIFF) that is replaced with an external device sound that you specify. You can use device sounds only as event sounds—you can’t synchronize device sounds with the Timeline, as you can with standard sounds. Flash Lite 1.0 and Flash Lite 1.1 do not support the following features available in the desktop version of Flash® Player:

• The ActionScript Sound object • Loading of external mp3 files • The Speech Audio Compression option
For more information, see “Working with Sound, Video, and Images” in Developing Flash Lite 2.x Applications or “Working with Sound” in Developing Flash Lite 1.x Applications.

Exporting Sounds
Compressing sounds for export
You can select compression options for individual event sounds and export the sounds with those settings. You can also select compression options for individual stream sounds. However, all stream sounds in a document are exported as a single stream file, using the highest setting of all those applied to individual stream sounds. This includes stream sounds in video objects. If you select global compression settings for event sounds or stream sounds in the Publish Settings dialog box, these settings are applied to individual event sounds or all stream sounds if you do not select compression settings for the sounds in the Sound Properties dialog box. You can also override export settings specified in the Sound Properties dialog box by selecting Override Sound Settings in the Publish Settings dialog box. This option is useful if you want to create a larger high-fidelity audio file for local use and a smaller low-fidelity version for the web. The sampling rate and degree of compression make a significant difference in the quality and size of sounds in exported SWF files. The more you compress a sound and the lower the sampling rate, the smaller the size and the lower the quality. You should experiment to find the optimal balance between sound quality and file size. When working with imported mp3 files, you can export the files in mp3 format using the same settings that the files had when imported. Note: In Windows, you can also export all the sounds from a document as a WAV file using File > Export > Export Movie.

FLASH CS3 297
User Guide

See also
“Publishing overview” on page 419 “Set publish options for the Flash SWF file format” on page 421 “Exporting Flash content, images, and video” on page 448

Compress a sound for export
1 Do one of the following:

• Double-click the sound’s icon in the Library panel. • Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) a sound file in the Library panel and select Properties from
the context menu.

• Select a sound in the Library panel and select Properties from the Panel menu in the upper right corner of the
panel.

• Select a sound in the Library panel and click the Properties button at the bottom of the Library panel.
2 If the sound file has been edited externally, click Update. 3 For Compression, select Default, ADPCM, mp3, Raw, or Speech.

The Default compression option uses the global compression settings in the Publish Settings dialog box when you export your SWF file. If you select Default, no additional export settings are available.
4 Set export settings. 5 Click Test to play the sound once. Click Stop if you want to stop testing the sound before it finishes playing. 6 Adjust export settings if necessary until the desired sound quality is achieved, and then click OK. ADPCM and Raw compression options

ADPCM compression sets compression for 8- or 16-bit sound data. Use the ADPCM setting when you export short event sounds such as button clicks. Raw compression exports sounds with no sound compression.
Preprocessing Converts mixed stereo sounds to monaural (mono) when you select Convert Stereo To Mono (mono sounds are unaffected by this option). Sample Rate Controls sound fidelity and file size. Lower rates decrease file size but can also degrade sound quality.

Rate options are as follows:

• 5 kHz Barely acceptable for speech. • 11 kHz The lowest recommended quality for a short segment of music and one-quarter the standard CD rate. • 22 kHz A popular choice for web playback and half the standard CD rate. • 44 kHz The standard CD audio rate.
Note: Flash cannot increase the kHz rate of an imported sound above the rate at which it was imported.
mp3 compression options
MP3 Compression lets you export sounds with mp3 compression. Use mp3 when you are exporting longer stream sounds such as music sound tracks.

FLASH CS3 298
User Guide

If you are exporting a file that was imported in mp3 format, you can export the file using the same settings the file had when it was imported.
Use Imported mp3 Quality Default setting. Deselect to select other mp3 compression settings. Select to export an

imported mp3 file with the same settings the file had when it was imported.
Bit Rate Determines the bits per second in the exported sound file. Flash supports 8 through 160 Kbps CBR

(constant bit rate). When you export music, set the bit rate to 16 Kbps or higher for best results.
Preprocessing Converts mixed stereo sounds to monaural (mono sounds are unaffected by this option).

Note: The Preprocessing option is available only if you select a bit rate of 20 Kbps or higher.
Quality Determines the compression speed and sound quality:

• Fast Yields faster compression but lower sound quality. • Medium Yields somewhat slower compression but higher sound quality. • Best Yields the slowest compression and the highest sound quality.
Speech compression option

Speech compression exports sounds using a compression that is adapted to speech. Note: Flash Lite 1.0 and Flash Lite 1.1 do not support the Speech compression option. For content targeting those player versions, use mp3, ADPCM, or Raw compression.
Sample rate Controls sound fidelity and file size. A lower rate decreases file size but can also degrade sound quality.

Select from the following options:

• 5 kHz Acceptable for speech. • 11 kHz Recommended for speech. • 22 kHz Acceptable for most types of music on the web. • 44 kHz The standard CD audio rate. However, because compression is applied, the sound is not CD quality in the
SWF file.

Guidelines for exporting sound in Flash documents
Besides sampling rate and compression, there are several ways to use sound efficiently in a document and keep file size small:

• Set the in and out points to prevent silent areas from being stored in the Flash file and to reduce the size of the
sound.

• Get more out of the same sounds by applying different effects for sounds (such as volume envelopes, looping, and
in/out points) at different keyframes. You can get a number of sound effects using only one sound file.

• Loop short sounds for background music. • Do not set streaming sound to loop. • When exporting audio in embedded video clips, remember that the audio is exported using the global streaming
settings selected in the Publish Settings dialog box.

• Use stream synchronization to keep the animation synchronized to your sound track when you preview your
animation in the editor. If your computer is not fast enough to draw the animation frames so that they keep up with your sound track, Flash skips frames.

FLASH CS3 299
User Guide

• When exporting QuickTime movies, use as many sounds and channels as you want without worrying about file
size. The sounds are combined into a single sound track when you export as a QuickTime file. The number of sounds you use has no effect on the final file size.

Sound and ActionScript
Control sounds using behaviors
Using sound behaviors, prewritten ActionScript 2.0, you can add sounds to your document and control sound playback. Adding a sound using these behaviors creates an instance of the sound, which is then used to control the sound. Note: ActionScript 3.0 and Flash Lite 1.x and Flash Lite 2.x do not support behaviors.
Load a sound to a file using a behavior 1 Select the object, such as a button, that you want to use to trigger the behavior. 2 In the Behaviors panel (Window > Behaviors), click the Add (+) button and select Sound > Load Sound from Library or Sound > Load Streaming mp3 File. 3 In the Load Sound dialog box, enter the linkage identifier for a sound from the Library, or the sound location for a streaming mp3 file. Next, enter a name for this instance of the sound, and click OK. 4 In the Behaviors panel under event, click On Release (the default event), and select a mouse event from the menu. If you want to use the OnRelease event, do not change the option. Play or stop sounds using a behavior 1 Select the object, such as a button, that you want to use to trigger the behavior. 2 In the Behaviors panel (Window > Behaviors), click the Add (+) button. 3 Select Sound > Play Sound, Sound > Stop Sound, or Sound > Stop All Sounds. 4 In the dialog box that appears, do one of the following:

• Enter the linkage identifier and the instance name of the sound you want to play or stop, and click OK. • Click OK to verify that you want to stop all sounds.
5 In the Behaviors panel under Event, click On Release (the default event) and select a mouse event from the menu. If you want to use the OnRelease event, do not change the option.

Control sounds with the ActionScript 2.0 Sound object
Use the Sound object in ActionScript 2.0 to add sounds to a document and to control sound objects in a document, including adjusting the volume or the right and left balance while a sound plays. For more information, see Creating sound controls in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash.
1 Select the sound in the Library panel. 2 Select Linkage from the Panel menu in the upper-right corner of the panel, or right-click (Windows) or Controlclick (Macintosh) the sound name in the Library panel and select Linkage from the context menu. 3 Under Linkage in the Linkage Properties dialog box, select Export for ActionScript. 4 Enter an identifier string in the box, and click OK.

FLASH CS3 300
User Guide

Accessing ID3 properties in mp3 files with Flash Player
Macromedia Flash Player 7 from Adobe and later supports ID3 v2.4 and v2.4 tags. With this version, when you load an mp3 sound using the ActionScript 2.0 attachSound() or loadSound() method, the ID3 tag properties are available at the beginning of the sound data stream. The onID3 event executes when the ID3 data is initialized. Flash Player 6 (6.0.40.0) and later supports mp3 files with ID3 v1.0 and v1.1 tags. With ID3 v1.0 and v1.1 tags, the properties are available at the end of the data stream. If a sound does not contain an ID3v1 tag, the ID3 properties are undefined. Users must have Flash Player 6 (6.0.40.0) or later for the ID3 properties to function. For more information on using the ID3 properties, see id3 (Sound.id3 property) in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference.

About the ActionScript 2.0 onSoundComplete event
The onSoundComplete event of the ActionScript 2.0 Sound object lets you trigger an event in a Flash application based on completing an attached sound file. The Sound object is a built-in object that lets you control sounds in a Flash application. For more information, see Sound in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference. The onSoundComplete event of a Sound object is invoked automatically when the attached sound file finishes playing. If the sound is looped a specified number of times, the event is triggered when the sound finishes looping. The Sound object has two properties that you can use with the onSoundComplete event. The duration property is a read-only property representing the duration, in milliseconds, of the sound sample attached to the sound object. The position property is a read-only property representing the number of milliseconds the sound has been playing in each loop. The onSoundComplete event lets you manipulate sounds in a many ways, such as the following:

• Creating a dynamic playlist or sequencer • Creating a multimedia presentation that checks for narration completion before advancing to the next frame or scene • Building a game that synchronizes sounds to particular events or scenes and transitions smoothly between
different sounds

• Timing an image change to a sound—for example, changing an image when a sound is halfway through at
playback time

301

Chapter 15: Working with video
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional is a powerful tool for incorporating video footage into web-based presentations. Flash Video offers technological and creative benefits that let you fuse video together with data, graphics, sound, and interactive control. Flash Video lets you easily put video on a web page in a format that almost anyone can view.

Creating and publishing Flash Video
About video features in Flash
How you choose to deploy your video determines how you create your video content, and how you integrate it for use with Flash. You can incorporate video into Flash in the following ways:
Streaming video content Lets you host video files using Flash Media Server, a server solution optimized to deliver

streaming, real-time media. Import video clips stored locally into your Flash documents, and later upload them to the server, to more easily assemble and develop Flash content. To control video playback and provide intuitive controls for users to interact with the video, use the new FLVPlayback component or ActionScript™. Host your own Flash Media Server, or use a hosted Flash Video Streaming Service (FVSS). Adobe has partnered with several content delivery network (CDN) providers to offer hosted services for delivering on-demand Flash Video across highperformance, reliable networks. Built with Flash Media Server and integrated directly into the delivery, tracking, and reporting infrastructure of the CDN network, FVSS provides the most effective way to deliver Flash Video to the largest possible audience without the hassle of setting up and maintaining your own streaming server hardware and network.
Progressively downloading video from a web server If you don’t have access to Flash Media Server or FVSS, you can still download video from an external source when you use progressive downloading. Progressively downloading a video clip from a web server doesn’t provide the same real-time performance that Flash Media Server does; however, you can use relatively large video clips, and keep the size of your published SWF files to a minimum. To control video playback and provide intuitive controls for users to interact with the video, use the new FLVPlayback component or ActionScript. Importing embedded video Import video clips into Flash as embedded files. An embedded video file becomes part of the Flash document. For this reason, you can only import short-duration video clips. Importing video in QuickTime format Import video clips in QuickTime format as linked files. Flash documents that

contain linked QuickTime video must be published in QuickTime format. A linked video file does not become part of the Flash document. Instead, the document maintains a pointer to the linked file.
Importing FLV files in the Library Import video clips in Flash Video (FLV) format from Adobe® directly into Flash.

When you import FLV files, you use the encoding options already applied to the files. You do not need to select encoding options during import. You can control the playback of video files in the following ways:
Using the FLVPlayback component Lets you quickly add a full-featured FLV or mp3 playback control to your Flash movie and provides support for both progressive downloading and streaming FLV files. FLVPlayback lets you easily create intuitive video controls for users to control video playback, and apply premade skins, or apply your own custom skins to the video interface.

FLASH CS3 302
User Guide

Controlling external video playback using ActionScript Play back external FLV files in a Flash document at runtime using the NetConnection and NetStream ActionScript objects.

You can use video behaviors (prewritten ActionScript scripts) to control video playback.
Controlling video playback in the Timeline To control video playback, write custom ActionScript.

For video tutorials about working with video in Flash, see the following:

• Using video in Flash: www.adobe.com/go/vid0136 • Using Flash Video Encoder: www.adobe.com/go/vid0138 • Creating content for Adobe After Effects: www.adobe.com/go/vid0139
For a text tutorial about using video in Flash, see Building a Video Player on the Flash Tutorials page at www.adobe.com/go/learn_fl_tutorials.

See also
“Import linked QuickTime video files” on page 308 “Importing and modifying Flash Video files” on page 302 “About the FLVPlayback component” on page 323 “Playing back external FLV files dynamically” on page 321 “Control video playback using behaviors” on page 323

Importing and modifying Flash Video files
Import Flash Video files into the library
To import files in the FLV format, use the Import or Import To Library commands or the Import button in the Video Properties dialog box. To create your own video player, which dynamically loads FLV files from an external source, place your video inside a movie clip symbol. When you load FLV files dynamically, adjust the dimensions of the movie clip to match the actual dimension of the FLV and scale the video by scaling the movie clip. Note: A best practice is to place video inside a movie clip instance, which gives you the most control over the content. The video’s Timeline plays independently from the main Timeline. You do not have to extend your main Timeline by many frames to accommodate the video, which can make working with your FLA file difficult.
❖ To import an FLV file into the Library, do one of the following:

• Select File > Import > Import To Library. • Select any existing video clip in the Library panel, and select Properties from the Library Panel menu. Click
Import. Locate the file to import, and click Open.

Controlling video playback using the Timeline
To control playback of an embedded or linked video file, control the Timeline that contains the video. For example, to pause a video playing on the main Timeline, you would call a stop() action that targets that Timeline. Similarly, you can control a video object in a movie clip symbol by controlling the playback of that symbol’s Timeline.

FLASH CS3 303
User Guide

You can apply the following actions to imported video objects in movie clips: goTo, play, stop, toggleHighQuality, stopAllSounds, getURL,FScommand, loadMovie, unloadMovie, ifFrameLoaded, and onMouseEvent. To apply actions to a Video object, first convert the Video object to a movie clip. To show a live video stream from a camera, use ActionScript. First, to place a Video object on the Stage, use the New Video Object in the Library panel. To attach the video stream to the Video object, use Video.attachVideo. See also Video and attachVideo (Video.attachVideo method) in the ActionScript 2.0 Language Reference, and fl.video in the ActionScript 3.0 Language Reference.

See also
“Playing back external FLV files dynamically” on page 321

About progressively downloading video
Progressive downloading lets you use ActionScript to load external FLV files into a SWF file, and play them back at runtime. To initiate playback of the FLV file, and to control the Play, Pause, and Seek behaviors, as well as the buffer time and size for a given video file, use the netConnection and netStream objects. Because the video content is kept external to the other Flash content and the video playback controls, it’s relatively easy to update video content without republishing the SWF file. Progressive downloading provides the following advantages over embedded video:

• During authoring, publish only the SWF interface to preview or test part or all of your Flash content. This results
in faster preview times and quicker turnaround on iterative experimentation.

• During delivery, video begins playing as soon as the first segment is downloaded and cached to the local
computer’s disk drive.

• At runtime, video files are loaded from the computer’s disk drive into the SWF file, with no limitation on file size
or duration. No audio synchronization issues or memory restrictions exist.

• The frame rate of the video file can be different from the frame rate of the SWF file, allowing for greater flexibility
in authoring your Flash content.

Streaming video using Flash Media Server
In streaming, each Flash client opens a persistent connection to the Flash Media Server, and a controlled relationship exists between the video being delivered and the client interaction. Flash Media Server uses bandwidth detection to deliver video or audio content based on the user’s available bandwidth. This lets you provide different content for users based on their ability to easily access and download content. For example, if a user with a dial-up modem accesses your video content, you can deliver an appropriately encoded file that doesn’t require too much bandwidth. Flash Media Server also provides you with quality of service metrics, detailed tracking and reporting statistics, and a range of interactive features designed to enhance the video experience. As with progressive downloading, the video content (FLV file) is kept external to the other Flash content and the video playback controls. This lets you easily add or change content without having to republish the SWF file. Streaming video with Flash Media Server or FVSS provides the following advantages over embedded and progressively downloaded video:

• Video playback starts sooner than it does using other methods of incorporating video. • Streaming uses less of the client's memory and disk space, because the clients don’t need to download the entire file.

FLASH CS3 304
User Guide

• Network resources are used more efficiently, because only the parts of the video that are viewed are sent to the
client.

• Delivery of media is more secure, because media is not saved to the client’s cache when streamed. • Streaming video provides better tracking, reporting, and logging ability. • Streaming lets you deliver live video and audio presentations, or capture video from a web cam or digital video
camera.

• Flash Media Server enables multiway and multiuser streaming for video chat, video messaging, and video conferencing applications.

• By using server-side scripting to control video and audio streams, you can create server-side play lists, synchronized streams, and more intelligent delivery options based on the client’s connection speed. To learn more about Flash Media Server, see: www.adobe.com/go/flash_media_server. To learn more about FVSS, see: www.adobe.com/go/fvss.

Embedding video in a SWF file
Embedded video lets you embed a video file within a SWF file. When you import video in this way, the video is placed in the Timeline where you can see the individual video frames represented in the Timeline frames. An embedded video file becomes part of the Flash document. When you create a SWF file with embedded video, the frame rate of the video clip and the SWF file must be the same. If you use different frame rates for the SWF file and the embedded video clip, playback is inconsistent. To use variable frame rates, import the video using either progressive download or Flash Media Server. When you import video files using either of these methods, the FLV files are self-contained and run at a frame rate separate from that of all other timeline frame rates included in the Flash SWF file. You can import video clips into Flash as embedded files in QuickTime video (MOV), Audio Video Interleaved file (AVI), Motion Picture Experts Group file (MPEG), or other formats, depending on your system. Embedded video works best for smaller video clips, with a playback time of less than 10 seconds. If you are using video clips with longer playback times, consider using progressively downloaded video, or streaming video using Flash Media Server. The limitations of embedded video include:

• You might encounter problems if the resulting SWF files become excessively large. Flash Player reserves a lot of
memory when downloading and attempting to play large SWF files with embedded video, which can cause Flash Player to fail.

• Longer video files (over 10 seconds long) often have synchronization issues between the video and audio portions
of a video clip. Over time, the audio track begins playing out of sequence with the video, causing a less than desirable viewing experience.

• To play a video embedded in a SWF file, the entire video file must be downloaded before the video starts to play.
If you embed an excessively large video file, it might take a long time for the SWF file to download in its entirety and for playback to start.

See also
“Supported file formats for video” on page 310

FLASH CS3 305
User Guide

About Linked QuickTime video
Using Flash, you can create QuickTime movies (MOV files) that can be played back by users who have the QuickTime plug-in installed on their computers. This is often done when people use Flash to create title sequences or animation for use as video content. The published QuickTime file can be distributed as a DVD, or incorporated into other applications such as Adobe® Director® or Adobe® Premiere Pro®. When you use Flash to create a QuickTime video clip, you can link to a QuickTime video from the Flash file rather than embed the video. A linked QuickTime video imported into Flash does not become part of the file. Instead, a pointer is maintained to the source file. If you are creating a QuickTime video using Flash, set your publish setting to Flash 3, 4, or 5. You cannot display a linked QuickTime video in SWF format. The QuickTime file contains a Flash track, but the linked video clip remains in QuickTime format. Note: Importing a video clip as linked QuickTime means that the resulting content can only be published as a QuickTime MOV file. You cannot publish content using a linked QuickTime video as a SWF file.

Change the properties of a video clip
To modify embedded and linked video clips, use the Property inspector and the Video Properties dialog box. In the Property inspector, you can change properties for an instance of an embedded or linked video clip on the Stage, assign the instance an instance name, and change its width, height, and position on the Stage. You can also swap an instance of a video clip—assign a different symbol to an instance of a video clip. Assigning a different symbol to an instance displays a different instance on the Stage but leaves all the other instance properties (such as dimensions and registration point) intact. In the Video Properties dialog box, you can do the following:

• View information about an imported video clip, including its name, path, creation date, pixel dimensions, length,
and file size

• Change the video clip name • Update the video clip if you modify it in an external editor • Import an FLV video to replace the selected clip • Export a video clip as an FLV file
For lessons on working with video, see the Adobe Flash Support Center at www.adobe.com/go/flash_video.
Change video instance properties in the Property inspector 1 Select an instance of an embedded or linked video clip on the Stage. 2 Select Window > Properties > Properties, and do any of the following:

• Enter an instance name in the Name text field on the left side of the Property inspector. • Enter values for W and H to change the dimensions of the video instance. • Enter values for X and Y to change the position of the upper-left corner of the instance on the Stage. • Click Swap. Select a video clip to replace the clip currently assigned to the instance.
Note: You can swap an embedded video clip only with another embedded video clip, and you can swap a linked video clip only with another linked video clip.

FLASH CS3 306
User Guide

View video clip properties in the Video Properties dialog box 1 Select a video clip in the Library panel. 2 Select Properties from the Library Panel menu, or click the Properties button located at the bottom of the the Library panel. The Video Properties dialog box is displayed. Assign a new name to, update, or replace a video clip with an FLV clip 1 Select the video clip in the Library panel and select Properties from the Library Panel menu. 2 Do one of the following:

• To assign a new name, enter the name in the Name text field. • To update a video clip, navigate to the updated video file and click Open. • To replace a video clip with an FLV clip, click Import, navigate to the FLV file to replace the current clip, and click Open.

Import video with Flash Media Server or FVSS
Import a video file that is already deployed to a web server or a Flash Media Server or Flash Video Streaming Service (FVSS), or select a video file that is stored locally on your computer, and upload the video file to the server after importing it to your FLA file.
1 To import the video clip into the current Flash document, select File > Import > Import Video. 2 Select the video clip to import. Select either a video clip stored on your local computer, or enter the URL of a video already uploaded to a web server, your own Flash Media Server, or an FVSS and do one of the following:

• To import video for progressive download, select Progressive Download from a standard web server. • To import video for streaming with Flash Media Server or FVSS, select Stream From Flash Video Streaming
Service (FVSS) or Stream From Flash Media Server (FMS).
3 (Optional) If the video you are deploying is not in FLV format, use the Encoding panel to select an encoding profile, and copy, trim, and split the video clip.

Note: This step applies only if you are uploading the video from your local computer. Video clips that are already deployed to a server must be previously encoded in the FLV format.
4 Select a skin for your video clip. You can choose to:

• Not use a skin with the video. • Select one of the predefined skins. • Select a custom skin of your own design by entering the URL of the skin on the server.
The Video Import wizard encodes your source video clip in the FLV format (if it isn’t already in FLV format) and creates a video component on the Stage that you can use to test video playback locally.
5 Upload the following assets to the web server hosting your video:

• The FLV encoded video clip (which is located in the same folder as the source video clip you selected with a .flv
extension) Note: If the video clip is in FLV format, Flash uses a relative path to point to the FLV file (relative to the SWF file), letting you use the same directory structure locally that you use on the server. If the video was previously deployed to your FMS or FVSS hosting your video, you can skip this step.

• The video skin (if you chose to use a skin)
To use a predefined skin, Flash copies the skin into the same folder as the FLA file.

FLASH CS3 307
User Guide

• The video component
To edit the component’s URL field to that of the web server that you are uploading the video to, use the Component inspector.

See also
“Select a video encoding profile” on page 314 “Specify the contentPath parameter” on page 324 “About the FLVPlayback component” on page 323

Embed video in a SWF file
Import video clips as embedded files in several file formats, depending on your system. Preview frames of an imported video by dragging the playhead along the Timeline. However, the sound does not play back. To preview the video with sound, use the Test Movie command. When you import a video as an embedded file, you can edit the video before importing it. You can also apply customized compression settings, including bandwidth or video quality settings. Note: After a video clip is imported, it cannot be edited.

See also
“Supported file formats for video” on page 310 “Test document download performance” on page 493 “Types of symbols” on page 209 “Select a video encoding profile” on page 314
Embed video within the SWF file 1 To import the video clip into the current Flash document, select File > Import > Import Video. 2 Select the video clip on your local computer to import. 3 Select Embed Video In SWF and Play In Timeline. 4 Choose the symbol type with which to embed the video in the SWF file.
Embed in the Timeline If you’re using the video clip for linear playback in the Timeline, importing the video into the Timeline is the most appropriate method. Embed as a movie clip A best practice is to place video inside a movie clip instance, because you have the most control over the content. The video’s Timeline plays independently from the main Timeline. You do not have to extend your main Timeline by many frames to accommodate the video, which can make working with your FLA file difficult. Embed as a graphic symbol When you embed a video clip as a graphic symbol, you cannot interact with the video using ActionScript (typically you use graphic symbols for static images and to create reusable pieces of animation that are tied to the main Timeline).

5 Import the video clip directly onto the Stage (and the Timeline) or as a library item.

By default, Flash places the video you import on the Stage. To import into the library only, deselect Place Instance on Stage.

FLASH CS3 308
User Guide

If you’re creating a simple video presentation with linear narration and little to no interaction, accept the default setting and import the video to the Stage. To create a more dynamic presentation, work with multiple video clips, or add dynamic transitions or other elements using ActionScript, import the video into the library. After a video clip is in the library, customize it by converting it into a MovieClip object that you can more easily control with ActionScript. By default, Flash expands the Timeline to accommodate the playback length of the video clip you are embedding.
6 (Optional) To edit your video clip before embedding it in the Timeline, select Edit Video First. 7 (Optional) If the video clip is not yet encoded in the FLV format, select a Flash Video encoding profile. 8 Click Finish.

The Video Import wizard encodes your video into the FLV format, and embeds the video into the SWF file. The video appears either on the Stage or in the library depending on the embedding options you chose.
9 In the Property inspector (Window > Properties), give the video clip an instance name, and make any modifications to the video clip’s properties. Update an embedded video clip after editing it in an external editor 1 Select the video clip in the Library panel. 2 Select Properties and click Update.

The embedded video clip is updated with the edited file. The compression settings you selected when you first imported the video are reapplied to the updated clip.

Import linked QuickTime video files
A linked QuickTime video imported into Flash does not become part of the Flash file. Instead, Flash maintains a pointer to the source file. If you link to a QuickTime video, publish the SWF file as a QuickTime video. You cannot display a linked QuickTime clip in SWF format. The QuickTime file contains a Flash track, but the linked video clip remains in QuickTime format. You can scale, rotate, and animate a linked QuickTime video in Flash. However, you cannot tween linked QuickTime video content in Flash. Note: The QuickTime Player does not support Flash Player files later than version 5.

See also
“About QuickTime” on page 453 “Specify publish settings for QuickTime videos” on page 431
Import a QuickTime video as a linked file 1 Do one of the following:

• To link the video clip directly to the current Flash document, select File > Import > Import To Stage. • To link the video clip to the library for the current Flash document, select File > Import > Import To Library.
2 Select Link To External Video File, and click Next.

FLASH CS3 309
User Guide

3 If you imported the video clip directly to the Stage in step 1, a warning appears if the imported clip contains more frames than the span in which you are placing it in the current Flash document. Do one of the following:

• To extend the span the required number of frames, click Yes. • To keep the span at its current size, click No. Frames in the imported clip that exceed the frames in the span do
not appear unless you subsequently add frames to the span.
4 Select Control > Play. Preview a linked QuickTime video before you publish your SWF file. When you import a linked QuickTime video, Flash adds the required number of frames to preview the QuickTime video, the same as it does for an embedded video.

Note: You cannot use the Test Movie command to preview linked QuickTime video content.

Change the directory path of a linked QuickTime video
1 Select Window > Library, and select the desired linked QuickTime video. 2 In the Panel menu in the Library panel, select Properties. 3 Click Set Path. 4 Navigate to the file for the linked video clip, select it, click Open, and click OK.

Edit video clips in the Video Import wizard
1 Import the video clip. 2 To open the Editing pane of the Video Import wizard, select Edit the Video First, and click Next. 3 To browse frames in the video, do one of the following:

• Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. • To move forward, click the Play button; to stop at the desired frame, click the Pause button. • To move forward or backward one frame at a time, click the Backward and Forward buttons in the Controller.
4 To set the in and out points (beginning and ending frames), do one of the following:

• Drag the in and out points (the triangles below the scrubber bar). • To set the beginning or ending frame at the current location of the playhead, click the In or Out button below the
scrubber bar.
5 To play the video, do one of the following:

• To play the video from the current playhead position, click the Play button in the button controls. • To play the video with the current in and out points, click Preview.
Note: To stop video playback, click the Stop button.
6 To create a clip with the current in and out points, click Create Clip.

To create additional clips from the same file, select in and out points for the clips as described in step 4, and click Create Clip again.
7 To rename a clip, select it in the scroll pane and enter the new name. 8 To re-edit a clip, select it in the scroll pane. Select new in and out points as described in step 4, and click Update Clip. 9 To delete a clip from the scroll pane, select the clip and click the Delete (-) button. 10 When the editing process is complete, click Next.

FLASH CS3 310
User Guide

About digital video and Flash
Supported file formats for video
If QuickTime 7 for Macintosh, QuickTime 6.5 for Windows, or DirectX 9 or later (Windows only) is installed on your system, you can import video clips in several file formats, including MOV, AVI, and MPG/MPEG. You can import linked video clips in MOV format. Flash documents with embedded video can be published as SWF files. Flash documents with linked video must be published in QuickTime format. The following video file formats are supported for importing embedded video if QuickTime 7 is installed on your Macintosh computer:
File type Audio Video Interleaved Digital video Motion Picture Experts Group QuickTime Video Extension .avi .dv .mpg, .mpeg .mov

The following video file formats are supported for importing embedded video if DirectX 9 or later is installed (Windows only):
File type Audio Video Interleaved Motion Picture Experts Group Windows Media file Extension .avi .mpg, .mpeg .wmv, .asf

By default, Flash imports and exports video using the On2 VP 6 codec. A codec is a compression-decompression algorithm that controls how multimedia files are compressed during encoding, and decompressed during playback. If you attempt to import a file format that is not supported on your system, a warning message appears that the operation cannot be completed. In some cases, Flash might import the video but not the audio in a file. For example, audio is not supported in MPG and MPEG files imported with QuickTime 7 on Mac OS. In such cases, a warning indicates that the audio portion of the file cannot be imported. You can import the video without sound.

See also
“About Linked QuickTime video” on page 305 “Comparing the On2 VP6 and Sorenson Spark video codecs” on page 311

Audio support for MPEG video
Because MPEG encodes both the video and audio portions of a file into a single track, encoding MPEG files as FLV files might result in the audio portion being removed. This occurs primarily when encoding video files into FLV format on Mac OS. On Mac OS, MPEG video is imported using QuickTime. QuickTime does not support extracting audio content from MPEG files (although QuickTime correctly plays back an MPEG file with audio programming).

FLASH CS3 311
User Guide

If you are encoding MPEG video with audio on a Macintosh computer, it is recommended that you first convert the MPEG video clip into another format that encodes audio and video as separate tracks within the file. You can then encode the other format as an FLV file, and preserve the audio content. An alternative is to use a computer with the Windows operating system. Windows imports MPEG video using DirectShow, which supports extracting both the video and audio tracks of an MPEG file. This lets you convert MPEG video to the FLV format without removing the audio portion of the video clip. Note: Imported audio is published or exported as streamed audio, using the global audio streaming settings selected in the Publish Settings dialog box.

See also
“Set publish options for the Flash SWF file format” on page 421

Comparing the On2 VP6 and Sorenson Spark video codecs
The On2 VP6 codec is the default video codec to use when encoding Flash content that uses video and FLV content to use with Flash Player 8 and 9. The On2 VP6 codec provides:

• Higher quality video when compared to the Sorenson Spark codec encoded at the same data rate • Support for the use of an alpha channel to composite video
To support better quality video at the same data rate, the On2 VP6 codec is noticeably slower to encode and requires more processor power on the client computer to decode and play back. For this reason, carefully consider the lowest common denominator of computer you intend your viewing audience to use when accessing your Flash Video content. If you anticipate a large user base that uses older computers, consider encoding your FLV files using the Sorenson Spark codec. If your Flash content dynamically loads Flash video (using either progressive download or Flash Media Server), you can use On2 VP6 video without having to republish your SWF file for Flash Player 8, as long as users use Flash Player 8 or later to view your content. By streaming or downloading On2 VP6 video into Flash SWF versions 6 or 7, and playing the content using Flash Player 8 or later, you avoid having to recreate your SWF files for use with Flash Player 8 and later versions. Important: Only Flash Player 8 and 9 supports both publish and playback of On2 VP6 video.
Codec Content (SWF) version (publish version) 6 7 On2 VP6 6, 7, 8 9 Flash Player version (version required for playback) 6, 7, 8 7, 8, 9 8, 9 9

Sorenson Spark

Tips for creating Flash video
Follow these guidelines to deliver the best possible Flash video:

FLASH CS3 312
User Guide

Whenever possible, always encode a file from its uncompressed form

If you convert a precompressed digital video format into the FLV format, the previous encoder can introduce video noise. The first compressor already performed its encoding algorithm on the video and reduced its quality, frame size, and rate. It might have also introduced some of its own digital artifacts or noise. This additional noise affects the FLV encoding process and might require a higher data rate to play back a good-quality file.
Strive for simplicity Avoid elaborate transitions—they don’t compress well and can make your final compressed

video look chunky during the change. Hard cuts (as opposed to cross-dissolves) are usually best. Video sequences that show an object zooming from behind the first track, doing a page turn, or wrapping around a ball and then flying off the screen can be eye-catching, but they usually don’t compress well and should be used sparingly.
Know your audience data rate

When you deliver video over the Internet, produce files at lower data rates. Users with fast Internet connections can view the files with little or no wait, but dial-up users must wait for files to download. Make the clips short to keep the download times within acceptable limits for dial-up users.
Select the proper frame rate

Frame rate indicates frames per second (fps). If you have a higher data rate clip, a lower frame rate can improve playback on lower-end computers. For example, if you are compressing a clip with little motion, cutting the frame rate in half probably saves you only 20 percent of the data rate. However, if you are compressing high-motion video, reducing the frame rate has a much greater effect on the data rate. Because video looks much better at native frame rates, Adobe® recommends leaving the frame rate high if your delivery channels and playback platforms allow it. However, if you need to reduce the frame rate, the best results come from dividing the frame rate by whole numbers. Note: To embed video clips in the SWF file, the frame rate of the video clip must be the same that the SWF file uses. To encode video using the same frame rate as the FLA file, use the Advanced Video Encoding settings in the Video Import wizard.
Select a frame size that fits your data rate

At a given data rate (connection speed), increasing the frame size results in decreased video quality. When you select the frame size for your document, consider frame rate, source material, and personal preferences. Use the following list of common frame sizes (in pixels) as a guide. Experiment to find the best setting for your project.

• Modem: 160 x 120 • Dual ISDN: 192 x 144 • T1/DSL/cable: 320 x 240
Know progressive download times

Know how long it will take to download your video. While your video clip downloads, you might want to have other content that appears and disguises the download. For short clips, use the following formula: Pause = download time – play time + 10% of play time. For example, if your clip is 30 seconds long and it takes one minute to download, give your clip a 33-second buffer (60 seconds – 30 seconds + 3 seconds = 33 seconds).

FLASH CS3 313
User Guide

Use clean video

The higher the quality of the original, the better the final result. Although frame rates and sizes of Internet video are usually smaller than those of television, computer monitors have much better color fidelity, saturation, sharpness, and resolution than conventional televisions. Even with a small window, image quality can be more important for digital video than for standard analog television. Artifacts and noise that are barely noticeable on TV can be obvious on a computer screen.
Remove noise and interlace

After you capture your video content, you might need to remove noise and interlacing.
Follow the same guidelines for audio

The same considerations exist for audio production as for video production. To achieve good audio compression, begin with clean audio. If you are encoding material from a CD, try to record the file using direct digital transfer instead of through the analog input of your sound card. The sound card introduces an unnecessary digital-to-analog and analog-to-digital conversion that can create noise in your source audio. Direct digital transfer tools are available for Windows and Macintosh platforms. To record from an analog source, use the highest-quality sound card available.

See also
“Embedding video in a SWF file” on page 304

Encoding video
About Flash Video encoding methods
The following sections describe the encoding settings, crop-and-trim controls, and for users of either the Flash Video Encoder or FLV QuickTime Export plug-in, the cue point embedding controls.
Flash Video Import wizard

The Flash Video Import wizard encodes video clips into the Flash Video (FLV) format when you import them. However, you can only encode one video clip at a time, and the process of encoding can be both time- and computing-intensive. For users who work extensively with video-based content, Flash includes the Flash Video Encoder and the QuickTime Exporter.
Flash Video Encoder

The Flash Video Encoder batches process video clips, allowing you to encode several clips at a time without having to interrupt your workflow. In addition to selecting encoding options for video and audio content, the Flash Video Encoder can also embed cue points into video clips you encode, and edit the video using crop-and-trim controls. For more information, see the online help included with the Flash Video Encoder application.
FLV QuickTime Export plug-in

If you have Flash 8 or later and QuickTime 6.1.1 installed on your computer, you can use the FLV QuickTime Export plug-in to export FLV files from supported video-editing applications. You can then import these FLV files directly into Flash.

FLASH CS3 314
User Guide

The FLV Export plug-in supports the following video-editing applications:

• Adobe After Effects (Windows and Macintosh) • Apple FinalCut Pro (Macintosh) • Apple QuickTime Pro (Windows and Macintosh) • Avid Xpress DV (Windows and Macintosh)
Using the FLV QuickTime Export plug-in to export FLV files from either Flash Video Encoder or other video-editing applications significantly streamlines working with FLV files in your Flash documents. With the FLV Export plugin, you can select encoding options for video and audio content as you export, including frame rate, bit rate, quality, and other options. You can import FLV files directly into Flash without re-encoding the video after import. For a video tutorial about using Flash Video Encoder, see www.adobe.com/go/vid0138.

Select a video encoding profile
Encoding profiles are based on the Flash Player version you intend to publish content for, and the data rate at which you want your video content to be encoded. An encoding profile using Flash Player 8 uses the On2 VP6 video codec. An encoding profile using Flash Player 7 uses the Sorenson Spark video codec to encode the video.
1 In the Encoding panel, select an encoding profile from the Flash Video Encoding Profile pop-up menu. 2 Verify that the encoding profile you’ve selected is appropriate for your intended application. 3 Do one of the following:

• To further adjust the encoding settings, or to modify the video clip’s size or playback length using the crop-andtrim controls, click the Video or Crop and Resize tabs.

• To encode the video, click Continue.

See also
“Comparing the On2 VP6 and Sorenson Spark video codecs” on page 311

Specify advanced encoding settings
1 To specify advanced encoding options, select the Video tab. 2 Select a video codec to encode your content with from the Video Codec pop-up menu. If you are authoring for

Flash Player 6 or 7, choose the Sorenson Spark codec; if you are authoring for Flash Player 8 or later, choose the On2 VP6 codec.
3 Select a frame rate.

By default, Flash Video Encoder uses the same frame rate as the source video. Adobe® recommends using the default frame rate unless you are experienced with video encoding, and have a specific application that requires modifying the source video’s frame rate. To alter the frame rate, understand how modifying the frame rate affects the video quality. Note: To embed video clips in the SWF file, the frame rate of the video clip must be the same as that used by the SWF file. To encode video using the same frame rate as the FLA file, use the Video settings in the Video Import wizard.
4 Select the keyframe placement for the video. Keyframes are video frames that contain complete data. For example, if you specify a keyframe interval of 30, Flash Video Encoder encodes a complete frame every 30 frames in the video clip. For frames between keyframe intervals, Flash stores only the data that changes from the preceding frame.

FLASH CS3 315
User Guide

By default, Flash Video Encoder places a keyframe every two seconds of playback time. For example, if the video you’re encoding has a frame rate of 30 fps, a keyframe is inserted every 60 frames. In general, the default keyframe value provides a reasonable level of control when seeking within a video clip. To select a custom keyframe placement value, be aware that the smaller the keyframe interval, the larger the file size.
5 Specify the quality of the video from the Quality pop-up menu.

The quality setting determines the data rate (or bit rate) of the encoded video. The higher the data rate, the better the quality of the encoded video clip. To specify a quality setting, do one of the following:

• Select a preset quality setting to automatically select a Data Rate value. • Select Custom and enter a value, in kilobits per second, in the Maximum Data Rate text field.
Note: If you find that the preset quality settings do not work with your source footage, try specifying a custom maximum data rate.
6 To resize the video clip, do the following:

• Select the Resize video check box. • (Optional) To keep the aspect ratio the same as the original video clip, select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box.
Note: If you resize a video clip’s frame size, and do not select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box, the video might become distorted.

• Specify values for Width and Height. You can specify a frame size in pixels or as a percentage of the original image size.
7 Do one of the following:

• To move to the next panel of the Video Import wizard, click Next. • To further modify the video’s encoding settings, select either the Cue Point or the Crop and Resize tab.

See also
“Import video with Flash Media Server or FVSS” on page 306 “Embedding video in a SWF file” on page 304

Specify advanced audio encoding settings
The audio encoding settings portion of the dialog box is automatically selected when an audio-only file is added to the encoding list. This portion of the dialog box is disabled when you encode video content without a combined audio track. Note: Select an encoding profile from the Flash Video Encoding Profile pop-up menu, which sets a corresponding profile for the audio-only encoding format.
1 To activate the advanced audio encoding options, select Audio. The default audio codec is mp3.

Note: If the source video file has no audio track, or if you are encoding MPEG-1 files on a Macintosh computer, the audio encoding settings portion of the dialog box is disabled.
2 Select a data rate from the Data Rate pop-up menu.

The data rate is the bit rate of the mp3 audio stream. Better quality audio tracks, such as music and significant background noise, require a higher bit rate. Simple dialogue can be compressed to a much higher degree. Higher bitrate settings (encoded at 80 Kbps or higher) are encoded in stereo, while lower bit-rate settings (encoded at 64 Kbps or lower) are encoded in mono.

FLASH CS3 316
User Guide

3 To move to the next panel of the Video Import wizard, click Next. To further modify the video clip, select another of the Advanced Settings tabs.

Embed cue points
Cue points cause the video playback to trigger other actions within the presentation. For example, you can create a Flash presentation video playing in one area of the screen while text and graphics appear in another area. A cue point placed in the video triggers an update to the text and graphics, letting them remain relevant to the content of the video. Each cue point consists of a name and the time at which it occurs. You specify cue point times in hour:minute:second:milisecond format; the default frame rate is 30 fps. You can specify cue point times with any frame rate, and also express them in milliseconds rather than frame numbers. To define and embed cue points, use Flash Video Encoder or import a video clip using the Video Import wizard.
1 From the Encoding Profiles panel of the Video Import wizard, select a predefined encoding profile from the Flash Video encoding profile pop-up menu, or create your own custom encoding profile using the encoding options in the Video tab. 2 Click the Cue Points tab. 3 To locate a specific frame (point in the video) to embed a cue point, use the playback head. For greater precision, select the playback head, and use the left and right arrow keys to locate specific points in the video. To locate a specific frame, use the pointer to move the playback head to the point in the video to embed a cue point. The video preview window visually identifies points in the video at which to insert a cue point. To locate specific points in time at which to embed cue points, use the elapsed time counter (located beneath the video preview window). 4 When the playback head is positioned on a frame where you want to embed a cue point, click the Add Cue Point button.

Flash Video Encoder embeds a cue point on that frame of the video, and populates the cue point list with a placeholder for the name of the new cue point, and the elapsed time and video frame at which the cue point is located (this is the time during playback when the event is triggered). Flash Video Encoder also displays a pop-up menu that lets you select the type of cue point to embed. A cue point marker appears on the slider control at the point where the cue point was embedded. To adjust the placement of the cue point, use the cue point marker.
5 Specify the type of cue point to embed:

• Event cue points trigger ActionScript methods when the cue point is reached, and synchronize the video playback
to other events in the Flash presentation.

• Navigation cue points are used for navigation and seeking, and to trigger ActionScript methods when the cue
point is reached. Embedding a navigation cue point inserts a keyframe at that point in the video clip.
6 Enter parameters for the selected cue point. Parameters are a set of key-value pairs that you can add to the cue point. The parameters are passed to the cue point event handler as members of the single parameter object. 7 (Optional) Save the cue points you’ve created so that you can apply them to other video clips. Click the Save Cue Points button (the disk icon) on the cue points tab, and save the file to a location on your computer..

See also
“Importing and modifying Flash Video files” on page 302 “Encoding video” on page 313

FLASH CS3 317
User Guide

Crop and resize video
Flash Video Encoder provides the following editing options to crop and resize video clips before encoding them: Cropping alters the dimensions of a video clip. You can eliminate areas of the video to emphasize a particular focal point within the frame such as highlighting a character by removing ancillary imagery or removing unwanted backdrops. Trimming edits the beginning and ending points (the in and outpoints) of a video. For example, you can adjust the trim of a video clip to begin playback 30 seconds into the full clip, removing unwanted frames.
1 From the Encoding Profiles panel of the Video Import wizard, specify an encoding setting for the video clip. 2 Click the Crop and Resize tab. 3 Enter values for the right, left, top, and bottom edges to crop the video, or use the slider controls to visually adjust the dimensions of the video. Guides in the preview window indicate the cropped area. 4 To set the in and out points, drag the in and out point markers below the scrubber bar until you finish adjusting the video clip size. For greater precision, select the in and out point markers, and use the left and right arrow keys to locate specific points in the video.

The video preview window visually identifies beginning and ending frames where you can trim the video clip. To locate specific times where you can trim the video clip, use the elapsed time counter (located in the Trim section of the dialog box).
5 To preview the video, drag the play head over the scrubber bar to ensure that the video plays appropriately. 6 To further modify the video’s encoding settings, select either the Cue Point or the Encoding tab, or to return to the main Flash Video Encoding dialog box, click OK.

Note: When you encode the video, the original source video clip is not changed. You can always re-encode a video clip and specify new settings if your initial attempt doesn’t produce the results you want.

See also
“Encoding video” on page 313

Working with Premiere Pro and After Effects
Working with Adobe Premiere Pro and Adobe Flash
Adobe Premiere Pro is a professional tool for editing video. If you use Adobe Flash to design interactive content for websites or mobile devices, you can use Adobe Premiere Pro to edit the movies for those projects. Adobe Premiere Pro gives you professional tools for frame-accurate video editing, including tools for optimizing video files for playback on computer screens and mobile devices. Adobe Flash CS3 Professional is a tool for incorporating video footage into presentations for the web and mobile devices. Adobe Flash offers technological and creative benefits that let you fuse video with data, graphics, sound, and interactive control. The Adobe Flash Video format lets you put video on a web page in a format that almost anyone can view. If you use Adobe Premiere Pro to export Adobe Flash Video files, you can use Adobe Flash to embed the content into interactive websites or applications for mobile devices. Adobe Flash can import sequence markers you add in an Adobe Premiere Pro sequence as cue points that can trigger events you designate in Adobe Flash, on playback.

FLASH CS3 318
User Guide

If you export video files in other standard formats, Adobe Flash can encode your videos within Flash applications, using the latest compression technologies to deliver the greatest quality possible at small file sizes.

Moving content between Adobe Premiere Pro and Adobe Flash
After you start and edit a video in Adobe Premiere Pro, you can add sequence markers to the timeline that serve as cue points in a Flash application. Then, you can export the movie directly into the Adobe Flash Video format (FLV). You can choose from several Adobe Media Encoder presets that balance file size against audio and video quality to achieve the bit rate needed for any target audience or device. If you export the movie with an alpha channel, the movie can be easily used as a layer in a Flash project. You can then import this movie into Adobe Flash for use in an interactive website or mobile application. Flash will read sequence markers as cue points you can use to trigger events in the Flash composition. In Flash, you can also customize the interface that surrounds your video. Alternatively, because Flash can be used to create animations, you can start a movie as a Flash project, export it as a QuickTime file, then import the QuickTime file into Adobe Premiere Pro for editing. In Adobe Premiere Pro, for example, you could add titles or mix the animation with other video sources.

Tips for creating Adobe Flash Video
Follow these guidelines to deliver the best possible Flash video:
Work with video in the native format of your project until your final output

If you convert a precompressed digital video format into another format such as FLV, the previous encoder can introduce video noise. The first compressor already applied its encoding algorithm to the video, reducing its quality, frame size, and rate. That compression may have also introduced digital artifacts or noise. This additional noise affects the final encoding process, and a higher data rate may be required to encode a good-quality file.
Strive for simplicity

Avoid elaborate transitions—they don’t compress well and can make your final compressed video look “chunky” during the change. Hard cuts (as opposed to dissolves) are usually best. Eye-catching video sequences—for instance showing an object zooming from behind the first track, doing a “page peel,” or wrapping around a ball and then flying off the screen—don’t compress well and should be used sparingly.
Know your audience data rate

When you deliver video over the Internet, produce files at lower data rates. Users with fast Internet connections can view the files with little or no delay for loading, but dial-up users must wait for files to download. Make the clips short to keep the download times within acceptable limits for dial-up users.
Select the proper frame rate

Frame rate indicates frames per second (fps). If you have a higher data rate clip, a lower frame rate can improve playback through limited bandwidth. For example, if you are compressing a clip with little motion, cutting the frame rate in half probably saves you only 20% of the data rate. However, if you are compressing high-motion video, reducing the frame rate has a much greater effect on the data rate.

FLASH CS3 319
User Guide

Because video looks much better at native frame rates, leave the frame rate high if your delivery channels and playback platforms allow. For web delivery, get this detail from your hosting service. For mobile devices, use the device-specific encoding presets, and the device emulator available through Adobe Media Encoder in Adobe Premiere Pro. If you need to reduce the frame rate, the best results come from dividing the frame rate by whole numbers. Note: When you embed video clips in the SWF file, the frame rate of the video clip must be the same as the frame rate of the SWF file. To encode video using the frame rate of the FLA file, use the Advanced Video Encoding settings in the Flash Video Import wizard.
Select a frame size that fits your data rate and frame aspect ratio

At a given data rate (connection speed), increasing the frame size decreases video quality. When you select the frame size for your encoding settings, consider frame rate, source material, and personal preferences. To prevent pillarboxing, it’s important to choose a frame size of the same aspect ratio as that of your source footage. For example, you get pillarboxing if you encode NTSC footage to a PAL frame size. Adobe Premiere Pro makes several Adobe Flash Video presets available through Adobe Media Encoder. These include preset frame sizes and frame rates for the different television standards at different data rates. Use the following list of common frame sizes (in pixels) as a guide, or experiment with the various Adobe Media Encoder presets to find the best setting for your project.
Modem NTSC 4 x 3 162 x 120 Modem PAL 4 x 3 160 x 120 T1/DSL/cable NTSC 4 x 3 648 x 480 T1/DSL/cable PAL 4 x 3 768 x 576

Stream for best performance

To eliminate download time, provide deep interactivity and navigation capabilities, or monitor quality of service, stream Adobe Flash Video files with the Flash Media Server or use the hosted service from one of Adobe’s Flash Video Streaming Service partners available through the Adobe website. For more details on the difference between Progressive Download and Streaming with Flash Media Server, see “Delivering Flash Video: Understanding the Difference Between Progressive Download and Streaming Video” on the Flash Developer Center website.
Know progressive download times

Know how long it will take to download enough of your video so that it can play to the end without pausing to finish downloading. While the first part of your video clip downloads, you may want to display other content that disguises the download. For short clips, use the following formula: Pause = download time – play time + 10% of play time. For example, if your clip is 30 seconds long and it takes one minute to download, give your clip a 33-second buffer (60 seconds – 30 seconds + 3 seconds = 33 seconds).
Remove noise and interlacing

For the best encoding, you might need to remove noise and interlacing. The higher the quality of the original, the better the final result. Although frame rates and sizes of Internet video are usually smaller than those of television, computer monitors have much better color fidelity, saturation, sharpness, and resolution than conventional televisions. Even with a small window, image quality can be more important for digital video than for standard analog television. Artifacts and noise that are barely noticeable on TV can be obvious on a computer screen.

FLASH CS3 320
User Guide

Adobe Flash is intended for progressive display on computer screens and other devices, rather than on interlaced displays such as TVs. Interlaced footage viewed on a progressive display can exhibit alternating vertical lines in highmotion areas. Thus, all the Adobe Flash Video presets in the Adobe Media Encoder have deinterlacing turned on by default.
Follow the same guidelines for audio

The same considerations apply to audio production as to video production. To achieve good audio compression, begin with clean audio. If you are encoding material from a CD, try to record the file using direct digital transfer instead of through the analog input of your sound card. The sound card introduces an unnecessary digital-to-analog and analog-to-digital conversion that can create noise in your source audio. Direct digital transfer tools are available for Windows and Macintosh platforms. To record from an analog source, use the highest-quality sound card available.

Working with Flash and After Effects
If you use Adobe® Flash® to create video or animation, you can use After Effects® to edit and refine the video. For example, you can export Flash animations and applications as QuickTime movies or Flash Video (FLV) files. You can then use After Effects to edit and refine the video. If you use After Effects to edit and composite video, you can then use Flash to publish that video. You can also export an After Effects video as Flash content for further editing in Flash.
Exporting QuickTime video from Flash

If you create animations or applications with Flash, you can export them as QuickTime movies using the File > Export > Export Movie command in Flash. For a Flash animation, you can optimize the video output for animation. For a Flash application, Flash renders video of the application as it runs, allowing the user to manipulate it. This lets you capture the branches or states of your application that you want to include in the video file.
Exporting Flash video (FLV) from After Effects

When you render finished video from After Effects, select FLV as the output format in the Render Queue panel to export directly to the Flash Video (FLV) format. You can specify size, compression, and other output options. Any After Effects markers are added to the FLV file as cue points. You can then import the FLV file into Flash and publish it in a SWF file, which can be played by Flash Player.
Importing and publishing video in Flash

When you import a FLV file into Flash, you can use various techniques, such as scripting or Flash components, to control the visual interface that surrounds your video. For example, you might include playback controls or other graphics. You can also add graphic layers on top of the FLV file for composite effects.
Composite graphics, animation, and video

Flash and After Effects each include many capabilities that allow you to perform complex compositing of video and graphics. Which application you choose to use will depend on your personal preferences and the type of final output you want to create. Flash is the more web-oriented of the two applications, with its small final file size. Flash also allows for runtime control of animation. After Effects is oriented towards video and film production, provides a wide range of visual effects, and is generally used to create video files as final output.

FLASH CS3 321
User Guide

Both applications can be used to create original graphics and animation. Both use a timeline and offer scripting capabilities for controlling animation programmatically. After Effects includes a larger set of effects, while the Flash ActionScript™ language is the more robust of the two scripting environments. Both applications allow you to place graphics on separate layers for compositing. These layers can be turned on and off as needed. Both also allow you to apply effects to the contents of individual layers. In Flash, composites do not affect the video content directly; they affect only the appearance of the video during playback in Flash Player. In contrast, when you composite with imported video in After Effects, the video file you export actually incorporates the composited graphics and effects. Because all drawing and painting in After Effects is done on layers separate from any imported video, it is always non-destructive. Flash has both destructive and non-destructive drawing modes.
Exporting After Effects content for use in Flash

You can export After Effects content for use in Flash. You can export a SWF file that can be played immediately in Flash Player or used as part of another Flash project. When you export content from After Effects in SWF format, the some of the content may be flattened and rasterized in the SWF file.
Importing Flash SWF files into After Effects

Flash has a unique set of vector art tools that make it useful for a variety of drawing not possible in After Effects or Adobe Illustrator®. You can import SWF files into After Effects to composite them with other video or render them as video with additional creative effects. When After Effects imports a SWF file, its internal keyframes are preserved so that you can continue to use them for timing other effects. Each SWF file imported into After Effects is flattened into a single continuously rasterized layer, with its alpha channel preserved. Continuous rasterization means that graphics stay sharp as they are scaled up. This import method allows you to use the root layer or object of your SWF files as a smoothly rendered element in After Effects, allowing the best capabilities of each tool to work together.

Using ActionScript to play external Flash Video
Playing back external FLV files dynamically
An alternative to importing video into the Flash authoring environment it to use either the FLVPlayback component or ActionScript to dynamically play external FLV files in Flash Player. You can play FLV files posted as HTTP downloads or as local media files. Create FLV files by importing video into the Flash authoring tool and exporting it as an FLV file. If you have Macromedia Flash Professional 8 or Flash CS3 Professional, you can use the FLV Export plug-in to export FLV files from supported video-editing applications. To play back an external FLV file, post an FLV file to a URL (either an HTTP site or a local folder) and add either the FLVPlayback component or ActionScript code to the Flash document to access the file and control playback during runtime. Using external FLV files provides the following capabilities that are not available when using imported video:

• You can use longer video clips without slowing down playback. External FLV files are played using cached memory,
which means that large files are stored in small pieces and accessed dynamically; they do not require as much memory as embedded video files.

FLASH CS3 322
User Guide

• An external FLV file can have a different frame rate from the Flash document in which it plays. For example, you
can set the Flash document frame rate to 30 fps and the video frame rate to 21 fps, which gives you greater control in ensuring smooth video playback.

• With external FLV files, Flash document playback does not have to be interrupted while the video file is loading.
Imported video files can sometimes interrupt document playback to perform certain functions (for example, to access a CD-ROM drive). FLV files can perform functions independently of the Flash document, and so do not interrupt playback.

• Captioning video content is easier with external FLV files because you can use callback functions to access
metadata for the video. For more information on playing back FLV files, see “Playing back external FLV files dynamically” in Learning ActionScript 2.0 in Adobe Flash or “Basics of video” in Programming ActionScript 3.0.

See also
“Export a Flash video file” on page 452 “About Flash Video encoding methods” on page 313

Behaviors used in video playback
Video behaviors provide one way to control video playback. Behaviors are prewritten ActionScript scripts that you add to a triggering object to control another object. Behaviors add the power, control, and flexibility of ActionScript coding to your document without having to create the ActionScript code. Video behaviors play, stop, pause, rewind, fast-forward, show, and hide a video clip. To control a video clip with a behavior, use the Behaviors panel to apply the behavior to a triggering object, such as a movie clip. Specify the event that triggers the behavior (such as releasing the movie clip), select a target object (the video that is affected by the behavior), and when necessary, select settings for the behavior, such as the number of frames to rewind. Note: The triggering object must be a movie clip. You cannot attach video playback behaviors to button symbols or button components. The following behaviors in Flash control embedded video:
Behavior Play Video Purpose Plays a video in the current document. Stops the video. Pauses the video. Rewinds the video by the specified number of frames. Fast-forwards the video by the specified number of frames. Hides the video. Shows the video. Parameters Instance name of target video

Stop Video Pause Video Rewind Video

Instance name of target video Instance name of target video Instance name of target video Number of frames Instance name of target video Number of frames Instance name of target video Instance name of target video

Fast Forward Video

Hide Video Show Video

FLASH CS3 323
User Guide

Control video playback using behaviors
1 Select the movie clip to trigger the behavior. 2 In the Behaviors panel (Window > Behaviors), click the Add (+) button, and select the desired behavior from the Embedded Video submenu. 3 Select the video to control. 4 Select a Relative or Absolute path. 5 If required, select settings for the behavior parameters and click OK. 6 In the Behaviors panel under Event, click On Release (the default event) and select a mouse event. To use the On Release event, leave the option unchanged.

See also
“Using absolute and relative target paths” on page 73 “Controlling video playback using the Timeline” on page 302

About the FLVPlayback component
The FLVPlayback component does the following:

• Provides a set of prefabricated skins to customize playback controls and the look and feel of the user interface. • Lets advanced users create their own custom skins. • Provides cue points to synchronize your video with the animation, text, and graphics in your Flash application. • Provides live preview of customizations. • Maintains a reasonably sized SWF file for easy download.
The FLVPlayback component is the display area in which you view video. The FLVPlayback component includes the FLV Custom UI controls, a set of control buttons that play, stop, pause, and control playback the video.

Configure the FLVPlayback component
1 With the component selected, open the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties) and enter an instance name. 2 Select Parameters in the Property inspector or open the Component inspector (Window > Components). 3 Enter values for parameters or use default settings.

For each FLVPlayback component instance you can set the following parameters in the Property inspector or in the Component inspector: Note: In most instances, it is not necessary to alter the settings in the FLVPlayback component unless you want to change the appearance of a video skin. The Video Import wizard sufficiently configures the parameters for most deployments.
autoPlay Boolean value that determines how to play the FLV. If true, the FLV plays immediately when it is loaded. If false, loads the first frame and pauses. The default value is true. autoRewind Boolean value that determines whether the FLV is automatically rewound. If true, the Video component

automatically rewinds the FLV to the beginning when the playhead reaches the end or when the user clicks the stop button. If false, the Video component does not automatically rewind the FLV. The default value is true.

FLASH CS3 324
User Guide

autoSize Boolean value that, if true, resizes the component at runtime to use the source FLV dimensions. The

default value is false. Note: The encoded frame size of the FLV is not the same as the default dimensions of the FLVPlayback component.
bufferTime Number of seconds to buffer before beginning playback. The default value is 0. contentPath String that specifies the URL to an FLV or to an XML file that describes how to play the FLV. Doubleclick the Value cell for this parameter to activate the Content Path dialog box. The default is an empty string. If you do not specify a value for the contentPath parameter, nothing happens when Flash executes the FLVPlayback instance. isLive Boolean value that, if true, specifies that the FLV is streaming live from FMS. The default value is false. cuePoints A string that specifies the cue points for the FLV. Cue points allow you to synchronize specific points in

the FLV with Flash animation, graphics, or text. The default value is an empty string.
maintainAspectRatio A Boolean value that, if true, resizes the video player in the FLVPlayback component to retain

the source FLV aspect ratio; the source FLV is still scaled and the FLVPlayback component itself is not resized. The
autoSize parameter takes precedence over this parameter. The default value is true.

skin A parameter that opens the Select Skin dialog box and allows you to choose a skin for the component. The

default value is None. If you choose None, the FLVPlayback instance does not have control elements that allow the user to play, stop, or rewind the FLV, or take other actions that the controls make possible. If the autoPlay parameter is set to true, the FLV plays automatically. For more information, see “Customizing the FLVPlayback component” in Using ActionScript 3.0 Components or ActionScript 2.0 Components Language Reference.
totalTime Total number of seconds in the source FLV. The default value is 0. If you use progressive download, Flash uses this number if it is set to a value greater than zero (0). Otherwise, Flash tries to take the time from metadata.

Note: If you’re using FMS or FVSS, this value is ignored; the total time of the FLV is taken from the server.
volume A number from 0 to 100 that represents the percentage of maximum volume at which to set the volume.

Specify the contentPath parameter
If you imported a local video clip into Flash for use with progressively downloaded or streaming video content, update the contentPath parameter of the FLVPlayback component before uploading your content to a web server. The contentPath parameter specifies the name and location of the FLV on the server, and implies the playback method (for example, progressively download using HTTP, or streaming from Flash Media Server using RTMP).
1 With the component selected, open the Property inspector (Window > Properties > Properties) and select Parameters in the Property inspector, or open the Component inspector (Window > Component Inspector). 2 Enter values for parameters, or use the default settings as appropriate. For the contentPath parameter, do the

following:
a Double-click the Value cell for the contentPath parameter to activate the Content Path dialog box. b Enter the URL or local path to either the FLV file or the XML file (for Flash Media Server or FVSS) that describes

how to play the FLV. If you do not know the location of the FLV or XML file, click the folder icon to navigate to the correct location. When browsing for an FLV file, if it is at or below the location of the target SWF file, Flash automatically makes the path relative to that location so that it is ready for serving from a web server. Otherwise, it is an absolute Windows or Macintosh file path.

FLASH CS3 325
User Guide

If you specify an HTTP URL, the FLV file is a progressive download FLV file. If you specify a URL that is a RealTime Messaging Protocol (RTMP) URL, the FLV streams from a Flash Media Server (FMS). A URL to an XML file could also be a streaming FLV file from FMS or from a FVSS. Note: When you click OK on the Content Path dialog box, Flash updates the value of the cuePoints parameter, too, because you might have changed the contentPath parameter so that the cuePoints parameter no longer applies to the current content path. As a result, you lose any disabled cue points, although not ActionScript cue points. For this reason, you might want to disable non-ActionScript cue points through ActionScript, rather than through the Cue Points dialog box. You can also specify the location of an XML file that describes how to play multiple FLV streams for multiple bandwidths. The XML file uses Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language (SMIL) to describe the FLV files. For a description of the XML SMIL file, see “Using a SMIL file” in the ActionScript 2.0 Components Language Reference.

Media components (Flash Player 6 and 7)
Note: The media components were introduced in Macromedia Flash MX Professional 2004. If you are developing content to use with Macromedia Flash Player 8, instead use the FLVPlayback component introduced in Macromedia Flash Professional 8. The FLVPlayback component provides improved functionality, giving you more control over video and audio playback in the Flash environment. The media component suite consists of three components: MediaDisplay, MediaController, and MediaPlayback. With the MediaDisplay component, to add media to your Flash documents, drag the component to the Stage and configure it in the Component inspector. In addition to setting the parameters in the Component inspector, you can add cue points to trigger other actions. The MediaDisplay component has no visual representation during playback; only the video clip is visible. The MediaController component provides user interface controls that let the user interact with streaming media. The Controller features Play, Pause, and Rewind to Start buttons and a volume control. It also includes playbars that show how much of the media has loaded and how much has played. A playhead slider can be dragged forward and backward on the playbar to navigate quickly to different parts of the video. Using behaviors or ActionScript, you can easily link this component to the MediaDisplay component to show streaming video and provide user control. The MediaPlayback component provides the easiest and quickest way to add video and a controller to your Flash documents. The MediaPlayback component combines the MediaDisplay and MediaController components into a single, integrated component. The MediaDisplay and MediaController component instances are automatically linked to each other for playback control. To configure parameters for playback, size, and layout for all three components, use the Component inspector or the Parameters tab in the Property inspector. All the media components work equally well with mp3 audio content. For more information on the media components, “Media components,” in the ActionScript 2.0 Components Language Reference.

326

Chapter 16: Creating e-learning content
Adobe® Flash® CS3 Professional e-learning content is designed to facilitate rapid e-learning development, letting you create online courses and instructional materials. Note: The Flash e-learning content works only with ActionScript™ 2.0 documents. E-learning content will not work with ActionScript 3.0

Getting started with Flash e-learning
Flash e-learning overview
Flash learning interactions help you create interactive online (e-learning) courses that run in Flash. Following are some of the benefits:

• Anyone with a Flash-enabled web browser can use the instructional content. • You can customize the interface to meet your needs and create high-quality interfaces that load quickly and look
the same on different platforms.

• Interactions added to your online course provide a simple interface for entering data without writing code. • Each Flash learning interaction can send tracking information to a server-side learning management system
(LMS) that complies with the Aviation Industry CBT Committee (AICC) protocol or Shareable Content Object Reference Model (SCORM) standards.

• The quiz templates track cumulative results from a sequence of interactions and can route them to the LMS with
an enhanced data tracking functionality that is either AICC or SCORM compliant.

Requirements
Your e-learning courseware runs on any computer with Flash® Player 6 or later and a Flash-enabled web browser. The e-learning content is compatible only with ActionScript 2.0, so you must specify ActionScript 2.0 when publishing your Flash documents using the e-learning courseware. To track user data from the Flash learning interactions, you must have the following:

• A web server-side LMS, such as an AICC- or SCORM-compatible system • Internet Explorer 4.0 or Netscape Navigator 4.0 or later (Windows), or Netscape 4.5 or later (Macintosh). Tracking
to an LMS with learning interactions does not work with Internet Explorer on the Macintosh.

Flash learning interactions
An interaction is a part of a Flash application in which the user interacts with the application to provide a response. A typical response might be answering a question, selecting True or False, or clicking an area of the screen. Use the following six learning interactions to build interactive courseware:
True Or False The user chooses either true or false. Multiple Choice The user selects among multiple answers. Fill In The Blank The user types a response that is checked against matching phrases.

FLASH CS3 327
User Guide

Drag And Drop The user responds to a question by dragging one or more onscreen objects to a target. Hot Spot The user responds by clicking a region (or regions) on the screen. Hot Object The user responds by clicking an object (or objects) on the screen.

Each learning interaction has unique parameters that determine how the interaction appears to the user. For additional information about Flash components, see Using ActionScript 2.0 Components or Using ActionScript 3.0 Components.

Including a Flash learning interaction in a document
Quiz templates and stand-alone interactions
Use either quiz templates or stand-alone interactions in your Flash documents:

• The quiz templates are designed for scenarios in which interaction-based quizzes are required, or tracking is
necessary. The quiz learning interactions are graphically designed to fit into the quiz format. The quiz templates contain a mechanism that counts a cumulative score and starts and stops the necessary tracking in both AICCand SCORM-compliant APIs.

• The stand-alone interactions are designed for scenarios that require a single interaction, or a series of interactions
that need to fit into a specific layout within a Flash document. These interactions are available from the common library and are graphically designed for stand-alone use. You can track the results for each stand-alone interaction and submit them to an AICC-compatible LMS. To initialize SCORM tracking, use a quiz template.

Create a quiz with a quiz template
Each of the three quiz templates that come with Flash has a different graphical look and feel, but they are otherwise identical. Each template contains the following elements:

• A Welcome page • One of each of the six learning interaction types • A Results page • Navigation elements • ActionScript to gather AICC and SCORM tracking information
The quiz templates are fully functional. After creating a document from a quiz template, you can immediately test the document, before modification, to see how the quiz functions.
1 Create a file (File > New). 2 In the New From Template window, select the Templates tab.

FLASH CS3 328
User Guide

3 In the Category column, select Quiz; in the Templates column, select one of the quiz styles.

Set quiz parameters
Quiz parameters control how the entire quiz is presented to users—for example, whether the questions are presented in a random or sequential order, the number of questions to display, and whether the Results page appears.
1 Select the Quiz Options component with instructions to the left of the Stage in the quiz template. This component lets you set the parameters for the quiz.

Note: These instructions do not appear in the SWF file.
2 Do one of the following to open the Component inspector:

• Select Window > Component Inspector.

FLASH CS3 329
User Guide

• In the Property inspector, click Launch Component Inspector.

Note: If the text in the Component inspector is too small to be legible, undock the panel and drag a corner of the panel to enlarge it.
3 Select Randomize to present the quiz questions in a random order. 4 In the Questions To Ask box, specify the number of questions to ask for one presentation of the quiz. If you set this number to 0, the quiz uses all the questions you add to the document. If you enter a number larger than the number of questions in the quiz, the quiz displays only the number of questions that are in the quiz and does not duplicate any of them.

For example, if you have 10 interactions in your quiz, you can specify that a lesser number, such as 5 interactions, appear to the user. Use this feature with the Randomize feature to create quizzes with unexpected questions in an unexpected order.
5 Enter the URL to redirect the user.

When an AICC-compliant LMS starts a quiz, it includes parameters that the HTML code looks for when it executes the embed tag for the Flash application, and the course loads properly. If no parameters are specified, the user is redirected to the URL specified in the Login File URL field. If this field is blank or the Flash file was published with the SCORM template, the redirection does not occur.
6 In the Activity ID and Activity Name boxes, enter the activity ID and activity name of your LMS. If you are not using an LMS, either accept or delete the default entries. 7 Select Show Results Page to present quiz results to users after they complete the quiz.

FLASH CS3 330
User Guide

Modify learning interactions in a quiz template
Each question in the quiz is considered an interaction. When you use a quiz template, you place interactions sequentially between the first and last frame of the Interactions layer on the root Timeline. Add or remove frames and keyframes as needed, as long as the interactions remain sequential and the first and last frames are reserved for the Welcome and Results pages. The number of frames between the Welcome and Results page keyframes are used to calculate the score.
A

B

A. First frame of the layer B. Interactions layer

For example, the following 12 keyframes on the Interactions layer comprise a 10-question quiz:

• Frame 1 = Welcome page keyframe • Frames 2–11 = Interactions keyframes • Frame 12 = Results page keyframe
1 Select the first frame on the Interactions layer and modify the text of the Welcome page. Include text to indicate that the user must click Next to continue. Do not add an interaction to this page. 2 Select each of the learning interactions in the next six frames and do one of the following:

• To use the interaction, configure it. • If you do not want to use the interaction, remove it.
3 Select the last frame in the Interactions layer and modify the text of the Results page. Leave the supplied dynamic text field names intact, or the results will not appear. Do not delete or place interactions in this frame. If the Results Page quiz parameter is turned off for the quiz, this frame is not called, but it is still reserved.

Configure a Learning Interaction component
Included with each quiz template is one of each of the six learning interaction types, stored in movie clips in the library. These movie clips are containers for the collection of elements that make up each interaction. When you add an interaction (movie clip) to the Stage, break it apart to edit the individual objects.
1 Select the entire learning interaction, and then select Modify > Break Apart. This action breaks the interaction into individual objects that you can modify.

Note: Break apart the interaction only once.
2 Deselect all the items on the Stage (Control+Shift+A).

FLASH CS3 331
User Guide

3 Select the Learning Interaction component.

Note: Do not delete these instructions; they contain necessary ActionScript code and do not appear in the SWF file.
4 In the Property inspector, click Launch Component Inspector.

5 If the Flash application sends tracking information to a server-side LMS, specify a name for the interaction in the Interaction ID box. Each interaction in the quiz templates is uniquely named. If you add interactions from the library or you are not using the quiz template, follow your LMS specifications to uniquely name each interaction in your file. 6 In the Question box, type the text the user will see. This text can be a question or instructions for the user. 7 Configure the learning interaction. 8 At the bottom of the Component inspector, click Options and enter feedback and Knowledge Track parameters for the learning interaction.

Note: Documents created using a quiz template have the Knowledge Track option turned on and the Navigation option turned off (the default settings) for each learning interaction, because the quiz template has its own navigation controls.
9 (Optional) Click the Assets button, and change the assets for the learning interaction.

See also
“Configure a Drag and Drop interaction” on page 339 “Configure a Fill In The Blank interaction” on page 340

FLASH CS3 332
User Guide

“Configure a Hot Object interaction” on page 341 “Configure a Hot Spot interaction” on page 342 “Configure a Multiple Choice interaction” on page 343 “Configure a True or False interaction” on page 344 “Adding, naming, and registering assets” on page 335 “Set Knowledge Track options for a learning interaction” on page 345 “Set navigation options for a learning interaction” on page 345

Add learning interactions to a quiz template
When you use a quiz template, you add learning interactions to the Interactions layer.
1 In the first layer of the Timeline, select the frame that precedes the frame number where you want to add the interaction. For example, to add an interaction to Frame 8, select Frame 7. 2 Shift-click the same frame number on the other layers to also select those frames. 3 Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) a selected frame and select Insert Frames to extend the Timeline evenly across all layers.

4 On the Interactions layer, select the frame you added and select Insert > Timeline > Blank Keyframe. 5 To add an interaction, do one of the following:

• To copy and paste an interaction that already exists in the Timeline, right-click (Windows) or Control-click
(Macintosh) the keyframe with the interaction and select Copy Frames. Paste the frame in the blank keyframe that you inserted in step 4. In this copy of the interaction, modify objects on the Stage or the settings in the Component inspector.

FLASH CS3 333
User Guide

• To use an interaction from the library, drag the desired interaction movie clip type from the Learning Interactions
library (Window > Common Libraries > Learning Interactions) to the blank keyframe. Break the interaction apart (select the interaction and select Modify > Break Apart), and edit the assets and parameters.

Add learning interactions to a document (no quiz template)
To add learning interactions to a Flash document that does not use a quiz template, place stand-alone learning interactions in the Timeline in a single frame, sequential frames (for example, 10 questions in 10 sequential frames), or labeled frames.
1 Select the appropriate layer and select Insert > Timeline > Blank Keyframe. 2 Select Window > Common Libraries > Learning Interactions.

The Learning Interactions library includes six types of learning interaction movie clips: Drag And Drop, Fill In The Blank, Hot Objects, Hot Spot, Multiple Choice, and True Or False. In addition, the library contains a folder called Assets that contains subfolders called Controls, Graphics, and UIComponents. These folders are used for customizing learning interactions.
3 Select the new keyframe and drag one of the Learning Interaction movie clips from the Library panel to the Stage. 4 Reposition the interaction by dragging it to where you want it to appear on the Stage. 5 Configure the learning interaction.

Note: Watch the frame count across layers as you add and remove keyframes. All layers must end at the same frame number along the Timeline so that the frame count is the same in all layers.

See also
“Changing buttons, check boxes, and radio buttons” on page 347

FLASH CS3 334
User Guide

Managing library assets for learning interactions
When you drag a learning interaction from the Learning Interactions common library to the Stage, the symbols that comprise the learning interaction are copied from the common library to the library of the Flash document you are creating. For example, if you copy a Hot Object learning interaction from the Learning Interactions common library to your document, the symbols in the following example become part of the document library.

If you’re using a quiz template, the learning interaction symbols are already included in your document library. To manage library assets, create folders for each graphical interaction, place the folders in the Assets folder, and keep the movie clips associated with the interaction in the new folder.

Remove a learning interaction from the Timeline
When you remove a learning interaction from the Timeline, maintain the sequence of learning interactions. If you remove a frame from the Interactions layer, you also need to remove it from all other layers.
1 On the Interactions layer, select the keyframe containing the interaction to delete. Shift-select the same frame number on other layers to also delete those frames. 2 To delete frames across all layers, do one of the following:

• Right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Macintosh) the keyframe and select Remove Frames. • Select Edit > Timeline > Remove Frames.
Note: Watch the frame count across layers as you add and remove keyframes. All layers must end at the same frame number along the Timeline so that the frame count is the same in all layers.

Check if a movie clip is broken apart
❖ Select a text field or any other single element of the learning interaction on the Stage.

If a grouped object is selected, the interaction is not broken apart. If you can select a single text field or another element, the interaction is broken apart and you can proceed with editing.

FLASH CS3 335
User Guide

Test a quiz
Test a quiz frequently as you add and remove interactions.
1 Select Control > Test Movie. 2 Answer the questions as they appear. 3 When you complete the quiz, close it in the Flash Player window to return to the workspace.

Adding, naming, and registering assets
Adding, naming, and registering assets and Learning Interaction component instances
Each Flash learning interaction consists of the following assets:

• An interaction component • Dynamic text fields • Distractor elements • User interface (UI) components
Every interaction has an interaction component associated with it to configure its unique parameters. These components do not need to be named. The collection of assets for each interaction type is stored in movie clip symbols in the library. These movie clips provide mobility for the assets so they can be copied to keyframes or among files. The movie clips are only containers and are not necessary to make the interaction work. You do not need to use the movie clip containers or the templates—instead, you can add your own assets to the Stage, add a Learning Interaction component to the Stage, and then register the assets’ instance names in the Component inspector for the interaction. Remember the following aspects about naming assets:

• Interaction components do not need to be named. • UI components need to have unique names for similar interaction types. • Each graphic distractor (Drag object, Target object, hot spot, and hot object) must have a unique instance name. • Text fields can share the same instance names across multiple interactions.
After you name the assets on the Stage, register those names in the Component inspector for the learning interaction, so that the scripts can control the assets.

Name UI components (RadioButton, CheckBox, Button, and TextInput)
When you use similar interaction types, give each UI component a unique name. For example, if you create two Multiple Choice interactions, the second interaction requires unique instance names for the CheckBox and the Button components. Register these new instance names in the Component inspector for the learning interaction.
1 Select the UI component instance on the Stage. 2 In the Property inspector, type a name in the Instance Name box. 3 Register the name in the Component inspector for the interaction.

FLASH CS3 336
User Guide

Name dynamic text fields
If you have more than one of any type of learning interaction in a quiz, the objects in each learning interaction must have unique names. Register these new unique instance names in the Component inspector for the learning interaction.
1 Select the dynamic text field on the Stage. 2 In the Property inspector, type a name in the Instance Name box.

Note: Enter the instance name, not the variable name.
3 Register the name in the Component inspector.

Register dynamic text fields and UI components
1 Select the Learning Interaction component (to the left of the Stage in the quiz template), and open the Component

inspector, if necessary, from the Property inspector.
2 Click Assets at the bottom of the panel. 3 Enter the name in the appropriate instance name box.

Name and register graphic distractors
Graphic distractors such as Drag objects, Target objects, hot spots, and hot objects must be named uniquely across all interactions. In a file with two Drag and Drop interactions, each containing four Drag objects, each of the eight Drag objects in the file must be named uniquely. A sequential naming scheme is usually the easiest to work with— for example, the Drag objects in the first interaction could be named Drag 1, Drag 2, Drag 3, and Drag 4, and the Drag objects in the second interaction could be named Drag A, Drag B, Drag C, and Drag D. This system ensures that the scripts work properly and the interactions behave as intended.
Name graphic distractors 1 Check that the objects on the Stage are instances of learning interactions or movie clip symbols. 2 Select an object on the Stage. 3 In the Property inspector, type a name in the Instance Name box. 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each object on the Stage. 5 Register the names. Register a distractor instance name 1 Select the Learning Interaction component (to the left of the Stage in the quiz template), and open the Component

inspector from the Property inspector.
2 Enter the name in the Component inspector, under Instance Name.

Text field names
Text fields can share the same names from interaction to interaction. The question text field in interaction 1 can be named the same as the question text field in interaction 2, and so on. Register these and all asset names with the interaction components.

FLASH CS3 337
User Guide

Asset name defaults
The assets supplied in the movie clip interaction containers are prenamed with the instance names listed in the following tables.
Drag and Drop learning interaction asset names
Asset Question text field Feedback text field Control button Description Holds question text Holds feedback text Submits user response and controls navigation Resets Drag objects Object type Dynamic text field Dynamic text field Flash UI Button component Flash UI Button component Movie clip symbol Movie clip symbol Instance name Template_Question Template_Feedback Template_ControlButton

Reset button

Template_ResetButton

1-8 Drag objects 1-8 Target objects

Drag object distractors Targets for Drag objects

Drag1 – Drag8 Target1 – Target8

Fill In The Blank learning interaction asset names
Asset Question text field Feedback text field User entry field Description Holds question text Holds feedback text User types answer into this text field Submits user response and controls navigation Object type Dynamic text field Dynamic text field Flash UI TextInput component Flash UI Button component Instance name Template_Question Template_Feedback Template_UserEntry

Control button

Template_ControlButton

Hot Object learning interaction asset names
Asset Question text field Feedback text field Control button Description Holds question text Holds feedback text Submits user response and controls navigation Object type Dynamic text field Dynamic text field Flash UI Button component Instance name Template_Question Template_Feedback Template_ControlButton

Reset button

Resets hot object distrac- Flash UI Button compotors nent Hot object distractors Movie clip symbol

Template_ResetButton

1-8 hot objects

HotObject1 - 8

Hot Spot learning interaction asset names
Asset Question text field Feedback text field Description Holds question text Holds feedback text Object type Dynamic text field Dynamic text field Instance name Template_Question Template_Feedback

FLASH CS3 338
User Guide

Asset Control button

Description Submits user response and controls navigation Resets hot spot distractors Hot spot distractors

Object type Flash UI Button component Flash UI Button component Movie clip symbol

Instance name Template_ControlButton

Reset button

Template_ResetButton

1-8 hot spots

HotSpot1 - 8

Multiple Choice learning interaction asset names
Asset Question text field Feedback text field Control button Description Holds question text Holds feedback text Submits user response and controls navigation Check box distractors Object type Dynamic text field Dynamic text field Flash UI Button component Flash UI CheckBox component Instance name Template_Question Template_Feedback Template_ControlButton

3-8 check boxes

Checkbox1-8

True or False learning interaction asset names
Asset Question text field Feedback text field Control button Description Holds question text Holds feedback text Submits user response and controls navigation Object type Dynamic text fie